A discourse of the religion anciently professed by the Irish and Brittish. By Iames Vssher Archbishop of Armagh, and Primate of Ireland
         Ussher, James, 1581-1656.
      
       
         
           1631
        
      
       Approx. 355 KB of XML-encoded text transcribed from 72 1-bit group-IV TIFF page images.
       
         Text Creation Partnership,
         Ann Arbor, MI ; Oxford (UK) :
         2005-12 (EEBO-TCP Phase 1).
         A14233
         STC 24549
         ESTC S118950
         99854157
         99854157
         19565
         
           
            This keyboarded and encoded edition of the work described above is co-owned by the institutions providing financial support to the Early English Books Online Text Creation Partnership. This Phase I text is available for reuse, according to the terms of
             Creative Commons 0 1.0 Universal
            . The text can be copied, modified, distributed and performed, even for commercial purposes, all without asking permission.
          
        
      
       
         Early English books online.
      
       
         (EEBO-TCP ; phase 1, no. A14233)
         Transcribed from: (Early English Books Online ; image set 19565)
         Images scanned from microfilm: (Early English books, 1475-1640 ; 1191:5)
      
       
         
           
             A discourse of the religion anciently professed by the Irish and Brittish. By Iames Vssher Archbishop of Armagh, and Primate of Ireland
             Ussher, James, 1581-1656.
          
           [8], 133, [11] p.
           
             Printed by R[obert] Y[oung] for the Partners of the Irish Stocke,
             London :
             1631.
          
           
             Printer's name from STC.
             Running title reads: Of the religion professed by the ancient Irish.
             Usually found as part 4 of STC 24544 or 24544.5.
             Reproduction of the original in Yale University. Library.
          
        
      
    
     
       
         Created by converting TCP files to TEI P5 using tcp2tei.xsl, TEI @ Oxford.
         Re-processed by University of Nebraska-Lincoln and Northwestern, with changes to facilitate morpho-syntactic tagging. Gap elements of known extent have been transformed into placeholder characters or elements to simplify the filling in of gaps by user contributors.
      
       
         EEBO-TCP is a partnership between the Universities of Michigan and Oxford and the publisher ProQuest to create accurately transcribed and encoded texts based on the image sets published by ProQuest via their Early English Books Online (EEBO) database (http://eebo.chadwyck.com). The general aim of EEBO-TCP is to encode one copy (usually the first edition) of every monographic English-language title published between 1473 and 1700 available in EEBO.
         EEBO-TCP aimed to produce large quantities of textual data within the usual project restraints of time and funding, and therefore chose to create diplomatic transcriptions (as opposed to critical editions) with light-touch, mainly structural encoding based on the Text Encoding Initiative (http://www.tei-c.org).
         The EEBO-TCP project was divided into two phases. The 25,363 texts created during Phase 1 of the project have been released into the public domain as of 1 January 2015. Anyone can now take and use these texts for their own purposes, but we respectfully request that due credit and attribution is given to their original source.
         Users should be aware of the process of creating the TCP texts, and therefore of any assumptions that can be made about the data.
         Text selection was based on the New Cambridge Bibliography of English Literature (NCBEL). If an author (or for an anonymous work, the title) appears in NCBEL, then their works are eligible for inclusion. Selection was intended to range over a wide variety of subject areas, to reflect the true nature of the print record of the period. In general, first editions of a works in English were prioritized, although there are a number of works in other languages, notably Latin and Welsh, included and sometimes a second or later edition of a work was chosen if there was a compelling reason to do so.
         Image sets were sent to external keying companies for transcription and basic encoding. Quality assurance was then carried out by editorial teams in Oxford and Michigan. 5% (or 5 pages, whichever is the greater) of each text was proofread for accuracy and those which did not meet QA standards were returned to the keyers to be redone. After proofreading, the encoding was enhanced and/or corrected and characters marked as illegible were corrected where possible up to a limit of 100 instances per text. Any remaining illegibles were encoded as <gap>s. Understanding these processes should make clear that, while the overall quality of TCP data is very good, some errors will remain and some readable characters will be marked as illegible. Users should bear in mind that in all likelihood such instances will never have been looked at by a TCP editor.
         The texts were encoded and linked to page images in accordance with level 4 of the TEI in Libraries guidelines.
         Copies of the texts have been issued variously as SGML (TCP schema; ASCII text with mnemonic sdata character entities); displayable XML (TCP schema; characters represented either as UTF-8 Unicode or text strings within braces); or lossless XML (TEI P5, characters represented either as UTF-8 Unicode or TEI g elements).
         
          Keying and markup guidelines are available at the
           Text Creation Partnership web site
          .
        
      
       
         
         
      
    
     
       
         eng
      
       
         
           Church of Ireland -- History -- Early works to 1800.
        
      
    
     
        2005-02 TCP
        Assigned for keying and markup
      
        2005-03 Aptara
        Keyed and coded from ProQuest page images
      
        2005-04 Judith Siefring
        Sampled and proofread
      
        2005-04 Judith Siefring
        Text and markup reviewed and edited
      
        2005-10 pfs
        Batch review (QC) and XML conversion
      
    
  
   
     
       
         
         
         
           A
           DISCOURSE
           OF
           THE
           RELIGION
           Anciently
           professed
           by
           the
           IRISH
           and
           BRITTISH
           .
        
         
           By
           IAMES
           VSSHER
           Archbishop
           of
           Armagh
           ,
           and
           Primate
           of
           IRELAND
           .
        
         
           LONDON
           ,
           Printed
           by
           R.
           Y.
           for
           the
           Partners
           of
           the
           Irish
           Stocke
           .
           1631.
           
        
      
       
         
         
         
           ❧
           TO
           MY
           VERY
           MVCH
           HONOVRED
           Friend
           ,
           Sir
           Christopher
           Sibthorp
           ,
           Knight
           ,
           one
           of
           his
           Majesties
           Iustices
           of
           his
           Court
           of
           chiefe
           place
           in
           IRELAND
           .
        
         
           
             WORTHY
             SIR
             :
          
        
         
           I
           Confesse
           ,
           I
           somewhat
           incline
           to
           bee
           of
           your
           minde
           ,
           that
           if
           unto
           the
           authorities
           drawn
           out
           of
           Scriptures
           and
           Fathers
           (
           which
           are
           common
           to
           us
           with
           others
           )
           a
           true
           discoverie
           were
           added
           of
           that
           Religion
           which
           anciently
           was
           professed
           in
           this
           Kingdome
           ;
           it
           might
           prove
           a
           speciall
           motive
           to
           induce
           my
           poore
           country-men
           to
           consider
           a
           little
           
           better
           of
           the
           old
           and
           true
           way
           from
           whence
           they
           have
           hitherto
           been
           mis-ledd
           .
           Yet
           on
           the
           one
           side
           ,
           that
           saying
           in
           the
           Gospel
           runneth
           much
           in
           my
           minde
           ;
           a
           
             If
             they
             heare
             not
             Moses
             and
             the
             Prophets
             ,
             neyther
             will
             they
             be
             perswaded
             ,
             though
             one
             rose
             from
             the
             dead
             :
          
           and
           on
           the
           other
           ,
           that
           heavie
           iudgement
           mentioned
           by
           the
           Apostle
           ;
           b
           
             because
             they
             received
             not
             the
             love
             of
             the
             truth
             ,
             that
             they
             might
             bee
             saved
             ,
             God
             shall
             send
             them
             strong
             delusion
             ,
             that
             they
             should
             beleeve
             lyes
             .
          
           The
           woefull
           experience
           whereof
           ,
           wee
           may
           see
           daily
           before
           our
           eyes
           in
           this
           poore
           nation
           :
           where
           ,
           such
           as
           are
           slow
           of
           heart
           to
           beleeve
           the
           saving
           truth
           of
           God
           delivered
           by
           the
           Prophets
           and
           Apostles
           ,
           doe
           with
           all
           greedinesse
           imbrace
           ,
           and
           with
           a
           most
           strange
           kinde
           of
           credulitie
           entertaine
           those
           lying
           Legends
           ,
           wherewith
           their
           Monkes
           and
           Friars
           in
           these
           latter
           daies
           have
           polluted
           the
           religion
           and
           lives
           of
           our
           ancient
           Saints
           .
        
         
           I
           doe
           not
           deny
           but
           that
           in
           this
           Countrey
           ,
           as
           well
           as
           in
           others
           ,
           corruptions
           did
           creep
           in
           by
           little
           and
           little
           ,
           before
           the
           Divell
           was
           let
           loose
           to
           procure
           that
           seduction
           which
           prevailed
           so
           generally
           in
           these
           last
           times
           :
           but
           as
           farre
           as
           I
           can
           collect
           by
           such
           records
           of
           the
           former
           ages
           as
           have
           come
           unto
           my
           hands
           
           eyther
           manuscript
           or
           printed
           )
           the
           religion
           professed
           by
           the
           ancient
           Bishops
           ,
           Priests
           ,
           Monks
           ,
           and
           other
           Christians
           in
           this
           land
           ,
           was
           for
           substance
           the
           very
           same
           with
           that
           which
           now
           by
           publike
           authoritie
           is
           maintained
           therein
           ,
           against
           the
           forraine
           doctrin
           brought
           in
           thither
           in
           later
           times
           by
           the
           Bishop
           of
           Romes
           followers
           .
           I
           speake
           of
           the
           more
           substantiall
           points
           of
           doctrine
           ,
           that
           are
           in
           controversie
           betwixt
           the
           Church
           of
           Rome
           and
           us
           at
           this
           day
           ;
           by
           which
           only
           we
           must
           iudge
           ,
           whether
           of
           both
           sides
           hath
           departed
           from
           the
           religion
           of
           our
           Ancestors
           :
           not
           of
           matters
           of
           inferiour
           note
           ,
           much
           lesse
           of
           ceremonies
           and
           such
           other
           things
           as
           appertaine
           to
           the
           discipline
           rather
           than
           to
           the
           doctrine
           of
           the
           Church
           .
        
         
           And
           whereas
           it
           is
           knowne
           unto
           the
           learned
           ,
           that
           the
           name
           of
           Scoti
           in
           those
           elder
           times
           (
           whereof
           we
           treate
           )
           was
           common
           to
           the
           inhabitants
           of
           the
           greater
           and
           the
           lesser
           Scotland
           (
           for
           so
           heretofore
           they
           have
           beene
           distinguished
           )
           that
           is
           to
           say
           ,
           of
           Ireland
           ,
           and
           the
           famous
           colonie
           deduced
           from
           thence
           into
           Albania
           :
           I
           will
           not
           follow
           the
           example
           of
           those
           that
           have
           of
           late
           laboured
           to
           make
           dissension
           betwixt
           the
           daughter
           and
           the
           mother
           ,
           
           but
           account
           of
           them
           both
           ,
           as
           of
           the
           same
           people
           .
        
         
           
             Tros
             Rutulusve
             fuat
             ,
             nullo
             discrimine
             habebo
             .
          
           The
           religion
           doubtlesse
           received
           by
           both
           ,
           was
           the
           selfe
           same
           ;
           and
           differed
           little
           or
           nothing
           from
           that
           which
           was
           maintained
           by
           their
           neighbours
           the
           Britons
           :
           as
           by
           comparing
           the
           evidences
           that
           remaine
           ,
           both
           of
           the
           one
           nation
           and
           of
           the
           other
           ,
           in
           the
           ensuing
           discourse
           more
           fully
           shall
           appeare
           .
        
      
       
         
         
           The
           chiefe
           Heads
           treated
           of
           in
           this
           discourse
           ,
           are
           these
           :
        
         
           
             I.
             OF
             the
             holy
             Scriptures
             .
             pag.
             1.
             
          
           
             II.
             Of
             Predestination
             ,
             Grace
             ,
             Free-will
             ,
             Workes
             ,
             Iustification
             and
             Sanctification
             .
             pag.
             11.
             
          
           
             III.
             Of
             Purgatory
             ,
             and
             Prayer
             for
             the
             dead
             .
             pag.
             21.
             
          
           
             IIII.
             Of
             the
             Worship
             of
             God
             ,
             the
             publike
             forme
             of
             Liturgie
             ,
             the
             Sacrifice
             ,
             and
             Sacrament
             of
             the
             Lords
             Supper
             .
             pag.
             30.
             
          
           
             V.
             Of
             Chrisme
             ,
             Sacramentall
             Confession
             ,
             Penance
             ,
             Absolution
             ,
             Marriage
             ,
             Divorces
             ,
             and
             single
             life
             in
             the
             Clergie
             .
             pag.
             45.
             
          
           
             VI.
             Of
             the
             discipline
             of
             our
             ancient
             Monkes
             ;
             and
             abstinence
             from
             meats
             .
             pag.
             54.
             
          
           
             VII
             .
             Of
             the
             Church
             and
             various
             state
             thereof
             ,
             especially
             in
             the
             dayes
             of
             Antichrist
             :
             of
             
             Miracles
             also
             ,
             and
             of
             the
             Head
             of
             the
             Church
             .
             pag.
             66.
             
          
           
             VIII
             .
             Of
             the
             Popes
             spirituall
             Iurisdiction
             ,
             and
             how
             little
             footing
             it
             had
             gotten
             at
             first
             within
             these
             parts
             .
             pag.
             75.
             
          
           
             IX
             .
             Of
             the
             Controversie
             which
             the
             Britons
             ,
             Picts
             ,
             and
             Irish
             maintained
             against
             the
             Church
             of
             Rome
             ,
             touching
             the
             celebration
             of
             Easter
             .
             pag.
             92.
             
          
           
             X.
             Of
             the
             height
             that
             the
             opposition
             betwixt
             the
             Romane
             party
             ,
             and
             that
             of
             the
             Brittish
             and
             the
             Scottish
             grew
             unto
             ;
             and
             the
             abatement
             thereof
             in
             time
             :
             and
             how
             the
             Doctors
             of
             the
             Scottish
             and
             Irish
             side
             have
             beene
             ever
             accounted
             most
             eminent
             men
             in
             the
             Catholike
             Church
             ,
             notwithstanding
             their
             dis-union
             from
             the
             Bishop
             of
             Rome
             .
             pag.
             105.
             
          
           
             XI
             .
             Of
             the
             temporall
             power
             ,
             which
             the
             Popes
             followers
             would
             directly
             intitle
             him
             unto
             over
             the
             Kingdome
             of
             Ireland
             :
             together
             with
             the
             indirect
             power
             which
             hee
             challengeth
             in
             absolving
             subjects
             from
             the
             obedience
             ,
             which
             they
             owe
             to
             their
             temporall
             Governours
             .
             pag.
             117.
             
          
        
      
    
     
       
         
         OF
         THE
         RELIGION
         PROFESSED
         BY
         THE
         ANCIENT
         IRISH.
         
      
       
         
           CHAP.
           I.
           
        
         
           
             Of
             the
             holy
             Scriptures
             .
          
        
         
           TWo
           excellent
           rules
           doth
           St.
           Paul
           prescribe
           unto
           Christians
           for
           their
           direction
           in
           the
           waies
           of
           God
           :
           the
           one
           ,
           that
           they
           a
           
             be
             not
             unwise
             ,
             but
             understanding
             what
             the
             will
             of
             God
             is
          
           ;
           the
           other
           ,
           that
           they
           b
           
             bee
             not
             more
             wise
             than
             behoveth
             to
             be
             wise
             ,
             but
             be
             wise
             unto
             sobriety
             .
          
           and
           that
           we
           might
           know
           the
           limits
           ,
           within
           which
           this
           wisedome
           and
           sobriety
           should
           bee
           bounded
           ;
           hee
           elsewhere
           declareth
           ,
           that
           not
           to
           bee
           
           more
           wise
           than
           is
           fitting
           ,
           is
           c
           
             not
             to
             be
             wise
             above
             that
             which
             is
             written
             .
          
           Hereupon
           Sedulius
           (
           one
           of
           the
           most
           ancient
           Writers
           that
           remaineth
           of
           this
           Country
           birth
           )
           delivereth
           this
           for
           the
           meaning
           of
           the
           former
           rule
           ;
           d
           
             Search
             the
             Law
             ,
             in
             which
             the
             will
             of
             God
             is
             contained
             :
          
           and
           this
           for
           the
           later
           ;
           e
           
             He
             would
             be
             more
             wise
          
           than
           is
           meete
           ,
           
             who
             searcheth
             those
             things
             that
             the
             Law
             doth
             not
             speake
             of
             .
          
           Unto
           whom
           wee
           will
           adjoyne
           Claudius
           another
           famous
           Divine
           ,
           (
           counted
           one
           of
           the
           founders
           of
           the
           University
           of
           Paris
           )
           who
           for
           the
           illustration
           of
           the
           former
           ,
           affirmeth
           that
           men
           f
           
             therefore
             erre
             ,
             because
             they
             know
             not
             the
             Scriptures
             ;
             and
             because
             they
             are
             ignorant
             of
             the
             Scriptures
             ,
             they
             consequently
             know
             not
             Christ
             ,
             who
             is
             the
             power
             of
             God
             and
             the
             wisedome
             of
             God
             :
          
           and
           for
           the
           clearing
           of
           the
           latter
           ,
           bringeth
           in
           that
           knowne
           Canon
           of
           Saint
           Hierome
           ;
           g
           
             This
             ,
             because
             it
             hath
             not
             authority
             from
             the
             Scriptures
             ,
             is
             with
             the
             same
             facility
             contemned
             ,
             wherewith
             it
             is
             avowed
             .
          
        
         
           Neither
           was
           the
           practice
           of
           our
           Ancestors
           herein
           different
           from
           their
           judgement
           .
           For
           as
           Bede
           touching
           the
           latter
           ,
           recordeth
           of
           the
           successors
           of
           Colum-kille
           the
           great
           Saint
           of
           our
           Country
           ;
           that
           they
           h
           
             observed
             onely
             those
             workes
             of
             piety
             and
             chastity
             ,
             which
             they
             could
             learne
             in
             the
             Propheticall
             ,
             Evangelicall
             ,
             and
             Apostolicall
             writings
             :
          
           so
           for
           the
           former
           ,
           hee
           specially
           noteth
           of
           one
           of
           the
           principall
           of
           them
           ,
           to
           wit
           ,
           Bishop
           Aidan
           ;
           that
           i
           
             all
             such
             as
             went
             in
             his
             company
             ,
             whether
             they
             were
             
             of
             the
             Clergie
             ,
             or
             of
             the
             Laity
             ,
             were
             tyed
             to
             exercise
             themselves
             ,
             either
             in
             the
             reading
             of
             Scriptures
             ,
             or
             in
             the
             learning
             of
             Psalmes
             .
          
           And
           long
           before
           their
           time
           ,
           it
           was
           the
           observation
           which
           Saint
           Chrysostome
           made
           of
           both
           these
           Ilands
           :
           that
           k
           
             although
             thou
             didst
             goe
             unto
             the
             Ocean
             ,
             and
             those
             Brittish
             Isles
             ,
             although
             thou
             didst
             sayle
             to
             the
             Euxine
             Sea
             ,
             although
             thou
             didst
             goe
             unto
             the
             Southerne
             quarters
             ;
             thou
             shouldst
             heare
             ALL
             men
             every
             where
             discoursing
             matters
             out
             of
             the
             SCRIPTVRE
             ,
             with
             another
             voice
             indeede
             ,
             but
             not
             with
             another
             faith
             ,
             and
             with
             a
             different
             tongue
             ,
             but
             with
             an
             according
             judgement
             .
          
           Which
           is
           in
           effect
           the
           same
           with
           that
           which
           venerable
           Bede
           pronounceth
           of
           the
           Island
           of
           Brittaine
           in
           his
           owne
           dayes
           ,
           that
           l
           
             in
             the
             language
             of
             five
             Nations
             it
             did
             search
             and
             confesse
             one
             and
             the
             same
             knowledge
             of
             the
             highest
             truth
             ,
             and
             of
             the
             true
             sublimity
             ;
             to
             wit
             ,
             of
             the
             English
             ,
             the
             Britons
             ,
             the
             Scots
             ,
             the
             Picts
             ,
             and
             the
             Latins
             .
          
           which
           last
           although
           hee
           affirmeth
           
             by
             the
             meditation
             of
             the
             Scriptures
             to
             have
             become
             common
             to
             all
             the
             rest
             :
          
           yet
           the
           community
           of
           that
           one
           among
           the
           learned
           ,
           did
           not
           take
           away
           the
           property
           of
           the
           other
           foure
           among
           the
           vulgar
           ,
           but
           that
           such
           as
           understood
           not
           the
           Latin
           ,
           might
           yet
           in
           their
           own
           mother
           tongue
           have
           those
           Scriptures
           ,
           wherein
           they
           might
           
             search
             the
             knowledge
             of
             the
             highest
             truth
             ,
             and
             of
             the
             true
             sublimity
             .
          
           even
           as
           at
           this
           day
           in
           the
           reformed
           Churches
           ,
           the
           same
           Latin
           tongue
           is
           common
           to
           all
           the
           learned
           in
           the
           meditation
           and
           exposition
           of
           the
           Scriptures
           ;
           and
           yet
           the
           common
           people
           for
           all
           that
           ,
           doe
           in
           their
           owne
           vulgar
           tongues
           *
           
             search
             the
             Scriptures
             ,
             because
             
             in
             them
             they
             thinke
             to
             have
             eternall
             life
             .
          
           For
           as
           by
           us
           now
           ,
           so
           by
           our
           forefathers
           then
           ,
           the
           m
           
             continuall
             meditation
             of
             the
             Scriptures
          
           was
           held
           to
           give
           speciall
           vigour
           and
           
             vegetation
             to
             the
             soule
          
           (
           as
           wee
           reade
           in
           the
           booke
           attributed
           unto
           St.
           
             Patrick
             ,
             of
             the
             abuses
             of
             the
             world
             :
          
           )
           and
           the
           holy
           documents
           delivered
           therein
           ,
           were
           esteemed
           by
           Christians
           as
           their
           chiefe
           riches
           ;
           according
           to
           that
           of
           Columbanus
           ,
           
             n
             Sint
             tibi
             divitiae
             ,
             divinae
             dogmata
             legis
             .
          
           In
           which
           heavenly
           riches
           our
           ancient
           Scottish
           and
           Irish
           did
           thrive
           so
           well
           ,
           that
           many
           worthy
           personages
           in
           forraine
           parts
           were
           content
           to
           undergoe
           a
           voluntarie
           exile
           from
           their
           owne
           Country
           ;
           that
           they
           might
           more
           freely
           trafficke
           here
           for
           so
           excellent
           a
           commodity
           .
           And
           by
           this
           meanes
           Altfrid
           King
           of
           Northumberland
           ,
           purchased
           the
           reputation
           of
           o
           
             a
             man
             most
             learned
             in
             the
             Scriptures
             .
          
           
             
               Scottorum
               qui
               tum
               versatus
               incola
               terris
               ,
            
             
               Coelestem
               intento
               spirabat
               corde
               sophiam
               .
            
             
               Nam
               patriae
               fines
               &
               dulcia
               liquerat
               arva
               ,
            
             
               Sedulus
               ut
               Domini
               mysteria
               disceret
               exul
               .
            
          
           as
           Bede
           writeth
           of
           him
           ,
           in
           his
           Poëme
           of
           the
           life
           of
           our
           Countryman
           St.
           Cuthbert
           .
        
         
           So
           when
           wee
           reade
           in
           the
           same
           Bede
           of
           p
           Furseus
           ,
           and
           in
           another
           ancient
           Author
           of
           q
           Kilianus
           ,
           that
           
             from
             the
             time
             of
             their
             very
             childhood
             ,
          
           they
           had
           a
           care
           to
           learne
           the
           holy
           Scriptures
           :
           it
           may
           easily
           bee
           collected
           ,
           that
           in
           those
           dayes
           it
           was
           not
           thought
           a
           thing
           unfit
           ,
           that
           even
           children
           should
           give
           themselves
           unto
           
           the
           studie
           of
           the
           Bible
           .
           Wherein
           how
           greatly
           some
           of
           them
           did
           profit
           in
           those
           tender
           yeeres
           ,
           may
           appeare
           by
           that
           which
           Boniface
           the
           first
           Archbishop
           of
           Mentz
           ,
           relateth
           of
           Livinus
           (
           who
           was
           trained
           up
           in
           his
           youth
           by
           Benignus
           in
           r
           the
           singing
           of
           Davids
           Psalmes
           ,
           and
           the
           reading
           of
           the
           holy
           Gospels
           ,
           and
           other
           divine
           exercises
           )
           and
           Ionas
           of
           Columbanus
           ;
           in
           whose
           s
           
             breast
             the
             treasures
             of
             the
             holy
             Scriptures
             were
             so
             layd
             up
             ,
             that
             within
             the
             compasse
             of
             his
             youthfull
             yeeres
             hee
             set
             forth
             an
             elegant
             exposition
             of
             the
             booke
             of
             the
             Psalmes
             ,
          
           by
           whose
           industry
           likewise
           afterward
           ,
           the
           studie
           of
           Gods
           Word
           was
           so
           propagated
           ;
           that
           in
           the
           Monasteries
           which
           were
           founded
           t
           
             according
             to
             his
             rule
          
           beyond
           the
           Seas
           ,
           not
           the
           men
           only
           ,
           but
           the
           religious
           women
           also
           did
           carefully
           attend
           the
           same
           ,
           that
           through
           patience
           and
           comfort
           of
           the
           Scriptures
           they
           might
           have
           hope
           .
           See
           for
           this
           ,
           the
           practice
           of
           the
           Virgin
           u
           Bitihildis
           lying
           upon
           her
           death
           bed
           ;
           reported
           by
           the
           same
           Ionas
           ,
           or
           whosoever
           else
           was
           the
           Author
           of
           the
           life
           of
           Burgundofora
           .
        
         
           As
           for
           the
           edition
           of
           the
           Scriptures
           used
           in
           these
           parts
           at
           those
           times
           :
           the
           Latin
           translation
           was
           so
           received
           into
           common
           use
           among
           the
           learned
           ,
           that
           the
           principall
           authority
           was
           still
           reserved
           to
           the
           originall
           fountaines
           .
           Therefore
           doth
           Sedulius
           in
           the
           Old
           Testament
           commend
           unto
           us
           x
           
             the
             Hebrew
             verity
          
           (
           for
           so
           with
           S.
           Hierome
           doth
           he
           style
           it
           :
           )
           and
           in
           the
           New
           correct
           oftentimes
           the
           vulgar
           Latin
           according
           to
           the
           truth
           of
           the
           Greek
           copies
           .
           For
           example
           :
           in
           1
           Cor.
           7
           34.
           
           he
           readeth
           as
           wee
           doe
           ,
           
             There
             is
             difference
             betweene
             a
             wife
             and
             a
             virgin
          
           ;
           and
           not
           as
           the
           Rhemists
           have
           translated
           it
           out
           of
           the
           Latin.
           Rom.
           12.
           19.
           hee
           readeth
           ,
           
             Non
             vosmetipsos
             vindicantes
          
           ,
           not
           avenging
           your selves
           :
           where
           the
           vulgar
           Latin
           hath
           corruptly
           ,
           
             Non
             vosmetipsos
             defendentes
          
           ,
           not
           defending
           your selves
           .
           Rom.
           3.
           4.
           where
           the
           Rhemists
           translate
           according
           to
           the
           Latin
           ,
           
             God
             is
             true
          
           :
           hee
           sheweth
           that
           in
           the
           Greeke
           copies
           it
           is
           found
           ,
           
             Let
             God
             be
             true
          
           ,
           or
           ,
           
             let
             God
             be
             made
             true
          
           .
           Rom.
           15.
           17.
           hee
           noteth
           that
           the
           Latin
           bookes
           have
           put
           glory
           for
           gloriation
           .
           Galat.
           1.
           16.
           where
           the
           Rhemists
           have
           according
           to
           the
           Latin
           ,
           
             I
             condescended
             not
             to
             flesh
             &
             bloud
             :
          
           he
           saith
           ,
           that
           
             in
             Graeco
             meliùs
             habet
          
           (
           for
           so
           must
           his
           words
           bee
           here
           corrected
           out
           of
           St.
           Hierome
           ,
           whom
           hee
           followeth
           )
           the
           Greek
           hath
           it
           better
           ,
           
             I
             conferred
             not
          
           .
           Rom.
           8.
           3.
           where
           the
           Rhemists
           say
           of
           God
           ,
           according
           to
           the
           Latin
           translation
           ,
           
             that
             of
             sinne
          
           hee
           
             damned
             sinne
             in
             the
             flesh
             :
             Sedulius
          
           affirmeth
           ,
           that
           
             veriùs
             habetur
             apud
             Graecos
          
           ,
           it
           is
           
             more
             truly
          
           expressed
           in
           the
           Greeke
           bookes
           ;
           that
           
             for
             sinne
          
           he
           
             damned
             sinne
             in
             the
             flesh
          
           .
           Lastly
           ,
           where
           the
           Rhemists
           translate
           after
           their
           Latin
           copie
           ,
           Gal.
           5.
           9.
           
           
             A
             little
             leaven
             corrupteth
             the
             whole
             paste
             :
          
           hee
           saith
           it
           should
           be
           ,
           leaveneth
           ,
           (
           as
           we
           have
           it
           )
           and
           y
           not
           corrupteth
           ,
           as
           it
           is
           ill
           read
           in
           the
           Latin
           bookes
           .
           So
           where
           they
           translate
           by
           the
           same
           authority
           ,
           Galat.
           6.
           1.
           
           
             Instruct
             such
             an
             one
             in
             the
             spirit
             of
             lenitie
             :
          
           z
           Claudius
           ,
           following
           St.
           Hierome
           ,
           affirmeth
           that
           it
           is
           better
           in
           the
           Greeke
           ,
           Restore
           or
           
             Perfect
             him
          
           .
           and
           where
           they
           make
           St.
           Peter
           say
           ,
           Mat.
           16.
           22.
           
           
             Lord
             ,
             bee
             it
             farre
             from
             thee
             :
          
           a
           he
           noteth
           ,
           that
           it
           is
           better
           in
           the
           Greeke
           ,
           
             Lord
             ,
             favour
             thy selfe
          
           .
        
         
         
           In
           the
           old
           Testament
           I
           observe
           that
           our
           Writers
           doe
           more
           usually
           follow
           the
           translation
           taken
           out
           of
           the
           Septuagint
           ,
           than
           the
           
             Vulgar
             Latine
          
           ,
           which
           is
           now
           received
           in
           the
           Church
           of
           Rome
           .
           So
           ,
           for
           example
           ,
           where
           the
           Vulgar
           Latin
           hath
           Esay
           32.
           4.
           
           b
           
             The
             tongue
             of
             the
             stammerers
          
           (
           or
           mafflers
           ,
           as
           the
           Doway
           Translation
           would
           have
           it
           englished
           )
           
             shall
             speak
             readily
             and
             plainely
          
           :
           in
           the
           Confession
           of
           St.
           Patricke
           c
           wee
           finde
           it
           layd
           downe
           more
           agreeably
           to
           the
           d
           Greeke
           lection
           :
           
             The
             stammering
             tongues
             shall
             swiftly
             learne
             to
             speak
             peace
             .
          
           and
           in
           his
           Epistle
           to
           Coroticus
           or
           Cereticus
           ;
           e
           Malach.
           4.
           2.
           
           
             You
             shall
             dance
             as
             calves
             loosed
             out
             of
             bands
             :
          
           where
           our
           common
           Latin
           hath
           ;
           f
           
             You
             shall
             leape
             as
             calves
             of
             the
             heard
             .
          
           And
           Iob
           20.
           15
           ,
           16.
           
           g
           
             The
             riches
             which
             he
             shall
             gather
             unjustly
             ,
             shall
             be
             vomited
             out
             of
             his
             belly
             ,
             the
             Angel
             of
             death
             draweth
             him
             .
             Hee
             shall
             be
             mulcted
             with
             the
             wrath
             of
             Dragons
             :
             the
             tongue
             of
             the
             Serpent
             shall
             kill
             him
             .
          
           where
           the
           Vulgar
           Latin
           readeth
           :
           h
           
             The
             riches
             ,
             which
             he
             hath
             devoured
             ,
             he
             shall
             vomit
             out
             ,
             and
             God
             shall
             draw
             them
             forth
             out
             of
             his
             belly
             .
             He
             shall
             suck
             the
             head
             of
             Aspes
             ,
             and
             the
             Vipers
             tongue
             shall
             kill
             him
             .
          
           The
           same
           course
           is
           likewise
           observed
           by
           Sedulius
           in
           his
           citations
           .
           But
           Gildas
           the
           Briton
           in
           some
           Bookes
           ,
           (
           as
           
             Deuteronomy
             ,
             Esay
          
           and
           Ieremy
           ,
           for
           example
           )
           useth
           to
           follow
           the
           Vulgar
           Latin
           translated
           out
           of
           the
           Hebrew
           ;
           in
           others
           (
           as
           the
           bookes
           of
           
             Chronicles
             ,
             Iob
             ,
             Proverbs
             ,
             Ezekiel
             ,
          
           and
           the
           
             small
             Prophets
          
           )
           the
           elder
           Latin
           translated
           out
           of
           the
           Greeke
           ,
           as
           also
           long
           after
           him
           his
           country
           man
           *
           Nennius
           ,
           in
           reckoning
           
           the
           yeares
           of
           the
           age
           of
           the
           world
           ,
           followeth
           the
           LXX
           .
           and
           Asser
           alledgeth
           the
           text
           ,
           Genes
           .
           4.
           7.
           
           i
           
             If
             thou
             offer
             aright
             ,
             and
             dost
             not
             divide
             aright
             ,
             thou
             sinnest
          
           ;
           according
           to
           the
           k
           Greek
           reading
           :
           whereas
           the
           Vulgar
           Latin
           hath
           it
           ;
           l
           
             If
             thou
             doe
             well
             ,
             shalt
             thou
             not
             receive
             againe
             ?
             but
             if
             thou
             doest
             ill
             ,
             shall
             not
             thy
             sinne
             forthwith
             be
             present
             at
             the
             doore
             ?
          
        
         
           Of
           the
           Psalter
           there
           are
           extant
           foure
           Latin
           translations
           out
           of
           the
           Greeke
           ,
           (
           namely
           the
           old
           Italian
           ,
           the
           Romane
           ,
           the
           Gallican
           ,
           and
           that
           of
           Millayne
           :
           )
           and
           one
           out
           of
           the
           Hebrew
           ,
           composed
           by
           St.
           Hierome
           :
           which
           though
           it
           bee
           now
           excluded
           out
           of
           the
           body
           of
           the
           Bible
           ,
           and
           the
           Gallican
           admitted
           in
           the
           roome
           thereof
           ;
           yet
           in
           some
           Manuscript
           Copies
           ,
           it
           still
           retaineth
           his
           ancient
           place
           .
           three
           whereof
           I
           have
           seene
           my selfe
           in
           Cambridge
           ,
           the
           one
           in
           Trinitie
           ,
           the
           other
           in
           Benet
           ,
           and
           the
           third
           in
           Iesus
           Colledge
           Librarie
           :
           where
           this
           translation
           out
           of
           the
           Hebrew
           ,
           and
           not
           the
           Vulgar
           out
           of
           the
           Greek
           ,
           is
           inserted
           into
           the
           context
           of
           the
           Bible
           .
           In
           the
           citations
           of
           Gildas
           ,
           and
           the
           Confession
           of
           Saint
           Patrick
           ,
           I
           observe
           that
           the
           Roman
           Psalter
           is
           followed
           ,
           rather
           than
           the
           Gallican
           :
           in
           the
           quotations
           of
           Sedulius
           ,
           on
           the
           other
           side
           ,
           the
           Gallican
           rather
           than
           the
           
             Roman
             .
             Claudius
          
           speaking
           of
           a
           text
           in
           the
           118
           th
           .
           (
           or
           as
           he
           accounteth
           it
           ,
           the
           117
           th
           .
           )
           m
           Psalme
           ,
           saith
           ,
           that
           where
           the
           LXX
           .
           Interpreters
           did
           translate
           it
           ,
           
             O
             Lord
             save
             me
          
           ,
           it
           was
           written
           in
           the
           Hebrew
           ,
           
             Anna
             Adonai
             Osanna
             :
             which
             our
             Interpreter
             Hierom
          
           (
           saith
           he
           )
           
             more
             diligently
             explaining
          
           ,
           translated
           thus
           ;
           
             I
             beseech
             thee
             ,
             O
             Lord
             ,
             save
             I
             beseech
             thee
             .
          
           Before
           
           this
           translation
           of
           S.
           Hierome
           ,
           n
           I
           have
           seene
           an
           Epigram
           prefixed
           by
           Ricemarch
           the
           Briton
           ;
           who
           by
           Caradoc
           of
           Lhancarpan
           o
           is
           commended
           for
           
             the
             godliest
             ,
             wisest
             ,
             and
             greatest
             Clerke
             that
             had
             been
             in
             Wales
             many
             yeares
             before
          
           his
           time
           ,
           his
           father
           
             Sulgen
             Bishop
             of
             S.
             Davids
          
           only
           excepted
           ,
           
             who
             had
             brought
             him
             up
             ,
             and
             a
             great
             number
             of
             learned
             disciples
             .
          
           He
           having
           in
           this
           Epigramme
           said
           of
           those
           who
           translated
           the
           Psalter
           out
           of
           Greeke
           ,
           that
           they
           did
           
             darken
             the
             Hebrew
             rayes
             with
             thir
             Latin
             clowde
             :
          
           addeth
           of
           S.
           Hierome
           ,
           that
           being
           
             replenished
             with
             the
             Hebrew
             fountaine
             ,
             hee
             did
             more
             cleerely
             and
             briefly
             discover
             the
             truth
          
           ;
           as
           drawing
           it
           out
           of
           the
           
             first
             vessell
          
           immediately
           ,
           and
           not
           taking
           it
           at
           the
           
             second
             hand
          
           .
           To
           this
           purpose
           thus
           expresseth
           he
           himselfe
           ;
           
             
               Ebraeis
               nablam
               custodit
               littera
               signis
               :
            
             
               Pro
               captu
               quam
               quisque
               suo
               sermone
               Latino
            
             
               Edidit
               ,
               innumeros
               Linguâ
               variante
               libellos
               ;
            
             
               Ebraeumque
               jubar
               suffuscat
               nube
               Latina
               .
            
             
               Nam
               tepefacta
               ferum
               dant
               tertia
               labrasaporem
               .
            
             
               Sed
               sacer
               Hieronymus
               ,
               Ebraeo
               fonte
               repletus
               ,
            
             
               Lucidiùs
               nudat
               verum
               ,
               breviusque
               ministrat
               .
            
             
               Namque
               secunda
               creat
               ,
               nam
               tertia
               vascula
               vitat
               .
            
          
        
         
           Now
           for
           those
           bookes
           annexed
           to
           the
           Old
           Testament
           ,
           which
           S.
           Hierom
           calleth
           Apocryphall
           ,
           others
           Ecclesiasticall
           ;
           true
           it
           is
           that
           in
           our
           Irish
           and
           Brittish
           writers
           some
           of
           them
           are
           alledged
           as
           parcels
           of
           Scripture
           ,
           and
           propheticall
           writings
           ;
           those
           especially
           that
           commonly
           bare
           the
           name
           of
           Salomon
           .
           But
           so
           also
           is
           the
           fourth
           booke
           of
           Esdras
           cited
           by
           Gildas
           ,
           in
           the
           name
           of
           p
           
             blessed
             Esdras
             the
             Prophet
          
           ;
           which
           yet
           our
           Romanists
           will
           not
           admit
           to
           be
           Canonicall
           :
           neither
           
           doe
           our
           writers
           mention
           any
           of
           the
           rest
           with
           more
           titles
           of
           respect
           than
           wee
           finde
           given
           unto
           them
           by
           others
           of
           the
           ancient
           Fathers
           ,
           who
           yet
           in
           expresse
           termes
           doe
           exclude
           them
           out
           of
           the
           number
           of
           those
           bookes
           which
           properly
           are
           to
           be
           esteemed
           Canonicall
           .
           So
           that
           from
           hence
           no
           sufficient
           proofe
           can
           bee
           taken
           ,
           that
           our
           ancestours
           did
           herein
           depart
           from
           the
           tradition
           of
           the
           Elder
           Church
           ,
           *
           delivered
           by
           S.
           Hierome
           in
           his
           Prologues
           ,
           and
           explained
           by
           Brito
           (
           a
           Briton
           ,
           it
           seemeth
           ,
           by
           nation
           ,
           as
           well
           as
           by
           appellation
           )
           in
           his
           commentaries
           upon
           the
           same
           ;
           which
           being
           heretofore
           joyned
           with
           the
           Ordinarie
           Glosse
           upon
           the
           Bible
           ,
           have
           of
           late
           proved
           so
           distastefull
           unto
           our
           Popish
           Divines
           ,
           that
           in
           their
           new
           editions
           (
           printed
           at
           Lyons
           anno
           1590.
           and
           at
           Venice
           afterward
           )
           they
           have
           quite
           crossed
           them
           out
           of
           their
           books
           .
        
         
           Yet
           Marianus
           Scotus
           
             (
             who
             was
             borne
             in
             Ireland
             in
             the
             MXXVIII
             .
             yeare
             of
             our
             Lord
             )
             was
             somewhat
             more
             carefull
             to
             maintaine
             the
             ancient
             bounds
             of
             the
          
           Canon
           
             set
             by
             his
             forefathers
             .
             For
             he
             in
             his
             Chronicle
             ,
             following
          
           Eusebius
           
             and
             S.
          
           Hierom
           ,
           
             at
             the
             reigne
          
           of
           Artaxerxes
           Longimanus
           
             writeth
             thus
          
           :
           q
           Hitherto
           the
           divine
           Scripture
           of
           the
           Hebrewes
           containeth
           the
           order
           of
           Times
           .
           But
           those
           things
           that
           after
           this
           were
           done
           among
           the
           Iewes
           ,
           are
           represented
           out
           of
           the
           booke
           of
           the
           Maccabees
           ,
           and
           the
           writings
           of
           Iosephus
           and
           Aphricanus
           .
           
             But
             before
             him
             ,
             more
             plainly
             ,
             the
             author
             of
             the
             book
          
           de
           mirabilibus
           Scripturae
           (
           
             who
             is
             accounted
             to
             have
             lived
             here
             ,
             about
             the
             yeare
             DCLVII
             .
          
           )
           r
           In
           the
           bookes
           
           of
           the
           Maccabees
           ,
           howsoever
           some
           wonderfull
           things
           bee
           found
           ,
           which
           might
           conveniently
           bee
           inserted
           into
           this
           ranke
           ;
           yet
           w●ll
           wee
           not
           weary
           our selves
           with
           any
           care
           thereof
           ▪
           because
           wee
           only
           purposed
           to
           touch
           in
           some
           measure
           a
           short
           historicall
           exposition
           of
           the
           wonderfull
           things
           contained
           in
           the
           divine
           canon
           .
           
             as
             also
             in
             the
             apocryphall
             additions
             of
          
           Daniel
           ,
           
             hee
             telleth
             us
             ,
             that
             what
             is
             reported
          
           s
           touching
           the
           lake
           (
           or
           denne
           )
           and
           the
           carrying
           of
           Abackuk
           ,
           in
           the
           fable
           of
           Bel
           and
           the
           Dragon
           ,
           is
           not
           therefore
           placed
           in
           this
           ranke
           ,
           because
           these
           things
           have
           not
           the
           authority
           of
           divine
           Scripture
           .
        
         
           And
           so
           much
           concerning
           the
           holy
           Scriptures
           .
        
      
       
         
           CHAP.
           II.
           
        
         
           
             Of
             Predestination
             ,
             Grace
             ,
             Free-will
             ,
             Faith
             ,
             Workes
             ,
             Iustification
             and
             Sanctification
             .
          
        
         
           
             THe
             Doctrine
             which
             our
             learned
             men
             observed
             out
             of
             the
             Scriptures
             &
             the
             writings
             of
             the
             most
             approved
             Fathers
             ,
             was
             this
             ▪
             that
             God
          
           b
           by
           his
           immoveable
           counsaile
           (
           as
           Gallus
           
             speaketh
             in
             his
             Sermon
             preached
             at
          
           Constance
           )
           
             ordained
             some
             of
             his
             creatures
          
           to
           praise
           h●m
           ,
           and
           to
           live
           blessedly
           from
           him
           and
           in
           him
           ,
           &
           by
           him
           :
           namely
           ,
           c
           by
           his
           eternall
           predestination
           ,
           his
           free
           calling
           ,
           and
           his
           grace
           which
           was
           due
           to
           none
           .
           that
           d
           hee
           hath
           mercie
           with
           great
           goodnesse
           ,
           and
           hardneth
           without
           any
           iniquitie
           :
           so
           as
           neyther
           he
           that
           is
           delivered
           can
           glory
           of
           his
           own
           merits
           ,
           nor
           he
           that
           is
           condemned
           complain
           but
           
           of
           his
           own
           merits
           .
           for
           asmuch
           as
           grace
           onely
           maketh
           the
           distinction
           betwixt
           the
           redeemed
           and
           the
           lost
           ;
           who
           by
           a
           cause
           drawne
           from
           their
           common
           originall
           ,
           were
           framed
           together
           into
           one
           masse
           of
           perdition
           .
           For
           e
           all
           mankinde
           stood
           condemned
           in
           the
           apostaticall
           roote
           (
           of
           Adam
           )
           with
           so
           just
           and
           divine
           a
           judgement
           ;
           that
           although
           none
           should
           be
           freed
           from
           thence
           ,
           no
           man
           could
           rightly
           blame
           the
           justice
           of
           God
           :
           and
           such
           as
           were
           freed
           ,
           must
           so
           have
           beene
           freed
           ,
           that
           by
           those
           many
           which
           were
           not
           freed
           ,
           but
           left
           in
           their
           most
           just
           condemnation
           ,
           it
           might
           bee
           shewed
           what
           the
           whole
           lumpe
           had
           deserved
           ,
           that
           the
           due
           judgement
           of
           God
           should
           have
           condemned
           even
           those
           that
           are
           justified
           ,
           unlesse
           mercy
           had
           relieved
           them
           from
           that
           which
           was
           due
           :
           that
           so
           all
           the
           mouthes
           of
           them
           ,
           which
           would
           glory
           of
           their
           merits
           ,
           might
           bee
           stopped
           ;
           and
           hee
           that
           glorieth
           ,
           might
           glory
           in
           the
           Lord.
           
        
         
           
             They
             further
             taught
             (
             as
             Saint
          
           Augustine
           
             did
             )
             that
          
           f
           Man
           using
           ill
           his
           Free
           will
           ,
           lost
           both
           himselfe
           and
           it
           .
           
             that
             ,
             as
             one
          
           by
           living
           is
           able
           to
           kill
           himselfe
           ,
           but
           by
           killing
           himselfe
           is
           not
           able
           to
           live
           ,
           nor
           hath
           power
           to
           raise
           up
           himselfe
           when
           hee
           hath
           killed
           himselfe
           so
           when
           sinne
           had
           beene
           committed
           by
           free
           will
           ,
           sinne
           being
           the
           conquerour
           ,
           free
           will
           also
           was
           lost
           ;
           for
           asmuch
           as
           of
           whom
           a
           man
           is
           overcome
           ,
           of
           the
           same
           is
           hee
           also
           brought
           in
           bondage
           (
           2
           Pet.
           2.
           19.
           
           )
           that
           unto
           a
           man
           thus
           brought
           in
           bondage
           and
           sold
           ,
           there
           is
           no
           liberty
           left
           to
           doe
           well
           ,
           unlesse
           he
           redeeme
           
           him
           ,
           whose
           saying
           is
           this
           ;
           If
           the
           Sonne
           make
           you
           free
           ,
           yee
           shall
           bee
           free
           indeede
           .
           (
           Iohn
           8.
           36.
           
           )
           that
           g
           the
           minde
           of
           men
           from
           their
           very
           youth
           is
           set
           upon
           evill
           :
           there
           being
           not
           a
           man
           which
           sinneth
           not
           .
           
             that
             a
             man
          
           h
           hath
           nothing
           from
           himselfe
           ,
           but
           sinne
           .
           that
           i
           God
           is
           the
           author
           of
           all
           good
           things
           ,
           that
           is
           to
           say
           ,
           both
           of
           good
           nature
           ,
           and
           of
           good
           will
           ;
           which
           unlesse
           God
           doe
           worke
           in
           him
           ,
           man
           cannot
           doe
           .
           because
           this
           good
           will
           is
           prepared
           by
           the
           Lord
           in
           man
           ;
           that
           by
           the
           gift
           of
           God
           hee
           may
           doe
           that
           ,
           which
           of
           himselfe
           he
           could
           not
           doe
           by
           his
           owne
           free-will
           .
           that
           k
           the
           good
           will
           of
           man
           goeth
           before
           many
           gifts
           of
           God
           ,
           but
           not
           all
           :
           and
           of
           those
           which
           it
           doth
           not
           goe
           before
           ,
           it selfe
           is
           one
           .
           For
           both
           of
           these
           is
           read
           in
           the
           holy
           Scriptures
           ;
           His
           mercy
           shall
           goe
           before
           mee
           ,
           and
           ,
           His
           mercie
           shall
           follow
           mee
           :
           it
           preventeth
           him
           that
           is
           unwilling
           that
           hee
           may
           will
           ,
           and
           it
           followeth
           him
           that
           is
           willing
           ,
           that
           he
           will
           not
           in
           vaine
           .
           
             and
             that
             therefore
          
           we
           are
           admonished
           to
           aske
           that
           wee
           may
           receive
           ,
           to
           the
           end
           ,
           that
           what
           we
           doe
           will
           may
           be
           effected
           by
           him
           ,
           by
           whom
           it
           was
           effected
           that
           we
           did
           so
           will.
           
        
         
           
             They
             taught
             also
             ,
             that
          
           l
           the
           Law
           was
           not
           given
           ,
           that
           it
           might
           take
           away
           sinne
           ,
           but
           that
           it
           might
           shut
           up
           all
           under
           sinne
           :
           
             to
             the
             end
             that
             men
             ,
             being
          
           by
           this
           means
           humbled
           ,
           might
           understand
           that
           their
           salvation
           was
           not
           in
           their
           owne
           hand
           ,
           but
           in
           the
           hand
           of
           a
           Mediatour
           .
           
             that
             
             by
             the
             Law
             commeth
             ,
          
           m
           neither
           the
           remission
           nor
           the
           removall
           ,
           but
           the
           knowledge
           of
           sinnes
           :
           
             that
             it
          
           n
           taketh
           not
           away
           diseases
           ,
           but
           discovereth
           them
           ;
           o
           forgiveth
           not
           sinnes
           ,
           but
           condemneth
           them
           .
           that
           p
           the
           Lord
           God
           did
           impose
           it
           ,
           not
           upon
           those
           that
           served
           righteousnesse
           ,
           but
           sinne
           ;
           namely
           ,
           by
           giving
           a
           just
           law
           to
           unjust
           men
           ,
           to
           manifest
           their
           sins
           ,
           and
           not
           to
           take
           them
           away
           :
           forasmuch
           as
           nothing
           taketh
           away
           sins
           but
           the
           grace
           of
           faith
           which
           worketh
           by
           love
           .
           
             That
             our
          
           q
           sinnes
           are
           freely
           forgiven
           us
           ;
           r
           without
           the
           merit
           of
           our
           workes
           :
           that
           s
           through
           grace
           we
           are
           saved
           ,
           by
           faith
           ,
           and
           not
           by
           works
           ;
           
             and
             that
             therfore
             we
             are
             to
             rejoyce
             ,
          
           t
           not
           in
           our
           owne
           righteousnesse
           ,
           or
           learning
           ,
           but
           in
           the
           faith
           of
           the
           Crosse
           ,
           by
           which
           all
           our
           sinnes
           are
           forgiven
           us
           .
           That
           u
           grace
           is
           abject
           and
           vaine
           ,
           if
           it
           alone
           doe
           not
           suffice
           
             us
             :
             and
             that
             we
          
           x
           esteem
           basely
           
             of
             Christ
          
           ,
           when
           we
           thinke
           that
           he
           is
           not
           sufficient
           for
           us
           to
           salvation
           .
        
         
           That
           y
           God
           hath
           so
           ordered
           it
           ,
           that
           he
           will
           be
           gracious
           to
           mankind
           ,
           if
           they
           do
           beleeve
           that
           they
           shall
           be
           freed
           by
           the
           bloud
           
             of
             Christ.
             that
             ,
             as
          
           z
           the
           soule
           is
           the
           life
           of
           the
           body
           ,
           so
           faith
           is
           the
           life
           of
           the
           soule
           :
           
             and
             that
             wee
             live
          
           a
           by
           faith
           onely
           ,
           as
           owing
           nothing
           to
           the
           Law.
           that
           b
           hee
           
           who
           beleeveth
           in
           Christ
           ,
           hath
           the
           perfection
           of
           the
           Law.
           For
           whereas
           none
           might
           be
           justified
           by
           the
           Law
           ,
           because
           none
           did
           fulfill
           the
           Law
           ,
           but
           onely
           hee
           which
           did
           trust
           in
           the
           promise
           of
           Christ
           :
           faith
           was
           appointed
           ,
           which
           should
           be
           accepted
           for
           the
           perfection
           of
           the
           Law
           ,
           that
           in
           all
           things
           which
           were
           omitted
           faith
           might
           satisfie
           for
           the
           whole
           Law.
           
             That
             this
             righteousnesse
             therefore
             is
          
           c
           not
           ours
           ,
           nor
           in
           us
           ,
           but
           in
           Christ
           ;
           
             in
             whom
             were
             are
             considered
          
           as
           members
           in
           the
           head
           .
           That
           d
           faith
           ,
           procuring
           the
           remission
           of
           sinnes
           by
           grace
           ,
           maketh
           all
           beleevers
           the
           children
           of
           Abraham
           :
           
             and
             that
          
           e
           it
           was
           just
           ,
           that
           as
           Abraham
           was
           justified
           by
           faith
           onely
           ,
           so
           also
           the
           rest
           that
           followed
           his
           faith
           should
           bee
           saved
           
             after
             the
             same
             manner
             .
             That
          
           f
           through
           adoption
           we
           are
           made
           the
           sons
           of
           God
           ,
           by
           beleeving
           in
           the
           Sonne
           of
           God
           :
           
             and
             that
             this
             is
          
           g
           a
           testimony
           of
           our
           adoption
           ,
           that
           we
           have
           the
           spirit
           ;
           by
           which
           we
           pray
           ,
           
             and
             cry
             Abba
             Father
          
           ;
           forasmuch
           as
           none
           can
           receive
           so
           great
           a
           pledge
           as
           this
           ,
           but
           such
           as
           bee
           sonnes
           onely
           .
           That
           h
           Moses
           himselfe
           made
           a
           distinction
           betwixt
           both
           the
           justices
           ,
           to
           wit
           of
           faith
           and
           of
           deedes
           :
           that
           the
           one
           did
           by
           workes
           justifie
           him
           that
           came
           ,
           the
           other
           by
           beleeving
           onely
           .
           that
           i
           the
           Patriarches
           and
           the
           Prophets
           were
           not
           justified
           by
           the
           workes
           of
           the
           Law
           ,
           but
           by
           faith
           .
           that
           k
           the
           custome
           of
           sinne
           hath
           so
           prevailed
           ,
           that
           none
           now
           can
           fulfill
           the
           Law
           :
           as
           the
           Apostle
           Peter
           saith
           ,
           Acts
           15.
           10.
           
           Which
           neither
           our
           fathers
           nor
           wee
           
           have
           beene
           able
           to
           beare
           .
           But
           if
           there
           were
           any
           righteous
           men
           which
           did
           escape
           the
           curse
           :
           it
           was
           not
           by
           the
           workes
           of
           the
           Law
           ,
           but
           for
           their
           faiths
           sake
           that
           they
           were
           saved
           .
        
         
           Thus
           did
           Sedulius
           and
           Claudius
           ,
           two
           of
           our
           most
           famous
           Divines
           deliver
           the
           doctrine
           of
           free
           will
           and
           grace
           ,
           faith
           and
           workes
           ,
           the
           Law
           and
           the
           Gospel
           ,
           Iustification
           and
           Adoption
           ;
           no
           lesse
           agreeably
           to
           the
           faith
           which
           is
           at
           this
           day
           professed
           in
           the
           reformed
           Churches
           ,
           that
           to
           that
           which
           they
           themselves
           received
           from
           the
           more
           ancient
           Doctors
           ,
           whom
           they
           did
           follow
           therein
           .
           Neither
           doe
           wee
           in
           our
           judgement
           one
           whit
           differ
           from
           them
           ,
           when
           they
           teach
           that
           l
           
             faith
             alone
             is
             not
             sufficient
             to
             life
             .
          
           For
           when
           it
           is
           said
           ,
           that
           
             Faith
             alone
             justifieth
          
           :
           this
           word
           alone
           may
           bee
           conceived
           to
           have
           relation
           either
           to
           the
           former
           part
           of
           the
           sentence
           ,
           which
           in
           the
           Schooles
           they
           terme
           the
           Subject
           ;
           or
           to
           the
           latter
           ,
           which
           they
           call
           the
           Predicate
           .
           Being
           referred
           to
           the
           former
           ,
           the
           meaning
           will
           be
           ;
           that
           such
           a
           faith
           as
           is
           alone
           (
           that
           is
           to
           say
           ,
           not
           accompanied
           with
           other
           vertues
           )
           doth
           justifie
           :
           and
           in
           this
           sense
           wee
           utterly
           disclaime
           the
           assertion
           .
           But
           being
           referred
           to
           the
           latter
           ,
           it
           maketh
           this
           sense
           ;
           that
           faith
           is
           it
           which
           alone
           or
           onely
           justifieth
           :
           and
           in
           this
           meaning
           onely
           doe
           we
           defend
           that
           proposition
           ;
           understanding
           still
           by
           faith
           ,
           not
           a
           dead
           carkase
           thereof
           (
           for
           how
           should
           the
           just
           bee
           able
           to
           live
           by
           a
           dead
           faith
           ?
           )
           but
           a
           true
           and
           lively
           faith
           ,
           m
           
             which
             worketh
             by
             love
          
           .
           For
           as
           it
           is
           a
           certaine
           truth
           ,
           that
           among
           all
           the
           members
           of
           the
           body
           ,
           the
           eye
           is
           the
           onely
           instrument
           whereby
           we
           see
           ;
           and
           yet
           it
           is
           as
           true
           also
           ,
           that
           the
           eye
           being
           alone
           ,
           and
           separated
           from
           the
           rest
           of
           
           the
           members
           ,
           is
           dead
           ,
           and
           for
           that
           cause
           doth
           neither
           see
           onely
           ,
           not
           see
           at
           all
           :
           so
           these
           two
           sayings
           likewise
           may
           stand
           well
           enough
           together
           ,
           that
           among
           all
           the
           vertues
           in
           the
           foule
           ,
           faith
           is
           the
           onely
           instrument
           whereby
           wee
           lay
           hold
           upon
           Christ
           for
           our
           justification
           ;
           and
           yet
           ,
           that
           faith
           being
           alone
           ,
           and
           disjoyned
           from
           the
           society
           of
           other
           graces
           ,
           
             is
             dead
             in
             it selfe
          
           ,
           (
           as
           St.
           n
           Iames
           speaketh
           )
           and
           in
           that
           respect
           can
           neither
           only
           justifie
           ,
           nor
           justifie
           at
           all
           .
        
         
           
             So
             though
          
           Claudius
           
             doe
             teach
             as
             wee
             doe
             ,
             that
          
           o
           faith
           alone
           saveth
           us
           ;
           because
           by
           the
           workes
           of
           the
           law
           no
           man
           shall
           bee
           justified
           :
           
             yet
             hee
             addeth
             withall
             this
             caution
             .
          
           p
           Not
           as
           if
           the
           workes
           of
           the
           law
           should
           be
           contemned
           ,
           and
           without
           them
           a
           simple
           faith
           (
           
             so
             hee
             calleth
             that
          
           solitary
           
             faith
             whereof
             we
             spake
             ,
             which
             is
             a
          
           simple
           
             faith
             indeed
          
           )
           should
           bee
           desired
           ;
           but
           that
           the
           workes
           themselves
           should
           bee
           adorned
           with
           the
           faith
           of
           Christ.
           For
           that
           sentence
           of
           the
           wise
           man
           is
           excellent
           ,
           that
           the
           faithfull
           man
           doth
           not
           live
           by
           righteousnesse
           ,
           but
           the
           righteous
           man
           by
           faith
           .
           
             In
             like
             manner
          
           Sedulius
           ,
           
             acknowledgeth
             with
             us
             ,
             that
             God
          
           q
           hath
           purposed
           by
           faith
           onely
           to
           forgive
           our
           sinnes
           freely
           ,
           and
           r
           by
           faith
           onely
           to
           save
           the
           beleevers
           ;
           
             and
             that
             ,
             when
             men
             have
             fallen
             ,
             they
             are
             to
             bee
             renewed
          
           s
           onely
           by
           the
           faith
           of
           Christ
           ,
           which
           worketh
           by
           love
           .
           
             intimating
             by
             this
             last
             clause
             ,
             that
             howsoever
             faith
             onely
             be
             it
             which
             justifieth
             the
             man
             ,
             yet
             the
             worke
             of
             love
             is
             necessarily
             required
             (
             for
             all
             that
             )
             to
             justifie
             the
             faith
             .
             And
          
           this
           
           faith
           (
           saith
           t
           he
           )
           when
           it
           hath
           beene
           iustified
           ,
           sticketh
           in
           the
           soyle
           of
           the
           soule
           ,
           like
           a
           roote
           which
           hath
           received
           a
           showre
           :
           that
           when
           it
           hath
           begunne
           to
           be
           manured
           by
           the
           law
           of
           God
           ,
           it
           may
           rise
           up
           againe
           into
           bowes
           ,
           which
           may
           beare
           the
           fruit
           of
           workes
           .
           Therefore
           the
           roote
           of
           righteousnesse
           doth
           not
           grow
           out
           of
           works
           ,
           but
           the
           fruit
           of
           works
           out
           of
           the
           root
           of
           righteousnesse
           ;
           namely
           out
           of
           that
           root
           of
           righteousnesse
           ,
           which
           God
           doth
           accept
           for
           righteousnesse
           without
           workes
           .
           
             The
             conclusion
             is
             :
             that
             saving
             faith
             is
             alwaies
             a
             fruitfull
             faith
             ;
             and
             though
             it
             never
             goe
             alone
             ,
             yet
             may
             there
             be
             some
             gift
             of
             God
             ,
             which
             it
             alone
             is
             able
             to
             reach
             unto
             .
             as
          
           u
           Columbanus
           
             also
             implieth
             in
             that
             verse
          
           :
           
             Sola
             fides
             fidei
             dono
             ditabitur
             almo
             .
          
        
         
           
             The
             greatest
             depressers
             of
             Gods
             grace
             ,
             and
             the
             advancers
             of
             mans
             abilities
             ,
             were
          
           Pelagius
           and
           Celestius●
           
             the
             one
             borne
             in
          
           Brittaine
           (
           
             as
             appeareth
             by
          
           Prosper
           Aquitanus
           )
           
             the
             other
             in
          
           Scotland
           or
           Ireland
           ;
           as
           x
           
             M
             
             r.
          
           Persons
           
             doth
             gather
             out
             of
             those
             words
             of
             S.
          
           Hierom
           
             in
             one
             of
             the
             Prefaces
             of
             his
             commentaries
             (
             not
             upon
             Ezechiel
             ,
             as
             he
             quoteth
             it
             ,
             but
             )
             upon
             Ieremy
             .
          
           y
           He
           hath
           his
           off-spring
           from
           the
           Scottish
           nation
           ,
           neere
           to
           the
           Britans
           .
           
             These
             hereticks
             (
             as
             our
          
           Marianus
           
             noteth
             out
             of
          
           Prosper
           .
           
             in
             his
             Chronicle
             )
             preached
             ,
             among
             other
             of
             their
             impieties
             ,
          
           z
           
             that
             for
          
           attaining
           of
           righteousnesse
           every
           one
           was
           governed
           by
           his
           owne
           will
           ,
           and
           received
           so
           much
           grace
           as
           he
           did
           merit
           .
           
             Whole
             venemous
             doctrine
             was
             in
          
           Brittaine
           
             repressed
             ,
             first
             by
          
           Palladius
           ,
           Lupus
           ,
           
           Germanus
           and
           Severus
           
             from
             abroad
             ;
             afterward
             ,
             by
          
           David
           Menevensis
           ,
           
             and
             his
             successors
             at
             home
             agreeably
             to
             whose
             institution
             ,
          
           Asser.
           Men●vensis
           
             doth
             professe
             ,
             that
             God
             is
             alwaies
             to
             bee
             esteemed
             both
             the
             mover
             of
             the
             will
             ,
             and
             the
             bestower
             of
             the
             good
             that
             is
             willed
             for
             hee
             is
             (
             saith
             hee
             )
          
           a
           the
           instigatour
           of
           all
           good
           wills
           ,
           and
           withall
           the
           most
           bountifull
           provider
           that
           the
           good
           things
           desired
           may
           bee
           had
           :
           forasmuch
           as
           hee
           would
           never
           stirre
           up
           any
           to
           will
           well
           ,
           unlesse
           hee
           did
           also
           liberally
           supply
           that
           which
           every
           one
           doth
           well
           and
           justly
           desire
           to
           obtaine
           .
        
         
           Among
           our
           Irish
           ,
           the
           grounds
           of
           sound
           doctrine
           in
           these
           points
           were
           at
           the
           beginning
           well
           settled
           by
           Palladius
           and
           Patricius
           ,
           b
           sent
           hither
           by
           Celestinus
           Bishop
           of
           Rome
           .
           And
           when
           the
           poyson
           of
           the
           Pelagian
           heresie
           ,
           about
           two
           hundred
           yeares
           after
           that
           ,
           beganne
           to
           breake
           out
           among
           them
           :
           the
           Clergie
           of
           Rome
           in
           the
           yeare
           of
           our
           Lord
           DCXXXIX
           .
           (
           during
           the
           vacancie
           of
           the
           See
           ,
           upon
           the
           death
           of
           Severinus
           )
           directed
           their
           letters
           unto
           them
           ,
           for
           the
           preventing
           of
           this
           growing
           mischiefe
           .
           Wherein
           among
           other
           things
           they
           put
           them
           in
           minde
           ,
           that
           d
           
             it
             is
             both
             blasphemy
             and
             folly
             to
             say
             ,
             that
             a
             man
             is
             without
             sinne
             :
             which
             none
             at
             all
             can
             say
             ,
             but
             that
             one
             mediatour
             betwixt
             God
             and
             man
             ,
             the
             man
             Christ
             Iesus
             ,
             who
             was
             conceived
             and
             borne
             without
             sinne
             .
          
           Which
           is
           agreeable
           ,
           partly
           to
           that
           of
           Claudius
           ;
           that
           e
           
             it
             is
             manifest
             unto
             all
             wise
             men
             ,
             although
             it
             bee
             contradicted
             by
             heretickes
             ,
             that
             there
             is
             none
             who
             can
             live
             upon
             earth
             without
             the
             touch
             of
             some
             
             sinne
             :
          
           partly
           to
           that
           of
           Sedulius
           ,
           that
           f
           
             there
             is
             none
             of
             the
             elect
             so
             great
             ,
             whom
             the
             Divell
             doth
             not
             dare
             to
             accuse
             ,
             but
             him
             alone
             who
             did
             no
             sinne
             ,
             and
             who
             said
             ;
             The
             Prince
             of
             this
             world
             commeth
             now
             ,
             and
             in
             mee
             bee
             findeth
             nothing
             .
          
        
         
           
             For
             touching
             the
             imperfection
             of
             our
             sanctification
             in
             this
             life
             ,
             these
             men
             held
             the
             same
             that
             wee
             doe
             :
             to
             wit
             ,
             that
             the
             Law
          
           g
           cannot
           be
           fulfilled
           ;
           that
           h
           there
           is
           none
           that
           doth
           good
           ,
           that
           is
           to
           say
           ,
           perfect
           and
           entire
           good
           .
           that
           i
           
             Gods
             elect
             shall
             be
             perfectly
          
           holy
           and
           immaculate
           in
           the
           life
           to
           come
           ,
           where
           the
           Church
           of
           Christ
           shall
           have
           no
           spot
           nor
           wrinkle
           :
           whereas
           in
           this
           present
           life
           they
           are
           righteous
           ,
           holy
           ,
           and
           immaculate
           ,
           not
           wholly
           ,
           but
           in
           part
           
             only
             that
          
           k
           the
           righteous
           shall
           then
           be
           without
           all
           kinde
           of
           sinne
           ,
           when
           there
           shall
           be
           no
           law
           in
           their
           members
           ,
           that
           shall
           resist
           the
           law
           of
           their
           minde
           .
           
             that
             although
          
           l
           sinne
           doe
           not
           now
           reigne
           in
           their
           mortall
           body
           to
           obey
           the
           desires
           thereof
           :
           yet
           sin
           dwelleth
           in
           that
           mortall
           body
           ,
           the
           force
           of
           that
           naturall
           custome
           being
           not
           yet
           extinguished
           ,
           
             which
             we
             have
             gotten
             by
             our
             originall
             ,
             and
             increased
             by
             our
             actual
             transgressions
             .
             And
             as
             for
             the
             matter
             of
          
           merit
           :
           Sedulius
           
             doth
             resolve
             us
             out
             of
             S.
          
           Paul
           ,
           
             that
             we
             are
             Saints
          
           m
           by
           the
           calling
           of
           God
           ,
           not
           by
           the
           merit
           of
           our
           deed
           ;
           
             that
             God
             is
             able
             to
             exceeding
             abundantly
             above
             that
             we
             aske
             or
             think
             ,
          
           n
           according
           to
           the
           power
           that
           worketh
           in
           us
           ,
           not
           according
           to
           our
           merits
           ;
           
           that
           o
           whatsoever
           men
           have
           from
           God
           ;
           is
           grace
           ,
           because
           they
           have
           nothing
           of
           due
           ;
           
             and
             that
          
           p
           nothing
           can
           bee
           found
           worthy
           or
           to
           bee
           compared
           with
           the
           glorie
           to
           come
           .
        
      
       
         
           CHAP.
           III.
           
        
         
           
             Of
             Purgatory
             ,
             and
             Prayer
             for
             the
             dead
             .
          
        
         
           THe
           next
           Point
           that
           offereth
           it selfe
           unto
           our
           consideration
           ,
           is
           that
           of
           Purgatory
           .
           Whereof
           if
           any
           man
           doe
           doubt
           ;
           a
           Caesarius
           (
           a
           Germane
           Monke
           of
           the
           Cistercian
           order
           )
           adviseth
           him
           for
           his
           resolution
           to
           make
           a
           journey
           into
           Scotland
           (
           the
           greater
           Scotland
           he
           meaneth
           )
           and
           there
           to
           
             enter
             into
             S.
             Patricks
             Purgatory
          
           :
           and
           then
           he
           giveth
           him
           his
           word
           ,
           that
           
             he
             shall
             no
             more
             doubt
             of
             the
             paines
             of
             Purgatory
             .
          
           If
           Doctor
           Terry
           (
           who
           commendeth
           this
           unto
           us
           as
           the
           testimony
           of
           b
           
             a
             most
             famous
             Authour
          
           )
           should
           chance
           to
           have
           a
           doubtfull
           thought
           hereafter
           of
           the
           pains
           of
           Purgatory
           ;
           I
           would
           wish
           his
           ghostly
           Father
           to
           injoyne
           him
           no
           other
           penance
           ,
           but
           the
           undertaking
           of
           a
           pilgrimage
           unto
           S.
           Patricks
           purgatorie
           ;
           to
           see
           whether
           he
           would
           prove
           any
           wiser
           when
           he
           came
           from
           thence
           ,
           than
           when
           he
           went
           thither
           .
           In
           the
           meane
           time
           ,
           untill
           he
           hath
           made
           some
           further
           experiment
           of
           the
           matter
           ,
           he
           shall
           give
           me
           leave
           to
           beleeve
           him
           that
           hath
           beene
           there
           ,
           and
           hath
           cause
           to
           know
           the
           place
           as
           wel
           as
           any
           (
           the
           Iland
           wherein
           it
           is
           seated
           ,
           being
           held
           by
           him
           as
           a
           part
           of
           the
           inheritance
           descended
           unto
           him
           from
           his
           ancestours
           )
           
           and
           yet
           professeth
           ,
           that
           hee
           found
           nothing
           therein
           ,
           which
           might
           afford
           him
           any
           argument
           to
           thinke
           there
           was
           a
           Purgatorie
           .
           I
           passe
           by
           ,
           that
           Nennius
           ,
           and
           Probus
           ,
           and
           all
           the
           elder
           writers
           of
           the
           life
           of
           S.
           Patrick
           that
           I
           have
           met
           withall
           ,
           speake
           not
           one
           word
           of
           any
           such
           place
           ;
           and
           that
           c
           Henrie
           the
           monke
           of
           Saltrey
           ,
           in
           the
           daies
           of
           King
           Stephen
           ,
           is
           the
           first
           in
           whom
           I
           could
           ever
           finde
           any
           mention
           thereof
           .
           this
           only
           would
           I
           know
           of
           the
           Doctor
           ,
           what
           the
           reason
           might
           bee
           ,
           that
           where
           hee
           bringeth
           in
           the
           words
           of
           
             Giraldus
             Cambrensis
          
           touching
           this
           place
           ,
           as
           d
           
             an
             authenticall
             authoritie
          
           ;
           he
           passeth
           over
           that
           part
           of
           his
           relation
           ,
           wherein
           he
           affirmeth
           ,
           that
           S.
           Patrick
           intended
           by
           this
           means
           to
           bring
           the
           rude
           people
           to
           a
           perswasion
           of
           the
           certaintie
           e
           
             of
             the
             infernall
             paines
             of
             the
             reprobate
             ,
             and
             of
             the
             true
             and
             everlasting
             life
             of
             the
             elect
             after
             death
             .
          
        
         
           
             The
             Grecians
             alledge
             this
             for
             one
             of
             their
             arguments
             against
             Purgatory
             :
             that
             whereas
          
           f
           their
           Fathers
           had
           delivered
           unto
           them
           many
           visions
           and
           dreames
           and
           other
           wonders
           concerning
           the
           everlasting
           punishment
           ,
           
             wherewith
             the
             wicked
             should
             be
             tormented
             in
             Hell
             ;
             yet
             none
             of
             them
             had
          
           declared
           any
           thing
           concerning
           a
           purgatorie
           temporarie
           fire
           .
           
             Belike
             the
             Doctor
             was
             affraid
             ,
             
             that
             wee
             would
             conclude
             upon
             the
             same
             ground
             ;
             that
             S.
          
           Patrick
           
             was
             carefull
             to
             plant
             in
             mens
             minds
             the
             beleefe
             of
          
           Heaven
           and
           Hell
           ,
           
             but
             of
          
           Purgatory
           
             taught
             them
             never
             a
             word
             .
             And
             sure
             I
             am
             ,
             that
             in
             the
             booke
             ascribed
             unto
             him
             ,
          
           De
           tribus
           habitaculis
           ,
           
             (
             which
             is
             to
             be
             seene
             in
             his
             Majesties
             Librarie
             )
             there
             is
             no
             mention
             of
             any
             other
             place
             after
             this
             life
             ,
             but
             of
             these
             two
             only
             .
             I
             will
             lay
             downe
             here
             the
             beginning
             of
             that
             treatise
             ;
             and
             leave
             it
             to
             the
             judgement
             of
             any
             indifferent
             man
             ,
             whether
             it
             can
             well
             stand
             with
             that
             which
             the
             Romanists
             teach
             concerning
             Purgatorie
             at
             this
             day
             .
          
           g
           There
           be
           three
           habitations
           under
           the
           power
           of
           Almighty
           God
           :
           the
           first
           ,
           the
           lowermost
           ,
           and
           the
           middle
           .
           The
           highest
           whereof
           is
           called
           the
           Kingdome
           of
           God
           ,
           or
           the
           Kingdome
           of
           Heaven
           ,
           the
           lowermost
           is
           termed
           Hell
           ,
           the
           middle
           is
           named
           the
           present
           World
           ,
           or
           the
           circuit
           of
           the
           earth
           .
           The
           extremes
           whereof
           are
           altogether
           contrary
           one
           to
           another
           :
           (
           for
           what
           fellowship
           can
           there
           be
           betwixt
           light
           and
           darkenesse
           ,
           betwixt
           Christ
           and
           Belial
           ?
           )
           but
           the
           middle
           hath
           some
           similitude
           with
           the
           extremes
           .
           For
           in
           this
           world
           there
           is
           a
           mixture
           of
           the
           bad
           and
           of
           the
           good
           together
           .
           whereas
           in
           the
           Kingdome
           of
           God
           there
           are
           none
           bad
           ,
           but
           all
           good
           :
           but
           in
           Hell
           there
           are
           none
           good
           ,
           but
           all
           bad
           .
           And
           both
           those
           places
           are
           supplyed
           out
           of
           the
           middle
           .
           For
           of
           the
           men
           of
           this
           world
           ,
           
           some
           are
           lifted
           up
           to
           Heaven
           ,
           others
           are
           drawne
           downe
           to
           Hell
           ▪
           namely
           ,
           like
           are
           joyned
           unto
           like
           ,
           that
           is
           to
           say
           ,
           good
           to
           good
           ,
           and
           bad
           to
           bad
           :
           just
           men
           to
           just
           Angels
           ,
           wicked
           men
           to
           wicked
           Angels
           ;
           the
           servants
           of
           God
           to
           God
           ,
           the
           servants
           of
           the
           Divell
           to
           the
           Divell
           .
           The
           blessed
           are
           called
           to
           the
           Kingdome
           prepared
           for
           them
           from
           the
           beginning
           of
           the
           world
           :
           the
           cursed
           are
           driven
           into
           the
           everlasting
           fire
           that
           is
           prepared
           for
           the
           Divell
           and
           his
           angels
           ,
           
             Thus
             farre
             there
          
           .
        
         
           
             Hitherto
             also
             may
             be
             referred
             that
             ancient
             Canon
             of
             one
             of
             our
             Irish
             Synods
             ,
             wherin
             it
             is
             affirmed
             ,
             that
             the
             soule
             being
             separated
             from
             the
             body
             is
          
           h
           presented
           before
           the
           judgement
           seat
           of
           Christ
           ,
           who
           rendreth
           it
           owne
           unto
           it
           ,
           according
           as
           it
           hath
           done
           :
           
             and
             that
          
           neither
           the
           Archangel
           can
           leade
           it
           unto
           life
           ,
           untill
           the
           Lord
           hath
           iudged
           it
           ;
           nor
           the
           Divell
           transport
           it
           unto
           paine
           ,
           unlesse
           the
           Lord
           doe
           damne
           it
           .
           
             as
             the
             sayings
             of
          
           Sedulius
           
             likewise
             ;
             that
             after
             the
             end
             of
             this
             life
             ,
          
           i
           eyther
           death
           or
           life
           succeedeth
           ,
           
             and
             that
          
           k
           death
           is
           the
           gate
           by
           which
           wee
           enter
           into
           our
           kingdome
           :
           
             together
             with
             that
             of
          
           Claudius
           ;
           that
           l
           Christ
           did
           take
           upon
           him
           our
           punishment
           without
           the
           guilt
           ,
           that
           thereby
           hee
           might
           loose
           our
           guilt
           ,
           and
           finish
           also
           our
           punishment
           .
           Cardinall
           Bellarmine
           
             indeed
             alledgeth
             here
             against
             us
             the
             vision
             of
          
           Furseus
           :
           who
           m
           rising
           from
           the
           dead
           ,
           told
           many
           things
           ,
           which
           he
           saw
           concerning
           the
           paines
           of
           purgatory
           ;
           as
           Bede
           ,
           
             he
             saith
             ,
             doth
             write
             .
             But
             ,
             by
             his
             good
             leave
             ,
             we
             will
             be
             better
             
             advised
             ,
             before
             wee
             build
             articles
             of
             faith
             upon
             such
             visions
             and
             dreames
             as
             these
             :
             many
             whereof
             deserve
             to
             have
             a
             place
             among
          
           n
           the
           strange
           narrations
           of
           soules
           appearing
           after
           death
           ,
           
             collected
             by
          
           Damascius
           
             the
             heathen
             Idolater
             ;
             rather
             than
             among
             the
             histories
             and
             discourses
             of
             sober
             Christians
             .
          
        
         
           As
           for
           this
           vision
           of
           Furscus
           :
           all
           that
           Bede
           relateth
           of
           it
           to
           this
           purpose
           ,
           is
           concerning
           certain
           great
           fires
           above
           the
           ayre
           ,
           appointed
           to
           o
           
             examine
             every
             one
             according
             to
             the
             merits
             of
             his
             workes
             .
          
           which
           peradventure
           may
           make
           something
           for
           Damascius
           his
           Purgatory
           in
           
             Circulo
             lacteo
          
           (
           for
           in
           that
           circle
           made
           hee
           p
           away
           for
           the
           soules
           that
           went
           to
           the
           Hades
           in
           Heaven
           ;
           and
           q
           would
           not
           have
           us
           wonder
           ,
           that
           there
           they
           should
           be
           purged
           by
           the
           way
           :
           )
           but
           nothing
           for
           the
           Papists
           Purgatory
           ,
           which
           Bellarmine
           by
           the
           common
           consent
           of
           the
           Schoolemen
           determineth
           to
           bee
           within
           the
           bowels
           of
           the
           earth
           .
           Neyther
           is
           there
           any
           thing
           else
           in
           the
           whole
           booke
           of
           the
           life
           of
           Furseus
           (
           whence
           Bede
           borrowed
           these
           things
           )
           that
           looketh
           toward
           Purgatorie
           :
           unlesse
           peradventure
           that
           speech
           of
           the
           Divell
           may
           bee
           thought
           to
           give
           some
           advantage
           unto
           it
           .
           r
           
             This
             man
             hath
             not
             purged
             his
             sins
             upon
             earth
             ;
             neither
             doth
             he
             receive
             punishment
             for
             them
             here
             .
             Where
             is
             therefore
             the
             justice
             of
             God
             ?
          
           as
           if
           Gods
           justice
           were
           not
           sufficiently
           satisfied
           by
           the
           sufferings
           of
           Christ
           ;
           but
           man
           also
           must
           needs
           give
           further
           satisfaction
           thereunto
           by
           penall
           workes
           of
           sufferings
           ,
           eyther
           here
           ,
           or
           in
           the
           other
           world
           .
           which
           is
           the
           ground
           ,
           upon
           which
           our
           Romanists
           doe
           lay
           the
           rotten
           frame
           of
           their
           devised
           Purgatorie
           .
        
         
           The
           later
           visions
           of
           
             Malachias
             ,
             Tundal
             ,
             Owen
          
           ,
           and
           
           others
           that
           lived
           within
           these
           last
           five
           hundred
           years
           ;
           come
           not
           within
           the
           compasse
           of
           our
           present
           inquirie
           :
           nor
           yet
           the
           fables
           that
           have
           beene
           framed
           in
           those
           times
           ,
           touching
           the
           lives
           and
           actions
           of
           elder
           Saints
           ;
           whereof
           no
           wise
           man
           will
           make
           any
           reckoning
           .
           Such
           (
           for
           example
           )
           is
           that
           which
           we
           read
           in
           the
           life
           of
           St.
           Brendan
           :
           that
           the
           question
           being
           moved
           in
           his
           hearing
           ,
           s
           
             Whether
             the
             sinnes
             of
             the
             dead
             could
             be
             redeemed
             by
             the
             prayers
             or
             almes-deeds
             of
             their
             friends
             remaining
             in
             this
             life
          
           (
           for
           that
           was
           still
           a
           question
           in
           the
           Church
           :
           )
           he
           is
           said
           to
           have
           told
           them
           ,
           that
           on
           a
           certaine
           night
           ,
           as
           hee
           sayled
           in
           the
           great
           Ocean
           ,
           the
           soule
           of
           one
           Colman
           t
           (
           who
           
             had
             beene
             an
             angry
             Monke
             ,
             and
             a
             sower
             of
             discord
             betwixt
             brethren
             )
          
           appeared
           unto
           him
           ;
           who
           complaining
           of
           his
           grievous
           torments
           ,
           intreated
           that
           prayers
           might
           be
           made
           to
           God
           for
           him
           ,
           and
           after
           sixe
           dayes
           thankefully
           acknowledged
           that
           by
           meanes
           thereof
           hee
           had
           gotten
           into
           heaven
           .
           Whereupon
           it
           is
           concluded
           ,
           u
           
             that
             the
             prayer
             of
             the
             living
             doth
             profit
             much
             the
             dead
             .
          
           But
           of
           S.
           Brendans
           sea-pilgrimage
           ,
           we
           have
           the
           censure
           of
           Molanus
           a
           learned
           Romanist
           ;
           that
           there
           bee
           x
           
             many
             apocryhall
             fooleries
          
           in
           it
           :
           and
           whosoever
           readeth
           the
           same
           with
           any
           judgement
           ,
           cannot
           choose
           but
           pronounce
           of
           it
           ,
           as
           Photius
           doth
           of
           the
           
             strange
             narrations
             of
             Damascius
          
           ,
           formerly
           mentioned
           ;
           that
           it
           containeth
           not
           only
           apocryphall
           ,
           but
           also
           y
           
             impossible
             ,
             incredible
             ,
             ill-composed
             ,
             and
             monstruous
          
           fooleries
           .
           Whereof
           though
           the
           old
           Legend
           it selfe
           were
           not
           free
           (
           as
           by
           the
           heads
           thereof
           ,
           touched
           by
           
             Glaber
             Rodulphus
          
           and
           
             Giraldus
             Cambrensis
          
           ,
           may
           appeare
           )
           yet
           for
           the
           tale
           that
           I
           recited
           out
           of
           the
           z
           
             New
             Legend
          
           of
           England
           ,
           I
           can
           say
           ,
           
           that
           in
           the
           manuscript
           books
           which
           I
           have
           met
           withall
           here
           ,
           in
           St.
           Brendans
           owne
           country
           ,
           (
           one
           whereof
           was
           transcribed
           for
           the
           use
           of
           the
           Friars
           minors
           of
           Kilkenny
           ,
           about
           the
           yeere
           of
           our
           Lord
           1350.
           )
           there
           is
           not
           the
           least
           footstep
           thereof
           to
           be
           seene
           .
        
         
           And
           this
           is
           a
           thing
           very
           observable
           in
           the
           ancienter
           lives
           of
           our
           Saints
           (
           such
           I
           meane
           ,
           as
           have
           beene
           written
           before
           the
           time
           of
           Sathans
           loosing
           ;
           beyond
           which
           we
           doe
           not
           now
           looke
           :
           )
           that
           the
           prayers
           and
           oblations
           for
           the
           dead
           mentioned
           therein
           ,
           are
           expressly
           noted
           to
           have
           beene
           made
           for
           them
           ,
           whose
           soules
           were
           supposed
           at
           the
           same
           instant
           to
           have
           rested
           in
           blisse
           .
           So
           Adamnanus
           reporteth
           ,
           that
           Saint
           Colme
           (
           called
           by
           the
           Irish
           ,
           both
           in
           a
           Bedes
           and
           our
           dayes
           ,
           Colum-kille
           )
           b
           caused
           all
           things
           to
           be
           prepared
           ,
           for
           the
           sacred
           ministry
           of
           the
           Eucharist
           ;
           when
           he
           had
           seene
           the
           soule
           of
           St.
           Brendan
           received
           by
           the
           holy
           Angels
           :
           and
           that
           hee
           did
           the
           like
           ,
           when
           Columbanus
           Bishop
           of
           Leinster
           departed
           this
           life
           .
           for
           
             I
             must
             to
             day
          
           (
           saith
           St.
           Colme
           c
           there
           )
           
             although
             I
             bee
             unworthy
             ,
             celebrate
             the
             holy
             mysteries
             of
             the
             Eucharist
             ,
             for
             the
             reverence
             of
             that
             soule
             which
             this
             night
             ,
             carried
             beyond
             the
             starry
             firmament
             betwixt
             the
             holy
             Quires
             of
             Angels
             ,
             ascended
             into
             Paradise
             .
          
           Whereby
           it
           appeareth
           ,
           that
           an
           honourable
           commemoration
           of
           the
           dead
           was
           herein
           intended
           ,
           and
           a
           sacrifice
           of
           thanksgiving
           for
           their
           salvation
           rather
           than
           of
           propitiation
           for
           their
           sinnes
           .
           In
           Bede
           also
           wee
           finde
           mention
           of
           the
           like
           obsequies
           celebrated
           by
           St.
           Cuthbert
           for
           one
           Hadwaldus
           ;
           after
           d
           he
           
             had
             seene
             his
             soule
             carried
             by
             the
             hands
             of
             
             Angels
             unto
             the
             joyes
             of
             the
             kingdome
             of
             heaven
             .
          
           So
           Gallus
           and
           Magnus
           (
           as
           
             Walafridus
             Strabus
          
           relateth
           in
           the
           life
           of
           the
           one
           ,
           and
           
             Theodorus
             Campidonensis
          
           ,
           or
           whosoever
           else
           was
           author
           of
           the
           life
           of
           the
           other
           )
           e
           
             said
             Masse
          
           (
           which
           what
           it
           was
           in
           those
           dayes
           wee
           shall
           afterward
           heare
           )
           
             and
             were
             instant
             in
             prayers
             for
             the
             commemoration
          
           of
           Abbat
           Columbanus
           their
           countryman
           ;
           f
           
             frequenting
             the
             memory
             of
             that
             great
             Father
             ,
             with
             holy
             prayers
             ,
             and
             healthfull
             sacrifices
             .
          
           Where
           that
           speech
           of
           Gallus
           unto
           his
           Deacon
           Magnus
           or
           Magnoaldus
           ,
           is
           worthy
           of
           speciall
           consideration
           :
           g
           
             After
             this
             nights
             watch
             ,
             I
             understood
             by
             a
             vision
             ,
             that
             my
             master
             and
             father
             Columbanus
             is
             to
             day
             departed
             out
             of
             the
             miseries
             of
             this
             life
             unto
             the
             joyes
             of
             Paradise
             .
             For
             his
             rest
             therefore
             I
             ought
             to
             offer
             the
             sacrifice
             of
             salvation
             .
          
           In
           like
           manner
           also
           ,
           when
           Gallus
           himselfe
           dyed
           ;
           h
           Iohn
           Bishop
           of
           
             Constance
             prayed
             to
             the
             Lord
             for
             his
             rest
             ,
          
           and
           
             offered
             healthfull
             sacrifices
             for
             him
          
           :
           although
           he
           were
           certainly
           perswaded
           that
           he
           had
           attained
           the
           blessing
           of
           everlasting
           life
           ;
           as
           may
           bee
           seene
           in
           Walafridus
           .
           And
           when
           Magnus
           afterwards
           was
           in
           his
           death
           bed
           ,
           hee
           is
           said
           to
           have
           used
           these
           words
           unto
           Tozzo
           Bishop
           of
           Ausborough
           ,
           that
           came
           to
           visit
           him
           .
           i
           
             Doe
             not
             weepe
             ,
             reverend
             Prelate
             ,
             
             because
             thou
             beholdest
             me
             labouring
             in
             so
             many
             stormes
             of
             worldly
             troubles
             :
             because
             I
             beleeve
             in
             the
             mercy
             of
             God
             ,
             that
             my
             soule
             shall
             rejoyce
             in
             the
             freedome
             of
             immortalitie
             .
             yet
             I
             beseech
             thee
             ,
             that
             thou
             wilt
             not
             cease
             to
             helpe
             mee
             a
             sinner
             and
             my
             soule
             with
             thy
             holy
             prayers
             .
          
           Then
           followeth
           :
           that
           at
           the
           time
           of
           his
           departure
           ,
           this
           voice
           was
           heard
           ;
           k
           
             Come
             ,
             Magnus
             ,
             come
             ,
             receive
             the
             crowne
             which
             the
             Lord
             hath
             prepared
             for
             thee
             .
          
           and
           that
           thereupon
           Tozzo
           said
           unto
           Theodorus
           (
           the
           supposed
           writer
           of
           this
           history
           )
           l
           
             Let
             us
             cease
             weeping
             ,
             brother
             ;
             because
             wee
             ought
             rather
             to
             rejoyce
             ,
             having
             heard
             this
             signe
             of
             the
             receiving
             of
             his
             soule
             unto
             immortality
             ,
             than
             to
             make
             lamentation
             .
             but
             let
             us
             goe
             to
             the
             Church
             ,
             and
             be
             carefull
             to
             offer
             healthfull
             sacrifices
             to
             the
             Lord
             for
             so
             deare
             a
             friend
             .
          
        
         
           I
           dispute
           not
           of
           the
           credit
           of
           these
           particular
           passages
           :
           it
           is
           sufficient
           ,
           that
           the
           authors
           from
           whom
           wee
           have
           received
           them
           ,
           lived
           within
           the
           compasse
           of
           those
           times
           ,
           whereof
           wee
           now
           doe
           treate
           .
           For
           thereby
           it
           is
           plaine
           enough
           (
           and
           if
           it
           be
           not
           ,
           it
           shall
           elsewhere
           be
           made
           yet
           more
           plaine
           )
           that
           in
           those
           elder
           dayes
           it
           was
           an
           usuall
           thing
           ,
           to
           make
           prayers
           and
           oblations
           for
           the
           rest
           of
           those
           soules
           ,
           which
           were
           not
           doubted
           to
           have
           beene
           in
           glorie
           :
           and
           consequently
           ,
           that
           neither
           the
           Commemoration
           nor
           the
           
             Praying
             for
             the
             dead
          
           ,
           nor
           the
           
             Requiem
             Masses
          
           of
           that
           age
           ,
           have
           any
           necessary
           relation
           to
           the
           beleefe
           of
           Purgatory
           .
           The
           lesson
           therefore
           which
           Claudius
           teacheth
           us
           here
           out
           of
           Saint
           Hierome
           ,
           is
           very
           good
           :
           that
           m
           
             while
             wee
             are
             in
             this
             present
             world
             ,
             wee
             may
             bee
             
             able
             to
             helpe
             one
             another
             ,
             either
             by
             our
             prayers
             or●
             by
             our
             counsailes
             ,
             but
             when
             wee
             shall
             come
             before
             the
             Iudgement
             seate
             of
             Christ
             ,
             neither
             Iob
             ,
             nor
             Daniel
             ,
             nor
             Noah
             can
             intreate
             for
             any
             one
             ,
             but
             every
             one
             must
             beare
             his
             owne
             burden
             .
          
           and
           the
           advice
           which
           the
           no
           lesse
           learned
           than
           godly
           Abbat
           Columbanus
           giveth
           us
           ,
           is
           verie
           safe
           :
           not
           to
           pitch
           upon
           uncertainties
           hereafter
           ,
           but
           now
           to
           
             trust
             in
             God
             ,
             and
             follow
             the
             precepts
             of
             Christ
             ;
             while
             our
             life
             doth
             yet
             remaine
             ,
             and
             while
             the
             times
             ,
             wherein
             we
             may
             obtaine
             salvation
             ,
             are
             certaine
             .
          
           
             
               Vive
               Deo
               fidens
               (
               saith
               n
               he
               )
               Christi
               praecepta
               sequēdo
               ;
            
             
               Dum
               modò
               vita
               manet
               ,
               dum
               tempora
               certa
               salutis
               .
            
          
        
         
           Whereunto
           Iohn
           the
           Briton
           (
           another
           son
           of
           
             Sulgen
             Bishop
             of
             St.
             Davids
          
           )
           seemeth
           also
           to
           have
           had
           an
           eye
           ,
           when
           (
           at
           the
           end
           of
           the
           Poëme
           which
           he
           wrote
           of
           his
           owne
           and
           his
           fathers
           life
           )
           he
           prayeth
           for
           himselfe
           in
           the
           same
           manner
           :
           
             
               Vt
               genitor
               clemens
               solitâ
               pietate
               remittat
            
             
               Factis
               aut
               dictis
               quae
               gessi
               corde
               nefando
               ;
            
             
               Dum
               mihi
               vita
               manet
               ,
               dum
               flendi
               flumina
               possunt
               .
            
             
               Nam
               cum
               tartareis
               nullius
               cura
               subintrat
               .
            
          
        
      
       
         
           CHAP.
           IV.
           
        
         
           
             Of
             the
             Worship
             of
             God
             ,
             the
             publicke
             forme
             of
             Liturgie
             ,
             the
             Sacrifice
             and
             Sacrament
             of
             the
             Lords
             Supper
             .
          
        
         
           TOuching
           the
           worship
           of
           God
           ,
           Sedulius
           delivereth
           this
           generall
           rule
           :
           that
           a
           
             to
             adore
             any
             other
             beside
             the
             Father
             ,
             and
             the
             Sonne
             ,
             and
             the
             holy
             Ghost
             ,
             is
             
             the
             crime
             of
             impiety
          
           ;
           and
           that
           b
           
             all
             that
             the
             soule
             oweth
             unto
             God
             ,
             if
             it
             bestow
             it
             upon
             any
             beside
             God
             ,
             it
             committeth
             adultery
             .
          
           More
           particularly
           ,
           in
           the
           matter
           of
           Images
           ,
           c
           hee
           reproveth
           the
           wise
           men
           of
           the
           heathen
           ,
           for
           thinking
           that
           they
           had
           found
           out
           a
           way
           ,
           
             how
             the
             invisible
             God
             might
             bee
             worshipped
             by
             a
             visible
             image
             :
          
           with
           whom
           also
           accordeth
           Claudius
           ;
           that
           d
           God
           is
           to
           bee
           
             knowne
             ,
             neither
             in
             mettall
             nor
             in
             stone
             .
          
           and
           for
           Oathes
           ,
           there
           is
           a
           Canon
           ascribed
           to
           Saint
           Patricke
           ;
           wherein
           it
           is
           determined
           ,
           that
           e
           
             no
             creature
             is
             to
             bee
             sworne
             by
             ,
             but
             onely
             the
             Creator
             .
          
           As
           for
           the
           forme
           of
           the
           Litugrie
           or
           publicke
           service
           of
           God
           ,
           which
           the
           same
           St.
           Patrick
           brought
           into
           this
           country
           :
           it
           is
           said
           ,
           that
           hee
           received
           it
           from
           Germanus
           and
           Lupus
           ;
           and
           that
           it
           originally
           descended
           from
           S.
           Marke
           the
           Evangelist
           .
           for
           so
           have
           I
           seene
           it
           set
           downe
           in
           an
           ancient
           fragment
           ,
           written
           wellnigh
           900.
           yeeres
           since
           :
           remaining
           now
           in
           the
           Library
           of
           Sir
           
             Robert
             Cotton
          
           ,
           my
           worthy
           friend
           ;
           who
           can
           never
           sufficiently
           bee
           commended
           ,
           for
           his
           extraordinary
           care
           ,
           in
           preserving
           all
           rare
           monuments
           of
           this
           kinde
           .
           Yea
           St.
           Hieromes
           authority
           is
           there
           vouched
           for
           proofe
           hereof
           .
           
             Beatus
             Hieronymus
             adfirmat
          
           ,
           quòd
           
             ipsum
             cursum
             ,
             qui
             dicitur
             praesente
             tempore
             Scottorum
             ,
             beatus
             Marcus
             decanta●it
             .
          
           which
           being
           not
           now
           to
           bee
           found
           in
           any
           of
           Saint
           Hieroms
           workes
           ,
           the
           truth
           thereof
           I
           leave
           unto
           the
           credit
           of
           the
           reporter
           .
        
         
           But
           whatsoever
           Liturgie
           was
           used
           here
           at
           first
           :
           this
           is
           sure
           ,
           that
           in
           the
           succeeding
           ages
           no
           one
           generall
           forme
           of
           divine
           service
           was
           retained
           ,
           but
           diverse
           rites
           and
           manners
           of
           celebrations
           were
           observed
           in
           diverse
           parts
           of
           this
           Kingdome
           ;
           untill
           the
           
             Romane
             
             use
             was
             brought
             in
             at
             last
             by
          
           Gillebertus
           ,
           and
           Malachias
           ,
           and
           Christianus
           ,
           
             who
             were
             the
             Popes
             Legates
             here
             about
             500.
             yeeres
             agoe
             .
             This
          
           Gillebertus
           (
           
             an
             old
             acquaintance
             of
          
           f
           Anselm
           
             Archbishop
             of
          
           Canterbury
           )
           
             in
             the
             Prologue
             of
             his
             booke
          
           De
           usu
           Ecclesiastico
           ,
           
             directed
             to
             the
             whole
             Clergie
             of
             Ireland
             ,
             writeth
             in
             this
             manner
             .
          
           g
           At
           the
           request
           ,
           yea
           and
           at
           the
           command
           of
           many
           of
           you
           (
           dearely
           beloved
           )
           I
           endevoured
           to
           set
           downe
           in
           writing
           the
           Canonicall
           custome
           in
           saying
           of
           Houres
           ,
           and
           performing
           the
           Office
           of
           the
           whole
           Ecclesiasticall
           Order
           ;
           not
           presumptuously
           ,
           but
           in
           desire
           to
           serve
           your
           most
           godly
           command
           :
           to
           the
           end
           that
           those
           diverse
           and
           schismaticall
           Orders
           ,
           wherewith
           in
           a
           manner
           all
           Ireland
           is
           deluded
           ,
           may
           give
           place
           to
           one
           Catholicke
           and
           Romane
           Office.
           For
           what
           may
           bee
           said
           to
           bee
           more
           undecent
           or
           schismaticall
           ;
           than
           that
           the
           most
           learned
           in
           one
           order
           ,
           should
           bee
           made
           as
           a
           private
           and
           lay
           man
           in
           another
           mans
           Church
           ?
        
         
           
             These
             beginnings
             were
             presently
             seconded
             by
          
           Malachias
           :
           
             in
             whose
             life
             ,
             written
             by
          
           Bernard
           ,
           
             wee
             reade
             as
             followeth
          
           .
           h
           The
           Apostolicall
           constitutions
           ,
           and
           the
           decrees
           of
           the
           holy
           Fathers
           ,
           but
           especially
           the
           customes
           of
           the
           holy
           Church
           of
           Rome
           ,
           did
           he
           establish
           in
           all
           Churches
           .
           And
           hence
           it
           is
           ,
           that
           at
           this
           day
           the
           Canonicall
           
           Houres
           are
           chanted
           and
           sung
           therein
           ,
           according
           to
           the
           manner
           of
           the
           whole
           earth
           :
           whereas
           before
           that
           ,
           this
           was
           not
           done
           ,
           no
           not
           in
           the
           Citie
           it selfe
           .
           (
           
             the
             poore
             city
             of
          
           Ardmagh
           
             he
             meaneth
          
           .
           )
           But
           Malachias
           had
           learned
           song
           in
           his
           youth
           ,
           and
           shortly
           after
           caused
           singing
           to
           be
           used
           in
           his
           own
           Monasterie
           ;
           when
           as
           yet
           ,
           aswell
           in
           the
           citie
           as
           in
           the
           whole
           Bishoprick
           ,
           they
           eyther
           knew
           not
           ,
           or
           would
           not
           sing
           .
           
             Lastly
             ,
             the
             worke
             was
             brought
             to
             perfection
             ,
             when
          
           Christianus
           
             Bishop
             of
             Lismore
             ,
             as
             Legate
             to
             the
             Pope
             ,
             was
             President
             in
             the
             Councell
             of
          
           Casshell
           :
           
             wherein
             a
             speciall
             order
             was
             taken
             for
          
           i
           the
           right
           singing
           of
           the
           Ecclesiasticall
           Office
           ;
           
             and
             a
             generall
             act
             established
             ,
             that
          
           k
           all
           divine
           offices
           of
           holy
           Church
           should
           from
           thenceforth
           be
           handled
           in
           all
           parts
           of
           Ireland
           ,
           according
           as
           the
           Church
           of
           England
           d●d
           observe
           them
           .
           
             The
             statutes
             of
             which
             Councell
             were
          
           l
           
             confirmed
             by
             the
             Regall
          
           authoritie
           
             of
             King
          
           Henry
           the
           second
           ;
           m
           
             by
             whose
          
           mandate
           ,
           
             the
             Bishops
             that
             met
             therein
             were
             assembled
             ,
             in
             the
             yeare
             of
             our
             Lord
          
           1171.
           as
           Giraldus
           Cambrensis
           ▪
           
             witnesseth
             ,
             in
             his
             historie
             of
             the
             Conquest
             of
          
           Ireland
           .
           
             And
             thus
             late
             was
             it
             ,
             before
             the
          
           Romane
           
             use
             was
             fully
             settled
             in
             this
             Kingdome
             .
          
        
         
           That
           the
           Britons
           used
           another
           manner
           in
           the
           administration
           of
           the
           Sacrament
           of
           Baptisme
           than
           the
           Romanes
           did
           :
           appeareth
           by
           the
           proposition
           made
           unto
           them
           by
           Austin
           the
           Monke
           ;
           n
           
             that
             they
             should
             performe
             the
             ministerie
             of
             baptisme
             ,
             according
             to
             the
             custome
             of
             the
             Church
             of
             Rome
             .
          
           That
           their
           forme
           of
           Liturgie
           
           was
           the
           same
           with
           that
           which
           was
           received
           by
           their
           neighbours
           the
           Galls
           ,
           is
           intimated
           by
           the
           Author
           of
           that
           ancient
           fragment
           before
           alledged
           :
           who
           also
           addeth
           ,
           that
           the
           o
           
             Gallican
             Order
             was
             received
             in
             the
             Church
             throughout
             the
             whole
             world
             .
          
           Yet
           elsewhere
           doe
           I
           meete
           with
           a
           sentence
           alledged
           out
           of
           Gildas
           ;
           that
           p
           
             the
             Britons
             were
             contrary
             to
             the
             whole
             world
             ,
             and
             enemies
             to
             the
             Roman
             customes
             ,
          
           aswell
           in
           their
           Masse
           ,
           as
           in
           their
           Tonsure
           .
        
         
           Where
           to
           let
           passe
           what
           I
           have
           collected
           touching
           the
           difference
           of
           these
           tonsures
           (
           as
           a
           matter
           of
           very
           small
           moment
           eyther
           way
           )
           and
           to
           speake
           somewhat
           of
           the
           Masse
           (
           for
           which
           so
           great
           adoe
           is
           now
           adayes
           made
           by
           our
           Romanists
           )
           wee
           may
           observe
           in
           the
           first
           place
           ,
           that
           the
           publike
           Liturgie
           or
           service
           of
           the
           Church
           ,
           was
           of
           old
           named
           the
           Masse
           :
           even
           then
           also
           ,
           when
           prayers
           only
           were
           said
           ,
           without
           the
           celebration
           of
           the
           holy
           Communion
           .
           So
           the
           last
           Masse
           that
           S.
           Colme
           was
           ever
           present
           at
           ,
           is
           noted
           by
           q
           Adamnanus
           to
           have
           beene
           
             vespertinalis
             Dominica
             noctis
             Missa
          
           .
           He
           dyed
           the
           mid-night
           following
           ;
           whence
           the
           Lords
           day
           tooke
           his
           beginning
           (
           9●
           
             viz.
             Iunii
             ,
             Anno
             Dom.
          
           597.
           )
           according
           to
           the
           account
           of
           the
           Romanes
           :
           which
           the
           Scottish
           and
           Irish
           seeme
           to
           have
           begunne
           from
           the
           evening
           going
           before
           .
           and
           then
           was
           that
           evening-Masse
           said
           :
           which
           in
           all
           likelihood
           ,
           differed
           not
           from
           those
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           mentioned
           by
           r
           Leo
           the
           Emperour
           in
           his
           Tacticks
           ,
           that
           is
           to
           say
           ,
           from
           that
           which
           we
           call
           Even-song
           ,
           or
           
             Evening
             prayer
          
           .
           But
           the
           name
           of
           the
           Masse
           was
           in
           those
           daies
           more
           specially
           applied
           to
           the
           administration
           fo
           the
           Lords
           Supper
           :
           &
           therfore
           in
           the
           same
           s
           Adamnanus
           we
           see
           that
           
             Sacra
             
             Eucharistiae
             ministeria
          
           and
           
             Missarum
             solemnia
          
           ,
           the
           
             sacred
             ministerie
             of
             the
             Eucharist
          
           and
           
             the
             solemnities
             of
             the
             Masse
          
           ,
           are
           taken
           for
           the
           same
           thing
           .
           So
           likewise
           in
           the
           t
           relation
           of
           the
           passages
           that
           concerne
           the
           obsequies
           of
           Columbanus
           ,
           performed
           by
           Gallus
           and
           Magnoaldus
           ;
           we
           finde
           that
           
             Missam
             celebrare
          
           and
           
             Missas
             agere
          
           ,
           is
           made
           to
           be
           the
           same
           with
           
             Divina
             celebrare
             mysteria
          
           and
           
             Salutis
             hostiam
          
           (
           or
           
             salutare
             sacrificium
             )
             immolare
          
           :
           the
           saying
           of
           Masse
           ,
           the
           same
           with
           the
           
             celebration
             of
             the
             divine
             mysteries
          
           and
           the
           
             oblation
             of
             the
             healthfull
             sacrifice
          
           .
           for
           by
           that
           terme
           was
           the
           administration
           of
           the
           
             sacrament
             of
             the
             Lords
             Supper
          
           at
           that
           time
           usually
           designed
           .
        
         
           For
           as
           in
           our
           u
           beneficence
           ,
           and
           communicating
           unto
           the
           necessities
           of
           the
           poore
           (
           which
           are
           sacrifices
           wherewith
           God
           is
           well
           pleased
           )
           wee
           are
           taught
           to
           x
           give
           both
           our selves
           and
           our
           almes
           ,
           first
           unto
           the
           Lord
           ,
           and
           after
           unto
           our
           brethren
           by
           the
           will
           of
           God
           :
           so
           is
           it
           in
           this
           ministery
           of
           the
           blessed
           Sacrament
           .
           the
           service
           is
           first
           presented
           unto
           God
           ,
           (
           from
           which
           ,
           as
           from
           a
           most
           principall
           part
           of
           the
           dutie
           ,
           the
           sacrament
           it selfe
           is
           called
           the
           Eucharist
           ;
           because
           therein
           wee
           y
           offer
           a
           speciall
           sacrifice
           of
           praise
           and
           thankesgiving
           alwaies
           unto
           God
           )
           and
           then
           communicated
           unto
           the
           use
           of
           Gods
           people
           .
           in
           the
           performance
           of
           which
           part
           of
           the
           service
           ,
           both
           the
           minister
           was
           said
           to
           give
           ,
           and
           the
           communicant
           to
           
             receive
             the
             sacrifice
          
           :
           as
           well
           as
           in
           respect
           of
           the
           former
           part
           ,
           they
           were
           said
           to
           offer
           the
           same
           unto
           the
           Lord.
           For
           they
           did
           not
           distinguish
           the
           Sacrifice
           from
           the
           Sacrament
           ,
           as
           the
           Romanists
           doe
           now
           adayes
           :
           but
           used
           the
           name
           of
           Sacrifice
           indifferently
           ,
           both
           of
           that
           which
           
           was
           offered
           unto
           God
           ,
           and
           of
           that
           which
           was
           given
           to
           and
           received
           by
           the
           communicant
           .
           Therefore
           wee
           read
           of
           
             offring
             the
             sacrifice
          
           to
           God
           :
           as
           in
           that
           speech
           of
           Gallus
           to
           his
           scholler
           Magnoaldus
           ;
           z
           
             My
             master
             Columbanus
             is
             accustomed
             to
             offer
             unto
             the
             Lord
             the
             sacrifice
             of
             salvation
             in
             brasen
             vessels
             .
          
           Of
           
             giving
             the
             sacrifice
          
           to
           man
           :
           as
           when
           it
           is
           said
           in
           one
           of
           the
           ancient
           Synods
           of
           Ireland
           ,
           that
           a
           a
           Bishop
           by
           his
           Testament
           may
           bequeath
           a
           certaine
           proportion
           of
           his
           goods
           for
           a
           legacie
           
             to
             the
             Priest
             that
             giveth
             him
             the
             sacrifice
             .
          
           and
           of
           
             receiving
             the
             sacrifice
          
           from
           the
           hands
           of
           the
           minister
           :
           as
           in
           that
           sentence
           of
           the
           Synod
           attributed
           unto
           S.
           Patrick
           ;
           b
           
             He
             who
             deserveth
             not
             to
             receive
             the
             sacrifice
             in
             his
             life
             ,
             how
             can
             it
             helpe
             him
             after
             his
             death
             ?
          
           and
           in
           that
           glosse
           of
           Sedulius
           upon
           1.
           
           Cor.
           11.
           33.
           
           c
           
             Tarry
             one
             for
             another
          
           ,
           that
           is
           ,
           (
           saith
           he
           )
           
             untill
             you
             doe
             receive
             the
             sacrifice
             .
          
           and
           in
           the
           Brittish
           antiquities
           :
           where
           we
           reade
           of
           Amon
           a
           noble
           man
           in
           Wales
           (
           father
           to
           Samson
           the
           Saint
           of
           Dole
           in
           little
           Brittain
           )
           that
           d
           
             being
             taken
             with
             a
             grievous
             sicknesse
             ,
             hee
             was
             admonished
             by
             his
             neighbours
             ,
             that
             according
             to
             the
             usuall
             manner
             he
             should
             receive
             the
             sacrifice
             of
             the
             communion
             .
          
           Whereby
           it
           doth
           appeare
           ,
           that
           the
           sacrifice
           of
           the
           elder
           times
           was
           not
           like
           unto
           the
           new
           Masse
           of
           the
           Romanists
           ,
           wherein
           the
           Priest
           alone
           doth
           all
           ;
           but
           unto
           our
           Communion
           ,
           where
           others
           also
           have
           free
           libertie
           given
           unto
           them
           to
           e
           eat
           of
           the
           Altar
           ,
           as
           well
           as
           they
           that
           serve
           that
           Altar
           .
        
         
           Again
           ,
           they
           that
           are
           communicants
           in
           the
           Romish
           sacrament
           ,
           receive
           the
           Eucharist
           in
           one
           kinde
           onely
           :
           
           the
           Priest
           in
           offering
           of
           the
           sacrifice
           receiveth
           the
           same
           distinctly
           ,
           both
           by
           way
           of
           meat
           and
           by
           way
           of
           drinke
           ;
           which
           they
           tell
           us
           f
           is
           chiefly
           done
           ,
           
             for
             the
             integritie
             of
             the
             Sacrifice
             and
             not
             of
             the
             Sacrament
             .
          
           For
           in
           the
           Sacrifice
           ,
           they
           say
           ,
           g
           
             the
             severall
             elements
             be
             consecrated
             ,
             not
             into
             Christs
             whole
             person
             as
             it
             was
             borne
             of
             the
             Virgin
             or
             now
             is
             in
             heaven
             :
             but
             the
             bread
             into
             his
             body
             apart
             ,
             as
             betrayed
             ,
             broken
             ,
             and
             given
             for
             us
             ;
             the
             wine
             into
             his
             bloud
             apart
             ,
             as
             shed
             out
             of
             his
             bodie
             for
             remission
             of
             sinnes
             and
             dedication
             fo
             the
             new
             Testament
             ,
             which
             bee
             conditions
             of
             his
             person
             as
             hee
             was
             in
             sacrifice
             and
             oblation
             .
          
           But
           our
           ancestours
           ,
           in
           the
           use
           of
           their
           Sacrament
           ,
           received
           the
           Eucharist
           in
           both
           kinds
           :
           not
           being
           so
           acute
           as
           to
           discerne
           betwixt
           the
           things
           that
           belonged
           unto
           the
           integritie
           of
           the
           sacrifice
           and
           of
           the
           sacrament
           ,
           because
           in
           very
           truth
           ,
           they
           tooke
           the
           one
           to
           be
           the
           other
           .
        
         
           Thus
           Bede
           relateth
           ,
           that
           one
           Hildmer
           ,
           an
           officer
           of
           Egfrid
           King
           of
           Northumberland
           ,
           intreated
           our
           Cuthbert
           h
           to
           send
           a
           Priest
           that
           might
           
             minister
             the
             sacraments
             of
             the
             Lords
             body
             and
             bloud
          
           unto
           his
           wife
           that
           then
           lay
           a
           dying
           :
           and
           Cuthbert
           himselfe
           ,
           immediately
           before
           his
           owne
           departure
           out
           of
           this
           life
           ,
           received
           the
           
             communion
             of
             the
             Lords
             body
             and
             bloud
          
           ;
           as
           i
           Herefride
           Abbat
           of
           the
           monsterie
           of
           Lindisfarne
           (
           who
           was
           the
           man
           that
           at
           that
           time
           ministred
           the
           sacrament
           unto
           him
           )
           made
           report
           unto
           the
           same
           Bede
           .
           who
           elsewhere
           also
           particularly
           noteth
           ,
           that
           he
           then
           tasted
           of
           the
           cup.
           
           
           
             k
             Pocula
             degustat
             vitae
             ,
             Christique
             supinum
             Sanguine
             munit
             iter
             .
          
           lest
           any
           man
           should
           thinke
           ,
           that
           under
           the
           formes
           of
           bread
           alone
           he
           might
           be
           said
           to
           have
           been
           partaker
           of
           the
           body
           and
           bloud
           of
           the
           Lord
           ,
           by
           way
           of
           Concomitance
           :
           which
           is
           a
           toy
           ,
           that
           was
           not
           once
           dreamed
           of
           in
           those
           daies
           .
           So
           that
           we
           need
           not
           to
           doubt
           ,
           what
           is
           meant
           by
           that
           which
           wee
           reade
           in
           the
           booke
           of
           the
           life
           of
           Furseus
           (
           which
           was
           written
           before
           the
           time
           of
           Bede
           )
           that
           l
           
             he
             received
             the
             communion
             of
             the
             holy
             body
             and
             bloud
          
           ;
           and
           that
           hee
           was
           wished
           to
           admonish
           m
           the
           Pastors
           of
           the
           Church
           ,
           that
           they
           should
           strengthen
           the
           soules
           of
           the
           faithfull
           
             with
             the
             spirituall
             food
             of
             doctrine
             ,
             and
             the
             participation
             of
             the
             holy
             body
             and
             bloud
             ,
          
           or
           of
           that
           which
           Cogitosus
           writeth
           in
           the
           life
           of
           Saint
           Brigid
           ,
           touching
           the
           place
           in
           the
           Church
           of
           Kildare
           ;
           n
           whereunto
           the
           Abbatesse
           with
           her
           maidens
           and
           widowes
           used
           to
           resort
           ,
           
             that
             they
             might
             enioy
             the
             banquet
             of
             the
             body
             and
             bloud
             of
             Iesus
             Christ.
          
           which
           was
           agreeable
           to
           the
           practice
           ,
           not
           only
           of
           the
           Nunneries
           founded
           beyond
           the
           seas
           according
           to
           the
           rule
           of
           Columbanus
           ;
           where
           the
           Virgins
           o
           
             received
             the
             body
             of
             the
             Lord
             ,
             and
             sipped
             his
             bloud
          
           (
           as
           appeareth
           by
           that
           which
           Ionas
           relateth
           of
           Domnae
           ,
           in
           the
           life
           of
           Burgundofora
           :
           )
           but
           also
           of
           S.
           Brigid
           her selfe
           ,
           who
           was
           the
           foundresse
           of
           the
           monasterie
           of
           Kildare
           ;
           one
           of
           whose
           miracles
           is
           reported
           ,
           even
           in
           the
           later
           Legends
           ,
           to
           have
           happened
           when
           shee
           was
           
           about
           to
           
             drinke
             out
             of
             the
             Chalice
          
           ,
           at
           the
           time
           of
           her
           receiving
           of
           the
           Eucharist
           .
           which
           they
           that
           list
           to
           looke
           after
           ,
           may
           finde
           in
           the
           collections
           of
           
             Capgrave
             ,
             Surius
          
           ,
           and
           such
           like
           .
        
         
           But
           ,
           you
           will
           say
           ;
           these
           testimonies
           that
           have
           beene
           alledged
           ,
           make
           not
           so
           much
           for
           us
           ,
           in
           proving
           the
           use
           of
           the
           
             communion
             under
             both
             kindes
          
           ,
           as
           they
           make
           against
           us
           ,
           in
           confirming
           the
           opinion
           of
           Transubstantiation
           :
           seeing
           they
           all
           specifie
           the
           receiving
           ,
           not
           of
           bread
           and
           wine
           ,
           but
           of
           the
           body
           and
           bloud
           of
           Christ.
           I
           answer
           ,
           that
           forasmuch
           as
           Christ
           himselfe
           at
           the
           first
           institution
           of
           his
           holy
           Supper
           did
           say
           expresly
           ;
           
             This
             is
             my
             body
          
           ,
           and
           ,
           
             This
             is
             my
             bloud
          
           :
           hee
           deserveth
           not
           the
           name
           of
           a
           Christian
           ,
           that
           will
           question
           the
           truth
           of
           that
           saying
           ,
           or
           refuse
           to
           speake
           in
           that
           language
           ,
           which
           hee
           hath
           heard
           his
           Lord
           and
           Master
           use
           before
           him
           .
           The
           question
           onely
           is
           ,
           in
           what
           sense
           ,
           and
           after
           what
           manner
           ,
           these
           things
           must
           bee
           conceived
           to
           bee
           his
           body
           and
           bloud
           .
           Of
           which
           there
           needed
           to
           be
           little
           question
           :
           if
           men
           would
           bee
           pleased
           to
           take
           into
           their
           consideration
           these
           two
           things
           ;
           which
           were
           never
           doubted
           of
           by
           the
           ancient
           ,
           and
           have
           most
           evident
           ground
           in
           the
           context
           of
           the
           Gospel
           .
           First
           ,
           that
           the
           subject
           of
           those
           sacramentall
           propositions
           delivered
           by
           our
           Saviour
           (
           that
           is
           to
           say
           ,
           the
           demonstrative
           particle
           THIS
           )
           can
           have
           reference
           to
           no
           other
           substance
           ,
           but
           that
           which
           hee
           then
           held
           in
           his
           sacred
           hands
           ,
           namely
           ,
           bread
           &
           wines
           which
           are
           of
           so
           different
           a
           nature
           from
           the
           body
           and
           bloud
           of
           Christ
           ,
           that
           the
           one
           cannot
           possibly
           in
           proper
           sense
           be
           said
           to
           be
           the
           other
           ;
           as
           the
           light
           of
           common
           reason
           doth
           force
           the
           Romanists
           themselves
           to
           confesse
           .
           
           Secondly
           ,
           that
           in
           the
           Predicate
           ,
           or
           latter
           part
           of
           the
           same
           propositions
           ,
           there
           is
           not
           mention
           made
           only
           of
           
             Christs
             body
          
           and
           bloud
           ;
           but
           of
           his
           
             body
             broken
          
           ,
           and
           his
           
             bloud
             shed
          
           :
           to
           shew
           ,
           that
           his
           body
           is
           to
           be
           considered
           here
           apart
           ,
           not
           
             as
             it
             was
             borne
             of
             the
             Virgin
             ,
             or
             now
             is
             in
             heaven
             ,
          
           but
           as
           it
           was
           broken
           and
           crucified
           for
           us
           ;
           and
           his
           bloud
           likewise
           apart
           ,
           not
           as
           running
           in
           his
           veines
           ,
           but
           
             as
             shed
             out
             of
             his
             body
          
           ;
           which
           the
           Rhemists
           have
           told
           us
           to
           be
           
             conditions
             of
             his
             person
             ,
             as
             hee
             was
             in
             sacrifice
             and
             oblation
             .
          
        
         
           And
           lest
           wee
           should
           imagine
           ,
           that
           his
           body
           were
           otherwise
           to
           bee
           considered
           in
           the
           sacrament
           than
           in
           the
           sacrifice
           ;
           in
           the
           one
           alive
           ,
           as
           it
           is
           now
           in
           heaven
           ,
           in
           the
           other
           dead
           ,
           as
           it
           was
           offered
           upon
           the
           Crosse
           :
           the
           Apostle
           putteth
           the
           matter
           out
           of
           doubt
           ,
           that
           not
           onely
           the
           minister
           in
           offering
           ,
           but
           also
           the
           people
           in
           receiving
           ,
           even
           p
           
             as
             often
             as
             they
             eate
             this
             bread
             ,
             and
             drinke
             this
             cup
             ,
             doe
             shew
             the
             Lords
             death
             untill
             hee
             come
             .
          
           Our
           elders
           surely
           ,
           that
           held
           the
           sacrifice
           to
           bee
           given
           and
           received
           (
           for
           so
           we
           have
           heard
           themselves
           speak
           )
           as
           well
           as
           offered
           ;
           did
           not
           consider
           otherwise
           of
           Christ
           in
           the
           sacrament
           ,
           than
           
             as
             hee
             was
             in
             sacrifice
             and
             oblation
             .
          
           If
           here
           therefore
           ,
           
             Christs
             body
          
           be
           presented
           as
           broken
           and
           livelesse
           ,
           and
           his
           bloud
           as
           shed
           forth
           and
           severed
           from
           his
           body
           ;
           and
           it
           be
           most
           certaine
           ,
           that
           there
           are
           no
           such
           things
           now
           really
           existent
           any
           where
           (
           as
           is
           confessed
           on
           all
           hands
           :
           )
           then
           must
           it
           follow
           necessarily
           ,
           that
           the
           bread
           and
           wine
           are
           not
           converted
           into
           these
           things
           really
           .
           The
           q
           Rhemists
           indeede
           tell
           us
           ,
           that
           when
           the
           Church
           doth
           offer
           and
           sacrifice
           Christ
           daily
           ;
           
             hee
             in
             mysterie
             and
             sacrament
             dyeth
             .
          
           Further
           than
           this
           they
           durst
           not
           goe
           :
           for
           if
           
           they
           had
           said
           ,
           hee
           dyed
           really
           ;
           they
           should
           thereby
           not
           only
           make
           themselves
           daily
           killers
           of
           Christ
           ,
           but
           also
           directly
           crosse
           that
           principle
           of
           the
           Apostle
           ,
           Rom.
           6.
           9.
           
           
             Christ
             being
             raised
             from
             the
             dead
             dyeth
             no
             more
             .
          
           If
           then
           the
           body
           of
           Christ
           in
           the
           administration
           of
           the
           Eucharist
           be
           propounded
           as
           dead
           (
           as
           hath
           been
           shewed
           )
           and
           dye
           it
           cannot
           really
           ,
           but
           onely
           in
           
             mysterie
             and
             sacrament
          
           :
           how
           can
           it
           be
           thought
           to
           bee
           contained
           under
           the
           outward
           elements
           ,
           otherwise
           than
           
             in
             sacrament
             and
             mysterie
          
           ?
           and
           such
           as
           in
           times
           past
           were
           said
           to
           have
           received
           the
           sacrifice
           from
           the
           hand
           of
           the
           Priest
           ;
           what
           other
           body
           and
           bloud
           could
           they
           expect
           to
           receive
           therein
           ,
           but
           such
           as
           was
           sutable
           to
           the
           nature
           of
           that
           sacrifice
           ,
           to
           wit
           ,
           
             mysticall
             and
             sacramentall
          
           ?
        
         
           
             Coelius
             Sedulius
          
           (
           to
           whom
           Gelasius
           Bishop
           of
           Rome
           ,
           with
           his
           Synod
           of
           LXX
           .
           Bishops
           ,
           giveth
           the
           title
           of
           r
           
             venerable
             Sedulius
          
           ;
           as
           
             Venantius
             Fortunatus
          
           of
           s
           
             conspicuous
             Sedulius
          
           ;
           and
           
             Hildephonsus
             Toletanus
          
           of
           the
           t
           
             good
             Sedulius
             ,
             the
             Evangelicall
             Poet
             ,
             the
             eloquent
             Orator
             ,
             and
             the
             Catholicke
             Writer
          
           )
           is
           by
           Trithemius
           and
           others
           supposed
           to
           be
           the
           same
           with
           our
           u
           Sedulius
           of
           Scotland
           (
           or
           Ireland
           )
           whose
           Collections
           are
           extant
           upon
           St.
           Pauls
           Epistles
           :
           although
           I
           have
           forborne
           hitherto
           to
           use
           any
           of
           his
           testimonies
           ,
           because
           I
           have
           some
           reason
           to
           doubt
           ,
           whether
           hee
           were
           the
           same
           with
           our
           Sedulius
           or
           no.
           But
           
             Coelius
             Sedulius
          
           (
           whatsoever
           countryman
           hee
           was
           )
           intimateth
           plainly
           ,
           that
           the
           things
           offered
           in
           the
           Christian
           sacrifice
           ,
           
           are
           
             the
             fruit
             of
             the
             corne
             and
             of
             the
             vine
             :
          
           
             
               (
               x
               Denique
               Pontificum
               princeps
               summusque
               Sacerdos
            
             
               Quis
               nisi
               Christus
               adest
               ?
               gemini
               libaminis
               author
               ,
            
             
               Ordine
               Melchisedech
               ,
               cui
               dantur
               munera
               semper
            
             
               Quae
               sua
               sunt
               ,
               segetis
               fructus
               ,
               &
               gaudia
               vitis
               .
            
          
           or
           ,
           as
           hee
           expresseth
           it
           in
           his
           prose
           ;
           y
           
             the
             sweete
             meate
             of
             the
             seede
             of
             wheate
             ,
             and
             the
             lovely
             drinke
             of
             the
             pleasant
             vine
             .
          
           Of
           Melch●sedek
           (
           according
           to
           whose
           order
           Christ
           ,
           and
           he
           onely
           ,
           was
           Priest
           )
           our
           owne
           Sedulius
           writeth
           thus
           :
           z
           
             Melchisedek
             offered
             wine
             &
             bread
             to
             Abraham
             for
             a
             figure
             of
             Christ
             ,
             offering
             his
             body
             and
             bloud
             unto
             God
             his
             Father
             upon
             the
             Crosse.
          
           Where
           note
           ,
           that
           first
           hee
           saith
           ,
           
             Melch
             sedek
          
           offered
           bread
           and
           wine
           to
           Abraham
           ,
           not
           to
           God
           :
           and
           secondly
           ,
           that
           hee
           was
           a
           figure
           of
           Christ
           offering
           his
           body
           and
           bloud
           
             upon
             the
             crosse
          
           ,
           not
           in
           the
           Eucharist
           .
           But
           we
           (
           saith
           a
           he
           )
           
             doe
             offer
             daily
             ,
             for
             a
             commemoration
             of
             the
             Lords
             passion
             (
             once
          
           performed
           )
           
             and
             our
             owne
             salvation
          
           .
           and
           elsewhere
           ,
           expounding
           those
           words
           of
           our
           Saviour
           ,
           
             Doe
             this
             in
             remembrance
             of
             me
          
           ;
           hee
           bringeth
           in
           this
           similitude
           ,
           used
           before
           and
           after
           him
           by
           others
           .
           b
           
             He
             left
             a
             memory
             of
             himselfe
             unto
             us
             :
             even
             as
             if
             one
             that
             were
             going
             a
             farre
             journey
             ,
             should
             leave
             some
             token
             with
             him
             whom
             hee
             loved
             ;
             that
             as
             oft
             as
             hee
             beheld
             it
             ,
             hee
             might
             call
             to
             remembrance
             his
             benefits
             and
             friendship
             .
          
        
         
           Claudius
           noteth
           ,
           that
           our
           Saviours
           c
           pleasure
           was
           ,
           first
           
             to
             deliver
             unto
             his
             Disciples
             the
             sacrament
             of
             his
             bodie
             and
             bloud
             ;
             and
             afterwards
             to
             offer
             up
             the
             body
             it selfe
             upon
             the
             altar
             of
             the
             crosse
             .
          
           Where
           at
           the
           first
           sight
           I
           
           did
           verily
           thinke
           ,
           that
           in
           the
           words
           
             fractione
             corporis
          
           an
           error
           had
           beene
           committed
           in
           my
           transcript
           (
           corporis
           being
           miswritten
           for
           panis
           )
           but
           afterwards
           comparing
           it
           with
           the
           originall
           ,
           whence
           I
           tooke
           my
           copie
           ,
           I
           found
           that
           the
           author
           retained
           the
           manner
           of
           speaking
           used
           both
           d
           before
           and
           e
           after
           his
           time
           ;
           in
           giving
           the
           name
           of
           the
           thing
           signified
           unto
           the
           signe
           ,
           even
           there
           where
           the
           direct
           intention
           of
           the
           speech
           was
           to
           distinguish
           the
           one
           from
           the
           other
           .
           For
           hee
           doth
           expresly
           here
           distinguish
           
             the
             sacrament
             of
             the
             bodie
          
           ,
           which
           was
           delivered
           unto
           the
           Disciples
           ,
           from
           
             the
             body
             it selfe
          
           ,
           which
           was
           afterwards
           offered
           upon
           the
           Crosse
           :
           and
           for
           the
           sacramentall
           relation
           betwixt
           them
           both
           ,
           hee
           rendreth
           this
           reason
           .
           f
           
             Because
             bread
             doth
             confirme
             the
             body
             ,
             and
             wine
             doth
             worke
             bloud
             in
             the
             flesh
             :
             therefore
             the
             one
             is
             mystically
             referred
             to
             the
             body
             of
             Christ
             ,
             the
             other
             to
             his
             bloud
             .
          
           Which
           doctrine
           of
           his
           (
           that
           the
           sacrament
           is
           in
           it
           owne
           nature
           bread
           and
           wine
           ,
           but
           the
           body
           and
           bloud
           of
           Christ
           by
           mysticall
           relation
           )
           was
           in
           effect
           the
           same
           with
           that
           which
           long
           afterwards
           was
           here
           in
           Ireland
           delivered
           by
           
             Henry
             Crumpe
          
           the
           Monke
           of
           Baltinglas
           ,
           g
           that
           
             the
             bodie
             of
             Christ
             in
             the
             sacrament
             of
             the
             altar
             was
             onely
             a
             looking
             glasse
             to
             the
             body
             of
             Christ
             in
             heaven
             :
          
           yea
           and
           within
           fifty
           or
           threescore
           yeeres
           of
           the
           time
           of
           
             Claudius
             Scotus
          
           himselfe
           ,
           was
           so
           fully
           maintained
           by
           
             Iohannes
             Scotus
          
           in
           a
           booke
           that
           hee
           purposely
           wrote
           of
           that
           argument
           ;
           that
           when
           it
           was
           alledged
           and
           extolled
           by
           Berengarius
           ,
           Pope
           Leo
           (
           the
           ninth
           )
           with
           his
           Bishops
           assembled
           
             in
             Synodo
             Vercellensi
          
           ,
           an●
           .
           Domini
           ,
           1050
           (
           which
           was
           235.
           yeeres
           after
           the
           time
           that
           Claudius
           wrote
           his
           commentaries
           upon
           St.
           Matthew
           )
           
           had
           no
           other
           meanes
           to
           avoide
           it
           ,
           but
           by
           flat
           h
           condemning
           of
           it
           .
           Of
           what
           great
           esteeme
           this
           Iohn
           was
           with
           king
           Alfred
           ,
           may
           be
           seene
           in
           William
           of
           
             Malmesbury
             ,
             Roger
             Hoveden
             ,
             Matthew
          
           of
           Westminster
           ,
           and
           other
           writers
           of
           the
           English
           history
           .
           The
           king
           himselfe
           ,
           in
           the
           Preface
           before
           his
           Saxon
           translation
           of
           St.
           Gregories
           Pastorall
           ,
           professeth
           that
           he
           was
           holpen
           in
           that
           worke
           by
           i
           Iohn
           his
           Masse-priest
           .
           By
           whom
           if
           he
           did
           meane
           this
           Iohn
           of
           ours
           :
           you
           may
           see
           ,
           how
           in
           those
           dayes
           a
           man
           might
           be
           held
           a
           Masse-priest
           ,
           who
           was
           far
           enough
           from
           thinking
           that
           he
           offered
           up
           the
           very
           body
           and
           bloud
           of
           Christ
           really
           present
           under
           the
           formes
           of
           bread
           and
           wine
           ;
           which
           is
           the
           onely
           Masse
           that
           our
           Romanists
           take
           knowledge
           of
           .
        
         
           Of
           which
           wonderfull
           point
           how
           ignorant
           our
           elders
           were
           ,
           even
           this
           also
           may
           be
           one
           argument
           :
           that
           the
           author
           of
           the
           booke
           
             of
             the
             wonderfull
             things
             of
             the
             holy
             Scripture
          
           (
           before
           alledged
           )
           passeth
           this
           quite
           over
           ,
           which
           is
           now
           esteemed
           to
           be
           the
           wonder
           of
           all
           wonders
           .
           And
           yet
           doth
           he
           professe
           ,
           that
           he
           k
           
             purposed
             to
             passe
             over
             nothing
             of
             the
             wonders
             of
             the
             Scripture
             ,
             wherein
             they
             might
             seeme
             notably
             to
             swerve
             from
             the
             ordinary
             administration
             in
             other
             things
             .
          
        
      
       
         
         
           CHAP.
           V.
           
        
         
           
             Of
             Chrisme
             ,
             Sacramentall
             Confession
             ,
             Penance
             ,
             Absolution
             ,
             Marriage
             ,
             Divorces
             ,
             and
             single
             life
             in
             the
             Clergie
             .
          
        
         
           THat
           the
           Irish
           a
           did
           baptize
           their
           infants
           without
           any
           consecrated
           
             Chrisme
             ,
             Lanfranc
          
           maketh
           complaint
           in
           his
           letters
           to
           Terdeluacus
           (
           or
           Tirlagh
           )
           the
           chiefe
           King
           of
           that
           country
           .
           And
           Bernard
           reporteth
           ,
           that
           Malachias
           in
           his
           time
           (
           which
           was
           after
           the
           daies
           of
           Lanfranc
           and
           Pope
           Hildebrand
           )
           did
           b
           
             of
             the
             new
             institute
             the
             most
             wholesome
             use
             of
             Confession
             ,
             the
             sacrament
             of
             Confirmation
             ,
             and
             the
             contract
             of
             marriages
             :
             all
             which
          
           he
           saith
           the
           Irish
           before
           were
           
             either
             ignorant
             of
             ,
             or
             did
             neglect
             .
          
           Which
           ,
           for
           the
           matter
           of
           Confession
           ,
           may
           receive
           some
           further
           confirmation
           from
           the
           testimonie
           of
           Alcuinus
           :
           who
           writing
           unto
           the
           Scottish
           (
           or
           ,
           as
           other
           copies
           read
           ,
           the
           Gothish
           )
           and
           commending
           the
           religious
           conversation
           of
           their
           laity
           ,
           who
           c
           
             in
             the
             midst
             of
             their
             worldly
             imployments
             were
             said
             to
             leade
             a
             most
             chaste
             life
          
           ;
           condemneth
           notwithstanding
           another
           custome
           ,
           which
           was
           said
           to
           have
           continued
           in
           that
           country
           .
           For
           d
           
             it
             is
             said
          
           (
           quot
           he
           )
           
             that
             no
             man
             of
             the
             laity
             will
             make
             his
             confession
             to
             the
             Priests
             ;
             whom
             we
             beleeve
             to
             have
             received
             from
             the
             Lord
             Christ
             ,
             the
             power
             of
             binding
             and
             loosing
             ,
             together
             with
             the
             holy
             Apostles
             .
          
        
         
         
           They
           had
           no
           reason
           indeed
           to
           hold
           (
           as
           Alcuinus
           did
           )
           that
           they
           ought
           to
           confesse
           unto
           a
           Priest
           all
           the
           sinnes
           they
           could
           remember
           :
           but
           upon
           speciall
           occasions
           ,
           they
           did
           (
           no
           doubt
           )
           both
           publikely
           and
           privately
           make
           confession
           of
           their
           faults
           ,
           aswell
           that
           they
           might
           receive
           counsaile
           and
           direction
           for
           their
           recovery
           ,
           as
           that
           they
           might
           bee
           made
           partakers
           of
           the
           benefit
           of
           the
           keyes
           ,
           for
           the
           quieting
           of
           their
           troubled
           consciences
           .
           Whatsoever
           the
           Gothish
           did
           herein
           (
           by
           whom
           wee
           are
           to
           understand
           the
           inhabitants
           of
           Languedok
           in
           France
           ,
           where
           Alcuinus
           lived
           )
           sure
           wee
           are
           ,
           that
           this
           was
           the
           practice
           of
           the
           ancient
           Scottish
           and
           Irish.
           So
           wee
           reade
           of
           one
           Fiachna
           or
           Fechnaus
           ,
           that
           being
           touched
           with
           remorse
           for
           some
           offence
           committed
           by
           him
           ,
           he
           fell
           at
           St.
           Colmes
           feet
           ,
           lamented
           bitterly
           ,
           and
           e
           
             confessed
             his
             sinnes
             before
             all
             that
             were
             there
             present
             .
          
           Whereupon
           the
           holy
           man
           ,
           weeping
           together
           with
           him
           ,
           is
           said
           to
           have
           returned
           this
           answer
           :
           f
           
             Rise
             up
             ,
             Sonne
             ,
             and
             bee
             comforted
             ,
             thy
             sinnes
             which
             thou
             hast
             committed
             are
             forgiven
             ;
             because
             (
             as
             it
             is
             written
             )
             a
             contrite
             and
             an
             humbled
             heart
             God
             doth
             not
             despise
             .
          
           We
           reade
           also
           of
           Adamanus
           ,
           that
           being
           very
           much
           terrified
           with
           the
           remembrance
           of
           a
           grievous
           sinne
           committed
           by
           him
           in
           his
           youth
           ;
           he
           g
           
             resorted
             unto
             a
             Priest
             ,
             by
             whom
             hee
             hoped
             the
             way
             of
             salvation
             might
             bee
             shewed
             unto
             him
             ,
             hee
             confessed
             his
             guilt
             ,
             and
             intreated
             that
             hee
             would
             give
             him
             counsell
             ,
             whereby
             hee
             might
             flee
             from
             the
             wrath
             of
             God
             that
             was
             to
             come
             .
          
        
         
         
           Now
           the
           counsell
           commonly
           given
           unto
           the
           Penitent
           after
           Confession
           ,
           was
           ;
           that
           hee
           should
           h
           wipe
           away
           his
           sinnes
           
             by
             meet
             fruits
             of
             repentance
          
           :
           which
           course
           Bede
           observeth
           to
           have
           beene
           usually
           prescribed
           by
           our
           Cuthbert
           .
           For
           penances
           were
           then
           exacted
           ,
           as
           testimonies
           of
           the
           sincerity
           of
           that
           inward
           repentance
           which
           was
           necessarily
           required
           for
           obtaining
           remission
           of
           the
           sinne
           :
           and
           so
           had
           reference
           to
           the
           taking
           away
           of
           the
           guilt
           ,
           and
           not
           of
           the
           temporall
           punishment
           remaining
           after
           the
           forgivenesse
           of
           the
           guilt
           ;
           which
           is
           the
           new
           found
           use
           of
           penances
           ,
           invented
           by
           our
           later
           Romanists
           .
           One
           old
           Penitentiall
           Canon
           wee
           finde
           laid
           downe
           in
           a
           Synod
           held
           in
           this
           country
           about
           the
           yeere
           our
           Lord
           CCCCL
           .
           by
           S.
           
             Patrick
             ,
             Auxilius
          
           ,
           and
           Isserninus
           :
           which
           is
           as
           followeth
           .
           i
           
             A
             Christian
             who
             hath
             kild
             a
             man
             ,
             or
             committed
             fornication
             ,
             or
             gone
             unto
             a
             Southsayer
             after
             the
             manner
             of
             the
             Gentiles
             ,
             for
             every
             of
             those
             crimes
             shall
             doe
             a
             yeere
             of
             Penance
             :
             when
             his
             yeere
             of
             penance
             is
             accomplished
             ,
             he
             shall
             come
             with
             witnesses
             ,
             and
             afterward
             hee
             shall
             be
             absolved
             by
             the
             Priest.
          
           These
           Bishops
           did
           take
           order
           (
           we
           see
           )
           according
           to
           the
           discipline
           generally
           used
           in
           those
           times
           ,
           that
           the
           penance
           should
           first
           be
           performed
           ;
           and
           when
           long
           &
           good
           proofe
           had
           bin
           given
           by
           that
           means
           of
           the
           truth
           of
           the
           parties
           repentance
           ,
           they
           wished
           the
           Priest
           to
           impart
           unto
           him
           the
           benefit
           of
           Absolution
           .
           wheras
           by
           the
           new
           device
           of
           sacramentall
           penance
           the
           matter
           is
           now
           far
           more
           easily
           transacted
           :
           by
           vertue
           of
           the
           keyes
           the
           sinner
           is
           instantly
           of
           attrite
           made
           contrite
           ,
           and
           thereupon
           as
           soon
           as
           hee
           hath
           made
           his
           Confession
           hee
           presently
           receiveth
           his
           Absolution
           :
           after
           this
           ,
           some
           sorry
           penance
           is
           imposed
           ,
           
           which
           upon
           better
           consideration
           may
           bee
           converted
           into
           pence
           ;
           and
           so
           a
           quicke
           end
           is
           made
           of
           many
           a
           foule
           businesse
           .
        
         
           But
           for
           the
           right
           use
           of
           the
           keyes
           ,
           we
           fully
           accord
           with
           Claudius
           :
           that
           k
           
             the
             office
          
           of
           remitting
           and
           retaining
           sinnes
           which
           was
           given
           unto
           the
           Apostles
           ,
           
             is
             now
             in
             the
             Bishops
             and
             Priests
             committed
             unto
             every
             Church
             .
             namely
             ,
             that
             having
             taken
             knowledge
             of
             the
             causes
             of
             such
             as
             have
             sinned
             ,
             as
             many
             as
             they
             shall
             behold
             humble
             and
             truly
             penitent
             ,
             those
             they
             may
             now
             with
             compassion
             absolve
             from
             the
             feare
             of
             everlasting
             death
             ;
             but
             such
             as
             they
             shall
             discerne
             to
             persist
             in
             the
             sins
             which
             they
             have
             committed
             ,
             those
             they
             may
             declare
             to
             be
             bound
             over
             unto
             never
             ending
             punishments
             .
          
           And
           in
           thus
           absolving
           such
           as
           be
           truly
           penitent
           ,
           we
           willingly
           yeeld
           ,
           that
           the
           Pastors
           of
           Gods
           Church
           doe
           
             remit
             sinnes
          
           after
           their
           manner
           ,
           that
           is
           to
           say
           ,
           ministerially
           and
           improperly
           :
           so
           that
           the
           priviledge
           of
           forgiving
           sinnes
           properly
           and
           absolutely
           ,
           bee
           still
           reserved
           unto
           God
           alone
           .
           Which
           is
           at
           large
           set
           out
           by
           the
           same
           Claudius
           ;
           where
           hee
           expoundeth
           the
           historie
           of
           the
           man
           sicke
           of
           the
           palsey
           ,
           that
           was
           cured
           by
           our
           Saviour
           in
           the
           ninth
           of
           S.
           Matthew
           .
           For
           ,
           following
           Bede
           upon
           that
           place
           ,
           he
           writeth
           thus
           .
           l
           
             The
             Scribes
             say
             true
             ,
             that
             none
             can
             forgive
             sinnes
             but
             God
             alone
             ;
             also
             forgiveth
             by
             them
             ,
             to
             whom
             hee
             hath
             given
             the
             power
             of
             forgiving
             .
             And
             therefore
             is
             Christ
             proved
             to
             bee
             truely
             God
             because
             he
             forgiveth
             sinnes
             as
             God.
             They
             render
             a
             true
             testimony
             unto
             God
             :
             but
             in
             denying
             the
             person
             of
             
             Christ
             ,
             they
             are
             deceived
             .
          
           and
           againe
           :
           m
           
             If
             it
             bee
             God
             that
             ,
             according
             to
             the
             Psalmist
             ,
             removeth
             our
             sins
             as
             far
             from
             us
             ,
             as
             the
             East
             is
             distant
             from
             the
             West
             ;
             and
             the
             Sonne
             of
             man
             hath
             power
             upon
             earth
             to
             forgive
             sinnès
             :
             therefore
             hee
             himselfe
             is
             both
             God
             and
             the
             Sonne
             of
             man.
             that
             both
             the
             man
             Christ
             might
             by
             the
             power
             of
             his
             divinitie
             forgive
             sinnes
             ;
             and
             the
             same
             Christ
             being
             God
             ,
             might
             by
             the
             frailtie
             of
             his
             humanitie
             dye
             for
             sinners
             .
          
           and
           out
           of
           S.
           Hierome
           :
           n
           Christ
           
             sheweth
             himselfe
             to
             bee
             God
             ,
             who
             can
             know
             the
             hidden
             things
             of
             the
             heart
             ;
             and
             after
             a
             sort
             holding
             his
             peace
             he
             speaketh
             .
             By
             the
             same
             majestie
             and
             power
             ,
             whereby
             I
             behold
             your
             thoughts
             ,
             I
             can
             also
             forgive
             sinnes
             unto
             men
             .
          
           In
           like
           manner
           doth
           the
           author
           of
           the
           booke
           
             of
             the
             wonderfull
             things
             of
             the
             Scripture
          
           observe
           these
           o
           
             divine
             workes
          
           in
           the
           same
           historie
           :
           
             the
             forgiving
             of
             sinnes
             ,
             the
             present
             cure
             of
             the
             disease
             ,
             &
             the
             answering
             of
             the
             thoughts
             by
             the
             mouth
             of
             God
             who
             searcheth
             all
             things
             .
          
           With
           whom
           ,
           for
           the
           propertie
           of
           beholding
           the
           secret
           thoughts
           ,
           Sedulius
           also
           doth
           concurre
           ,
           in
           those
           sentences
           .
           p
           
             God
             alone
             can
             know
             the
             hidden
             things
             of
             men
             .
          
           q
           
             To
             know
             the
             hearts
             of
             men
             ,
             and
             to
             discerne
             the
             secrets
             of
             their
             minde
             ,
             is
             the
             priviledge
             of
             God
             alone
             .
          
        
         
           That
           the
           
             contract
             of
             Marriages
          
           ,
           was
           either
           unknown
           or
           neglected
           by
           the
           Irish
           ,
           before
           Malachias
           did
           institute
           the
           same
           anew
           among
           them
           (
           as
           Bernard
           doth
           seeme
           to
           intimate
           )
           is
           a
           thing
           almost
           incredible
           .
           although
           r
           
           
             Giraldus
             Cambrensis
          
           doth
           complaine
           ,
           that
           the
           case
           was
           little
           better
           with
           them
           after
           the
           time
           of
           Malachias
           also
           .
           The
           licentiousnesse
           of
           those
           ruder
           times
           ,
           I
           know
           ,
           was
           such
           ,
           as
           may
           easily
           induce
           us
           to
           beleeve
           ,
           that
           a
           great
           both
           neglect
           and
           abuse
           of
           Gods
           ordinance
           did
           get
           footing
           among
           this
           people
           .
           Which
           enormities
           Malachias
           ,
           no
           doubt
           ,
           did
           labour
           to
           reforme
           :
           and
           withall
           peradventure
           brought
           in
           some
           new
           matters
           ,
           not
           knowne
           here
           before
           ;
           as
           hee
           was
           very
           desirous
           his
           country
           men
           should
           generally
           conforme
           themselves
           unto
           the
           traditions
           and
           customes
           of
           the
           Church
           of
           Rome
           .
           But
           our
           purpose
           is
           here
           only
           to
           deale
           with
           the
           doctrine
           and
           practice
           of
           the
           elder
           times
           :
           in
           which
           ,
           first
           ,
           that
           Marriage
           was
           not
           held
           to
           bee
           a
           sacrament
           ,
           may
           bee
           collected
           from
           s
           Sedulius
           ,
           who
           reckoneth
           it
           among
           those
           things
           ,
           which
           are
           
             gifts
             indeed
             ,
             but
             not
             spirituall
             .
          
        
         
           Secondly
           ,
           for
           the
           
             degrees
             of
             Consanguinitie
          
           hindering
           marriage
           ,
           the
           Synod
           attributed
           unto
           St.
           Patricke
           seemeth
           to
           referre
           us
           wholly
           unto
           the
           Levitical
           law
           ;
           prescribing
           therein
           t
           
             neyther
             lesse
             nor
             more
             than
             the
             Law
             speaketh
             :
          
           and
           particularly
           ,
           against
           matching
           with
           
             the
             wife
             of
             the
             deceased
             brother
          
           (
           which
           was
           the
           point
           so
           much
           questioned
           in
           the
           case
           of
           King
           Henrie
           the
           eighth
           )
           this
           u
           Synodicall
           decree
           is
           there
           urged
           .
           
             The
             brother
             may
             not
             ascend
             into
             the
             bed
             of
             his
             deceased
             brother
             :
             the
             Lord
             having
             said
             ,
             They
             two
             shall
             be
             one
             flesh
             .
             Therefore
             the
             wife
             of
             thy
             brother
             ,
             is
             thy
             sister
             .
          
           Whereupon
           we
           finde
           also
           ,
           that
           our
           Kilianus
           did
           suffer
           
           martyrdome
           for
           x
           dissolving
           such
           an
           incestuous
           marriage
           in
           Gozbertus
           Duke
           of
           Franconia
           :
           and
           that
           
             Clemens
             Scotus
          
           for
           maintaining
           the
           contrary
           was
           both
           by
           y
           Boniface
           Archbishop
           of
           Mentz
           ,
           and
           the
           z
           Councell
           held
           at
           Rome
           by
           Pope
           Zacharie
           in
           the
           yeare
           DCCXLV
           .
           condemned
           as
           a
           bringer
           in
           of
           Iudaisme
           amongst
           Christians
           .
           Yet
           how
           farre
           this
           condemned
           opinion
           of
           his
           prevailed
           afterward
           in
           this
           countrey
           ,
           and
           how
           foule
           a
           crime
           it
           was
           esteemed
           to
           be
           by
           others
           abroad
           (
           notwithstanding
           the
           Pope
           doth
           now
           by
           his
           Buls
           of
           dispensation
           take
           upon
           him
           to
           make
           a
           faire
           matter
           of
           it
           )
           may
           easily
           be
           perceived
           by
           this
           censure
           of
           Giraldus
           :
           a
           Moreover
           ,
           saith
           hee
           ,
           
             which
             is
             very
             detestable
             ,
             and
             most
             contrary
             not
             only
             to
             the
             faith
             ,
             but
             also
             unto
             common
             honesty
             ;
             brethren
             in
             many
             places
             throughout
             Ireland
             do
             ,
             I
             say
             not
             marry
             ,
             but
             marre
             rather
             and
             seduce
             the
             wives
             of
             their
             deceased
             brothers
             ,
             while
             in
             this
             sort
             they
             filthily
             and
             incestuously
             have
             knowledge
             of
             them
             :
             cleaving
             herein
             not
             to
             the
             marrow
             but
             to
             the
             barke
             of
             the
             Old
             Testament
             ,
             and
             desiring
             to
             imitate
             the
             ancient
             in
             vices
             more
             willingly
             than
             in
             vertues
             .
          
        
         
           Thirdly
           ,
           touching
           divorces
           ,
           wee
           reade
           in
           Sedulius
           ;
           that
           b
           
             it
             is
             not
             lawfull
             ,
             according
             to
             the
             precept
             of
             our
             Lord
             ,
             that
             the
             wife
             should
             be
             put
             away
             ,
             but
             for
             the
             cause
             of
             fornication
             ,
          
           and
           in
           the
           Synod
           ascribed
           to
           St.
           Patrick
           .
           c
           
           
             It
             is
             not
             lawfull
             for
             a
             man
             to
             put
             away
             his
             wife
             ,
             but
             for
             the
             cause
             of
             fornication
             .
             as
             if
             he
             should
             say
             ;
             for
             this
             cause
             ,
          
           he
           may
           .
           
             Whence
             if
             hee
             marry
             another
             ,
             as
             it
             were
             after
             the
             death
             of
             the
             former
             ,
             they
             forbid
             it
             not
             .
          
           Who
           they
           were
           ,
           that
           did
           not
           forbid
           this
           second
           marriage
           ,
           is
           not
           there
           expressed
           :
           that
           Saint
           Patrick
           himselfe
           was
           of
           another
           minde
           ,
           would
           appeare
           by
           this
           constitution
           following
           ;
           which
           in
           another
           ancient
           Canon-booke
           I
           found
           cited
           under
           his
           name
           .
           d
           
             If
             any
             mans
             wife
             have
             committed
             adulterie
             with
             another
             man
             :
             he
             shall
             not
             marry
             another
             wife
             ,
             as
             long
             as
             the
             first
             wife
             shall
             be
             alive
             .
             If
             per
             adventure
             she
             be
             converted
             ,
             and
             doe
             penance
             :
             he
             shall
             receive
             her
             ;
             and
             she
             shall
             serve
             him
             in
             the
             place
             of
             a
             maid-servant
             .
             Let
             her
             for
             a
             whole
             yeare
             doe
             penance
             in
             bread
             and
             water
             ,
             and
             that
             by
             measure
             :
             neyther
             let
             them
             remaine
             in
             the
             same
             bed
             together
             .
             Fourthly
             ,
          
           concerning
           
             single
             life
          
           ,
           I
           doe
           not
           finde
           in
           any
           of
           our
           records
           ,
           that
           it
           was
           generally
           imposed
           upon
           the
           Clergie
           ;
           but
           the
           contrary
           rather
           .
           For
           in
           the
           Synod
           held
           by
           St.
           
             Patrick
             ,
             Auxilius
          
           ,
           and
           Isserninus
           ;
           there
           is
           a
           speciall
           order
           taken
           ,
           e
           that
           their
           wives
           shall
           not
           walke
           abroad
           ,
           with
           their
           heads
           uncovered
           .
           And
           St.
           Patrick
           himselfe
           confesseth
           (
           at
           leastwise
           the
           Confession
           which
           goeth
           under
           his
           name
           saith
           so
           ;
           and
           
             Probus
             ,
             Iocelinus
          
           ,
           and
           others
           that
           write
           his
           life
           ,
           agree
           therewith
           )
           that
           hee
           f
           had
           to
           his
           father
           
             Calphurnius
             a
             Deacon
          
           ,
           and
           to
           his
           grandfather
           
             Potitus
             a
             Priest.
          
           For
           that
           was
           no
           new
           thing
           then
           among
           the
           Britons
           :
           
           whose
           Bishops
           therefore
           Gildas
           doth
           reprehend
           (
           as
           for
           the
           same
           cause
           he
           did
           the
           chiefe
           of
           the
           Laity
           )
           that
           they
           were
           not
           content
           to
           be
           the
           husbands
           of
           one
           ,
           but
           of
           many
           wives
           ,
           and
           that
           they
           corrupted
           their
           children
           by
           their
           evill
           example
           :
           whereas
           g
           
             the
             chastitie
             of
             the
             fathers
             was
             to
             be
             esteemed
             imperfect
             ,
             if
             the
             chastitie
             of
             their
             sonnes
             were
             not
             added
             thereunto
             .
          
        
         
           Nennius
           ,
           the
           eldest
           Historiographer
           of
           the
           Britons
           which
           wee
           have
           after
           him
           (
           who
           in
           many
           copies
           also
           beareth
           his
           owne
           name
           )
           wrote
           that
           booke
           which
           we
           have
           extant
           of
           his
           ,
           to
           h
           
             Samuel
             the
             childe
             of
             Benlanus
             the
             Priest
             ,
             his
             master
             :
          
           counting
           it
           a
           grace
           ,
           rather
           than
           any
           kinde
           of
           disparagement
           unto
           him
           ,
           to
           bee
           esteemed
           the
           sonne
           of
           a
           learned
           Priest.
           Which
           maketh
           him
           in
           the
           i
           verses
           prefixed
           before
           the
           worke
           to
           say
           :
           
             
               Christe
               ,
               tribuisti
               patri
               Samuelem
            
             ,
             *
          
        
         
           But
           about
           60.
           or
           70.
           yeares
           after
           ,
           I
           finde
           some
           partiall
           eclipse
           here
           (
           and
           the
           first
           ,
           I
           thinke
           ,
           of
           this
           kinde
           ,
           that
           can
           bee
           shewed
           among
           the
           Britons
           )
           in
           the
           lawes
           of
           
             Howel
             Dha
          
           :
           where
           it
           is
           ordered
           ,
           that
           k
           if
           a
           Clerk
           of
           a
           lower
           degree
           should
           match
           with
           a
           woman
           ,
           and
           have
           a
           sonne
           by
           her
           ,
           and
           that
           Clerke
           afterward
           having
           received
           the
           order
           of
           Priest-hood
           ,
           should
           have
           another
           sonne
           by
           the
           same
           woman
           ;
           the
           former
           son
           should
           enjoy
           his
           fathers
           whole
           estate
           ,
           without
           being
           bound
           to
           divide
           the
           same
           with
           his
           other
           brother
           .
           Yet
           these
           marriages
           for
           all
           that
           were
           so
           held
           out
           ,
           that
           the
           fathers
           not
           content
           their
           sonnes
           should
           succeed
           them
           in
           their
           temporall
           estate
           alone
           ,
           prevailed
           so
           
           far
           that
           they
           continued
           them
           in
           the
           succession
           of
           their
           spirituall
           promotions
           also
           .
           Which
           abuse
           
             Giraldus
             Cambrensis
          
           l
           complaineth
           to
           have
           been
           continuedin
           Wales
           unto
           his
           time
           ;
           &
           out
           of
           m
           
             Hil●ebertus
             Cenomanensis
          
           sheweth
           to
           have
           prevailed
           in
           little
           Brittaine
           also
           :
           whence
           he
           inferreth
           ,
           n
           that
           
             this
             vice
             was
             of
             old
             common
             to
             the
             whole
             Brittish
             nation
             aswell
             on
             this
             side
             as
             on
             the
             other
             side
             of
             the
             sea
             .
          
           Whereunto
           for
           Ireland
           also
           wee
           may
           adde
           the
           letters
           written
           by
           Pope
           Innocent
           the
           third
           unto
           
             Iohannes
             Salernitanus
          
           the
           Cardinall
           ,
           his
           legate
           ,
           o
           for
           abolishing
           the
           custome
           there
           ,
           whereby
           sonnes
           and
           grand-children
           did
           use
           to
           succeede
           their
           fathers
           and
           grand-fathers
           in
           their
           Ecclesiastical
           benefices
           .
        
      
       
         
           CHAP.
           VI.
           
        
         
           
             Of
             the
             discipline
             of
             our
             ancient
             Monkes
             ;
             and
             abstinence
             from
             meats
             .
          
        
         
           WHat
           hath
           beene
           said
           of
           the
           married
           Clergie
           ,
           concerneth
           the
           Seculars
           ,
           and
           not
           the
           Regulars
           ,
           whereof
           there
           was
           a
           very
           great
           number
           in
           Ireland
           ;
           because
           here
           a
           
             almost
             all
             the
             Prelates
             were
             wont
             to
             bee
             
             chosen
             into
             the
             Clergie
             out
             of
             monasteries
             .
          
           For
           our
           monasteries
           in
           ancient
           time
           were
           the
           seminaries
           of
           the
           ministerie
           :
           being
           as
           it
           were
           so
           many
           Colledges
           of
           learned
           divines
           ,
           whereunto
           the
           people
           did
           usually
           resort
           for
           instruction
           ,
           and
           from
           whence
           the
           Church
           was
           wont
           continually
           to
           bee
           supplied
           with
           able
           ministers
           .
           The
           benefit
           whereof
           was
           not
           onely
           contained
           within
           the
           limits
           of
           this
           Iland
           ,
           but
           did
           extend
           it selfe
           to
           forraine
           countries
           likewise
           .
           For
           this
           was
           it
           that
           drew
           b
           Egbert
           and
           Ceaddae
           (
           for
           example
           )
           into
           Ireland
           ;
           that
           they
           might
           there
           
             leade
             a
             monasticall
             life
             in
             prayers
             and
             continencie
             and
             meditation
             of
             the
             holy
             Scriptures
             :
          
           and
           hence
           were
           those
           famous
           monasteries
           planted
           in
           England
           by
           
             Aidan
             ,
             Finan
             ,
             Colman
          
           ,
           and
           others
           ;
           unto
           which
           c
           
             the
             people
             flockt
             apace
             on
             the
             Lords
             day
             ,
             not
             for
             the
             feeding
             of
             their
             body
             ,
             but
             for
             the
             learning
             of
             the
             word
             of
             God
             ,
          
           as
           Beda
           witnesseth
           .
           Yea
           this
           was
           the
           principall
           meanes
           ,
           whereby
           the
           knowledge
           both
           of
           the
           Scriptures
           and
           of
           all
           other
           good
           learning
           was
           preserved
           in
           that
           inundation
           of
           barbarisme
           ,
           wherewith
           the
           whole
           West
           was
           in
           a
           manner
           overwhelmed
           .
           Hitherto
           (
           saith
           d
           
             Curio
             )
             it
             might
             seeme
             that
             the
             studies
             of
             wisedome
             should
             quite
             have
             perished
             ;
             unlesse
             God
             had
             reserved
             a
             seed
             in
             some
             corner
             of
             the
             world
             .
             Among
             the
             Scottish
             and
             the
             Irish
             something
             as
             yet
             remained
             of
             the
             doctrine
             of
             the
             knowledge
             of
             God
             and
             of
             civill
             honesty
             ;
             because
             there
             was
             no
             terrour
             of
             armes
             in
             those
             utmost
             ends
             of
             the
             world
             .
             And
             we
             may
             there
             behold
             and
             adore
             the
             great
             goodnesse
             of
             God
             ;
             that
             among
             the
             
             Scots
             ,
             and
             in
             those
             places
             where
             no
             man
             would
             have
             thought
             it
             ,
             so
             many
             great
             companies
             should
             bee
             gathered
             together
             under
             a
             most
             strict
             discipline
             .
          
        
         
           How
           strict
           
             their
             discipline
             was
             ,
             may
             appeare
             partly
             by
             the
          
           Rule
           ,
           
             and
             partly
             by
             the
          
           Daily
           penances
           of
           Monkes
           ;
           
             which
             are
             yet
             extant
             of
          
           Columbanus
           
             his
             writing
             .
             In
             the
             later
             of
             these
             ,
             for
             the
             disobedience
             of
             Monkes
             these
             penances
             are
             prescribed
             .
          
           e
           If
           any
           brother
           bee
           disobedient
           ;
           
             hee
             shall
             fast
          
           two
           dayes
           ,
           with
           one
           bisket
           and
           water
           .
           If
           any
           say
           ,
           I
           will
           not
           do
           it
           ;
           three
           dayes
           ,
           with
           one
           bisket
           and
           water
           .
           If
           any
           murmure
           ;
           two
           dayes
           ,
           with
           one
           bisket
           and
           water
           .
           If
           any
           doe
           not
           aske
           leave
           ,
           or
           tell
           an
           excuse
           ;
           two
           dayes
           ,
           with
           one
           bisket
           and
           water
           ▪
           
             and
             so
             in
             other
             particulars
             .
             In
             his
          
           Rule
           ,
           
             these
             good
             lessons
             doth
             hee
             give
             unto
             his
             Monkes
             ,
             among
             many
             others
             .
             That
          
           f
           it
           profited
           them
           little
           ,
           if
           they
           were
           virgins
           in
           body
           ,
           and
           were
           not
           virgins
           in
           minde
           .
           
             that
             they
          
           g
           should
           daily
           profit
           ,
           as
           they
           did
           daily
           pray
           ,
           and
           daily
           reade
           .
           that
           h
           the
           good
           things
           of
           the
           Pharisee
           being
           vainly
           praised
           were
           lost
           ,
           and
           the
           sinnes
           of
           the
           Publican
           being
           accused
           vanished
           away
           :
           and
           therefore
           that
           a
           great
           word
           should
           not
           come
           out
           of
           the
           mouth
           of
           a
           Monke
           ,
           lest
           his
           great
           labour
           should
           perish
           .
           
             They
             were
             not
             taught
             to
             vaunt
             of
             their
             state
             of
          
           perfection
           ,
           
             and
             workes
             of
          
           supererogation
           :
           
             or
             to
             argue
             from
             thence
             (
             as
          
           Celestius
           the
           Pelagian
           
             Monke
             sometime
             did
             )
             that
          
           i
           by
           the
           nature
           of
           their
           free
           will
           they
           had
           such
           a
           possibility
           of
           not
           sinning
           ,
           that
           
           they
           were
           able
           also
           to
           doe
           more
           than
           was
           commanded
           ;
           because
           they
           did
           observe
           perpetuall
           virginity
           which
           is
           not
           commanded
           ,
           whereas
           for
           not
           sinning
           it
           is
           sufficient
           to
           fulfill
           the
           precepts
           .
           
             It
             was
             one
             of
             the
             points
             which
          
           Gallus
           
             (
             the
             scholler
             of
          
           Columbanus
           )
           
             delivered
             in
             his
             sermon
             preached
             at
          
           Constance
           ;
           
             that
             our
             Saviour
          
           k
           did
           so
           perswade
           the
           Apostles
           &
           their
           followers
           to
           lay
           hold
           upon
           the
           good
           of
           virginity
           ;
           that
           yet
           they
           should
           know
           ,
           it
           was
           not
           of
           humane
           industry
           ,
           but
           of
           divine
           gift
           .
           
             and
             it
             is
             a
             good
             observation
             which
             wee
             reade
             in
          
           Claudius
           :
           that
           l
           not
           only
           in
           the
           splendour
           of
           bodily
           things
           ,
           but
           also
           in
           mournfull
           abasing
           of
           ones
           selfe
           ,
           there
           may
           bee
           boasting
           ;
           and
           that
           so
           much
           the
           more
           dangerous
           ,
           as
           it
           deceiveth
           under
           the
           name
           of
           the
           service
           of
           God.
           
        
         
           Our
           Monkes
           were
           religious
           in
           deede
           ,
           and
           not
           in
           name
           only
           ;
           farre
           from
           the
           hypocrisie
           ,
           pride
           ,
           idlenesse
           and
           uncleannesse
           of
           those
           
             evill
             beasts
          
           and
           
             slothfull
             bellies
          
           that
           afterward
           succeeded
           in
           their
           roome
           .
           Under
           colour
           of
           forsaking
           all
           ,
           they
           did
           not
           hooke
           all
           unto
           themselves
           ;
           nor
           under
           semblance
           of
           devotion
           did
           they
           devoure
           widowes
           houses
           :
           they
           held
           begging
           to
           bee
           no
           point
           of
           perfection
           ;
           but
           m
           remembred
           the
           words
           of
           our
           Lord
           Iesus
           ,
           how
           he
           said
           ,
           
             It
             is
             a
             more
             blessed
             thing
             to
             give
             rather
             than
             to
             take
             .
          
           When
           king
           Sigebert
           made
           large
           offers
           unto
           Columbanus
           and
           his
           companions
           ,
           to
           keep
           them
           within
           his
           dominions
           in
           France
           :
           hee
           received
           such
           another
           answer
           from
           them
           ,
           as
           n
           Thaddaeus
           in
           the
           Ecclesiasticall
           history
           is
           said
           to
           have
           given
           unto
           Abgarus
           the
           governour
           of
           Edessa
           :
           o
           
             Wee
             who
             have
             forsaken
             our
             owne
             ,
             that
             according
             
             to
             the
             commandement
             of
             the
             Gospel
             we
             might
             follow
             the
             Lord
             ,
             ought
             not
             to
             embrace
             other
             mens
             riches
             ;
             lest
             peradventure
             we
             should
             prove
             transgressors
             of
             the
             divine
             commandement
             .
          
           How
           then
           did
           these
           men
           live
           ,
           will
           you
           say
           ?
           
             Walafridus
             Strabus
          
           telleth
           us
           ,
           that
           p
           
             some
             of
             them
             wrought
             in
             the
             garden
             ,
             others
             dressed
             the
             orchard
             ;
             Gallus
             made
             nets
          
           and
           tooke
           fish
           ,
           wherewith
           hee
           not
           only
           relieved
           his
           owne
           company
           ,
           but
           was
           helpfull
           also
           unto
           strangers
           .
           So
           Bede
           reporteth
           of
           Cuthbert
           ,
           that
           when
           hee
           retired
           himselfe
           unto
           an
           anchoreticall
           life
           ,
           he
           q
           
             first
             indeed
             received
             a
             little
             bread
             from
             his
             brethren
             to
             feede
             upon
             ,
             and
             dranke
             out
             of
             his
             owne
             well
             ;
             but
             afterwards
             hee
             thought
             it
             more
             fit
             to
             live
             by
             the
             worke
             of
             his
             owne
             hands
             ,
             after
             the
             example
             of
             the
             Fathers
             :
             and
             therefore
             intreated
             ,
             that
             instruments
             might
             bee
             brought
             him
             wherewith
             he
             might
             till
             the
             earth
             ,
             and
             corne
             that
             hee
             might
             sowe
             .
          
           
             
               r
               Quique
               suis
               cupiens
               victum
               conquirere
               palmis
               ;
            
             
               Incultam
               pertentat
               humum
               proscindere
               ferro
               ,
            
             
               Et
               sator
               edomitis
               anni
               spem
               credere
               glebis
               .
            
          
           The
           like
           doth
           hee
           relate
           of
           s
           Furseus
           ;
           and
           Bonifacius
           of
           t
           Livinus
           ;
           and
           
             Theodorus
             Campidonensis
          
           (
           or
           whosoever
           else
           wrote
           that
           booke
           )
           of
           u
           
             Gallus
             ,
             Magnoaldus
          
           ,
           and
           the
           rest
           of
           the
           followers
           of
           Columbanus
           ;
           that
           they
           got
           their
           living
           by
           the
           labour
           of
           their
           owne
           hands
           .
           And
           the
           x
           Apostles
           rule
           is
           generally
           laid
           downe
           for
           all
           Monkes
           ,
           in
           the
           life
           of
           Furseus
           :
           y
           
             They
             which
             live
             in
             Monasteries
             should
             worke
             with
             silence
             ,
             and
             eate
             their
             owne
             bread
             .
          
        
         
         
           
             But
             now
             there
             is
             start
             up
             a
             new
             generation
             of
             men
             ,
             that
             refuse
             to
          
           eate
           their
           own
           bread
           ,
           
             and
             count
             it
             a
             high
             point
             of
             sanctity
             to
             live
             by
          
           begging
           of
           other
           mens
           bread
           ;
           
             if
             yet
             the
             course
             they
             take
             may
             rightly
             bee
             termed
          
           begging
           .
           
             For
             as
          
           Richard
           Fitz-Ralphe
           ,
           
             that
             famous
             Archbishop
             of
          
           Armagh
           ,
           
             objected
             to
             their
             faces
             ,
             before
             the
             Pope
             himselfe
             and
             his
             Cardinals
             in
          
           z
           
             his
             time
             (
             and
             the
             matter
             is
             little
             amended
             ,
             I
             wisse
             ,
             in
             ours
             )
          
           scarce
           could
           any
           great
           or
           meane
           man
           of
           the
           Clergie
           or
           the
           Laitie
           eate
           his
           meate
           ,
           but
           such
           kinde
           of
           beggers
           would
           be
           at
           his
           elbowe
           :
           not
           like
           other
           poore
           folkes
           humbly
           craving
           almes
           at
           the
           gate
           or
           the
           doore
           (
           as
           Francis
           did
           cammand
           and
           teach
           them
           in
           his
           Testament
           )
           by
           begging
           ;
           but
           without
           shame
           intruding
           themselves
           into
           courts
           or
           houses
           ,
           and
           lodging
           there
           .
           where
           ,
           without
           any
           inviting
           at
           all
           ,
           they
           eate
           and
           drinke
           what
           they
           doe
           finde
           among
           them
           :
           and
           not
           with
           that
           content
           ,
           carry
           away
           with
           them
           eyther
           wheate
           ,
           or
           meale
           ,
           or
           bread
           ,
           or
           flesh
           ,
           or
           cheeses
           (
           although
           there
           were
           but
           two
           in
           an
           house
           )
           in
           a
           kinde
           of
           an
           extorting
           manner
           ;
           there
           being
           none
           that
           can
           deny
           them
           ,
           unlesse
           he
           would
           cast
           away
           naturall
           shame
           .
        
         
           This
           did
           that
           renowned
           Primate
           (
           whose
           anniversary
           memory
           is
           still
           celebrated
           in
           Dundalke
           ,
           where
           hee
           was
           borne
           and
           buried
           ,
           by
           the
           name
           of
           
             Saint
             Richard
          
           )
           publickly
           deliver
           in
           the
           yeere
           1357.
           at
           the
           Consistory
           of
           Avinion
           :
           where
           he
           stoutly
           maintained
           against
           the
           whole
           rabble
           of
           the
           Friars
           ,
           what
           hee
           had
           preached
           the
           yeere
           before
           at
           
             Pauls
             Crosse
          
           unto
           the
           
           people
           .
           namely
           ,
           a
           
             that
             our
             Lord
             Iesus
             Christ
             ,
             although
             in
             his
             humane
             conversation
             hee
             was
             alwayes
             poore
             ,
          
           b
           
             yet
             did
             hee
             never
             voluntarily
             begge
             himselfe
             ,
          
           c
           
             nor
             taught
             others
             so
             to
             doe
             ,
          
           d
           
             but
             taught
             the
             plaine
             contrary
          
           :
           and
           e
           
             that
             no
             man
             could
             prudently
             &
             holily
             take
             upon
             himself
             the
             perpetuall
             observation
             of
             voluntary
             beggary
             ;
             forasmuch
             as
             such
             kinde
             of
             begging
             ,
             as
             well
             by
             Christ
             ,
             as
             by
             his
             Apostles
             and
             Disciples
             ,
             by
             the
             Church
             and
             by
             the
             holy
             Scriptures
             ,
             was
             both
             disswaded
             and
             also
             reproved
             .
          
        
         
           His
           Countryman
           
             Henry
             Crumpe
          
           (
           a
           Monke
           of
           the
           Cistercian
           order
           in
           Baltinglas
           )
           not
           long
           after
           ,
           treading
           in
           his
           steps
           ,
           was
           accused
           for
           delivering
           in
           his
           Determinations
           at
           Oxford
           :
           that
           f
           
             the
             Friars
             of
             the
             foure
             Mendicant
             orders
             are
             not
             ,
             nor
             ever
             were
             instituted
             by
             Gods
             inspiration
             ,
             but
             that
             contrary
             to
             the
             generall
             Councell
             of
             Lateran
             ,
             held
             under
             Innocent
             the
             third
          
           (
           which
           prohibited
           the
           bringing
           in
           of
           any
           more
           new
           religious
           orders
           into
           the
           Church
           )
           
             and
             by
             feigned
             and
             false
             dreames
             ,
             Pope
             Honorius
             being
             perswaded
             by
             the
             Friars
             ,
             did
             confirme
             them
             .
          
           and
           g
           that
           
             all
             the
             Doctors
             which
             did
             
             determine
             for
             the
             Friars
             side
             ,
             were
             eyther
             affraid
             to
             speak
             the
             truth
             ,
             lest
             their
             books
             should
             be
             condemned
             by
             the
             Friars
             that
             had
             gotten
             to
             be
             Inquisitors
             ;
             or
             said
             ,
             As
             it
             seemeth
             ,
             or
             proceeded
             onely
             by
             way
             of
             d●sputation
             and
             not
             of
             determination
             :
             because
             if
             they
             had
             spoken
             the
             truth
             plainly
             in
             the
             behalfe
             of
             the
             Church
             ,
             the
             Friars
             would
             have
             persecuted
             them
             ,
             as
             they
             d●d
             persecute
             the
             holy
             Doctor
             Armachanus
             .
          
           Which
           Crumpe
           himselfe
           found
           afterwards
           to
           be
           too
           true
           by
           his
           owne
           experience
           .
           for
           hee
           was
           forced
           to
           deny
           and
           abjure
           these
           assertions
           in
           the
           house
           of
           the
           Carmelite
           Friars
           at
           Stanford
           ,
           before
           
             William
             Courtney
          
           Archbishop
           of
           Canterbury
           :
           and
           then
           silenced
           ,
           that
           hee
           should
           not
           exercise
           publickly
           any
           act
           in
           the
           Schooles
           ,
           either
           by
           reading
           ,
           preaching
           ,
           disputing
           ,
           or
           determining
           ;
           untill
           hee
           should
           have
           a
           speciall
           licence
           from
           the
           said
           Archbishop
           so
           to
           doe
           .
        
         
           But
           to
           leave
           the
           
             begging
             Friars
          
           (
           being
           a
           kinde
           of
           creatures
           unknowne
           to
           the
           Church
           for
           twelve
           hundred
           yeers
           after
           Christ
           )
           and
           to
           return
           to
           the
           
             labouring
             Monkes
          
           :
           wee
           finde
           it
           related
           of
           our
           Brendan
           :
           that
           he
           h
           
             governed
             three
             thousand
             such
             Monkes
             ,
             who
             by
             their
             owne
             labours
             and
             handy-worke
             did
             earne
             their
             living
             .
          
           which
           agreeth
           well
           with
           that
           saying
           ascribed
           to
           him
           by
           the
           writer
           of
           his
           life
           :
           i
           
             A
             Monke
             ought
             to
             bee
             fed
             and
             clothed
             by
             the
             labour
             of
             his
             owne
             hands
             .
          
           Neither
           was
           there
           any
           other
           order
           observed
           in
           that
           famous
           Monasterie
           of
           Bangor
           among
           the
           Britons
           ,
           k
           wherein
           
           there
           is
           said
           to
           have
           beene
           so
           great
           a
           number
           of
           Monkes
           ,
           that
           the
           Monastery
           being
           divided
           into
           seven
           portions
           (
           together
           with
           the
           Rectors
           appointed
           over
           them
           )
           none
           of
           all
           those
           portions
           had
           lesse
           than
           three
           hundred
           persons
           in
           them
           :
           all
           which
           
             (
             saith
          
           Bede
           )
           were
           w●nt
           to
           live
           by
           the
           labour
           of
           their
           owne
           hands
           .
           
             From
             the
             destruction
             of
             which
             Monastery
             ,
             unto
             the
             erection
             of
          
           Tuy
           Gwyn
           ,
           or
           White-house
           
             (
             which
             is
             said
             to
             have
             beene
             about
             the
             yeere
             1146.
             )
             the
             setter
             forth
             of
             the
          
           *
           
             Welsh
             Chronicle
             observeth
             ,
             that
             there
             were
             no
             Abbeyes
             among
             the
             Britons
             .
          
        
         
           
             Here
             in
             Ireland
             Bishop
          
           Colman
           
             founded
             the
             Monastery
             of
          
           Magio
           
             (
             in
             the
          
           †
           
             county
             of
          
           Limrick
           )
           
             for
             the
             entertainment
             of
             the
          
           English
           :
           
             where
             they
          
           l
           did
           live
           according
           to
           the
           example
           of
           the
           reverend
           Fathers
           
             (
             as
          
           Bede
           writeth
           )
           under
           a
           rule
           and
           a
           canonicall
           Abbot
           ,
           in
           great
           continency
           and
           sincerity
           ,
           with
           the
           labour
           of
           their
           owne
           hands
           .
           
             Like
             whereunto
             was
             the
             monastery
             of
          
           Mailros
           
             also
             ,
             planted
             by
             Bishop
          
           Aidan
           
             and
             his
             followers
             in
          
           Northumberland
           ;
           
             where
             St.
          
           Cuthbert
           
             had
             his
             education
             :
             who
             affirmed
             ,
             that
          
           m
           the
           life
           of
           such
           Monkes
           was
           justly
           to
           bee
           admired
           ,
           which
           were
           in
           all
           things
           subject
           to
           the
           commands
           of
           their
           Abbot
           ;
           and
           ordered
           all
           the
           times
           of
           their
           watching
           ,
           praying
           ,
           fasting
           ,
           and
           working
           ,
           according
           to
           his
           direction
           .
           
             
               n
               Excubiasque
               ,
               famemque
               ,
               preces
               ,
               manuumque
               laborem
            
             
               Ad
               votum
               gaudent
               proni
               fraenare
               regentis
               .
            
          
        
         
           As
           for
           their
           fasting
           (
           for
           of
           their
           watching
           and
           praying
           there
           is
           no
           question
           made
           ;
           and
           of
           their
           working
           wee
           have
           already
           spoken
           sufficiently
           )
           by
           the
           
           rule
           of
           Columbanus
           ,
           they
           were
           o
           
             every
             day
             to
             fast
             ,
             and
             every
             day
             to
             eate
             :
          
           that
           by
           this
           meanes
           ,
           p
           
             the
             enabling
             of
             them
             for
             their
             spirituall
             proficiency
             might
             bee
             retained
             ,
             together
             with
             the
             abstinence
             that
             did
             macerate
             the
             flesh
             .
          
           Hee
           would
           therefore
           have
           them
           q
           
             every
             day
             to
             eate
             ,
             because
             they
             were
             every
             day
             to
             profit
          
           ;
           and
           because
           r
           
             abstinence
             ,
             if
             it
             did
             exceed
             measure
             ,
             would
             prove
             a
             vice
             and
             not
             a
             vertue
             .
          
           and
           he
           would
           have
           them
           to
           fast
           everie
           day
           too
           ,
           that
           is
           ,
           not
           to
           eate
           any
           meate
           at
           all
           (
           for
           other
           fasts
           were
           not
           knowne
           in
           those
           dayes
           )
           untill
           evening
           .
           s
           
             Let
             the
             food
             of
             Monkes
          
           (
           saith
           he
           )
           be
           
             meane
             ,
             and
             taken
             at
             evening
             ;
             flying
             satiety
             and
             excesse
             of
             drink
             :
             that
             it
             may
             both
             sustaine
             them
             and
             not
             hurt
             them
             .
          
           This
           was
           the
           daily
           fasting
           and
           feeding
           of
           them
           that
           lived
           according
           to
           Columbanus
           his
           rule
           .
           although
           the
           strictnesse
           of
           the
           fast
           seemeth
           to
           have
           beene
           kept
           on
           Wednesdayes
           and
           Fridayes
           onely
           :
           which
           were
           the
           dayes
           of
           the
           weeke
           ,
           wherein
           the
           ancient
           Irish
           (
           agreeable
           to
           the
           custome
           of
           the
           Grecian
           rather
           than
           the
           Roman
           Church
           )
           were
           wont
           to
           observe
           abstinence
           both
           from
           meate
           and
           from
           the
           *
           marriage
           bed
           .
           Whence
           in
           the
           booke
           before
           alledged
           ,
           of
           the
           
             Daily
             Penances
             of
             Monkes
          
           ,
           we
           finde
           this
           order
           set
           downe
           by
           the
           same
           Columbanus
           :
           that
           t
           
             if
             any
             one
             ,
             unlesse
             he
             were
             weake
             ,
             did
             upon
             the
             Wednesday
             or
             Friday
             eate
             before
             the
             ninth
             houre
          
           (
           that
           is
           to
           say
           ,
           before
           three
           of
           the
           clocke
           in
           the
           afternoone
           ,
           according
           unto
           our
           account
           )
           hee
           should
           be
           punished
           with
           fasting
           
             two
             dayes
             in
             bread
             and
             water
             ▪
          
           
           and
           in
           Bedes
           Ecclesiasticall
           Historie
           ;
           that
           u
           such
           as
           followed
           the
           information
           of
           Aidan
           ,
           did
           upon
           the
           same
           dayes
           observe
           their
           fast
           ,
           untill
           the
           same
           houre
           .
           in
           which
           history
           we
           also
           reade
           of
           Bishop
           Cedd
           (
           who
           was
           brought
           up
           at
           Lindisfarne
           with
           our
           Aidan
           and
           Finan
           )
           that
           keeping
           a
           strict
           fast
           ,
           upon
           a
           speciall
           occasion
           ,
           in
           the
           time
           of
           Lent
           ,
           hee
           did
           x
           
             every
             day
             ,
             except
             the
             Lords
             day
             ,
             continue
             his
             fast
             ,
             (
             as
             the
             manner
             was
             )
             untill
             the
             evening
             ;
             and
             then
             also
             did
             eate
             nothing
             but
             a
             small
             pittance
             of
             bread
             ,
             and
             one
             egge
             ,
             with
             a
             little
             milke
             mingled
             with
             water
             .
          
           Where
           by
           the
           way
           you
           may
           note
           ,
           that
           in
           those
           daies
           egges
           were
           eaten
           in
           Lent
           ,
           and
           the
           Sundayes
           excepted
           from
           fasting
           ,
           even
           then
           when
           the
           abstinence
           was
           precisely
           and
           in
           more
           than
           an
           ordinarie
           manner
           observed
           .
        
         
           
             But
             generally
             for
             this
             point
             of
             the
          
           difference
           of
           meats
           ,
           
             it
             is
             well
             noted
             by
          
           Claudius
           
             out
             of
             S.
          
           Augustin
           ,
           that
           y
           the
           children
           of
           wisedome
           doe
           understand
           ,
           that
           neither
           in
           abstaining
           nor
           in
           eating
           is
           there
           any
           vertue
           ;
           but
           in
           contentednesse
           of
           bearing
           the
           want
           ,
           and
           temperance
           of
           not
           corrupting
           a
           mans
           selfe
           by
           abundance
           ,
           and
           of
           opportunely
           taking
           or
           not
           taking
           those
           things
           ,
           of
           which
           not
           the
           use
           but
           the
           concupiscence
           is
           to
           be
           blamed
           .
           
             and
             in
             the
             life
             of
          
           Furseus
           ,
           
             the
             hypocrisie
             of
             them
             is
             justly
             taxed
             ,
             that
             being
          
           z
           assaulted
           with
           spirituall
           vices
           ,
           doe
           yet
           omit
           the
           care
           of
           them
           ,
           and
           afflict
           their
           body
           with
           abstinence
           :
           
           who
           a
           abstaining
           from
           meates
           ,
           which
           God
           hath
           created
           to
           be
           received
           with
           thankesgiving
           ,
           fall
           to
           wicked
           things
           ,
           as
           if
           they
           were
           lawfull
           ;
           namely
           to
           pride
           ,
           covetousnesse
           ,
           envy
           ,
           false
           witnessing
           ,
           backbiting
           .
           
             Of
             whom
          
           Gildas
           
             giveth
             this
             good
             censure
             ,
             in
             one
             of
             his
             Epistles
             which
             now
             are
             lost
             .
          
           b
           These
           men
           ,
           while
           they
           doe
           feed
           on
           bread
           by
           measure
           ,
           for
           this
           same
           very
           thing
           doe
           glory
           without
           measure
           ;
           while
           they
           use
           water
           ,
           they
           are
           withall
           drenched
           with
           the
           cup
           of
           hatred
           ;
           while
           they
           feed
           on
           dry
           meates
           ,
           they
           use
           detractions
           ;
           while
           they
           spend
           themselves
           in
           watchings
           ,
           they
           disprayse
           others
           that
           are
           oppressed
           with
           sleepe
           ;
           preferring
           fasting
           before
           charitie
           ,
           watching
           before
           justice
           ,
           their
           owne
           invention
           before
           concord
           ,
           severitie
           before
           humilitie
           ,
           and
           lastly
           ,
           man
           before
           God.
           Such
           mens
           fasting
           ,
           unlesse
           it
           be
           proceeded
           unto
           by
           some
           vertues
           ,
           profiteth
           nothing
           at
           all
           :
           but
           such
           as
           accomplish
           charitie
           ,
           doe
           say
           with
           the
           harpe
           of
           the
           holy
           Ghost
           ;
           All
           our
           righteousnesses
           are
           as
           the
           cloth
           of
           a
           menstruous
           woman
           .
           Thus
           Gildas
           :
           
             who
             upon
             this
             ground
             layeth
             downe
             this
             sound
             conclusion
             ;
             wherewith
             wee
             will
             shut
             up
             this
             whole
             matter
             .
          
           c
           Abstinence
           from
           corporall
           meats
           is
           unprofitable
           without
           charitie
           .
           They
           are
           therefore
           the
           better
           men
           ,
           who
           doe
           not
           fast
           much
           ,
           nor
           abstaine
           from
           the
           creature
           of
           God
           beyond
           measure
           ,
           but
           carefully
           keepe
           their
           
           heart
           within
           pure
           before
           God
           ,
           from
           whence
           they
           know
           commeth
           the
           issue
           of
           life
           :
           than
           they
           who
           eate
           no
           flesh
           ,
           nor
           take
           delight
           in
           secular
           dinners
           ,
           nor
           ride
           with
           coaches
           or
           horses
           ,
           thinking
           themselves
           hereby
           to
           bee
           as
           it
           were
           superiour
           to
           others
           ▪
           upon
           whom
           death
           hath
           entred
           through
           the
           windows
           of
           haughtinesse
           .
        
      
       
         
           CHAP.
           VII
           .
        
         
           
             Of
             the
             Church
             ,
             and
             various
             state
             thereof
             ,
             especially
             in
             the
             dayes
             of
             Antichrist
             :
             of
             Miracles
             also
             ,
             and
             of
             the
             Head
             of
             the
             Church
             .
          
        
         
           
             COncerning
             the
          
           Catholike
           Church
           ,
           
             our
             Doctors
             taught
             with
             S.
          
           Gregory
           ;
           
             that
             God
          
           a
           hath
           a
           vineyard
           ,
           to
           wit
           ,
           the
           universall
           Church
           ,
           which
           from
           just
           Abel
           untill
           the
           last
           of
           the
           elect
           that
           shall
           be
           borne
           in
           the
           end
           of
           the
           world
           ,
           as
           many
           Saints
           as
           it
           hath
           brought
           forth
           ,
           so
           many
           branches
           (
           as
           it
           were
           )
           hath
           it
           budded
           .
           that
           b
           the
           congregation
           of
           the
           just
           is
           called
           the
           kingdome
           of
           heaven
           ;
           which
           is
           the
           Church
           of
           the
           just
           .
           that
           c
           the
           sonnes
           of
           the
           Church
           bee
           all
           such
           as
           from
           the
           beginning
           of
           mankinde
           untill
           now
           ,
           have
           attained
           to
           be
           just
           and
           holy
           .
           that
           d
           
             what
             is
             said
             of
             the
          
           body
           ,
           
             may
             bee
             said
             also
             of
             the
          
           members
           ;
           
             and
             that
             in
             this
             respect
          
           ,
           as
           well
           the
           Apostles
           and
           all
           beleevers
           ,
           as
           the
           Church
           it selfe
           ,
           have
           the
           title
           of
           
           a
           pillar
           given
           them
           in
           the
           Scriptures
           .
           that
           e
           the
           Church
           
             may
             be
             considered
          
           two
           
             manner
             of
             wayes
             :
             both
             that
             which
          
           neyther
           hath
           spot
           nor
           wrinkle
           and
           is
           truely
           the
           body
           of
           Christ
           ,
           and
           that
           which
           is
           gathered
           in
           the
           name
           of
           Christ
           without
           full
           and
           perfect
           vertues
           ;
           
             which
             notwithstanding
             by
             the
             warrant
             of
             the
             Apostle
             ,
             may
             have
             the
             name
             of
             the
          
           Church
           
             given
             unto
             it
             ,
             although
             it
             be
          
           depraved
           with
           errour
           .
           that
           f
           the
           Church
           is
           said
           not
           to
           have
           spot
           or
           wrinkle
           ,
           in
           respect
           of
           the
           life
           to
           come
           .
           
             that
             when
             the
             Apostle
             saith
          
           ;
           In
           a
           great
           house
           there
           are
           not
           only
           vessels
           of
           gold
           ,
           
             &c.
             but
          
           some
           to
           honour
           and
           some
           to
           dishonour
           :
           (
           2
           Tim.
           2.
           20.
           
           )
           
             by
             this
          
           g
           great
           house
           he
           doth
           not
           understand
           the
           Church
           (
           as
           some
           have
           thought
           )
           which
           hath
           not
           spot
           nor
           wrinkle
           :
           but
           the
           world
           ,
           in
           which
           the
           tares
           are
           mingled
           with
           the
           wheate
           .
           
             that
             yet
             in
          
           h
           the
           holy
           Church
           also
           ,
           the
           evill
           are
           mingled
           with
           the
           good
           ,
           and
           the
           reprobate
           with
           the
           elect
           :
           
             and
             that
             in
             this
             respect
             it
             is
             resembled
             unto
          
           the
           wise
           and
           foolish
           virgins
           ;
           
             as
             also
             to
          
           i
           the
           Kings
           marriage
           ,
           by
           which
           this
           present
           Church
           is
           designed
           ,
           wherein
           the
           good
           and
           the
           bad
           doe
           meet
           together
           .
           
             So
             that
          
           k
           in
           this
           Church
           ,
           neyther
           the
           bad
           can
           bee
           without
           the
           good
           ,
           nor
           the
           good
           without
           the
           bad
           :
           whom
           the
           holy
           Church
           notwithstanding
           doth
           both
           now
           receive
           indifferently
           ,
           and
           separate
           afterwards
           at
           their
           going
           from
           hence
           .
        
         
           
             The
             number
             of
             the
             good
          
           ,
           Gildas
           
             complaineth
             to
             
             have
             beene
          
           l
           
             so
             exceeding
             short
             in
             his
             time
             among
             the
             Britons
             ,
             in
             comparison
             of
             the
             other
             ;
             that
             their
          
           mother
           the
           Church
           in
           a
           manner
           did
           not
           see
           them
           lying
           in
           her
           own
           lap
           ,
           albeit
           they
           were
           the
           onely
           true
           sonnes
           which
           she
           had
           .
           
             And
             for
             externall
             pressures
             ,
             our
             Doctors
             have
             delivered
             ,
             that
          
           m
           the
           Church
           sometimes
           is
           not
           only
           afflicted
           ,
           but
           also
           defiled
           with
           such
           oppressions
           of
           the
           Gentiles
           ;
           that
           if
           it
           were
           possible
           ,
           her
           redeemer
           might
           seeme
           for
           a
           time
           utterly
           to
           have
           forsaken
           her
           :
           
             and
             that
             ,
             in
             the
             raging
             times
             of
          
           Antichrist
           ,
           n
           the
           Church
           shall
           not
           appeare
           ;
           by
           reason
           that
           the
           wicked
           persecutors
           shall
           then
           exercise
           their
           cruelty
           beyond
           all
           measure
           .
           
             that
             in
             those
          
           o
           times
           of
           Antichrist
           ,
           not
           onely
           more
           often
           and
           more
           bitter
           torments
           shall
           be
           put
           upon
           the
           faithfull
           ,
           than
           before
           were
           wont
           to
           be
           ;
           but
           (
           which
           is
           more
           grievous
           )
           the
           working
           of
           miracles
           also
           shall
           accompany
           those
           that
           inflict
           the
           torments
           :
           as
           the
           Apostle
           witnesseth
           ,
           saying
           ;
           Whose
           comming
           is
           after
           the
           working
           of
           Satan
           ,
           with
           all
           seduction
           ,
           signes
           ,
           and
           lying
           wonders
           .
           namely
           ,
           p
           juggling
           ones
           :
           as
           it
           was
           foretold
           before
           ;
           They
           shall
           shew
           such
           signes
           that
           ,
           if
           it
           were
           possible
           ,
           the
           very
           elect
           should
           bee
           deceived
           ,
           by
           such
           a
           phantasticall
           power
           ,
           as
           Iamnes
           and
           Mambres
           wrought
           withall
           before
           Pharao
           .
           q
           What
           unbeleever
           
           therefore
           (
           
             say
             they
             )
             will
             then
          
           bee
           converted
           unto
           the
           faith
           ?
           and
           who
           is
           hee
           that
           already
           beleeveth
           ,
           whose
           faith
           trembleth
           not
           and
           is
           not
           shaken
           ?
           when
           the
           persecuter
           of
           piety
           is
           the
           worker
           of
           wonders
           :
           and
           the
           same
           man
           that
           exerciseth
           crueltie
           with
           torments
           ,
           that
           Christ
           may
           be
           denyed
           ;
           provoketh
           by
           miracles
           ,
           that
           Antichrist
           may
           bee
           beleeved
           ?
           And
           r
           what
           a
           pure
           and
           a
           single
           eye
           is
           there
           need
           of
           ,
           that
           the
           way
           of
           wisedome
           may
           be
           found
           ;
           against
           which
           so
           great
           deceivings
           and
           errours
           of
           evill
           and
           perverse
           men
           ,
           doe
           make
           such
           a
           noyse
           ?
           all
           which
           notwithstanding
           men
           must
           passe
           through
           ;
           and
           so
           come
           to
           most
           certaine
           peace
           ,
           and
           the
           unmoveable
           stabilitie
           of
           wisedome
           .
        
         
           
             Hence
             concerning
          
           Miracles
           ,
           
             they
             give
             us
             these
             instructions
             .
             First
             ,
             that
          
           s
           neyther
           if
           an
           Angel
           should
           shew
           himselfe
           unto
           us
           to
           seduce
           us
           ,
           being
           suborned
           with
           the
           deceits
           of
           his
           father
           the
           divell
           ,
           ought
           he
           to
           prevaile
           against
           us
           ;
           neither
           if
           a
           miracle
           should
           be
           done
           by
           any
           one
           ,
           as
           it
           is
           said
           of
           Simon
           Magus
           that
           he
           did
           flye
           in
           the
           ayre
           :
           t
           neyther
           that
           signes
           should
           terrifie
           us
           ,
           as
           done
           by
           the
           Spirit
           ;
           because
           that
           our
           Saviour
           also
           hath
           given
           us
           warning
           of
           this
           before-hand
           .
           (
           Matth.
           24.
           24
           ,
           25.
           )
           
             Secondly
             ,
             that
          
           u
           the
           faith
           having
           increased
           ,
           miracles
           were
           to
           cease
           ;
           forasmuch
           as
           they
           are
           declared
           to
           have
           beene
           given
           for
           their
           sakes
           that
           beleeve
           not
           .
           
             and
             therefore
             that
          
           x
           now
           when
           the
           number
           of
           the
           faithfull
           is
           growne
           ,
           there
           bee
           many
           within
           the
           holy
           Church
           that
           retaine
           the
           life
           of
           vertues
           ,
           
           and
           yet
           have
           not
           those
           signes
           of
           vertues
           :
           because
           a
           miracle
           is
           to
           no
           purpose
           shewed
           outwardly
           ,
           if
           that
           bee
           wanting
           which
           it
           should
           worke
           inwardly
           .
           For
           according
           to
           the
           saying
           of
           the
           Master
           of
           the
           Gentiles
           ;
           Languages
           are
           for
           a
           signe
           ,
           not
           to
           the
           faithfull
           but
           to
           infidels
           .
           (
           1
           Cor.
           14.
           22.
           )
           
             Thirdly
             ,
             that
             the
             working
             of
             miracles
             is
             no
             good
             argument
             to
             prove
             the
             holinesse
             of
             them
             that
             bee
             the
             instruments
             thereof
             :
             and
             therefore
          
           y
           when
           the
           Lord
           doth
           such
           things
           for
           the
           convincing
           of
           infidels
           ,
           he
           yet
           giveth
           us
           warning
           that
           we
           should
           not
           bee
           deceived
           thereby
           ,
           supposing
           invisible
           wisedome
           to
           bee
           there
           ,
           where
           we
           shall
           behold
           a
           visible
           miracle
           .
           
             For
             hee
             saith
          
           :
           Many
           shall
           say
           unto
           me
           in
           that
           day
           ,
           Lord
           ,
           Lord
           ;
           have
           wee
           not
           prophesied
           in
           thy
           name
           ,
           and
           in
           thy
           name
           cast
           out
           Divels
           ,
           and
           in
           thy
           name
           done
           many
           miracles
           ?
           (
           Matth.
           7.
           22
           
           )
           
             Fourthly
             ,
             that
          
           z
           he
           tempteth
           God
           ,
           who
           for
           his
           own
           vaine
           glory
           will
           make
           shew
           of
           a
           superfluous
           and
           unprofitable
           miracle
           .
           
             such
             as
             that
             (
             for
             example
             )
             was
             ,
             whereunto
             the
             Divel
             tempted
             our
             Saviour
             ,
             Matth.
             4.
             6.
             to
             come
             downe
             headlong
             from
             the
             pinnacle
             of
             the
             Temple
             unto
             the
             plaine
             ,
          
           a
           every
           miracle
           being
           vaine
           ,
           which
           worketh
           not
           some
           profit
           unto
           mans
           salvation
           .
           
             Whereby
             wee
             may
             easily
             discerne
             ,
             what
             to
             judge
             of
             that
             infinite
             number
             of
             idle
             miracles
             ,
             wherewith
             the
             lives
             of
             our
             Saints
             are
             every
             where
             stuffed
             :
             many
             whereof
             wee
             may
             justly
             censure
             (
             as
          
           b
           Amphilochius
           
             doth
             the
             tales
             that
             the
             Poets
             tell
             of
             their
             Gods
             )
             for
          
           
             
               
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
              
               ,
            
             
               Fables
               ,
               of
               laughter
               worthy
               ,
               and
               of
               teares
               ;
            
          
           
           Yea
           some
           of
           them
           also
           we
           may
           rightly
           brand
           ,
           as
           
             
               
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
              
            
             
               Vnseemely
               fables
               ,
               and
               Divels
               documents
               .
            
          
           
             For
             what
             (
             for
             example
             )
             can
             be
             more
          
           unseemely
           ,
           
             and
             tend
             further
             to
             the
             advancement
             of
             the
          
           doctrine
           of
           divels
           ,
           
             than
             that
             which
          
           Cogitosus
           
             relateth
             in
             the
             life
             of
             S.
          
           Brigid
           ?
           
             that
             she
             ,
             for
             saving
             the
             credit
             of
             a
             Nunne
             that
             had
             beene
             gotten
             with
             childe
             ,
          
           c
           blessed
           her
           faithfully
           
             forsooth
             (
             for
             so
             the
             author
             speaketh
             )
             and
             so
             caused
             her
             conception
             to
          
           vanish
           away
           ,
           without
           any
           delivery
           and
           without
           any
           paine
           .
           
             which
             for
             the
             saving
             of
             St.
          
           Brigids
           
             owne
             credit
             ,
             eyther
          
           d
           Hen.
           Canisius
           
             or
             the
             friars
             of
          
           Aichstad
           (
           
             from
             whom
             he
             had
             his
             copie
             of
          
           Cogitosus
           )
           thought
           fit
           to
           scrape
           out
           ,
           and
           rather
           to
           leave
           a
           blanke
           in
           the
           booke
           ,
           than
           to
           suffer
           so
           lewd
           a
           tale
           to
           stand
           in
           it
           .
           But
           I
           will
           not
           stirre
           this
           puddle
           any
           further
           :
           but
           proceed
           on
           ,
           unto
           some
           better
           matter
           .
        
         
           
             And
             now
             are
             wee
             come
             at
             last
             to
             the
             great
             Point
             ,
             that
             toucheth
             the
          
           Head
           
             and
             the
          
           foundation
           
             of
             the
             Church
             .
             Concerning
             which
          
           Sedulius
           
             observeth
             ,
             that
             the
             title
             of
          
           e
           foundation
           
             is
             attributed
             both
             to
          
           Christ
           ,
           
             and
             to
             the
          
           Apostles
           and
           Prophets
           .
           
             that
             where
             it
             is
             said
             ,
             Esay
          
           28.
           16.
           
           Behold
           ,
           I
           lay
           in
           Sion
           a
           stone
           ,
           &c.
           f
           it
           is
           certaine
           ,
           that
           by
           the
           rocke
           or
           stone
           Christ
           is
           signified
           .
           
             that
             ,
             in
             Ephes.
          
           2.
           20.
           g
           the
           Apostles
           are
           the
           foundation
           ,
           or
           Christ
           rather
           the
           foundation
           of
           the
           Apostles
           .
           For
           Christ
           (
           
             saith
             hee
          
           )
           is
           the
           foundation
           ,
           who
           is
           also
           called
           the
           corner
           stone
           ,
           joyning
           and
           holding
           together
           the
           two
           wals
           .
           
           Therefore
           is
           hee
           the
           foundation
           and
           chiefe
           stone
           ;
           because
           in
           him
           the
           Church
           is
           both
           founded
           and
           finished
           .
           
             and
             we
             are
             to
             account
             the
             Apostles
          
           h
           as
           Ministers
           of
           Christ
           ,
           and
           not
           as
           the
           foundation
           .
           
             The
             famous
             place
             ,
             Matthew
          
           16.
           18.
           
           (
           
             whereupon
             our
             Romanists
             lay
             the
             maine
             foundation
             of
             the
             Papacie
          
           )
           Claudius
           
             expoundeth
             in
             this
             sort
          
           .
           i
           Vpon
           this
           rocke
           will
           I
           build
           my
           Church
           ,
           that
           is
           to
           say
           ,
           upon
           the
           Lord
           and
           Saviour
           ,
           who
           granted
           unto
           his
           faithfull
           knower
           ,
           lover
           ,
           and
           confessor
           the
           participation
           of
           his
           owne
           name
           ;
           that
           from
           petra
           (
           the
           rocke
           )
           hee
           should
           be
           called
           Peter
           .
           The
           Church
           is
           builded
           
             upon
             him
          
           :
           because
           onely
           by
           the
           faith
           and
           love
           of
           Christ
           ,
           by
           the
           receiving
           of
           the
           Sacraments
           of
           Christ
           ,
           by
           the
           observation
           of
           the
           commandements
           of
           Christ
           ,
           wee
           come
           to
           the
           inheritance
           of
           the
           elect
           and
           eternall
           life
           ,
           as
           witnesseth
           the
           Apostle
           ,
           who
           saith
           ,
           Other
           foundation
           can
           no
           man
           lay
           beside
           that
           which
           is
           laid
           ,
           which
           is
           Christ
           Iesus
           .
        
         
           
             Yet
             doth
             the
             same
          
           Claudius
           
             acknowledge
             ,
             that
          
           k
           St.
           Peter
           
             received
             a
             kinde
             of
          
           primacy
           for
           the
           founding
           of
           the
           Church
           (
           
             in
             respect
             whereof
             hee
             termeth
             him
          
           l
           Ecclesiae
           principem
           ,
           and
           m
           Apostolorum
           principem
           ,
           the
           prince
           of
           the
           Church
           ,
           
             and
             the
          
           prince
           
             or
             chiefe
          
           of
           the
           Apostles
           )
           
             but
             hee
             addeth
             with
             all
             ,
             that
             Saint
          
           Paul
           also
           was
           chosen
           in
           the
           same
           manner
           ,
           to
           have
           the
           primacy
           in
           founding
           the
           Churches
           of
           the
           Gentiles
           .
           
             and
             that
             hee
          
           n
           received
           this
           gift
           from
           God
           ,
           that
           hee
           should
           bee
           worthy
           
           to
           have
           the
           primacie
           in
           preaching
           to
           the
           Gentiles
           ,
           as
           Peter
           had
           it
           in
           the
           preaching
           of
           the
           Circumcision
           .
           
             and
             therefore
             that
          
           o
           St.
           Paul
           challengeth
           this
           grace
           as
           granted
           by
           God
           to
           him
           alone
           ,
           as
           it
           was
           granted
           to
           Peter
           alone
           among
           the
           Apostles
           .
           
             and
             that
             hee
             esteemed
             himselfe
          
           p
           not
           to
           be
           inferiour
           unto
           St.
           Peter
           ,
           because
           both
           of
           them
           were
           by
           one
           ordained
           unto
           one
           and
           the
           same
           ministery
           .
           
             and
             that
             writing
             to
             the
          
           Galatians
           ,
           q
           
             he
             did
             in
             the
          
           title
           name
           himselfe
           an
           Apostle
           of
           Christ
           ,
           to
           the
           end
           that
           by
           the
           very
           authority
           of
           that
           name
           hee
           might
           terrifie
           his
           readers
           ;
           judging
           ,
           that
           all
           such
           as
           did
           beleeve
           in
           Christ
           ,
           ought
           to
           be
           subject
           unto
           him
           .
        
         
           
             It
             is
             furthermore
             also
             observed
             by
          
           Claudius
           ,
           that
           r
           
             as
             when
             our
             Saviour
             propounded
             the
             question
          
           generally
           unto
           all
           the
           Apostles
           ,
           Peter
           did
           answer
           as
           one
           for
           all
           ;
           so
           what
           our
           Lord
           answered
           unto
           Peter
           ,
           in
           Peter
           he
           did
           answer
           unto
           all
           .
           
             and
             therefore
          
           s
           howsoever
           the
           power
           of
           loosing
           and
           binding
           might
           seeme
           to
           be
           given
           by
           the
           Lord
           unto
           Peter
           alone
           ,
           yet
           without
           all
           manner
           of
           doubt
           it
           is
           to
           be
           knowne
           ,
           that
           it
           was
           given
           unto
           the
           rest
           of
           the
           Apostles
           also
           :
           as
           himselfe
           doth
           witnesse
           ,
           who
           appearing
           unto
           them
           after
           the
           triumph
           of
           his
           passion
           and
           resurrection
           ,
           breathed
           on
           them
           ,
           and
           said
           unto
           them
           all
           ;
           Receive
           the
           holy
           Ghost
           ,
           whose
           sinnes
           ye
           remit
           ,
           they
           are
           remitted
           unto
           them
           ,
           and
           whose
           sins
           ye
           retaine
           they
           are
           retained
           .
           Gildas
           
             the
             Briton
             goeth
             further
             ,
             affirming
             that
          
           t
           to
           the
           true
           Priest
           
           it
           is
           said
           ;
           Thou
           art
           Peter
           ,
           and
           upon
           this
           rocke
           I
           will
           build
           my
           Church
           .
           that
           u
           to
           Peter
           and
           his
           successors
           our
           Lord
           saith
           ;
           And
           unto
           thee
           will
           I
           give
           the
           Keyes
           of
           the
           Kingdome
           of
           heaven
           .
           
             and
             consequently
             ,
             that
          
           x
           unto
           every
           holy
           Priest
           it
           is
           promised
           :
           Whatsoever
           thou
           shalt
           binde
           on
           earth
           ,
           shal
           be
           bound
           likewise
           in
           heaven
           ;
           and
           whatsoever
           thou
           shalt
           loose
           on
           earth
           ,
           shal
           be
           loosed
           likewise
           in
           heaven
           .
           
             Whereupon
             hee
             pronounceth
             of
             the
             good
             Priests
             of
             Brittaine
             ;
             that
             they
          
           y
           doe
           lawfully
           obtaine
           the
           Apostolicall
           state
           ,
           and
           z
           lawfully
           sit
           in
           the
           chaire
           
             of
             St.
          
           Paul
           :
           
             and
             on
             the
             other
             side
             of
             the
             bad
             ,
             that
          
           a
           with
           uncleane
           feete
           they
           usurpe
           the
           seate
           of
           the
           Apostle
           Peter
           ,
           but
           by
           the
           demerit
           of
           their
           covetousnesse
           fall
           into
           the
           pestilent
           chaire
           of
           the
           traytor
           Iudas
           ;
           
             and
             so
             the
             ordainers
             of
             such
             ,
             place
          
           b
           after
           a
           sort
           Iudas
           the
           betrayer
           of
           our
           Lord
           ,
           in
           the
           seate
           of
           Peter
           .
        
         
           Lastly
           ,
           as
           Claudius
           noteth
           ,
           that
           c
           
             the
             foundation
             of
             the
             Church
             was
             laid
          
           not
           onely
           upon
           St.
           Peter
           ,
           but
           also
           upon
           St.
           Iohn
           :
           so
           in
           a
           certaine
           Hymne
           supposed
           to
           be
           written
           by
           Secundinus
           (
           knowne
           in
           this
           country
           commonly
           by
           the
           name
           of
           St.
           Scachlin
           )
           in
           the
           yeere
           of
           our
           Lord
           CCCCXLVIII
           .
           St
           Patrick
           also
           is
           thus
           commended
           .
           d
           
             He
             is
             constant
             in
             the
             feare
             of
             God
             ,
             and
             unmovable
             in
             the
             faith
             ,
             upon
             whom
             the
             Church
             is
             builded
             as
             upon
             Peter
             ;
             whose
             Apostleship
             also
             he
             hath
             obtained
             from
             God
             ,
             and
             the
             gates
             of
             Hell
             shall
             not
             prevaile
             against
             him
             .
          
           yea
           e
           Christ
           is
           there
           said
           to
           have
           
             chosen
             him
             for
             his
             Vicar
             upon
             earth
             .
          
           His
           See
           likewise
           of
           Armagh
           ,
           is
           by
           one
           
           
             Calvus
             Perennis
          
           in
           the
           dayes
           of
           Brian
           king
           of
           Ireland
           (
           who
           was
           slaine
           ,
           as
           appeareth
           by
           f
           Marianus
           in
           the
           yeere
           1014.
           )
           termed
           g
           
             the
             Citie
          
           Apostolick
           .
           So
           Desiderius
           Bishop
           of
           Cahors
           in
           France
           ,
           is
           by
           our
           countryman
           Gaellus
           saluted
           both
           h
           Papa
           and
           Apostolicus
           :
           and
           the
           Bishop
           of
           Kildare
           in
           Ireland
           ,
           honoured
           by
           Cogitosus
           ,
           with
           the
           stile
           of
           i
           
             Summus
             Sacerdos
          
           ,
           and
           k
           
             Summus
             Pontifex
          
           ,
           the
           
             highest
             Priest
          
           and
           the
           
             highest
             Bishop
          
           .
           those
           titles
           and
           prerogatives
           ,
           which
           the
           Pope
           now
           peculiarly
           challengeth
           unto
           himselfe
           ,
           as
           ensignes
           of
           his
           Monarchy
           ,
           being
           heretofore
           usually
           communicated
           unto
           other
           Bishops
           ,
           when
           the
           universall
           Church
           was
           governed
           by
           way
           of
           Aristocratie
           .
        
      
       
         
           CHAP.
           VIII
           .
        
         
           
             Of
             the
             Popes
             spirituall
             Iurisdiction
             ;
             and
             how
             little
             footing
             it
             had
             gotten
             at
             first
             within
             these
             parts
             .
          
        
         
           MAster
           Campion
           telleth
           us
           ;
           that
           a
           
             when
             Ireland
             first
             received
             Christendome
             ,
             they
             gave
             themselves
             into
             the
             Iurisdiction
             both
             spirituall
             and
             temporall
             of
             the
             See
             of
             Rome
             .
          
           But
           herein
           he
           speaketh
           without
           booke
           ;
           of
           the
           spirituall
           jurisdiction
           untruly
           ,
           of
           the
           temporall
           absurdly
           .
           For
           from
           the
           first
           legation
           of
           Palladius
           and
           Patricius
           ,
           who
           were
           sent
           to
           plant
           the
           faith
           in
           this
           
           country
           ,
           it
           cannot
           bee
           shewed
           out
           of
           any
           monument
           of
           antiquity
           ,
           that
           the
           Bishop
           of
           Rome
           did
           ever
           send
           any
           of
           his
           Legats
           to
           exercise
           spirituall
           jurisdiction
           here
           (
           much
           lesse
           any
           of
           his
           Deputies
           to
           exercise
           jurisdiction
           temporall
           )
           before
           
             Gillebertus
             ,
             quem
             aiunt
             primâ
             functum
             legatione
             Apostolicae
             sedis
             per
             universam
             Hiberniam
          
           ;
           saith
           one
           that
           lived
           in
           his
           own
           time
           ,
           even
           Bernard
           himselfe
           in
           the
           life
           of
           Malachias
           .
           One
           or
           two
           instances
           peradventure
           may
           be
           alledged
           out
           of
           some
           obscure
           authors
           ,
           whose
           names
           ,
           and
           times
           ,
           and
           authority
           no
           man
           can
           tell
           us
           newes
           of
           :
           but
           unlesse
           that
           which
           is
           delivered
           by
           Bernard
           ,
           as
           the
           tradition
           that
           was
           current
           in
           his
           time
           ,
           can
           bee
           controlled
           by
           some
           record
           that
           may
           appeare
           to
           have
           beene
           written
           before
           his
           dayes
           ;
           we
           have
           small
           reason
           to
           detract
           any
           thing
           from
           the
           credit
           of
           so
           cleere
           a
           testimony
           .
        
         
           This
           country
           was
           heretofore
           ,
           for
           the
           number
           of
           holy
           men
           that
           lived
           in
           it
           ,
           termed
           the
           
             Iland
             of
             Saints
          
           :
           of
           that
           innumerable
           company
           of
           Saints
           ,
           whose
           memory
           was
           reverenced
           here
           ;
           what
           one
           received
           any
           solemne
           canonization
           from
           the
           Pope
           ,
           before
           Malachias
           Archbishop
           of
           Armagh
           ,
           &
           Laurence
           of
           Dublin
           ?
           who
           lived
           ,
           as
           it
           were
           ,
           but
           the
           other
           day
           .
           We
           reade
           of
           sundry
           Archbishops
           that
           have
           beene
           in
           this
           land
           :
           betwixt
           the
           dayes
           of
           Saint
           Patrick
           and
           of
           Malachias
           ,
           what
           one
           of
           them
           can
           be
           named
           ,
           that
           ever
           sought
           for
           a
           Pall
           from
           
             Rome
             ?
             Ioceline
          
           indeed
           a
           late
           Monke
           of
           the
           Abbey
           of
           Furnesse
           ,
           writeth
           of
           St.
           Patrick
           ;
           that
           the
           Bishop
           of
           Rome
           b
           conferred
           the
           Pall
           upon
           him
           ,
           together
           with
           the
           execution
           of
           legatine
           power
           in
           his
           
           roome
           .
           But
           he
           is
           well
           knowne
           to
           be
           a
           most
           fabulous
           author
           :
           and
           for
           this
           particular
           ,
           Bernard
           (
           who
           was
           his
           ancient
           )
           informeth
           us
           farre
           otherwise
           ;
           that
           c
           
             from
             the
             very
             beginning
             untill
             his
             time
             ,
             the
             metropoliticall
             See
             of
             Armagh
             wanted
             the
             use
             of
             the
             Pall.
          
           with
           whom
           the
           author
           of
           the
           Annales
           of
           Mailros
           doth
           fully
           accord
           ;
           noting
           that
           d
           
             in
             the
             yeere
             1151.
             
             Pope
             Eugenius
          
           (
           the
           same
           to
           whom
           Bernard
           did
           write
           his
           bookes
           
             de
             Consideratione
             )
             did
             by
             his
             Legate
             Iohn
             Papiron
             transmit
             foure
             Pals
             into
             Ireland
             ;
             whither
             a
             Pall
             before
             had
             never
             beene
             brought
             .
          
           And
           therefore
           
             Giraldus
             Cambrensis
          
           ,
           howsoever
           he
           acknowledgeth
           that
           Saint
           Patrick
           did
           e
           
             choose
             Armagh
             for
             his
             seate
             ,
             and
             did
             appoint
             it
             to
             be
             as
             it
             were
             a
             metropoliticall
             See
             ,
             and
             the
             proper
             place
             of
             the
             primacie
             of
             all
             Ireland
          
           ;
           yet
           doth
           hee
           affirme
           withall
           ,
           that
           in
           very
           deed
           f
           
             there
             were
             no
             Archbishops
             in
             Ireland
             ,
             but
             that
             Bishops
             only
             did
             consecrate
             one
             another
             ,
             untill
             Iohannes
             Papirio
          
           (
           or
           
             Paparo
             )
             the
             Popes
             Legate
             brought
             foure
             Pals
             thither
             .
          
           whereupon
           some
           of
           our
           Chroniclers
           after
           him
           ,
           give
           this
           note
           concerning
           Gelasius
           ,
           who
           was
           at
           that
           time
           Archbishop
           of
           Armagh
           ;
           that
           g
           
             hee
             is
             said
             to
             have
             beene
             the
             first
             Archbishop
             ,
             because
             hee
             used
             the
             first
             Pall
             :
          
           and
           that
           
             others
             before
             him
             were
             called
             Archbishops
             and
             Primates
             in
             name
             only
             ;
             for
             the
             reverence
             of
             Saint
             Patrick
             ,
             as
             the
             Apostle
             of
             that
             Nation
             .
          
        
         
           And
           indeed
           it
           might
           seeme
           ,
           that
           the
           complaint
           
           made
           by
           Anselme
           in
           his
           letters
           to
           
             Muriar
             dach
          
           King
           of
           Ireland
           ,
           that
           h
           Bishops
           here
           
             were
             consecrated
             by
             Bishops
             alone
          
           ,
           might
           somewhat
           justifie
           the
           truth
           of
           Giraldus
           his
           relation
           ;
           if
           we
           did
           not
           find
           a
           further
           complaint
           there
           also
           ,
           that
           they
           were
           often
           i
           
             ordained
             by
             one
             Bishop
             onely
          
           .
           But
           as
           this
           latter
           argueth
           ,
           not
           the
           want
           of
           a
           competent
           number
           of
           Bishops
           in
           the
           land
           (
           for
           ,
           as
           we
           shall
           heare
           presently
           ,
           they
           had
           more
           than
           a
           sufficient
           number
           of
           such
           )
           but
           a
           neglect
           of
           the
           observance
           of
           the
           Canon
           provided
           by
           the
           Nicence
           Fathers
           in
           that
           behalfe
           :
           so
           can
           it
           not
           rightly
           bee
           inferred
           out
           of
           the
           former
           ,
           that
           wee
           had
           no
           Archbishops
           here
           at
           that
           time
           ,
           but
           that
           the
           Bishops
           rather
           did
           faile
           much
           in
           the
           Canonicall
           respect
           which
           they
           ought
           to
           shew
           unto
           their
           Metropolitane
           .
           For
           that
           the
           Irish
           had
           their
           Archbishops
           (
           beside
           many
           other
           pregnant
           testimonies
           that
           might
           bee
           produced
           )
           Pope
           Hildebrands
           owne
           Briefe
           doth
           sufficiently
           manifest
           ;
           which
           is
           directed
           k
           to
           Terdeluachus
           (
           or
           
             Tirlagh
             )
             the
             illustrious
             King
             of
             Ireland
             ,
             the
          
           ARCHBISHOPS
           ,
           
             Bishops
             ,
             Abbots
             ,
             Nobles
             ,
             and
             all
             Christians
             inhabiting
             Ireland
             .
          
           And
           for
           the
           Archbishops
           of
           Armagh
           in
           particular
           ;
           it
           appeareth
           most
           evidently
           by
           Bernard
           in
           the
           life
           of
           Malachias
           ,
           that
           they
           were
           so
           far
           from
           being
           Metropolitans
           and
           Primates
           
             in
             name
             onely
          
           ;
           that
           they
           exercised
           much
           greater
           authority
           before
           they
           were
           put
           to
           the
           charges
           of
           fetching
           Pals
           from
           Rome
           ,
           then
           ever
           they
           did
           afterward
           :
           and
           that
           they
           did
           not
           onely
           consecrate
           Bishops
           ,
           but
           erected
           also
           new
           Bishopricks
           ,
           and
           Archbishopricks
           too
           sometimes
           ,
           according
           as
           they
           thought
           fitting
           .
        
         
           We
           reade
           in
           Nennius
           ,
           that
           at
           the
           beginning
           St.
           Patrick
           
           l
           founded
           here
           365.
           
           Churches
           ,
           and
           ordained
           365.
           
           Bishops
           ,
           beside
           3000.
           
           Presbyters
           .
           In
           processe
           of
           time
           the
           number
           of
           Bishops
           was
           daily
           m
           
             multiplyed
             according
             to
             the
             pleasure
             of
             the
             Metropolitan
             ,
          
           (
           whereof
           Bernard
           doth
           much
           complaine
           )
           and
           that
           ,
           not
           onely
           
             so
             farre
             ,
             that
             every
             Church
             almost
             had
             a
             severall
             Bishop
             :
          
           but
           also
           that
           in
           some
           n
           
             Townes
             or
             Cities
             there
             were
             ordained
             more
          
           than
           one
           ;
           yea
           and
           oftentimes
           o
           
             Bishops
             were
             made
             without
             any
             certaine
             place
             at
             all
          
           assigned
           unto
           them
           .
           And
           as
           for
           the
           erecting
           of
           new
           Archbishoprickes
           :
           if
           we
           beleeve
           our
           Legends
           ,
           p
           
             King
             Engus
             and
             S.
             Patrick
             ,
             with
             all
             the
             people
             ,
             did
             ordaine
             ,
             that
             in
             the
             City
             and
             See
             of
             Albeus
          
           (
           which
           is
           Emelye
           ,
           now
           annexed
           to
           
             Cashell
             )
             should
             be
             the
             Archbishoprick
             of
             the
             whole
             Province
             of
             Mounster
             .
          
           in
           like
           manner
           also
           ,
           q
           
             Brandubh
             King
             of
             the
             Lagenians
             ,
             with
             the
             consent
             as
             well
             of
             the
             Laity
             as
             of
             the
             Clergie
             ,
             did
             appoint
             that
             in
             the
             Citie
             of
             Fernes
          
           (
           which
           was
           the
           See
           of
           Moedog
           ,
           otherwise
           called
           
             Edanus
             )
             should
             bee
             the
             Archbishopricke
             of
             all
             the
             Province
             of
             Leinster
             .
          
           But
           Bernards
           testimony
           ,
           wee
           have
           no
           reason
           not
           to
           beleeve
           ,
           relating
           what
           was
           knowne
           to
           be
           done
           in
           his
           owne
           very
           time
           :
           that
           r
           Celsus
           
           the
           Archbishop
           of
           
             Armagh
             ,
             had
             of
             the
             new
             constituted
             another
             Metropoliticall
             See
             ,
             but
             subiect
             to
             the
             first
             See
             ,
             and
             to
             the
             Archbishop
             thereof
             .
          
           By
           which
           wee
           may
           see
           that
           in
           the
           erection
           of
           new
           Archbishopricks
           and
           Bishopricks
           ,
           all
           things
           were
           here
           done
           at
           home
           ,
           without
           consulting
           with
           the
           See
           of
           Rome
           for
           the
           matter
           .
        
         
           As
           for
           the
           nomination
           and
           confirmation
           of
           the
           Archbishops
           and
           Bishops
           themselves
           :
           wee
           finde
           the
           manner
           of
           advancing
           Saint
           Livinus
           to
           his
           Archbishoprick
           thus
           laid
           downe
           by
           Boniface
           in
           the
           description
           of
           his
           life
           .
           s
           When
           
             Menalchus
             the
             Archbishop
             was
             dead
             ,
             Calomagnus
             the
             King
          
           of
           Scots
           ,
           
             and
             the
             troope
             of
             his
             Officers
             with
             the
             under-courtiers
             ,
             and
             the
             concourse
             of
             all
             that
             countrey
             ,
             with
             the
             same
             affection
             of
             heart
             cryed
             out
             ,
             that
             the
             holy
             Priest
             Livinus
             was
             most
             worthily
             to
             bee
             advanced
             unto
             the
             honour
             of
             this
             order
             .
             The
             King
             (
             more
             devout
             than
             all
             of
             them
             )
             consenting
             thereunto
             ,
             three
             or
             foure
             times
             placed
             the
             blessed
             man
             in
             the
             chaire
             of
             the
             Archbishoprick
             with
             due
             honour
             ,
             according
             to
             the
             will
             of
             the
             Lord.
          
           In
           like
           manner
           also
           did
           t
           King
           Ecgfrid
           cause
           our
           Cuthbert
           to
           be
           ordained
           Bishop
           of
           the
           Church
           of
           Landisfarne
           ;
           and
           King
           Pipin
           u
           granted
           the
           Bishoprick
           of
           Salzburg
           to
           our
           Virgilius
           :
           and
           Duke
           Gunzo
           would
           have
           x
           conferred
           the
           Bishoprick
           of
           Constance
           upon
           our
           Gallus
           ;
           but
           that
           he
           refused
           it
           ,
           and
           y
           caused
           another
           upon
           his
           recommendation
           to
           be
           preferred
           thereunto
           .
        
         
           In
           the
           booke
           of
           Landaffe
           ,
           which
           is
           called
           Tilo
           
           (
           eyther
           from
           Teliau
           the
           second
           Bishop
           of
           that
           place
           ,
           whose
           life
           is
           largely
           there
           described
           ;
           or
           rather
           from
           the
           place
           it selfe
           ,
           which
           of
           old
           was
           called
           *
           Telio
           )
           we
           reade
           that
           Germanus
           and
           Lupus
           z
           did
           consecrate
           chiefe
           Doctor
           over
           all
           the
           Britons
           inhabiting
           the
           right
           side
           of
           Britanie
           ,
           S.
           Dubricius
           ,
           being
           chosen
           Archbishop
           by
           the
           King
           and
           all
           the
           Diocesse
           :
           and
           that
           by
           the
           graunt
           of
           Mouric
           the
           King
           ,
           the
           Nobilitie
           ,
           Clergie
           ,
           and
           people
           ,
           they
           appointed
           his
           Episcopall
           See
           to
           bee
           at
           Landaff
           .
           that
           a
           Oudoceus
           ,
           the
           third
           Bishop
           after
           him
           ,
           being
           elected
           by
           King
           Mouric
           ,
           and
           the
           chiefe
           of
           the
           Clergie
           and
           Laitie
           of
           the
           whole
           Diocesse
           ,
           was
           by
           them
           sent
           to
           the
           Archibishop
           of
           Canterbury
           for
           his
           consecration
           .
           that
           b
           Gucaunus
           (
           the
           26
           th
           .
           Bishop
           of
           that
           Church
           )
           was
           consecrated
           by
           Dunstan
           Archbishop
           of
           Canterbury
           ;
           the
           pastorall
           staffe
           being
           given
           him
           in
           the
           Court
           by
           Edgar
           chiefe
           King
           of
           the
           English.
           that
           next
           after
           him
           ,
           c
           in
           the
           year
           .
           
           983.
           election
           being
           made
           by
           the
           Kings
           and
           the
           whole
           Clergie
           and
           people
           of
           Glamorgan
           ,
           and
           the
           pastorall
           staffe
           given
           in
           the
           Court
           by
           Ethelred
           chiefe
           King
           of
           the
           English
           ;
           Bledri
           was
           consecrated
           by
           the
           Archbishop
           of
           Canterbury
           ,
           who
           is
           there
           named
           Albricus
           .
           (
           though
           in
           truth
           ,
           at
           the
           yeare
           here
           assigned
           ,
           Dunstan
           did
           still
           hold
           the
           place
           .
           )
           and
           that
           after
           his
           decease
           in
           the
           yeare
           1022.
           d
           by
           the
           election
           of
           the
           people
           and
           Clergie
           of
           Landaff
           and
           the
           Kings
           of
           the
           Britons
           (
           namely
           King
           Riderch
           that
           reigned
           at
           that
           time
           through
           all
           Wales
           ,
           and
           Hivel
           the
           substitute
           of
           the
           King
           of
           Glamorgan
           )
           Ioseph
           was
           consecrated
           Bishop
           by
           Aelnod
           Archbishop
           of
           Canterbury
           ,
           at
           the
           word
           of
           Cnut
           King
           of
           England
           ,
           in
           whose
           Court
           the
           Pastorall
           staffe
           was
           given
           unto
           him
           .
        
         
           Here
           in
           Ireland
           much
           after
           the
           same
           manner
           ,
           M
           
           r.
           Campion
           himselfe
           setteth
           down
           ,
           that
           f
           
             to
             the
             Monarch
             was
             granted
             a
             negative
             in
             the
             nomination
             of
             Bishops
             at
             every
             vocation
             :
             the
             Clergie
             and
             Laity
             of
             the
             Diocesse
             recommending
             him
             to
             their
             King
             ,
             the
             King
             to
             the
             Monarch
             ,
             the
             Monarch
             to
             the
             Archbishop
             of
             Canterbury
             .
          
           although
           this
           last
           clause
           bee
           wrongly
           extended
           by
           him
           to
           the
           Bishops
           of
           the
           whole
           land
           ,
           which
           properly
           belonged
           to
           the
           Ostmann
           strangers
           ,
           that
           possessed
           the
           g
           three
           cities
           of
           
             Dublin
             ,
             Waterford
          
           ,
           and
           Limrick
           .
           For
           these
           being
           a
           Colonie
           of
           the
           Norwegians
           and
           Livonians
           ,
           and
           so
           country-men
           to
           the
           Normans
           ,
           when
           they
           had
           seene
           England
           subdued
           by
           the
           Conquerour
           ,
           and
           Normans
           advanced
           to
           the
           
           chief
           archbishoprick
           there
           ;
           would
           needs
           now
           assume
           to
           themselves
           the
           name
           of
           h
           Normans
           also
           ,
           and
           cause
           their
           Bishops
           to
           receive
           their
           consecration
           from
           no
           other
           metropolitan
           but
           the
           Archbishop
           of
           Canterbury
           .
           And
           forasmuch
           as
           they
           were
           confined
           within
           the
           walls
           of
           their
           own
           cities
           :
           the
           Bishops
           which
           they
           made
           had
           no
           other
           diocesse
           to
           exercise
           their
           jurisdiction
           in
           ,
           but
           onely
           the
           bare
           circuit
           of
           those
           cities
           .
           Whereupon
           we
           finde
           a
           Certificate
           made
           unto
           Pope
           Innocent
           the
           third
           in
           the
           yeare
           1216.
           by
           the
           Archbishop
           of
           Tuam
           and
           his
           suffraganes
           ;
           that
           i
           
             Iohn
             Papiron
             the
             Legate
             of
             the
             Church
             of
             Rome
             comming
             into
             Ireland
             ,
             found
             that
             Dublin
             indeed
             had
             a
             Bishop
             ,
             but
             such
             a
             one
             as
             did
             exercise
             his
             Episcopall
             office
             within
             the
             wals
             onely
             .
          
        
         
           The
           first
           Bishop
           which
           they
           had
           in
           Dublin
           (
           as
           it
           appeareth
           by
           the
           Records
           of
           that
           Church
           )
           was
           one
           Donatus
           ,
           or
           Dunanus
           ,
           as
           others
           call
           him
           :
           upon
           whose
           death
           ,
           in
           the
           yeare
           1074.
           
           k
           Gothric
           their
           King
           ,
           with
           the
           consent
           of
           the
           Clergie
           and
           people
           of
           Dublin
           ,
           chose
           one
           Patrick
           for
           their
           Bishop
           ,
           and
           directed
           him
           into
           England
           to
           bee
           consecrated
           by
           Lanfranc
           Archbishop
           of
           Canterbury
           :
           who
           sent
           him
           backe
           with
           commendatory
           l
           letters
           aswell
           to
           the
           said
           Gothric
           King
           of
           the
           Ostmans
           ,
           as
           to
           Terdeluacus
           the
           chiefe
           King
           or
           Monarch
           of
           the
           Irish.
           Hereupon
           ,
           after
           the
           decease
           of
           this
           Patrick
           ,
           m
           in
           the
           yeare
           1085.
           the
           same
           
           Terdeluacus
           and
           the
           Bishops
           of
           Ireland
           joyned
           with
           the
           Clergie
           and
           people
           of
           Dublin
           ,
           in
           the
           election
           of
           Donatus
           ,
           one
           of
           Lanfrancs
           owne
           Monkes
           in
           Canterbury
           :
           who
           was
           by
           him
           there
           also
           consecrated
           .
           Then
           when
           he
           dyed
           ,
           in
           the
           yeare
           1095.
           his
           nephew
           Samuel
           ,
           a
           monke
           of
           St.
           Albans
           but
           borne
           in
           Ireland
           ,
           was
           n
           chosen
           Bishop
           in
           his
           place
           by
           Murierdach
           King
           of
           Ireland
           ,
           and
           the
           Clergie
           and
           people
           of
           the
           Citie
           :
           by
           whose
           common
           decree
           he
           was
           also
           sent
           unto
           Anselme
           Archbishop
           of
           Canterbury
           for
           his
           consecration
           .
           Not
           long
           after
           ,
           the
           Waterfordians
           ,
           following
           the
           example
           of
           the
           Dublinians
           ,
           erected
           a
           Bishoprick
           among
           themselves
           ;
           o
           and
           sent
           their
           new
           Bishop
           to
           Canterburie
           for
           his
           consecration
           .
           the
           manner
           of
           whose
           election
           
             the
             Clergie
             and
             people
             of
             Waterford
          
           in
           the
           letters
           which
           they
           wrote
           at
           that
           time
           unto
           Anselme
           ,
           doe
           thus
           intimate
           .
           p
           
             We
             and
             our
             King
             Murchertach
             ,
             and
             Dofnald
             the
             Bishop
             ,
             and
             Dermeth
             our
             Captain
             the
             Kings
             brother
             ,
             have
             made
             choice
             of
             this
             Priest
             Malchus
             ,
             a
             monke
             of
             Walkeline
             Bishop
             of
             Winchester
             ,
          
           the
           same
           man
           ,
           without
           doubt
           ,
           who
           was
           afterward
           promoted
           to
           the
           Bishopricke
           of
           Lismore
           ;
           so
           much
           commended
           by
           Bernard
           in
           the
           life
           of
           Malachias
           .
        
         
           The
           last
           Bishop
           of
           Dublin
           in
           the
           yeare
           1122.
           was
           sent
           unto
           Anselmes
           next
           successor
           for
           his
           consecration
           :
           touching
           which
           I
           have
           seene
           this
           writ
           of
           King
           Henry
           the
           first
           ,
           directed
           unto
           him
           :
           
             
               Henricus
               Rex
               Anglia
               ,
               Radulpho
               Cantuariensi
               Archiepiscopo
               ,
               salutem
               .
               *
               Mandavit
               mihi
               Rex
               Hiberniae
               per
               
               Breve
               suum
               ,
               &
               Burgenses
               Dublinae
               ,
               quòd
               elegerunt
               hunc
               Gregorium
               in
               Episcopum
               ,
               &
               eum
               tibi
               mittunt
               consecrandum
               .
               Vndè
               tibi
               mando
               ,
               ut
               petitioni
               eorum
               satisfaciens
               ,
               ejus
               consecrationem
               sine
               dilatione
               expleas
               .
               Teste
               Ranulpho
               Cancellario
               apud
               Windelsor
               .
            
             
               Henry
               King
               of
               England
               ,
               to
               Ralphe
               Archbishop
               of
               Canterbury
               ,
               greeting
               .
               The
               King
               of
               Ireland
               hath
               intimated
               unto
               mee
               by
               his
               writ
               ,
               and
               the
               Burgesses
               of
               Dublin
               ,
               that
               they
               have
               chosen
               this
               Gregory
               for
               their
               Bishop
               ,
               and
               send
               him
               unto
               you
               to
               be
               consecrated
               .
               Wherfore
               I
               wish
               you
               ,
               that
               satisfying
               their
               request
               ,
               you
               performe
               his
               consecration
               without
               delay
               .
               Witnesse
               Ranuph
               our
               Chancellour
               at
               Windsor
               .
            
          
           All
           the
           Burgesses
           of
           Dublin
           likewise
           ,
           and
           the
           whole
           assembly
           of
           the
           Clergie
           ,
           directed
           their
           joint
           letters
           to
           the
           Archbishop
           of
           Canterburie
           the
           same
           time
           :
           where
           in
           among
           other
           things
           they
           write
           thus
           .
           q
           
             Know
             you
             for
             verity
             ,
             that
             the
             Bishops
             of
             Ireland
             have
             great
             indignation
             toward
             us
             ,
             and
             that
             Bishop
             most
             of
             all
             that
             dwelleth
             at
             Armagh
             :
             because
             we
             will
             not
             obey
             their
             ordination
             ,
             but
             will
             alwaies
             bee
             under
             your
             governement
             .
          
           Whereby
           we
           may
           see
           ,
           that
           as
           the
           Ostmans
           were
           desirous
           to
           sever
           themselves
           from
           the
           Irish
           ,
           and
           to
           bee
           esteemed
           Normans
           rather
           :
           so
           the
           Irish
           Bishops
           on
           the
           other
           side
           ,
           howsoever
           they
           digested
           in
           some
           sort
           the
           recourse
           which
           they
           had
           to
           Lanfranc
           and
           Anselme
           (
           who
           were
           two
           of
           the
           most
           famous
           men
           in
           their
           times
           ,
           and
           with
           whom
           they
           themselves
           were
           desirous
           to
           hold
           all
           good
           correspondence
           )
           yet
           could
           they
           not
           well
           brooke
           this
           continuation
           of
           their
           dependance
           
           upon
           a
           Metropolitan
           of
           another
           kingdome
           ;
           which
           they
           conceived
           to
           be
           somewhat
           derogatorie
           to
           the
           dignitie
           of
           their
           owne
           Primate
           .
           But
           this
           jealousie
           continued
           not
           long
           .
           for
           this
           same
           Gregorie
           being
           afterwards
           made
           Archbishop
           of
           Dublin
           ,
           and
           the
           Bishopricks
           here
           settled
           by
           
             Iohannes
             Paparo
          
           :
           aswell
           they
           of
           Dublin
           ,
           as
           the
           others
           of
           Waterford
           and
           Limrick
           (
           for
           they
           also
           had
           one
           Patricke
           consecrated
           Bishop
           unto
           them
           by
           Theobald
           Archbishop
           of
           Canterbury
           )
           did
           ever
           after
           that
           time
           cease
           to
           have
           any
           relation
           unto
           the
           See
           of
           Canterbury
           .
        
         
           And
           now
           to
           goe
           forward
           :
           as
           the
           Kings
           and
           people
           of
           this
           land
           in
           those
           elder
           times
           kept
           the
           nomination
           of
           their
           Archbishops
           and
           Bishops
           in
           their
           own
           hands
           ,
           and
           depended
           not
           upon
           the
           Popes
           provisions
           that
           way
           :
           so
           doe
           wee
           not
           finde
           by
           any
           approved
           record
           of
           antiquitie
           ,
           that
           any
           Visitations
           of
           the
           clergie
           were
           held
           here
           in
           the
           Popes
           name
           ;
           much
           lesse
           that
           any
           Indulgences
           were
           sought
           for
           by
           our
           people
           at
           his
           hands
           .
           For
           ,
           as
           for
           the
           r
           
             Charter
             of
             S.
             Patrick
          
           ,
           (
           by
           some
           intituled
           ,
           
             De
             antiquitate
             Avalonicâ
          
           )
           wherein
           s
           Phaganus
           and
           Deruvianus
           are
           said
           to
           have
           purchased
           ten
           or
           thirtie
           yeares
           of
           Indulgences
           from
           Pope
           Eleutherius
           ;
           and
           St.
           Patrick
           himselfe
           to
           have
           procured
           twelve
           yeares
           in
           his
           time
           from
           Pope
           Celestinus
           :
           it
           might
           easily
           bee
           demonstrated
           (
           if
           this
           were
           a
           place
           for
           it
           )
           that
           it
           is
           a
           meere
           figment
           ,
           devised
           by
           the
           Monkes
           of
           Glastenbury
           .
           Neyther
           doe
           I
           well
           know
           ,
           what
           credit
           is
           to
           bee
           given
           unto
           that
           stragling
           sentence
           ,
           
           which
           I
           finde
           ascribed
           unto
           the
           same
           authour
           .
           t
           
             If
             any
             questions
             doe
             arise
             in
             this
             Iland
             ,
             let
             them
             bee
             referred
             to
             the
             See
             Apostolick
             .
          
           or
           that
           other
           decree
           ,
           attributed
           to
           
             Auxilius
             ,
             Patricius
             ,
             Secundinus
          
           and
           Benignus
           .
           u
           
             Whensoever
             any
             cause
             that
             is
             very
             difficult
             ,
             and
             unknown
             unto
             all
             the
             Iudges
             of
             the
             Scottish
             nations
             ,
             shall
             arise
             ;
             it
             is
             rightly
             to
             bee
             referred
             to
             the
             See
             of
             the
             Archbishop
             of
             the
             Irish
             (
             to
             wit
             ,
             Patrick
             )
             and
             to
             the
             examination
             of
             the
             Prelate
             thereof
             .
             But
             if
             there
             ,
             by
             him
             and
             his
             wisemen
             ,
             a
             cause
             of
             this
             nature
             cannot
             easily
             be
             made
             up
             :
             wee
             have
             decreed
             ,
             it
             shall
             bee
             sent
             to
             the
             See
             Apostolick
             ;
             that
             is
             to
             say
             ,
             to
             the
             chaire
             of
             the
             Apostle
             Peter
             ,
             which
             hath
             the
             authoritie
             of
             the
             City
             of
             Rome
             .
          
           Onely
           this
           I
           will
           say
           ,
           that
           as
           it
           is
           most
           likely
           ,
           that
           St.
           Patrick
           had
           a
           speciall
           regard
           unto
           the
           Church
           of
           Rome
           ,
           from
           whence
           he
           was
           sent
           for
           the
           conversion
           of
           this
           Iland
           :
           so
           if
           I
           my selfe
           had
           lived
           in
           his
           daies
           ,
           for
           the
           resolution
           of
           a
           doubtful
           question
           I
           should
           as
           willingly
           have
           listened
           to
           the
           judgement
           of
           the
           Church
           of
           Rome
           ,
           as
           to
           the
           determination
           of
           any
           Church
           in
           the
           whole
           world
           ;
           so
           reverend
           an
           estimation
           have
           I
           of
           the
           integritie
           of
           that
           Church
           ,
           as
           it
           stood
           in
           those
           good
           daies
           .
           But
           that
           St.
           Patrick
           was
           of
           opinion
           ,
           that
           the
           Church
           of
           Rome
           was
           sure
           ever
           afterward
           to
           continue
           in
           that
           good
           estate
           ,
           and
           that
           there
           was
           a
           perpetuall
           priviledge
           annexed
           unto
           that
           See
           ,
           that
           it
           should
           never
           erre
           in
           judgment
           ,
           or
           that
           the
           Popes
           sentences
           were
           alway
           to
           bee
           held
           as
           infallible
           Oracles
           ;
           that
           will
           I
           never
           beleeve
           :
           
           sure
           I
           am
           ,
           that
           my
           countrey-men
           after
           him
           were
           of
           a
           farre
           other
           beleefe
           ;
           who
           were
           so
           farre
           from
           submitting
           themselves
           in
           this
           sort
           to
           whatsoever
           should
           proceed
           from
           the
           See
           of
           Rome
           ,
           that
           they
           oftentimes
           stood
           out
           against
           it
           ,
           when
           they
           had
           little
           cause
           so
           to
           doe
           .
           For
           proofe
           whereof
           I
           need
           to
           seeke
           no
           further
           ,
           than
           to
           those
           very
           allegations
           which
           have
           been
           lately
           urged
           for
           maintenance
           of
           the
           supremacie
           of
           the
           Pope
           and
           Church
           of
           Rome
           in
           this
           Countrey
           .
        
         
           First
           ,
           M
           
           r.
           Coppinger
           commeth
           upon
           us
           ,
           with
           this
           wise
           question
           .
           x
           
             Was
             not
             Ireland
             among
             other
             Countries
             absolved
             from
             the
             Pelagian
             heresie
             by
             the
             Church
             of
             Rome
             ,
             as
             Cesar
             Baronius
             writeth
             ?
          
           then
           hee
           setteth
           downe
           the
           copie
           of
           S.
           Gregories
           y
           epistle
           ,
           in
           answer
           unto
           the
           Irish
           Bishops
           that
           submitted
           themselves
           unto
           him
           .
           and
           concludeth
           in
           the
           end
           ,
           that
           
             the
             Bishops
             of
             Ireland
             being
             infected
             with
             the
             Pelagian
             errour
             ,
             sought
             absolution
             first
             of
             Pelagius
             the
             Pope
             :
             but
             the
             same
             was
             not
             effectually
             done
             ,
             untill
             S.
             Gregory
             did
             it
             .
          
           But
           in
           all
           this
           ,
           hee
           doth
           nothing
           else
           but
           bewray
           his
           owne
           ignorance
           .
           For
           neyther
           can
           hee
           shew
           it
           in
           
             Cesar
             Baronius
          
           or
           in
           any
           other
           author
           whatsoever
           ,
           that
           the
           Irish
           Bishops
           did
           ever
           seeke
           absolution
           from
           Pope
           Pelagius
           ;
           or
           that
           the
           one
           had
           to
           deale
           in
           any
           businesse
           at
           all
           with
           the
           other
           .
           Neyther
           yet
           can
           hee
           shew
           that
           ever
           they
           had
           to
           doe
           with
           Saint
           Gregory
           in
           any
           matter
           that
           did
           concerne
           the
           Pelagian
           heresie
           .
           for
           these
           bee
           dreames
           of
           Coppingers
           owne
           idle
           head
           .
           The
           epistle
           of
           S.
           Gregory
           dealeth
           onely
           with
           the
           controversie
           of
           the
           
             three
             chapters
          
           ,
           which
           were
           condemned
           by
           the
           fifth
           generall
           Councell
           ;
           whereof
           Baronius
           writeth
           
           thus
           .
           z
           
             All
             the
             Bishops
             that
             were
             in
             Ireland
             ,
             with
             most
             earnest
             study
             ,
             rose
             up
             jointly
             for
             the
             defence
             of
             the
             Three
             Chapters
             .
             And
             when
             they
             perceived
             that
             the
             Church
             of
             Rome
             did
             both
             receive
             the
             condemnation
             of
             the
             Three
             Chapters
             ,
             and
             strengthen
             the
             fifth
             Synod
             with
             her
             consent
             :
             they
             departed
             from
             her
             ,
             and
             clave
             to
             the
             rest
             of
             the
             schismatickes
             ,
             that
             were
             eyther
             in
             Italy
             ,
             or
             in
             Africke
             ,
             or
             in
             other
             countries
             ,
             animated
             with
             that
             vaine
             confidence
             ,
             that
             they
             did
             stand
             for
             the
             Catholicke
             faith
             ,
             while
             they
             defended
             those
             things
             that
             were
             concluded
             in
             the
             Councell
             of
             Chalcedon
             .
          
           a
           And
           
             so
             much
             the
             more
             fixedly
          
           (
           saith
           he
           )
           
             did
             they
             cleave
             to
             their
             error
             ,
             because
             whatsoever
             Italy
             did
             suffer
             by
             commotions
             of
             warre
             ,
             by
             famine
             or
             pestilence
             ,
             all
             these
             unhappy
             things
             they
             thought
             did
             therefore
             befall
             unto
             it
             ,
             because
             it
             had
             undertaken
             to
             fight
             for
             the
             fifth
             Synod
             against
             the
             Councell
             of
             Chalcedon
             .
          
        
         
           Thus
           farre
           Baronius
           :
           out
           of
           whose
           narration
           this
           may
           bee
           collected
           ,
           that
           the
           Bishops
           of
           Ireland
           did
           not
           take
           all
           the
           resolutions
           of
           the
           Church
           of
           Rome
           for
           undoubted
           oracles
           ;
           but
           when
           they
           thought
           that
           they
           had
           better
           reason
           on
           their
           sides
           ,
           they
           preferred
           the
           judgement
           of
           other
           Churches
           before
           it
           .
           Wherein
           how
           peremptory
           they
           were
           ,
           when
           they
           wrote
           unto
           St.
           Gregory
           of
           the
           matter
           ;
           may
           easily
           be
           perceived
           by
           these
           parcels
           of
           the
           answer
           ,
           which
           hee
           returned
           unto
           their
           letters
           .
           b
           
             The
             first
             entry
             of
             your
             epistle
             
             hath
             notified
             ,
             that
             you
             suffer
             a
             grievous
             perfecution●
             which
             persecution
             indeed
             ,
             when
             it
             is
             not
             sustained
             for
             a
             reasonable
             cause
             ,
             doth
             profit
             nothing
             unto
             salvation
             .
          
           and
           c
           
             therefore
             it
             is
             very
             unfit
             ,
             that
             you
             should
             glory
             of
             that
             persecution
             ,
             as
             you
             call
             it
             ,
             by
             which
             it
             is
             certaine
             you
             cannot
             be
             promoted
             to
             everlasting
             rewards
             .
          
           d
           
             And
             whereas
             you
             write
             ,
             that
             since
             that
             time
             among
             other
             provinces
             Italy
             hath
             beene
             most
             afflicted
             ;
             you
             ought
             not
             to
             object
             that
             unto
             it
             as
             a
             reproach
             :
             because
             it
             is
             written
             :
             Whom
             the
             Lord
             loveth
             he
             chasteneth
             ,
             and
             scourgeth
             every
             sonne
             that
             he
             receiveth
             .
          
           Then
           having
           spoken
           of
           the
           booke
           that
           Pope
           Pelagius
           did
           write
           of
           this
           controversie
           (
           which
           indeed
           was
           penned
           by
           Gregory
           himselfe
           )
           hee
           addeth
           .
           e
           
             If
             after
             the
             reading
             of
             this
             booke
             ,
             you
             will
             persist
             in
             that
             deliberation
             ,
             wherein
             now
             you
             are
             ;
             without
             doubt
             you
             shew
             ,
             that
             you
             give
             your selves
             to
             bee
             ruled
             not
             by
             reason
             ,
             but
             by
             obstinacie
             .
          
           By
           all
           which
           you
           may
           see
           ,
           what
           credit
           is
           to
           be
           given
           unto
           the
           man
           ,
           who
           would
           beare
           us
           in
           hand
           ,
           that
           this
           epistle
           of
           St.
           Gregory
           was
           sent
           as
           an
           answer
           unto
           the
           Bishops
           of
           Ireland
           ,
           that
           did
           submit
           themselves
           unto
           him
           :
           whereas
           (
           to
           say
           nothing
           of
           the
           f
           copies
           ,
           wherein
           this
           epistle
           is
           noted
           to
           have
           beene
           written
           to
           the
           Bishops
           of
           Iberiâ
           ,
           and
           not
           ,
           in
           Hiberniâ
           )
           the
           least
           argument
           of
           any
           submission
           doth
           not
           appeare
           in
           any
           part
           of
           that
           epistle
           ;
           but
           the
           whole
           course
           of
           it
           doth
           cleerly
           manifest
           the
           flat
           contrary
           .
        
         
           
             In
             the
             next
             place
             steppeth
             forth
          
           Osullevan
           Beare
           ;
           
             who
             in
             his
          
           Catholick
           history
           of
           Ireland
           ,
           
             would
             have
             us
             
             take
             knowledge
             of
             this
             ,
             that
          
           g
           when
           the
           Irish
           Doctors
           did
           not
           agree
           together
           upon
           great
           questions
           of
           Faith
           ,
           or
           did
           heare
           of
           any
           new
           doctrine
           brought
           from
           abroad
           ,
           they
           were
           wont
           to
           consult
           with
           the
           Bishop
           of
           Rome
           the
           Oracle
           of
           truth
           .
           
             That
             they
             consulted
             with
             the
             Bishop
             of
          
           Rome
           ,
           
             when
             difficult
             questions
             did
             arise
             ,
             wee
             easily
             grant
             :
             but
             that
             they
             thought
             they
             were
             bound
             in
             conscience
             to
             stand
             to
             his
             judgement
             ,
             whatsoever
             it
             should
             bee
             ,
             and
             to
             entertaine
             all
             his
             resolutions
             as
             certaine
          
           Oracles
           of
           truth
           ;
           
             is
             the
             point
             that
             wee
             would
             faine
             see
             proved
             .
             For
             this
             hee
             telleth
             us
             ,
             that
          
           h
           when
           questions
           and
           disputations
           did
           arise
           here
           concerning
           the
           time
           of
           Easter
           and
           the
           Pelagian
           heresie
           ;
           the
           Doctors
           of
           Ireland
           referred
           the
           matter
           unto
           the
           See
           Apostolicke
           .
           Whereupon
           ,
           the
           errour
           of
           Pelagius
           is
           reported
           to
           have
           found
           no
           patron
           or
           maintainer
           in
           Ireland
           :
           and
           the
           common
           course
           of
           celebrating
           Easter
           was
           embraced
           both
           by
           the
           Northren
           Irish
           ,
           and
           by
           the
           Picts
           and
           Britons
           ,
           as
           soon
           as
           they
           understood
           the
           rite
           of
           the
           Romane
           Church
           .
           Which
           (
           
             saith
             hee
          
           )
           doth
           not
           obscurely
           appeare
           by
           the
           two
           heads
           of
           the
           Apostolicke
           letters
           ,
           related
           by
           Bede
           ,
           lib.
           2.
           cap.
           19.
           
        
         
           But
           that
           those
           
             Apostolick
             letters
          
           (
           as
           he
           calleth
           them
           )
           had
           that
           successe
           which
           hee
           talketh
           of
           ,
           appeareth
           neither
           plainly
           nor
           obscurely
           by
           Bede
           ,
           or
           any
           other
           authority
           whatsoever
           .
           
             The
             errour
             of
             Pelagius
          
           ,
           saith
           
           he
           ,
           
             is
             reported
             to
             have
             found
             no
             patron
             or
             maintainer
             in
             Ireland
             .
          
           But
           who
           is
           he
           that
           reporteth
           so
           ,
           beside
           
             Philip
             Osullevan
          
           ?
           a
           worthy
           author
           to
           ground
           a
           report
           of
           antiquity
           upon
           :
           who
           in
           relating
           the
           matters
           that
           fell
           out
           in
           his
           owne
           time
           ,
           discovereth
           himselfe
           to
           bee
           as
           egregious
           a
           lyar
           ,
           as
           any
           (
           I
           verily
           thinke
           )
           that
           this
           day
           breatheth
           in
           Christendome
           .
           The
           
             Apostolicke
             letters
          
           he
           speaketh
           of
           ,
           were
           written
           (
           as
           before
           hath
           bin
           touched
           )
           in
           the
           yeere
           of
           our
           Lord
           DCXXXIX
           .
           during
           the
           vacancie
           of
           the
           Romane
           See
           ,
           upon
           the
           death
           of
           Severinus
           .
           Our
           Countryman
           Kilianus
           repayred
           to
           Rome
           47.
           yeeres
           after
           that
           ,
           and
           was
           ordained
           Bishop
           there
           by
           Pope
           Conon
           in
           the
           yeere
           DCLXXXVI
           .
           The
           reason
           of
           his
           comming
           thither
           ,
           is
           thus
           laid
           downe
           by
           Egilwardus
           or
           who
           ever
           else
           was
           the
           author
           of
           his
           life
           .
           i
           
             For
             Ireland
             had
             beene
             of
             old
             defiled
             with
             the
             Pelagian
             heresie
             ,
             and
             condemned
             by
             the
             Apostolicall
             censure
             ,
             which
             could
             not
             bee
             loosed
             but
             by
             the
             Romane
             judgement
             .
          
           If
           this
           be
           true
           :
           then
           that
           is
           false
           which
           Osullevan
           reporteth
           of
           the
           effect
           of
           his
           
             Apostolicall
             Epistle
          
           ,
           that
           it
           did
           so
           presently
           quash
           the
           Pelagian
           heresie
           ,
           as
           it
           durst
           not
           once
           peepe
           up
           within
           this
           Iland
           .
        
      
       
         
           CHAP.
           IX
           .
        
         
           
             Of
             the
             controversie
             which
             the
             Britons
             ,
             Picts
             ,
             and
             Irish
             maintained
             against
             the
             Church
             of
             Rome
             ,
             touching
             the
             celebration
             of
             Easter
             .
          
        
         
           THe
           difference
           betwixt
           the
           Romanes
           and
           the
           Irish
           in
           the
           celebration
           of
           Easter
           ,
           consisted
           in
           this
           .
           
           The
           Romanes
           kept
           the
           memoriall
           of
           our
           Lords
           resurrection
           upon
           that
           Sunday
           ,
           which
           fell
           betwixt
           the
           XV.
           and
           the
           XXI
           .
           day
           of
           the
           Moone
           (
           both
           termes
           included
           )
           next
           after
           the
           XXI
           .
           day
           of
           March
           ;
           which
           they
           accounted
           to
           bee
           the
           seat
           of
           the
           
             Vernall
             aequinoctium
          
           ,
           that
           is
           to
           say
           ,
           that
           time
           of
           the
           Spring
           wherein
           the
           day
           and
           the
           night
           were
           of
           equall
           length
           .
           and
           in
           reckoning
           the
           age
           of
           the
           Moone
           they
           followed
           the
           Alexandrian
           cycle
           of
           XIX
           .
           yeeres
           (
           whence
           our
           
             golden
             number
          
           had
           his
           originall
           )
           as
           it
           was
           explained
           unto
           them
           by
           
             Dionysius
             Exiguus
          
           :
           which
           is
           the
           account
           that
           is
           still
           observed
           ,
           not
           onely
           in
           the
           Church
           of
           England
           ,
           but
           also
           among
           all
           the
           Christians
           of
           
             Greece
             ,
             Russia
             ,
             Asia
             ,
             Aegypt
             ,
          
           and
           Aethiopia
           ;
           and
           was
           (
           since
           the
           time
           that
           I
           my selfe
           was
           borne
           )
           generally
           received
           in
           all
           Christendome
           ,
           untill
           the
           late
           change
           of
           the
           Kalendar
           was
           made
           by
           Pope
           
             Gregory
             the
          
           XIII
           th
           .
           The
           Northren
           Irish
           and
           Scottish
           ,
           together
           with
           the
           Picts
           ,
           observed
           the
           custome
           of
           the
           Britons
           :
           a
           keeping
           their
           Easter
           upon
           the
           Sunday
           that
           fell
           betwixt
           the
           XIIII
           .
           and
           the
           XX.
           day
           of
           the
           Moone
           ;
           and
           following
           in
           their
           account
           thereof
           ,
           not
           the
           XIX
           .
           yeeres
           computation
           of
           Anatolius
           ,
           b
           but
           
             Sulpicius
             Severus
          
           his
           circle
           of
           LXXXIIII
           .
           yeeres
           .
           for
           howsoever
           they
           extolled
           Anatolius
           c
           for
           appointing
           (
           as
           they
           supposed
           )
           the
           bounds
           of
           Easter
           betwixt
           the
           XIIII
           .
           and
           the
           XX.
           day
           of
           the
           Moone
           ,
           yet
           Wilfride
           in
           the
           
           Synod
           of
           Strenshal
           chargeth
           them
           utterly
           to
           have
           rejected
           his
           cycle
           of
           XIX
           .
           yeeres
           :
           from
           which
           therefore
           Cummianus
           draweth
           an
           argument
           against
           them
           ;
           that
           d
           
             they
             can
             never
             come
             to
             the
             true
             account
             of
             Easter
             ,
             who
             observe
             the
             cycle
             of
          
           LXXXIIII
           .
           yeeres
           .
        
         
           To
           reduce
           the
           Irish
           unto
           conformity
           with
           the
           Church
           of
           Rome
           in
           this
           point
           ,
           Pope
           Honorius
           (
           the
           first
           of
           that
           name
           )
           directed
           his
           letters
           unto
           them
           :
           e
           
             Exhortintg
             them
             ,
             that
             they
             would
             not
             esteeme
             their
             own
             paucity
             ,
             seated
             in
             the
             utmost
             borders
             of
             the
             earth
             ,
             more
             wise
             than
             the
             ancient
             or
             moderne
             Churches
             of
             Christ
             through
             the
             whole
             world
             ;
             and
             that
             they
             would
             not
             celebrate
             another
             Easter
             contrary
             to
             the
             Paschall
             computations
             ,
             and
             the
             Synodall
             decrees
             of
             the
             Bishops
             of
             the
             whole
             world
             .
          
           and
           shortly
           after
           ,
           the
           Clergie
           of
           Rome
           (
           as
           wee
           have
           said
           )
           upon
           the
           death
           of
           Severinus
           ,
           wrote
           other
           letters
           unto
           them
           to
           the
           same
           effect
           .
           Now
           where
           Osullevan
           avoucheth
           ,
           that
           
             the
             common
             custome
             used
             by
             the
             Church
             in
             celebrating
             the
             feast
             of
             the
             Lords
             resurrection
             was
             alwaies
             observed
             by
             the
             Southerne
             Irish
          
           ;
           and
           now
           
             embraced
             also
             by
             the
             Northren
             ,
             together
             with
             the
             Picts
             and
             Britons
             (
             who
             received
             the
             faith
             from
             Irish
             Doctors
             )
             when
             they
             had
             knowledge
             given
             them
             of
             the
             rite
             of
             the
             Church
             of
             Rome
             :
          
           in
           all
           this
           (
           according
           to
           his
           common
           wont
           )
           he
           speaketh
           never
           a
           true
           word
           .
           For
           neyther
           did
           the
           
             Southerne
             Irish
          
           alwayes
           observe
           the
           celebration
           of
           Easter
           commonly
           received
           abroad
           :
           neyther
           did
           the
           
             Northren
             Irish
          
           ,
           nor
           the
           Picts
           ,
           nor
           the
           Britons
           ,
           many
           yeeres
           after
           this
           admonition
           given
           by
           the
           Church
           of
           Rome
           ,
           admit
           that
           observation
           among
           them
           .
           to
           speake
           nothing
           of
           his
           folly
           in
           saying
           ,
           that
           the
           Britons
           received
           the
           faith
           from
           the
           Irish
           :
           when
           
           the
           contrary
           is
           so
           well
           knowne
           ,
           that
           the
           Irish
           rather
           received
           the
           same
           from
           the
           *
           Britons
           .
        
         
           That
           the
           common
           custome
           of
           celebrating
           the
           time
           of
           Easter
           was
           not
           alwaies
           observed
           by
           the
           
             Southerne
             Irish
          
           ,
           may
           appeare
           by
           those
           words
           of
           Bede
           ,
           in
           the
           third
           booke
           of
           his
           history
           and
           the
           third
           chapter
           .
           
             Porrò
             gentes
             Scottorum
             ,
             quae
             in
             australibus
             Hiberniae
             insulae
             partibus
             morabantur
             ,
             jamdudum
             ad
             admonitionem
             Apostolicae
             sedis
             antistitis
             Paschacanonico
             ritu
             observare
             didicerunt
             .
          
           For
           if
           (
           as
           this
           place
           cleerly
           proveth
           )
           
             the
             nations
             of
             the
             Scots
             ,
             that
             dwelt
             in
             the
             Southern
             parts
             of
             Ireland
             ,
             did
             learne
             to
             observe
             Easter
             after
             the
             canonicall
             manner
             ,
             upon
             the
             admonition
             of
             the
             Bishop
             of
             Rome
             :
          
           it
           is
           evident
           ,
           that
           before
           that
           admonition
           they
           did
           observe
           it
           after
           another
           manner
           .
           The
           word
           jamdudum
           ,
           which
           Bede
           here
           useth
           ,
           is
           taken
           among
           authors
           oftentimes
           in
           contrary
           senses
           :
           either
           to
           signifie
           
             a
             great
             while
             since
          
           ,
           or
           else
           ,
           
             but
             lately
          
           ,
           or
           erewhile
           ,
           In
           the
           former
           sense
           it
           must
           bee
           here
           taken
           ,
           if
           it
           have
           relation
           to
           the
           time
           wherein
           Bede
           did
           write
           his
           book
           :
           and
           in
           the
           latter
           also
           it
           may
           be
           taken
           ,
           if
           it
           be
           referred
           to
           the
           time
           whereof
           he
           treateth
           ,
           (
           which
           is
           the
           more
           likely
           opinion
           )
           namely
           to
           the
           comming
           of
           Bishop
           Aidan
           into
           England
           ;
           which
           fell
           out
           about
           halfe
           a
           yeere
           ,
           after
           that
           Honorius
           had
           sent
           his
           admonitorie
           letters
           to
           the
           Irish.
           who
           ,
           as
           hee
           was
           the
           first
           Bishop
           of
           Rome
           we
           can
           reade
           of
           ,
           that
           admonished
           them
           to
           reforme
           their
           rite
           of
           keeping
           the
           time
           of
           Easter
           :
           so
           that
           the
           Irish
           also
           much
           about
           the
           same
           time
           conformed
           themselves
           herein
           to
           the
           Romane
           usage
           ,
           may
           thus
           be
           manifested
           .
        
         
           When
           Bishop
           Aidan
           came
           into
           England
           from
           the
           Iland
           Hy
           ,
           now
           called
           Y-Columkille
           ;
           f
           the
           Colledge
           
           of
           Monkes
           there
           was
           governed
           by
           Segenius
           ,
           who
           in
           the
           g
           inscription
           of
           the
           epistle
           of
           the
           clergie
           of
           Rome
           sent
           unto
           the
           Irish
           ,
           is
           called
           Segianus
           .
           Now
           there
           is
           yet
           extant
           in
           Sir
           
             Robert
             Cottons
          
           worthy
           Librarie
           ,
           an
           epistle
           of
           Cummianus
           directed
           to
           this
           Segienus
           (
           for
           so
           is
           his
           name
           there
           written
           )
           Abbot
           of
           
             Y-Columkille
             ▪
          
           wherein
           he
           plainly
           declareth
           ,
           that
           the
           great
           cycle
           of
           DXXXII
           .
           yeeres
           ,
           and
           the
           Romane
           use
           of
           celebrating
           the
           time
           of
           Easter
           according
           to
           the
           same
           ,
           was
           then
           newly
           brought
           in
           into
           this
           country
           .
           h
           
             For
             the
             first
             yeere
          
           (
           saith
           he
           )
           
             wherein
             the
             cycle
             of
          
           DXXXII
           .
           
             yeeres
             began
             to
             bee
             observed
             by
             our
             men
             ;
             I
             received
             it
             not
             ,
             but
             held
             my
             peace
             ,
             daring
             neither
             to
             commend
             it
             nor
             to
             dispraise
             it
             .
          
           That
           yeere
           being
           past
           ,
           he
           saith
           he
           consulted
           with
           his
           ancients
           ;
           who
           were
           the
           successors
           of
           
             Bishop
             Ailbeus
             ,
             Queranus
             Coloniensis
             ,
             Brendinus
             ,
             Nessanus
          
           and
           Lugidus
           .
           who
           being
           gathered
           together
           
             in
             Campo-lene
          
           ,
           concluded
           to
           celebrate
           Easter
           the
           yeere
           following
           together
           with
           the
           universall
           Church
           .
           i
           
             But
             not
             long
             after
          
           (
           saith
           hee
           )
           
             there
             arose
             up
             a
             certaine
             whited
             wall
             ,
             pretending
             to
             keepe
             the
             tradition
             of
             the
             Elders
             ;
             which
             did
             not
             make
             both
             one
             ,
             but
             divided
             them
             ,
             and
             made
             voide
             in
             part
             that
             which
             was
             promised
             :
             whom
             the
             Lord
             (
             as
             I
             hope
             )
             will
             smite
             ,
             in
             whatsoever
             manner
             he
             pleaseth
             .
          
        
         
           To
           this
           argument
           drawne
           from
           
             the
             tradition
             of
             the
             elders
          
           ,
           hee
           maketh
           answer
           :
           that
           k
           
             they
             did
             simply
             and
             faithfully
             observe
             that
             which
             they
             knew
             to
             bee
             best
             in
             their
             dayes
             ,
             without
             the
             fault
             of
             any
             contradiction
             or
             animosity
             ,
             and
             did
             so
             recommend
             it
             to
             their
             posterity
             .
          
           and
           
           opposeth
           thereunto
           n
           
             the
             unanimous
             rule
             of
             the
             Vniversall
             Catholicke
             Church
             :
          
           deeming
           this
           to
           be
           a
           very
           harsh
           conclusion
           .
           o
           
             Rome
             erreth
             ,
             Ierusalem
             erreth
             ,
             Alexandria
             erreth
             ,
             Antioch
             erreth
             ,
             the
             whole
             world
             erreth
             :
             the
             Scottish
             onely
             and
             the
             Britons
             doe
             alone
             hold
             the
             right
             .
          
           but
           especially
           hee
           urgeth
           the
           authority
           of
           the
           first
           of
           these
           Patriarchicall
           Sees
           ,
           which
           now
           (
           since
           the
           advancement
           thereof
           by
           the
           Emperour
           Phocas
           )
           began
           to
           bee
           admired
           by
           the
           inhabitants
           of
           the
           earth
           ,
           as
           
             the
             place
             which
             God
             had
             chosen
             ;
             whereunto
             ,
             if
             greater
             causes
             did
             arise
             ,
             recourse
             was
             to
             bee
             had
             ,
             according
             to
             the
             Synodicall
             decree
             ,
             as
             unto
             the
             head
             of
             cities
             .
          
           and
           therefore
           he
           saith
           ,
           that
           they
           sent
           some
           unto
           Rome
           :
           who
           returning
           backe
           in
           the
           third
           yeere
           ,
           informed
           them
           ,
           that
           they
           met
           there
           with
           a
           Grecian
           ,
           and
           an
           Hebrew
           ,
           and
           a
           Scythian
           ,
           and
           an
           Aegyptian
           in
           one
           lodging
           ;
           and
           that
           they
           all
           ,
           and
           the
           whole
           world
           too
           ,
           did
           keep
           their
           Easter
           at
           the
           same
           time
           ,
           when
           the
           Irish
           were
           dis-joyned
           from
           them
           by
           the
           space
           of
           a
           whole
           *
           moneth
           .
           p
           
             And
             wee
             have
             proved
          
           (
           saith
           
             Cummianus
             )
             that
             the
             vertue
             of
             God
             was
             in
             the
             relicks
             of
             the
             holy
             Martyrs
             ,
             and
             the
             Scriptures
             which
             they
             brought
             with
             them
             .
             For
             we
             saw
             with
             our
             eyes
             ,
             a
             mayde
             altogether
             blinde
             opening
             her
             eyes
             at
             these
             relickes
             ,
             and
             a
             man
             sicke
             of
             the
             palsie
             walking
             ,
             and
             many
             divels
             cast
             out
             .
          
           Thus
           farre
           he
           .
        
         
           The
           
             Northren
             Irish
          
           and
           
             Albanian
             Scottish
          
           on
           the
           other
           side
           ,
           made
           little
           reckoning
           of
           the
           authority
           ,
           either
           of
           the
           Bishop
           or
           of
           the
           Church
           of
           Rome
           .
           And
           
           therefore
           Bede
           ,
           speaking
           of
           Oswy
           king
           of
           Northumberland
           ,
           saith
           that
           q
           
             notwithstanding
             he
             was
             brought
             up
             by
             the
             Scottish
             ,
             yet
             he
             understood
             that
             the
             Roman
             was
             the
             Catholike
             and
             Apostolike
             Church
          
           (
           or
           ,
           
             that
             the
             Roman
             Church
             was
             Catholike
             and
             Apostolike
             )
          
           intimating
           therby
           ,
           that
           the
           Scottish
           ,
           among
           whom
           he
           received
           his
           education
           ,
           were
           of
           another
           minde
           .
           And
           long
           before
           that
           ,
           
             Laurentius
             ,
             Mellitus
          
           and
           Iustus
           (
           who
           were
           sent
           into
           England
           by
           Pope
           Gregory
           to
           assist
           Austin
           )
           in
           a
           letter
           which
           they
           sent
           unto
           the
           
             Scots
             that
             did
             inhabite
             Ireland
          
           (
           so
           Bede
           writeth
           )
           complained
           of
           the
           distaste
           given
           unto
           them
           by
           their
           country-men
           ,
           in
           this
           manner
           .
           r
           
             Wee
             knew
             the
             Britons
             ,
             wee
             thought
             that
             the
             Scots
             were
             better
             than
             they
             .
             But
             wee
             learned
             by
             Bishop
             Daganus
             comming
             into
             this
             Iland
             ,
             and
             Abbot
             Columbanus
             comming
             into
             France
             ;
             that
             the
             Scots
             did
             differ
             nothing
             from
             the
             Britons
             in
             their
             conversation
             .
             For
             Daganus
             the
             Bishop
             comming
             unto
             us
             ,
             would
             not
             take
             meate
             with
             us
             ,
             no
             not
             so
             much
             as
             in
             the
             same
             lodging
             wherein
             we
             did
             eate
             .
          
        
         
           And
           as
           for
           miracles
           ,
           wee
           finde
           them
           as
           rife
           among
           them
           that
           were
           opposite
           to
           the
           Romane
           tradition
           ,
           as
           upon
           the
           other
           side
           .
           If
           you
           doubt
           it
           ,
           reade
           what
           Bede
           hath
           written
           of
           Bishop
           Aidan
           (
           s
           
             who
             of
             what
             merit
             hee
             was
             ,
             the
             inward
             Iudge
             hath
             taught
             ,
             even
             by
             the
             tokens
             of
             miracles
          
           ;
           saith
           hee
           )
           and
           Adamnanus
           of
           the
           life
           of
           S.
           Colme
           or
           Columkille
           .
           Whereupon
           Bishop
           Colman
           in
           the
           Synod
           at
           Strenshal
           frameth
           this
           conclusion
           .
           
           t
           
             Is
             it
             to
             be
             beleeved
             ,
             that
             Colme
             our
             most
             reverend
             father
             ,
             and
             his
             successors
             ,
             men
             beloved
             of
             God
             ,
             which
             observed
             Easter
             in
             the
             same
             manner
             that
             wee
             doe
             ,
             did
             hold
             or
             doe
             that
             which
             was
             contrary
             to
             the
             holy
             Scriptures
             ?
             seeing
             there
             were
             very
             many
             among
             them
             ,
             to
             whose
             heavenly
             holinesse
             the
             signes
             and
             miracles
             which
             they
             did
             ,
             bare
             testimony
             :
             whom
             nothing
             doubting
             to
             bee
             Saints
             ,
             I
             desist
             not
             to
             follow
             evermore
             their
             life
             ,
             maners
             ,
             and
             discipline
             .
          
           What
           Wilfride
           replied
           to
           this
           ,
           may
           be
           seene
           in
           Bede
           :
           that
           which
           I
           much
           wonder
           at
           ,
           among
           the
           many
           wonderfull
           things
           related
           of
           St.
           Colme
           by
           Adamnanus
           ,
           is
           this
           ▪
           that
           where
           hee
           saith
           ,
           that
           this
           Saint
           ,
           during
           the
           time
           of
           his
           abode
           in
           the
           abbay
           of
           Clone
           (
           now
           called
           Clonmacnosh
           )
           did
           u
           
             by
             the
             revelation
             of
             the
             holy
             Ghost
             prophesie
             of
             that
             discord
             ,
             which
             after
             many
             dayes
             arose
             among
             the
             Churches
             of
             Scotland
          
           (
           or
           
             Ireland
             )
             for
             the
             diversity
             of
             the
             feast
             of
             Easter
             :
          
           yet
           hee
           telleth
           us
           not
           ,
           that
           the
           holy
           Ghost
           revealed
           unto
           him
           ,
           that
           he
           himselfe
           (
           whose
           example
           animated
           his
           followers
           to
           stand
           more
           stiffely
           herein
           against
           the
           Romane
           rite
           )
           was
           in
           the
           wrong
           ,
           and
           ought
           to
           conforme
           his
           judgment
           to
           the
           tradition
           of
           the
           Churches
           abroad
           .
           as
           if
           the
           holy
           Ghost
           did
           not
           much
           care
           ,
           whether
           of
           both
           sides
           should
           carry
           the
           matter
           away
           in
           this
           controversie
           :
           for
           which
           (
           if
           you
           please
           )
           you
           shall
           heare
           a
           very
           pretty
           tale
           out
           of
           an
           old
           Legend
           ,
           concerning
           this
           same
           discord
           whereof
           S.
           Colme
           is
           said
           to
           have
           prophesied
           .
        
         
           x
           Vpon
           a
           certaine
           time
           
             (
             saith
             my
             Author
          
           )
           there
           was
           a
           
           great
           Councell
           of
           the
           people
           of
           Ireland
           in
           the
           white
           field
           :
           among
           whom
           there
           was
           contention
           about
           the
           order
           of
           Easter
           .
           For
           Lasreanus
           ,
           the
           abbot
           of
           the
           monasterie
           of
           Leighlin
           ,
           unto
           whom
           there
           were
           subject
           a
           thousand
           &
           five
           hundred
           monkes
           ,
           defended
           the
           new
           order
           that
           lately
           came
           from
           Rome
           :
           but
           others
           defended
           the
           old
           .
           This
           Lasreanus
           or
           Lazerianus
           
             is
             the
             man
             ,
             who
             in
             other
             Legends
             (
             of
             no
             other
             credit
             than
             this
             we
             now
             have
             in
             hand
             )
             is
             reported
             to
             have
             been
             the
             Bishop
             of
          
           Romes
           
             Legate
             in
          
           Ireland
           ;
           
             and
             is
             commonly
             accounted
             to
             have
             beene
             the
             first
             Bishop
             of
             the
             Church
             of
          
           Leighlin
           .
           
             His
             principall
             antagonist
             at
             this
             meeting
             was
             one
          
           Munna
           ,
           
             founder
             of
             the
             monasterie
             which
             from
             his
             was
             called
          
           Teach-munna
           ,
           
             that
             is
             ,
             the
             house
             of
          
           Munna
           
             (
             in
             the
             Bishoprick
             of
          
           Meath
           :
           )
           
             who
             would
             needs
             bring
             this
             question
             to
             the
             same
             kinde
             of
             triall
             here
             ,
             that
          
           Austin
           
             the
             monke
             is
             said
             to
             have
             done
             in
          
           England
           .
           
             In
             defence
             of
             the
          
           Roman
           order
           ,
           Bede
           
             telleth
             us
             that
          
           Austin
           
             made
             this
             motion
             to
             the
          
           Brittish
           
             Bishops
             ,
             for
             a
             finall
             conclusion
             of
             the
             businesse
             .
          
           y
           
             Let
             us
             beseech
             God
             ,
             which
             maketh
             men
             to
             dwell
             of
             one
             mind
             together
             in
             their
             fathers
             house
             ;
             that
             hee
             will
             vouchsafe
             by
             some
             heavenly
             signes
             to
             make
             knowne
             unto
             us
             ,
             what
             tradition
             is
             to
             be
             followed
             ,
             and
             by
             what
             way
             wee
             may
             hasten
             to
             the
             entry
             of
             his
             kingdome
             .
             Let
             some
             sicke
             man
             be
             brought
             hither
             ;
             and
             by
             whose
             prayers
             he
             shall
             bee
             cured
             ,
             let
             his
             faith
             and
             working
             be
             beleeved
             to
             be
             acceptable
             unto
             God
             ,
             and
             to
             bee
             followed
             by
             all
             men
             .
          
        
         
           Now
           Munna
           ,
           
             who
             stood
             in
             defence
             of
             the
             order
             formerly
             used
             by
             the
          
           British
           and
           Irish
           ,
           
             maketh
             a
             more
             liberall
             proffer
             in
             this
             kinde
             ,
             and
             leaveth
          
           Lasreanus
           
           
             to
             his
             choyce
          
           .
           z
           Let
           us
           dispute
           briefly
           (
           
             saith
             he
          
           )
           but
           in
           the
           name
           of
           God
           let
           us
           give
           judgement
           .
           Three
           things
           are
           given
           to
           thy
           choyce
           ,
           Lasreanus
           .
           Two
           bookes
           shall
           be
           cast
           into
           the
           fire
           ,
           a
           booke
           of
           the
           old
           order
           and
           of
           the
           new
           ;
           that
           we
           may
           see
           whether
           of
           them
           both
           shall
           be
           freed
           from
           the
           fire
           .
           Or
           let
           two
           Monkes
           ,
           one
           of
           mine
           and
           another
           of
           thine
           ,
           be
           shut
           up
           into
           one
           house
           :
           and
           let
           the
           house
           be
           burnt
           ,
           and
           wee
           shall
           see
           which
           of
           them
           will
           escape
           untouched
           of
           the
           fire
           .
           Or
           let
           us
           goe
           unto
           the
           grave
           of
           a
           just
           Monke
           that
           is
           dead
           ,
           and
           raise
           him
           up
           againe
           :
           and
           let
           him
           tell
           us
           ,
           after
           what
           order
           wee
           ought
           to
           celebrate
           Easter
           this
           yeare
           .
           But
           Lasreanus
           
             being
             wiser
             than
             so
             ,
             refused
             to
             put
             so
             great
             a
             matter
             to
             that
             hazzard
             :
             and
             therefore
             returned
             this
             grave
             answer
             unto
          
           Munna
           ;
           
             if
             all
             be
             true
             that
             is
             in
             the
             Legend
             .
          
           a
           We
           will
           not
           goe
           unto
           thy
           judgement
           :
           because
           we
           know
           that
           ,
           for
           the
           greatnesse
           of
           thy
           labour
           and
           holinesse
           ,
           if
           thou
           shouldest
           bid
           that
           mount
           Marge
           should
           bee
           changed
           into
           the
           place
           of
           the
           White
           field
           ,
           and
           the
           White
           field
           into
           the
           place
           of
           mount
           Marge
           ;
           God
           would
           presently
           doe
           this
           for
           thy
           sake
           .
           
             So
             prodigall
             doe
             some
             make
             God
             to
             be
             of
          
           miracles
           ,
           
             and
             in
             a
             manner
             carelesse
             how
             they
             should
             fall
             ;
             as
             if
             in
             the
             dispensing
             of
             them
             ,
             he
             did
             respect
             the
             gracing
             of
          
           persons
           
             rather
             than
             of
          
           causes
           .
        
         
           In
           what
           yeare
           this
           Councel
           of
           the
           
             White
             field
          
           was
           held
           ,
           is
           not
           certainely
           knowne
           :
           nor
           yet
           whether
           S.
           Munna
           be
           that
           
             whited
             wall
          
           ,
           of
           whom
           wee
           heard
           Cummianus
           complaine
           .
           The
           Synod
           of
           Strenshal
           (
           before
           mentioned
           )
           was
           assembled
           long
           after
           ,
           at
           Whitby
           (
           called
           by
           the
           Saxons
           Streanesheale
           )
           in
           Yorkeshire
           ,
           the
           
           b
           
             yeare
             of
             our
             Lord
             DCLXIIII
             .
             for
             the
             decision
             of
             the
             same
             question
             .
             Concerning
             which
             ,
             in
             the
             life
             of
          
           Wilfrid
           (
           
             written
             by
             one
          
           Aeddi
           
             an
             acquaintance
             of
             his
             ,
             surnamed
          
           Stephen
           ;
           
             at
             the
             commandement
             of
          
           Acca
           ,
           
             who
             in
             the
             time
             of
          
           Bede
           
             was
             Bishop
             of
          
           Hangustald
           or
           Hexham
           ,
           in
           Northumberland
           )
           
             we
             reade
             thus
          
           .
           c
           Vpon
           a
           certaine
           time
           in
           the
           daies
           of
           Colman
           metropolitan
           Bishop
           of
           the
           citie
           of
           Yorke
           ,
           Oswi
           and
           Alhfrid
           his
           sonne
           being
           Kings
           ;
           the
           Abbots
           and
           Priests
           and
           all
           the
           degrees
           of
           Ecclesiasticall
           orders
           meeting
           together
           at
           the
           monastery
           which
           is
           called
           Streaneshel
           ,
           in
           the
           presence
           of
           Hilde
           the
           most
           godly
           mother
           of
           that
           abbey
           ,
           in
           presence
           also
           of
           the
           Kings
           and
           the
           two
           Bishops
           Colman
           and
           Aegelberht
           ,
           inquiry
           was
           made
           touching
           the
           observation
           of
           Easter
           ,
           what
           was
           most
           right
           to
           bee
           held
           :
           whether
           Easter
           should
           bee
           kept
           according
           to
           the
           custome
           of
           the
           Brittous
           and
           the
           Scots
           and
           all
           the
           Northren
           part
           ,
           upon
           the
           Lords
           day
           that
           came
           from
           the
           XIIII
           .
           day
           of
           the
           Moone
           untill
           the
           XX.
           or
           whether
           it
           were
           better
           ,
           that
           Easter
           Sunday
           should
           bee
           celebrated
           from
           the
           XV.
           day
           of
           the
           Moone
           untill
           the
           XXI
           .
           after
           the
           manner
           of
           the
           See
           Apostolick
           .
           Time
           was
           given
           unto
           Bishop
           Colman
           in
           the
           first
           place
           ,
           as
           it
           was
           fit
           ,
           to
           deliver
           
           his
           reason
           in
           the
           audience
           of
           all
           .
           Who
           with
           an
           undaunted
           minde
           made
           his
           answer
           ,
           and
           said
           .
           Our
           fathers
           and
           their
           predecessors
           ,
           who
           were
           manifestly
           inspired
           by
           the
           holy
           Ghost
           ,
           as
           Columkille
           was
           ,
           did
           ordaine
           that
           Easter
           should
           be
           celebrated
           upon
           the
           Lords
           day
           that
           fell
           upon
           the
           XIIII
           .
           Moone
           ;
           following
           the
           example
           of
           Iohn
           the
           Apostle
           and
           Evangelist
           ,
           who
           leaned
           upon
           the
           breast
           of
           our
           Lord
           at
           his
           last
           Supper
           ,
           and
           was
           called
           the
           lover
           of
           the
           Lord.
           Hee
           celebrated
           Easter
           upon
           the
           XIIII
           .
           day
           of
           the
           Moone
           :
           and
           wee
           with
           the
           same
           confidence
           celebrate
           the
           same
           ,
           as
           his
           Disciples
           Polycarpus
           and
           others
           did
           ;
           neyther
           dare
           wee
           for
           our
           parts
           ,
           neyther
           will
           wee
           change
           this
           .
        
         
           Bede
           
             relateth
             his
             speech
             thus
          
           .
           d
           This
           Easter
           which
           I
           use
           to
           observe
           ,
           I
           received
           from
           my
           elders
           ,
           who
           did
           send
           me
           Bishop
           hither
           :
           which
           all
           our
           fathers
           ,
           men
           beloved
           of
           God
           ,
           are
           knowne
           to
           have
           celebrated
           after
           the
           same
           manner
           .
           Which
           that
           it
           may
           not
           seeme
           unto
           any
           to
           bee
           contemned
           and
           rejected
           :
           it
           is
           the
           same
           which
           the
           blessed
           Evangelist
           Iohn
           ,
           the
           disciple
           specially
           beloved
           by
           our
           Lord
           ,
           with
           all
           the
           Churches
           whech
           he
           did
           oversee
           ,
           is
           read
           to
           have
           celebrated
           .
           Fridegodus
           a
           
             who
             wrote
             the
             life
             of
          
           Wilfrid
           
             at
             the
             command
             of
          
           Odo
           
             Archbishop
             of
          
           Canterbury
           )
           
             expresseth
             the
             same
             Verse
             ,
             after
             this
             manner
             .
          
           
             
               e
               Nos
               seriem
               patriam
               ,
               non
               frivola
               scripta
               tenemus
               ,
            
             
               Discipulo
               *
               eusebit
               Polycarpo
               dante
               Iohannis
               .
            
             
               Ille
               etenim
               bis
               septenae
               sub
               tempore
               Phoebae
            
             
               Sanctum
               praefixit
               nobis
               fore
               Pascha
               colendum
               ,
            
             
               Atque
               nefas
               dixit
               ,
               si
               quis
               contraria
               sentit
               .
            
          
        
         
           
             On
             the
             contrary
             side
          
           Wilfrid
           
             objected
             unto
          
           Colman
           
           
             and
             his
             Clerkes
             of
          
           Ireland
           ;
           
             that
             they
             with
             their
             complices
             ,
             the
          
           Pictes
           
             and
             the
          
           Brittons
           ,
           f
           out
           of
           the
           two
           utmost
           Iles
           ,
           and
           those
           not
           whole
           neyther
           ,
           did
           with
           a
           foolish
           labour
           fight
           against
           the
           whole
           world
           .
           g
           And
           if
           that
           Columb
           of
           yours
           (
           
             saith
             he
          
           )
           yea
           and
           ours
           also
           if
           hee
           were
           Christs
           ,
           was
           holy
           and
           powerfull
           in
           vertues
           :
           could
           hee
           bee
           preferred
           before
           the
           most
           blessed
           Prince
           of
           the
           Apostles
           ?
           unto
           whom
           the
           Lord
           said
           :
           Thou
           art
           Peter
           ,
           and
           upon
           this
           rocke
           will
           I
           build
           my
           Church
           ,
           and
           the
           gates
           of
           hell
           shall
           not
           prevaile
           against
           it
           ;
           and
           I
           will
           give
           unto
           thee
           the
           keyes
           of
           the
           kingdome
           of
           heaven
           .
           
             Which
             last
             words
             wrought
             much
             upon
             the
             simplicitie
             of
             King
          
           Oswy
           ;
           
             who
             feared
             ,
             that
          
           h
           
             when
             hee
             should
          
           come
           to
           the
           doores
           of
           the
           kingdome
           of
           heaven
           ,
           there
           would
           bee
           none
           to
           open
           ,
           if
           hee
           were
           displeased
           who
           was
           proved
           to
           keepe
           the
           keyes
           :
           
             but
             prevailed
             nothing
             with
             Bishop
          
           Colman
           ;
           who
           i
           for
           the
           feare
           of
           his
           countrey
           (
           as
           Stephen
           
             in
             the
             life
             of
          
           Wilfrid
           writeth
           )
           contemned
           the
           tonsure
           and
           the
           observation
           of
           Easter
           
             used
             by
             the
          
           Romanes
           ;
           and
           k
           taking
           with
           him
           such
           as
           would
           follow
           him
           ,
           that
           is
           to
           say
           ,
           such
           as
           would
           not
           receive
           the
           Catholike
           Easter
           and
           the
           tonsure
           of
           the
           crown
           (
           for
           of
           that
           also
           there
           was
           then
           no
           small
           question
           )
           returned
           back
           againe
           into
           Scotland
           .
        
      
       
         
         
           CHAP.
           X.
           
        
         
           
             Of
             the
             height
             that
             the
             opposition
             betwixt
             the
             Romane
             party
             and
             that
             of
             the
             Brittish
             and
             Scottish
             grew
             unto
             ;
             and
             the
             abatement
             thereof
             in
             time
             :
             and
             how
             the
             Doctors
             of
             the
             Scottish
             and
             Irish
             side
             have
             beene
             ever
             accounted
             most
             eminent
             men
             in
             the
             Catholike
             Church
             ,
             notwithstanding
             their
             dis-union
             from
             the
             Bishop
             of
             Rome
             .
          
        
         
           IN
           Colmans
           roome
           Wilfrid
           
             was
             chosen
             Archbishop
             of
          
           Yorke
           :
           
             who
             had
             learned
             at
          
           Rome
           
             from
             Archdeacon
          
           Boniface
           ,
           a
           the
           course
           of
           Easter
           ,
           which
           the
           schismaticks
           of
           Brittaine
           and
           Ireland
           did
           not
           know
           (
           
             so
             goe
             the
             words
             of
          
           Stephen
           ,
           
             the
             ancient
             writer
             of
             his
             life
             :
             )
             and
             afterward
             did
             brag
             ,
          
           b
           that
           hee
           was
           the
           first
           which
           did
           teach
           the
           true
           Easter
           in
           Northumberland
           (
           having
           cast
           out
           the
           Scots
           )
           which
           did
           ordaine
           the
           Ecclesiasticall
           songs
           to
           bee
           parted
           on
           sides
           ,
           and
           which
           did
           command
           S.
           Benets
           rule
           to
           be
           observed
           by
           Monkes
           .
           
             But
             when
             he
             was
             named
             to
             the
             Archbishopricke
             ,
          
           c
           
             he
             refused
             it
             at
             the
             first
             (
             as
          
           William
           of
           Malmesbury
           relateth
           )
           lest
           he
           should
           receive
           his
           consecration
           from
           the
           Scottish
           Bishops
           ,
           or
           from
           such
           as
           the
           Scots
           had
           ordained
           ,
           whose
           communion
           the
           Apostolike
           See
           had
           rejected
           .
           
             The
             speech
             which
             he
             used
             to
             this
             purpose
             ,
             unto
             the
             Kings
             that
             had
             chosen
             him
             ,
             is
             thus
             laid
             downe
             by
          
           Stephen
           
             the
             writer
             of
             his
             
             life
             .
          
           d
           O
           my
           honourable
           Lords
           the
           Kings
           ;
           it
           is
           necessary
           for
           us
           by
           all
           meanes
           providently
           to
           consider
           ,
           how
           with
           your
           election
           I
           may
           (
           by
           the
           helpe
           of
           God
           )
           come
           to
           the
           degree
           of
           a
           Bishop
           ,
           without
           the
           accusation
           of
           catholike
           men
           .
           For
           there
           be
           many
           Bishops
           here
           in
           Brittaine
           ,
           none
           of
           whom
           it
           is
           my
           part
           to
           accuse
           ,
           ordained
           within
           these
           foureteene
           yeares
           by
           the
           Brittons
           and
           Scots
           ,
           whom
           neyther
           the
           See
           Apostolicke
           hath
           received
           into
           her
           communion
           ,
           nor
           yet
           such
           as
           consent
           with
           the
           sch●smaticks
           .
           And
           therefore
           in
           my
           humility
           I
           request
           of
           you
           ,
           that
           you
           would
           send
           me
           with
           your
           warrant
           beyond
           the
           Sea
           ,
           into
           the
           countrey
           of
           France
           ,
           where
           many
           Catholike
           Bishops
           are
           to
           be
           had
           ;
           that
           without
           any
           controversie
           of
           the
           Apostolike
           See
           I
           may
           be
           counted
           meet
           ,
           though
           unworthy
           ,
           to
           receive
           the
           degree
           of
           a
           Bishop
           .
        
         
           While
           e
           Wilfrid
           protracted
           time
           beyond
           the
           Seas
           ,
           King
           Oswy
           ledde
           by
           the
           advice
           of
           the
           Quartadecimans
           (
           so
           they
           injuriously
           nicknamed
           the
           Brittish
           and
           Irish
           ,
           that
           did
           celebrate
           Easter
           from
           the
           fourteenth
           to
           the
           twentieth
           day
           of
           the
           moone
           )
           appointed
           f
           
             a
             most
             religious
             servant
             of
             God
             and
             an
             admirable
             Doctor
             that
             came
             from
             Ireland
             ,
          
           named
           Ceadda
           ,
           to
           be
           ordained
           Bishop
           of
           Yorke
           in
           his
           roome
           .
           
             
               Constituunt
               etenim
               perverso
               canone
               Coeddam
               ,
            
             
             
               Moribus
               acclinem
               ,
               doctrinae
               robore
               fortem
               ,
            
             
               Praesulis
               eximij
               servare
               cubilia
               :
               sicque
            
             
               Audacter
               vivo
               sponsam
               rapuere
               marito
               ,
            
          
           saith
           Fridegodus
           .
           This
           Ceadda
           ,
           being
           the
           scholler
           of
           Bishop
           Aidan
           ,
           was
           far
           otherwise
           affected
           to
           the
           Brittish
           and
           Irish
           than
           Wilfrid
           was
           :
           and
           therefore
           was
           content
           to
           receive
           his
           ordination
           from
           g
           Wini
           Bishop
           of
           the
           West-Saxons
           ,
           and
           tow
           other
           Brittish
           Bishops
           that
           were
           of
           the
           Quartadeciman
           partie
           .
           For
           at
           that
           time
           (
           as
           Bede
           noteth
           )
           
             there
             was
             not
             in
             all
             Brittaine
             any
             Bishop
             canonically
             ordained
          
           (
           that
           is
           to
           say
           ,
           by
           such
           as
           were
           of
           the
           communion
           of
           the
           Church
           of
           Rome
           )
           except
           that
           Wini
           only
           .
        
         
           
             But
             shortly
             after
             ,
             the
             opposition
             betwixt
             these
             two
             sides
             grew
             to
             be
             so
             great
             ,
             that
             our
          
           Cuthbert
           (
           
             Bishop
             of
          
           Lindisfarne
           )
           
             upon
             his
             death-bed
             required
             his
             followers
             ;
             that
             they
             should
          
           h
           hold
           no
           communion
           with
           them
           which
           did
           swerve
           from
           the
           unity
           of
           the
           Catholicke
           peace
           ,
           eyther
           by
           not
           celebrating
           Easter
           in
           his
           due
           time
           ,
           or
           by
           living
           perversly
           :
           
             and
             that
             they
             should
             rather
             take
             up
             his
             bones
             and
             remove
             their
             place
             of
             habitation
             ,
             than
             any
             way
             condescend
             to
          
           submit
           their
           neckes
           unto
           the
           yoke
           of
           schismatickes
           .
           
             For
             the
             further
             maintaining
             of
             which
             breach
             also
             ,
             there
             were
             certaine
             decrees
             made
             both
             by
             the
          
           Romanes
           ,
           
             and
             by
             the
          
           Saxons
           
             that
             were
             guided
             by
             their
             institution
             .
             One
             of
             the
             instructions
             that
             the
          
           Romans
           
             gave
             them
             ,
             was
             this
          
           :
           i
           You
           must
           beware
           ,
           that
           causes
           bee
           not
           referred
           to
           other
           
           Provinces
           or
           Churches
           ,
           which
           use
           another
           manner
           and
           another
           religion
           :
           whether
           to
           the
           Iewes
           ,
           which
           doe
           serve
           the
           shadow
           of
           the
           Law
           rather
           than
           the
           truth
           ▪
           or
           to
           the
           Britons
           ,
           who
           are
           contrary
           unto
           all
           men
           ,
           and
           have
           cut
           themselves
           off
           from
           the
           Romane
           manner
           ,
           and
           the
           unitie
           of
           the
           Church
           ;
           or
           to
           Heretickes
           ,
           although
           they
           should
           bee
           learned
           in
           Ecclesiasticall
           causes
           ,
           and
           well
           studied
           .
           
             And
             among
             the
          
           decrees
           
             made
             by
             some
             of
             the
          
           Saxon
           
             Bishops
             (
             which
             were
             to
             bee
             seene
             in
             the
             Library
             of
             Sir
          
           Thomas
           Knevet
           in
           Northfolke
           ,
           
             and
             are
             still
             ,
             I
             suppose
             ,
             preserved
             there
             by
             his
             heire
             )
             this
             is
             laid
             downe
             for
             one
             .
          
           k
           Such
           as
           have
           received
           ordination
           from
           the
           Bishops
           of
           the
           Scots
           or
           Brittaines
           ,
           who
           in
           the
           matter
           of
           Easter
           and
           Tonsure
           are
           not
           united
           unto
           the
           Catholicke
           Church
           ,
           let
           them
           bee
           againe
           by
           imposition
           of
           hands
           confirmed
           by
           a
           Catholicke
           Bishop
           .
           In
           like
           manner
           also
           let
           the
           Churches
           that
           have
           beene
           ordered
           by
           those
           Bishops
           ,
           be
           sprinkled
           with
           exorcized
           water
           ,
           and
           confirmed
           with
           some
           service
           .
           Wee
           have
           no
           licence
           also
           to
           give
           unto
           them
           Chrisme
           or
           the
           Eucharist
           ,
           when
           they
           require
           it
           ;
           unlesse
           they
           doe
           first
           professe
           ,
           that
           they
           will
           remaine
           with
           us
           in
           the
           unity
           of
           the
           Church
           .
           And
           such
           likewise
           as
           eyther
           of
           their
           nation
           ,
           or
           of
           any
           other
           ,
           shall
           doubt
           of
           their
           baptism
           ,
           let
           them
           be
           baptized
           .
           
             Thus
             did
             they
          
           .
        
         
           
             On
             the
             other
             side
             ,
             how
             averse
             the
          
           Brittish
           
             and
             the
          
           Irish
           
             were
             from
             having
             any
             communion
             with
             those
             of
             the
          
           Romane
           
             party
             ;
             the
          
           l
           
             complaint
             of
          
           Laurentius
           ,
           Mellitus
           ,
           and
           Iustus
           
             before
             specified
             ,
             doth
             sufficiently
             manifest
             .
             And
             the
             answer
             is
             well
             knowne
             ,
             which
          
           
           *
           the
           seven
           Brittish
           Bishops
           ,
           and
           many
           other
           most
           learned
           men
           
             of
             the
             same
             nation
             ,
             did
             return
             unto
             the
             propositions
             made
             unto
             them
             by
          
           Austin
           
             the
             Monk
             (
             who
             was
             sent
             unto
             their
             parts
             with
             authority
             from
             Rome
             :
             )
             that
          
           m
           they
           would
           perform
           none
           of
           them
           ,
           nor
           at
           all
           adneit
           him
           for
           their
           Archbishop
           .
           
             The
             Welsh
             Chroniclers
             do
             further
             relate
             ,
             that
          
           Dinot
           
             the
             Abbot
             of
          
           Bangor
           
             produced
             diverse
             arguments
             at
             that
             time
             ,
             to
             shew
             that
             they
             did
             owe
             him
             no
             subjection
             :
             and
             this
             among
             others
             .
          
           n
           Wee
           are
           under
           the
           government
           of
           the
           Bishop
           of
           Kaer-leon
           upon
           Vske
           ,
           who
           under
           God
           is
           to
           oversee
           us
           ,
           and
           cause
           us
           to
           keepe
           the
           way
           spirituall
           .
           and
           Gotcelinus
           Bertinianus
           
             in
             the
             life
             of
          
           Austin
           :
           o
           
             that
             for
             the
          
           authority
           of
           their
           ceremonies
           
             they
             did
             alledge
          
           ,
           that
           they
           were
           not
           onely
           delivered
           unto
           them
           by
           Saint
           Eleutherius
           the
           Pope
           their
           first
           instructer
           at
           the
           first
           infancie
           almost
           of
           the
           Church
           ,
           but
           also
           hitherto
           observed
           by
           their
           holy
           fathers
           who
           were
           the
           friends
           of
           God
           and
           followers
           of
           the
           Apostles
           :
           
             and
             therefore
          
           they
           ought
           not
           to
           change
           them
           for
           any
           new
           dogmatists
           .
           
             But
             above
             all
             others
             ,
             the
          
           Brittish
           
             Priests
             that
             dwelt
             in
          
           West-wales
           
             abhorred
             the
             communion
             of
             these
          
           new
           dogmatists
           
             above
             all
             measure
             :
             as
          
           Aldhelme
           
             Abbot
             of
          
           Malmesbury
           
             declareth
             at
             large
             in
             his
             Epistle
             sent
             to
          
           Geruntius
           
             King
             of
          
           Cornwall
           .
           
             where
             among
             many
             other
             particulars
             hee
             sheweth
             ,
             that
          
           p
           
             if
             any
             of
             the
          
           Catholickes
           
             (
             for
             so
             he
             calleth
             those
             
             of
             his
             owne
             side
             )
             did
             goe
             to
             dwell
             among
             them
          
           ;
           they
           would
           not
           vouchsafe
           to
           admit
           them
           unto
           their
           company
           and
           society
           ,
           before
           they
           first
           put
           them
           to
           forty
           dayes
           penance
           .
           Yea
           ,
           q
           even
           to
           this
           day
           (
           saith
           Bede
           ,
           
             who
             wrote
             his
             history
             in
             the
             yeere
             DCCXXXI
             .
          
           )
           it
           is
           the
           manner
           of
           the
           Brittons
           ,
           to
           hold
           the
           faith
           and
           the
           religion
           of
           the
           English
           in
           no
           account
           at
           all
           ,
           nor
           to
           communicate
           with
           them
           in
           any
           thing
           more
           than
           with
           Pagans
           .
        
         
           Whereunto
           those
           Verses
           of
           Taliessyn
           (
           honoured
           by
           the
           Britons
           with
           the
           title
           of
           
             Ben
             Beirdh
          
           ,
           that
           is
           ,
           
             the
             chiefe
             of
             the
             Bardes
          
           or
           Wisemen
           )
           may
           bee
           added
           :
           (
           which
           shew
           ,
           that
           hee
           wrote
           after
           the
           comming
           of
           Austin
           into
           England
           ,
           and
           not
           50.
           or
           60.
           yeeres
           before
           ,
           as
           others
           have
           imagined
           .
           )
           
             
               
                 *
                 Gwae'r
                 offeiriad
                 byd
              
               
                 Nys
                 engreifftia
                 gwyd
              
               
                 Ac
                 ny
                 phregetha
                 :
              
               
                 Gwae
                 ny
                 cheidw
                 ey
                 gail
              
               
                 Ac
                 ef
                 yn
                 vigail
                 ,
              
               
                 Ac
                 nys
                 areilia
                 :
              
               
                 Gwae
                 ny
                 cheidw
                 ey
                 dheuaid
              
               
                 Rhac
                 bleidhie
                 ,
                 Rhufeniaid
              
               
                 A'iffon
                 gnwppa
                 .
              
            
             
               
                 
                   Wo
                   be
                   to
                   that
                   Priest
                   yborne
                   ,
                
              
               
                 
                   That
                   will
                   not
                   cleanly
                   weed
                   his
                   corne
                
              
               
                 
                   And
                   preach
                   his
                   charge
                   among
                
                 :
              
               
                 
                   Wo
                   be
                   to
                   that
                   shepheard
                   (
                   I
                   say
                   )
                
              
               
                 
                   That
                   will
                   not
                   watch
                   his
                   fold
                   alway
                   ,
                
              
               
                 
                   As
                   to
                   his
                   office
                   doth
                   belong
                   :
                
              
               
               
                 
                   Wo
                   be
                   to
                   him
                   that
                   doth
                   not
                   keepe
                
              
               
                 
                   From
                   Romish
                   wolves
                   his
                   sheepe
                
              
               
                 
                   With
                   staffe
                   and
                   weapon
                   strong
                
                 .
              
            
          
        
         
           As
           also
           those
           others
           of
           Mantuan
           ;
           which
           shew
           that
           some
           tooke
           the
           boldnesse
           to
           taxe
           the
           Romans
           of
           
             folly
             ,
             impudencie
          
           ,
           and
           stolidity
           ,
           for
           standing
           so
           much
           upon
           matters
           of
           humane
           institution
           ,
           that
           for
           the
           not
           admitting
           of
           them
           they
           would
           breake
           peace
           there
           ,
           where
           the
           Law
           of
           God
           and
           the
           Doctrine
           first
           delivered
           by
           Christ
           and
           his
           Apostles
           was
           safely
           kept
           and
           maintained
           .
           
             
               r
               Adde
               quod
               &
               patres
               ausi
               taxare
               Latinos
               ;
            
             
               Causabantur
               eos
               stultè
               ,
               imprudenter
               ,
               &
               aequo
            
             
               Duriùs
               ,
               ad
               ritum
               Romae
               voluisse
               Britannos
            
             
               Cogere
               ,
               &
               antiquum
               tam
               praecipitanter
               amorem
            
             
               Tam
               stolido
               temerâsse
               ausu
               .
               Concedere
               Roma
            
             
               Debuit
               ,
               aiebant
               ,
               potiùs
               quàm
               rumpere
               pacem
            
             
               Humani
               quae
               juris
               erant
               ;
               modò
               salva
               maneret
            
             
               Lex
               divina
               ,
               fides
               ,
               Christi
               doctrina
               ,
               Senatus
            
             
               Quam
               primus
               tulit
               ore
               suo
               ;
               quia
               tradita
               ab
               ipso
            
             
               Christo
               erat
               ,
               humanae
               doctore
               &
               lumine
               vitae
               .
            
          
        
         
           By
           all
           that
           hath
           been
           said
           ,
           the
           vanity
           of
           Osullevan
           may
           be
           seene
           ,
           who
           feigneth
           the
           
             Northren
             Irish
          
           ,
           together
           with
           the
           Picts
           and
           the
           Britons
           ,
           to
           have
           beene
           so
           obsequious
           unto
           the
           Bishop
           of
           Rome
           ;
           that
           they
           reformed
           the
           celebration
           of
           Easter
           by
           them
           formerly
           used
           ,
           as
           soone
           as
           they
           understood
           what
           the
           rite
           of
           the
           Romane
           Church
           was
           .
           Whereas
           it
           is
           knowne
           ,
           that
           after
           the
           declaration
           thereof
           made
           by
           Pope
           Honorius
           and
           the
           Clergie
           of
           Rome
           ;
           the
           
             Northren
             Irish
          
           were
           nothing
           moved
           therewith
           ,
           but
           continued
           still
           their
           
           owne
           tradition
           .
           And
           therfore
           Bede
           findeth
           no
           other
           excuse
           for
           Bishop
           Aidan
           herein
           ;
           but
           that
           s
           
             eyther
             hee
             was
             ignorant
             of
             the
             canonicall
             time
             ,
             or
             if
             he
             knew
             it
             ,
             that
             he
             was
             so
             overcome
             with
             the
             authority
             of
             his
             owne
             nation
             ,
             that
             he
             did
             not
             follow
             it
             :
          
           that
           he
           did
           it
           ,
           t
           
             after
             the
             manner
             of
             his
             owne
             nation
          
           ;
           and
           that
           u
           
             hee
             could
             not
             keepe
             Easter
             contrary
             to
             the
             custome
             of
             them
             which
             had
             sent
             him
             .
          
           His
           successor
           Finan
           x
           contended
           more
           fiercely
           in
           the
           businesse
           with
           Ronan
           his
           countryman
           ;
           and
           declared
           himselfe
           
             an
             open
             adversary
          
           to
           the
           Romane
           rite
           .
           Colman
           that
           succeeded
           him
           ,
           did
           tread
           just
           in
           his
           steps
           :
           so
           farre
           ,
           that
           being
           put
           downe
           in
           the
           Synod
           of
           Streanshal
           ,
           yet
           
             for
             feare
             of
             his
             country
          
           (
           as
           before
           we
           have
           heard
           out
           of
           Stephen
           ,
           the
           writer
           of
           the
           life
           of
           Wilfrid
           )
           he
           refused
           to
           conforme
           himselfe
           ;
           and
           chose
           rather
           to
           forgoe
           his
           Bishoprick
           ,
           than
           to
           submit
           himselfe
           unto
           the
           Romane
           lawes
           ,
           
             
               Colmanusque
               suas
               inglorius
               abjicit
               arces
               ,
            
             
               Malens
               Ausonias
               victus
               dissolvere
               leges
               :
            
          
           saith
           Fridegodus
           .
           Neither
           did
           hee
           goe
           away
           alone
           :
           but
           y
           tooke
           with
           him
           all
           his
           countrymen
           that
           he
           had
           gathered
           together
           in
           Lindisfarne
           or
           
             Holy
             Iland
          
           :
           the
           Scottish
           monks
           also
           that
           were
           at
           Rippon
           (
           in
           Yorkshire
           )
           z
           making
           choice
           rather
           to
           quit
           their
           place
           ,
           than
           to
           admit
           the
           observation
           of
           Easter
           and
           the
           rest
           of
           the
           rites
           according
           to
           the
           custome
           of
           the
           Church
           of
           Rome
           .
           And
           so
           did
           the
           matter
           rest
           among
           the
           Irish
           about
           forty
           yeeres
           after
           that
           :
           untill
           their
           own
           countryman
           a
           Adamnanus
           perswaded
           most
           of
           them
           to
           
           yeeld
           to
           the
           custome
           received
           herein
           by
           all
           the
           Churches
           abroad
           .
        
         
           The
           Picts
           did
           the
           like
           not
           long
           after
           ,
           under
           King
           Naitan
           :
           who
           b
           
             by
             his
             regall
             authority
             commanded
             Easter
             to
             be
             observed
             throughout
             all
             his
             provinces
             according
             to
             the
             cycle
             of
          
           XIX
           .
           
             yeeres
             (
             abolishing
             the
             erroneous
             period
             of
          
           LXXXIIII
           .
           yeeres
           which
           before
           they
           used
           )
           and
           caused
           
             all
             Priests
             and
             Monkes
             to
             bee
             shorne
             croune-wise
             ,
          
           after
           the
           Romane
           manner
           .
           The
           monkes
           also
           of
           the
           Iland
           of
           Hy
           or
           Y-Columkille
           ,
           c
           by
           the
           perswasion
           of
           Ecgbert
           (
           an
           English
           Priest
           ,
           that
           had
           been
           bred
           in
           Ireland
           )
           in
           the
           yeere
           of
           our
           Lord
           DCCXVI
           .
           forsooke
           the
           observation
           of
           Easter
           and
           the
           Tonsure
           which
           they
           had
           received
           from
           Columkille
           a
           hundred
           and
           fiftie
           yeeres
           before
           ,
           and
           followed
           the
           Romane
           rite
           ;
           about
           LXXX
           .
           yeeres
           after
           the
           time
           of
           Pope
           Honorius
           ,
           and
           the
           sending
           of
           Bishop
           Aidan
           from
           thence
           into
           England
           .
           The
           Britons
           in
           the
           time
           of
           d
           Bede
           retained
           still
           their
           old
           usage
           :
           untill
           e
           Elbodus
           (
           who
           was
           the
           chiefe
           Bishop
           of
           Northwales
           ,
           and
           dyed
           in
           the
           yeere
           of
           our
           Lord
           DCCCIX
           .
           as
           Caradoc
           of
           Lhancarvan
           recordeth
           )
           brought
           in
           the
           Romane
           observation
           of
           Easter
           .
           which
           is
           the
           cause
           ,
           why
           f
           his
           disciple
           Nennius
           ,
           designeth
           the
           time
           wherein
           he
           wrote
           his
           history
           ,
           by
           the
           character
           of
           the
           g
           XIX
           .
           yeeres
           cycle
           ,
           and
           not
           of
           the
           other
           of
           LXXXIV
           .
           But
           howsoever
           North-wales
           did
           ;
           it
           is
           very
           probable
           that
           West-wales
           (
           which
           of
           all
           other
           parts
           
           was
           most
           eagerly
           bent
           against
           the
           traditions
           of
           the
           Romane
           Church
           )
           stood
           out
           yet
           longer
           .
           For
           we
           finde
           in
           the
           Greeke
           writers
           of
           the
           life
           of
           Chrysostome
           ,
           that
           
             certaine
             Clergie
             men
             which
             dwelt
             in
             the
             Iles
             of
             the
             Ocean
             ,
          
           repaired
           
             from
             the
             utmost
             borders
          
           of
           the
           habitable
           world
           unto
           Constantinople
           ,
           in
           the
           dayes
           of
           Methodius
           (
           who
           was
           Patriarch
           there
           ,
           from
           the
           yeer
           DCCCXLII
           .
           to
           the
           yeere
           DCCCXLVII
           .
           )
           to
           enquire
           of
           h
           
             certaine
             Ecclesiasticall
             traditions
             ,
             and
             the
             perfect
             and
             exact
             computation
             of
             Easter
             .
          
           Whereby
           it
           appeareth
           ,
           that
           these
           questions
           were
           kept
           still
           a
           foot
           in
           these
           Ilands
           ;
           and
           that
           the
           resolution
           of
           the
           Bishop
           of
           Constantinople
           was
           sought
           for
           from
           hence
           ,
           as
           well
           as
           the
           determination
           of
           the
           Bishop
           of
           Rome
           ,
           who
           is
           now
           made
           the
           only
           Oracle
           of
           the
           world
           .
        
         
           Neither
           is
           it
           here
           to
           be
           omitted
           ,
           that
           whatsoever
           broyles
           did
           passe
           betwixt
           our
           Irish
           that
           were
           not
           subject
           to
           the
           See
           of
           Rome
           ,
           and
           those
           others
           that
           were
           of
           the
           Romane
           communion
           :
           in
           the
           succeeding
           ages
           ,
           they
           of
           the
           one
           side
           were
           esteemed
           to
           be
           Saints
           ,
           as
           well
           as
           they
           of
           the
           other
           ;
           Aidan
           for
           example
           and
           Finan
           ,
           who
           were
           counted
           ringleaders
           of
           the
           Quartadeeiman
           party
           ,
           as
           well
           as
           Wilfrid
           and
           Cuthbert
           ,
           who
           were
           so
           violent
           against
           it
           .
           Yet
           now
           adayes
           men
           are
           made
           to
           beleeve
           ,
           that
           out
           of
           the
           communion
           of
           the
           Church
           of
           Rome
           nothing
           but
           Hell
           can
           bee
           looked
           for
           ;
           and
           that
           subjection
           to
           the
           Bishop
           of
           Rome
           ,
           as
           to
           the
           visible
           Head
           of
           the
           Universall
           Church
           ,
           is
           required
           as
           a
           matter
           necessary
           to
           salvation
           .
           Which
           if
           it
           may
           goe
           currant
           for
           good
           Divinity
           :
           the
           case
           is
           like
           to
           goe
           hard
           ,
           not
           onely
           ,
           with
           the
           i
           
             twelve
             hundred
          
           
           British
           Monkes
           of
           Bangor
           ,
           who
           were
           martyred
           in
           one
           day
           by
           Edelfride
           king
           of
           Northumberland
           (
           whom
           our
           Annals
           style
           by
           the
           name
           of
           k
           
             the
             Saints
          
           ;
           )
           but
           also
           with
           St.
           Aidan
           and
           St.
           Finan
           ,
           who
           deserve
           to
           bee
           honoured
           by
           the
           English
           nation
           with
           as
           venerable
           a
           remembrance
           ,
           as
           (
           I
           doe
           not
           say
           ,
           Wilfrid
           and
           Cuthbert
           ;
           but
           )
           Austin
           the
           Monke
           and
           his
           followers
           .
           For
           by
           the
           ministery
           of
           l
           Aidan
           was
           the
           kingdome
           of
           Northumberland
           recovered
           from
           paganisme
           :
           (
           whereunto
           belonged
           then
           ,
           beside
           the
           shire
           of
           Northumberland
           and
           the
           lands
           beyond
           it
           unto
           
             Edenborrow
             ,
             Frith
             ,
             Cumberland
          
           also
           and
           
             Westmorland
             ,
             Lancashire
             ,
             Yorkshire
          
           ,
           and
           the
           
             Bishopricke
             of
             Durham
          
           :
           )
           and
           by
           the
           meanes
           of
           m
           Finan
           ,
           not
           onely
           the
           Kingdome
           of
           the
           East-Saxons
           (
           which
           contained
           
             Essex
             ,
             Middlesex
          
           ,
           and
           halfe
           of
           Hertfordshire
           )
           regained
           ,
           but
           also
           the
           large
           Kingdome
           of
           Mercia
           converted
           first
           unto
           Christianity
           ;
           which
           comprehended
           underit
           ,
           
             Glocestershire
             ,
             Herefordshire
             ,
             Worcestershire
             ,
             Warwickshire
             ,
             Leicestershire
             ,
             Rutlandshire
             ,
             Northamptonshire
             ,
             Lincolneshire
             ,
             Huntingtonshire
             ,
             Bedfordshire
             ,
             Buckinghamshire
             ,
             Oxfordshire
             ,
             Staffordshire
             ,
             Darbyshire
             ,
             Shropshire
             ,
             Nottinghamshire
             ,
             Chesshire
             ,
          
           and
           the
           other
           halfe
           of
           Hertfordshire
           .
        
         
           The
           Scottish
           that
           professed
           no
           subjection
           to
           the
           Church
           of
           Rome
           ,
           were
           they
           ,
           that
           sent
           preachers
           for
           the
           conversion
           of
           these
           countries
           ;
           and
           ordained
           Bishops
           to
           governe
           them
           :
           namely
           ,
           n
           
             Aidan
             ,
             Finan
          
           and
           Colman
           successively
           for
           the
           kingdome
           of
           Northumberland
           ;
           o
           for
           the
           
             East-Saxons
             ,
             Cedd
          
           brother
           to
           Ceadda
           the
           Bishop
           of
           Yorke
           before
           mentioned
           ,
           p
           for
           
           the
           Middle-Angles
           (
           which
           inhabited
           Leicestershire
           )
           and
           the
           
             Mercians
             ,
             Diuma
          
           (
           for
           q
           
             the
             paucity
             of
             Priests
          
           ,
           saith
           
             Bede
             ,
             constrained
             one
             Bishop
             to
             bee
             appointed
             over
             two
             people
          
           )
           and
           after
           him
           Cellach
           and
           Trumhere
           .
           And
           these
           with
           their
           followers
           ,
           notwithstanding
           their
           division
           from
           the
           See
           of
           Rome
           ,
           were
           for
           r
           their
           extraordinary
           sanctity
           of
           life
           and
           painfulnesse
           in
           preaching
           the
           Gospel
           (
           wherein
           they
           went
           farre
           beyond
           those
           of
           the
           other
           side
           ,
           that
           afterward
           thrust
           them
           out
           and
           entred
           in
           upon
           their
           labours
           )
           exceedingly
           reverenced
           by
           all
           that
           knew
           them
           :
           Aidan
           especially
           ,
           who
           s
           
             although
             hee
             could
             not
             keepe
             Easter
          
           (
           saith
           
             Bede
             )
             contrary
             to
             the
             manner
             of
             them
             which
             had
             sent
             him
             ;
             yet
             he
             was
             carefull
             diligently
             to
             performe
             the
             workes
             of
             faith
             and
             godlinesse
             ,
             and
             love
             ,
             according
             to
             the
             manner
             used
             by
             all
             holy
             men
             .
             Whereupon
             hee
             was
             worthily
             beloved
             of
             all
             ,
             even
             of
             them
             also
             who
             thought
             otherwise
             of
             Easter
             than
             he
             did
             :
             and
             was
             had
             in
             reverence
             not
             only
             by
             them
             that
             were
             of
             meaner
             ranke
             ,
             but
             also
             by
             the
             Bishops
             themselves
             ,
             Honorius
             of
             Canterbury
             ,
             and
             Felix
             of
             the
             East-Angles
             .
          
           Neither
           did
           Honorius
           and
           Felix
           any
           other
           way
           carry
           themselves
           herein
           ,
           than
           their
           predecessors
           
             Laurentius
             ,
             Mellitus
          
           &
           Iustus
           had
           done
           before
           them
           :
           who
           writing
           unto
           the
           Bishops
           of
           Ireland
           ,
           that
           dissented
           from
           the
           Church
           of
           Rome
           in
           the
           celebration
           of
           Easter
           and
           many
           other
           things
           ;
           made
           no
           scruple
           to
           prefixe
           this
           loving
           and
           respectfull
           superscription
           to
           their
           letters
           .
           t
           
             To
             our
             Lords
             and
             most
             deare
             brethren
             ,
             
             the
             Bishops
             or
             Abbots
             throughout
             all
             Scotland
             ;
             Laurentius
             ,
             Mellitus
             and
             Iustus
             Bishops
             ,
             the
             servants
             of
             the
             servants
             of
             God.
          
           For
           howsoever
           Ireland
           at
           that
           time
           u
           received
           not
           the
           same
           lawes
           wherewith
           
             other
             nations
          
           were
           governed
           :
           yet
           it
           so
           
             flourished
             in
             the
             vigour
             of
             Christian
             doctrine
             ,
          
           (
           as
           Abbot
           Ionas
           testifieth
           )
           that
           
             it
             exceeded
             the
             faith
             of
             all
             the
             neighbour
             nations
          
           ;
           and
           in
           that
           respect
           was
           generally
           had
           in
           honour
           by
           them
           .
        
      
       
         
           CHAP.
           XI
        
         
           
             Of
             the
             temporall
             power
             ,
             which
             the
             Popes
             followers
             would
             directly
             intitle
             him
             unto
             over
             the
             Kingdome
             of
             Ireland
             :
             together
             with
             the
             indirect
             power
             which
             he
             challengeth
             in
             absolving
             subjects
             from
             the
             obedience
             which
             they
             owe
             to
             their
             temporall
             Governours
             .
          
        
         
           IT
           now
           remaineth
           that
           in
           the
           last
           place
           wee
           should
           consider
           the
           Popes
           power
           in
           disposing
           the
           temporall
           state
           of
           this
           Kingdome
           :
           which
           eyther
           directly
           or
           indirectly
           ,
           by
           hooke
           or
           by
           crooke
           ,
           this
           grand
           Usurper
           would
           draw
           unto
           himselfe
           .
           First
           therefore
           Cardinall
           Allen
           would
           have
           us
           to
           know
           ,
           that
           c
           
             the
             Sea
             Apostolike
             hath
             an
             old
             claime
             unto
             the
             soveraigntie
             of
             the
             countrey
             of
             Ireland
             ;
             and
             that
             before
             the
             Covenants
             passed
             betweene
             King
             Iohn
             and
             the
             same
             Sea.
             Which
             challenges
          
           (
           saith
           he
           )
           
             Princes
             commonly
             yeeld
             not
             up
             ,
             by
             what
             ground
             soever
             they
             come
             .
          
           What
           Princes
           use
           to
           yeeld
           or
           not
           yeeld
           ,
           I
           leave
           to
           the
           scanning
           of
           those
           ,
           unto
           whom
           Princes
           matters
           doe
           belong
           :
           for
           the
           Cardinals
           
           Prince
           I
           dare
           be
           bold
           to
           say
           ,
           that
           if
           it
           bee
           not
           his
           use
           to
           play
           fast
           and
           loose
           with
           other
           Princes
           ,
           the
           matter
           is
           not
           now
           to
           doe
           ;
           whatsoever
           right
           he
           could
           pretend
           to
           the
           temporall
           state
           of
           Ireland
           ,
           hee
           hath
           transferred
           it
           (
           more
           than
           once
           )
           unto
           the
           Kings
           of
           England
           .
           and
           when
           the
           ground
           of
           his
           claime
           shall
           be
           looked
           into
           ;
           it
           will
           bee
           found
           so
           frivolous
           and
           so
           ridiculous
           ,
           that
           we
           need
           not
           care
           three
           chippes
           ,
           whether
           he
           yeeld
           it
           up
           or
           keep
           it
           to
           himselfe
           .
           For
           whatsoever
           become
           of
           his
           idle
           challenges
           :
           the
           Crowne
           of
           England
           hath
           otherwise
           obtained
           an
           undoubted
           right
           unto
           the
           soveraigntie
           of
           this
           countrey
           ;
           partly
           by
           Conquest
           ,
           prosecuted
           at
           first
           upon
           occasion
           of
           a
           Sociall
           warre
           ,
           partly
           by
           the
           severall
           submissions
           of
           the
           chiefetaines
           of
           the
           land
           made
           afterwards
           .
           For
           d
           
             wheras
             it
             is
             it
             free
             for
             all
             men
             ,
             although
             they
             have
             been
             formerly
             quitt
             from
             all
             subjection
             ,
             to
             renounce
             their
             owne
             right
             :
             yet
             now
             in
             these
             our
             daies
          
           (
           saith
           
             Giraldus
             Cambrensis
          
           ,
           in
           his
           historie
           of
           the
           
             Conquest
             of
             Ireland
             )
             all
             the
             Princes
             of
             Ireland
             did
             voluntarily
             submitt
             ,
             and
             binde
             themselves
             with
             firme
             bonds
             of
             faith
             and
             oath
             ,
             unto
             Henry
             the
             second
             King
             of
             England
             .
          
           The
           like
           might
           be
           said
           of
           the
           generall
           submissions
           made
           in
           the
           dayes
           of
           King
           Richard
           the
           second
           and
           King
           Henry
           the
           eighth
           :
           to
           speake
           nothing
           of
           the
           prescription
           of
           divers
           hundreds
           of
           yeares
           possession
           ;
           which
           was
           the
           plea
           that
           e
           Iephte
           used
           to
           the
           Ammonites
           ,
           and
           is
           indeed
           the
           best
           evidence
           that
           the
           Bishop
           of
           Romes
           own
           f
           Proctors
           do
           produce
           for
           their
           Masters
           right
           to
           Rome
           it selfe
           .
        
         
         
           For
           the
           Popes
           direct
           dominion
           over
           Ireland
           ,
           two
           titles
           are
           brought
           forth
           ;
           beside
           those
           
             covenants
             of
             King
             Iohn
          
           (
           mentioned
           by
           Allen
           )
           which
           hee
           that
           hath
           any
           understanding
           in
           our
           state
           ,
           knoweth
           to
           be
           clearly
           voide
           and
           worth
           nothing
           .
           The
           one
           is
           taken
           from
           a
           speciall
           grant
           supposed
           to
           bee
           made
           by
           the
           inhabitants
           of
           the
           countrey
           ,
           at
           the
           time
           of
           their
           first
           conversion
           unto
           Christianitie
           :
           the
           other
           from
           a
           right
           which
           g
           the
           Pope
           challengeth
           unto
           himselfe
           over
           all
           Ilands
           in
           generall
           .
           The
           former
           of
           these
           was
           devised
           of
           late
           by
           an
           Italian
           ,
           in
           the
           reigne
           of
           King
           Henry
           the
           eighth
           ;
           the
           later
           was
           found
           out
           in
           the
           daies
           of
           King
           Henry
           the
           second
           :
           before
           whose
           time
           not
           one
           footestep
           doth
           appeare
           in
           all
           antiquitie
           of
           any
           claime
           that
           the
           Bishop
           of
           Rome
           should
           make
           to
           the
           dominion
           of
           Ireland
           ;
           no
           not
           in
           the
           Popes
           owne
           records
           ,
           which
           have
           beene
           curiously
           searched
           by
           
             Nicolaus
             Arragonius
          
           ,
           and
           other
           ministers
           of
           his
           ,
           who
           have
           purposely
           written
           of
           the
           particulars
           of
           his
           temporall
           estate
           .
           The
           Italian
           of
           whom
           I
           spake
           ,
           is
           
             Polydore
             Vergil
          
           ;
           he
           that
           composed
           the
           booke
           
             De
             inventoribus
             rerum
          
           ,
           of
           the
           first
           
             Inventers
             of
             things
          
           :
           among
           whom
           hee
           himselfe
           may
           challenge
           a
           place
           for
           this
           invention
           ;
           if
           the
           
             Inventers
             of
             lyes
          
           bee
           admitted
           to
           have
           any
           roome
           in
           that
           companie
           .
           This
           man
           being
           sent
           over
           by
           the
           Pope
           into
           England
           h
           for
           the
           collecting
           of
           his
           Peter-pence
           ,
           undertooke
           the
           writing
           of
           the
           historie
           of
           that
           nation
           ,
           wherein
           he
           forgat
           not
           by
           the
           way
           to
           doe
           the
           best
           service
           hee
           could
           to
           his
           Lord
           that
           had
           imployed
           him
           thither
           .
           There
           hee
           telleth
           an
           idle
           tale
           ;
           how
           the
           Irish
           being
           moved
           to
           accept
           Henry
           the
           second
           for
           
           their
           King
           ,
           i
           
             did
             deny
             that
             this
             could
             be
             done
             otherwise
             than
             by
             the
             Bishop
             of
             Romes
             anthoritie
             :
             because
          
           (
           forsooth
           )
           
             that
             from
             the
             very
             beginning
             ,
             after
             they
             had
             accepted
             Christian
             Religion
             ,
             they
             had
             yeelded
             themselves
             and
             all
             that
             they
             had
             into
             his
             power
             .
             and
             they
             did
             constantly
             affirme
          
           (
           saith
           this
           fabler
           )
           
             that
             they
             had
             no
             other
             Lord
             ,
             beside
             the
             Pope
             :
             of
             which
             also
             they
             yet
             doe
             bragge
             .
          
        
         
           The
           Italian
           is
           followed
           herein
           by
           two
           Englishmen
           ,
           that
           wished
           the
           Popes
           advancement
           as
           much
           as
           hee
           ;
           
             Edmund
             Campian
          
           and
           
             Nicholas
             Sanders
          
           .
           the
           one
           whereof
           writeth
           ,
           that
           k
           
             immediately
             after
             Christianitie
             planted
             here
             ,
             the
             whole
             Iland
             with
             one
             consent
             gave
             themselves
             not
             onely
             into
             the
             spirituall
             ,
             but
             also
             into
             the
             temporall
             Iurisdiction
             of
             the
             See
             of
             Rome
             .
          
           the
           other
           in
           Polydores
           owne
           words
           (
           though
           hee
           name
           him
           not
           )
           that
           l
           
             the
             Irish
             from
             the
             beginning
             ,
             presently
             after
             they
             had
             received
             Christian
             Religion
             ,
             gave
             up
             themselves
             and
             all
             that
             they
             had
             into
             the
             power
             of
             the
             Bishop
             of
             Rome
          
           ;
           and
           that
           untill
           the
           time
           of
           King
           Henry
           the
           second
           ,
           they
           did
           
             acknowledge
             no
             other
             supreme
             Prince
             of
             Ireland
             ,
             beside
             of
             the
             Bishop
             of
             Rome
             alone
             .
          
           For
           confutation
           of
           which
           dreame
           ,
           we
           need
           not
           have
           recourse
           to
           our
           owne
           Chronicles
           :
           the
           Bull
           of
           Adrian
           the
           fourth
           ,
           wherein
           hee
           giveth
           libertie
           of
           King
           Henry
           the
           second
           to
           enter
           upon
           Ireland
           ,
           sufficiently
           discovereth
           the
           vanitie
           thereof
           .
           For
           ,
           hee
           there
           shewing
           what
           right
           the
           Church
           of
           Rome
           pretended
           unto
           Ireland
           ,
           maketh
           no
           mention
           at
           all
           of
           this
           (
           which
           had
           beene
           the
           fairest
           and
           clearest
           title
           that
           could
           bee
           alledged
           ,
           if
           any
           such
           had
           been
           then
           existent
           
             in
             rerum
             naturâ
          
           )
           but
           is
           faine
           to
           
           flie
           unto
           a
           farre-fetcht
           interest
           which
           hee
           saith
           the
           Church
           of
           Rome
           hath
           unto
           all
           Christian
           Ilands
           .
           m
           Truly
           (
           saith
           he
           to
           the
           King
           )
           
             there
             is
             no
             doubt
             ,
             but
             that
             all
             Ilands
             unto
             which
             Christ
             the
             Sunne
             of
             Righteousnesse
             hath
             shined
             ,
             and
             which
             have
             received
             the
             instructions
             of
             the
             Christian
             faith
             ,
             doe
             pertaine
             to
             the
             right
             of
             Saint
             Peter
             and
             the
             holy
             Church
             of
             Rome
             :
             which
             your
             Noblenesse
             also
             doth
             acknowledge
             .
          
        
         
           If
           you
           would
           further
           understand
           the
           ground
           of
           this
           strange
           claime
           ,
           whereby
           all
           Christian
           Ilands
           at
           a
           clap
           are
           challenged
           to
           bee
           parcell
           of
           St.
           Peters
           patrimonie
           :
           you
           shall
           have
           it
           from
           
             Iohannes
             Sarisburiensis
          
           ,
           who
           was
           most
           inward
           with
           Pope
           Adrian
           ,
           and
           obtained
           from
           him
           this
           very
           grant
           whereof
           now
           wee
           are
           speaking
           .
           n
           
             At
             my
             request
          
           (
           saith
           he
           )
           
             he
             granted
             Ireland
             to
             the
             illustrious
             King
             of
             England
             Henry
             the
             second
             ,
             and
             gave
             it
             to
             bee
             possessed
             by
             right
             of
             inheritance
             :
             as
             his
             owne
             letters
             doe
             testifie
             unto
             this
             day
             .
             For
             all
             Ilands
             ,
             of
             ancient
             right
             ,
             are
             said
             to
             belong
             to
             the
             Church
             of
             Rome
             ,
             by
             the
             donation
             of
             Constantine
             ,
             who
             founded
             &
             endowed
             the
             same
             .
          
           But
           will
           you
           see
           ,
           what
           a
           goodly
           title
           here
           is
           ,
           in
           the
           meane
           time
           ?
           First
           ,
           the
           Donation
           of
           Constantine
           hath
           been
           long
           since
           discovered
           to
           be
           a
           notorious
           forgerie
           ,
           and
           is
           rejected
           by
           all
           men
           of
           judgement
           as
           a
           senslesse
           fiction
           .
           Secondly
           ,
           in
           the
           whole
           context
           of
           this
           forged
           Donation
           I
           find
           mention
           made
           of
           Ilands
           in
           one
           place
           only
           :
           o
           where
           no
           more
           power
           
           is
           given
           to
           the
           Church
           of
           Rome
           over
           them
           ,
           than
           in
           generall
           over
           the
           whole
           Continent
           (
           by
           East
           and
           by
           West
           ,
           by
           North
           and
           by
           South
           )
           and
           in
           particular
           over
           
             Iudaea
             ,
             Graecia
             ,
             Asia
             ,
             Thracia
             ,
          
           and
           Aphrica
           ;
           which
           use
           not
           to
           passe
           in
           the
           account
           of
           St.
           Peters
           temporall
           patrimonie
           .
           Thirdly
           ,
           it
           doth
           not
           appeare
           ,
           that
           Constantine
           himselfe
           had
           any
           interest
           in
           the
           Kingdome
           of
           Ireland
           :
           how
           then
           could
           hee
           conferre
           it
           upon
           another
           ?
           Some
           words
           there
           be
           in
           an
           oration
           of
           p
           Eumenius
           the
           Rhetorician
           ,
           by
           which
           peradventure
           it
           may
           bee
           collected
           ,
           that
           his
           father
           Constantius
           bare
           some
           stroke
           here
           :
           but
           that
           the
           Iland
           was
           ever
           possessed
           by
           the
           Romanes
           ,
           or
           accounted
           a
           parcell
           of
           the
           Empire
           ,
           cannot
           be
           proved
           by
           any
           sufficient
           testimonie
           of
           antiquitie
           .
           Fourthly
           ,
           the
           late
           writers
           that
           are
           of
           another
           mind
           ,
           as
           
             Pomponius
             Laetus
             ,
             Cuspinian
          
           ,
           and
           others
           ,
           doe
           yet
           affirme
           withall
           ,
           q
           that
           in
           the
           division
           of
           the
           Empire
           after
           Constantines
           death
           ,
           Ireland
           was
           assigned
           unto
           Constantinus
           the
           eldest
           sonne
           :
           which
           will
           hardly
           stand
           with
           this
           donation
           of
           the
           Ilands
           supposed
           to
           bee
           formerly
           made
           unto
           the
           Bishop
           of
           Rome
           and
           his
           successors
           .
           Pope
           Adrian
           therefore
           ,
           and
           Iohn
           of
           Salisbury
           his
           sollicitor
           ,
           had
           need
           seeke
           some
           better
           warrant
           for
           the
           title
           of
           Ireland
           ,
           than
           the
           Donation
           of
           Constantine
           .
        
         
           
             Iohn
             Harding
          
           in
           his
           Chronicle
           saith
           ,
           that
           the
           Kings
           of
           England
           have
           right
           
             
               r
               To
               Ireland
               also
               ,
               by
               King
               Henry
               (
               le
               fitz
            
             
               Of
               Maude
               ,
               daughter
               of
               first
               King
               Henry
               )
            
             
               That
               conquered
               it
               ,
               for
               their
               great
               heresie
               .
            
          
           which
           in
           another
           place
           he
           expresseth
           more
           at
           large
           ,
           in
           this
           manner
           :
           
           
             
               s
               The
               King
               Henry
               then
               ,
               conquered
               all
               Ireland
            
             
               By
               Papall
               dome
               ,
               there
               of
               his
               royaltee
            
             
               The
               profits
               and
               revenues
               of
               the
               land
            
             
               The
               domination
               ,
               and
               the
               soveraigntee
            
             
               For
               errour
               which
               agayn
               the
               spiritualtee
            
             
               They
               held
               full
               long
               ,
               and
               would
               not
               been
               correct
            
             
               Of
               heresies
               ,
               with
               which
               they
               were
               infect
               .
            
          
           
             Philip
             Osullevan
          
           on
           the
           other
           side
           ,
           doth
           not
           only
           deny
           t
           that
           Ireland
           was
           infected
           with
           any
           heresie
           :
           but
           would
           also
           have
           us
           beleeve
           ,
           u
           that
           the
           Pope
           never
           intended
           to
           conferre
           the
           Lordship
           of
           Ireland
           upon
           the
           Kings
           of
           England
           .
           For
           where
           it
           is
           said
           in
           Pope
           Adrians
           Bull
           ;
           x
           
             Let
             the
             people
             of
             that
             land
             receive
             thee
             ,
             and
             reverence
             thee
             as
             a
             Lord
             :
          
           the
           meaning
           thereof
           is
           ,
           saith
           this
           Glozer
           ,
           y
           Let
           them
           reverence
           thee
           ,
           
             as
             a
             Prince
             worthy
             of
             great
             honour
             ;
             not
             as
             Lord
             of
             Ireland
             ,
             but
             as
             a
             Deputie
             appointed
             for
             the
             collecting
             of
             the
             Ecclesiasticall
             tribute
             .
          
           It
           is
           true
           indeed
           that
           King
           Henry
           the
           second
           ,
           to
           the
           end
           hee
           might
           the
           more
           easily
           obtaine
           the
           Popes
           good
           wil
           for
           his
           entring
           upon
           Ireland
           ,
           did
           voluntarily
           offer
           unto
           him
           
             the
             payment
             of
             a
             yearely
             pension
             of
             one
             penny
             out
             of
             every
             house
          
           in
           the
           countrey
           :
           which
           (
           for
           ought
           that
           I
           can
           learne
           )
           was
           the
           first
           
             Ecclesiasticall
             tribute
          
           that
           ever
           came
           unto
           the
           Popes
           coffers
           out
           of
           Ireland
           .
           But
           that
           King
           Henry
           got
           nothing
           else
           by
           the
           bargaine
           but
           the
           bare
           office
           of
           collecting
           the
           Popes
           Smoke-silver
           (
           for
           so
           wee
           called
           it
           here
           ,
           when
           wee
           payed
           it
           )
           is
           so
           dull
           a
           conceit
           ;
           that
           I
           doe
           somewhat
           wonder
           how
           Osullevan
           himselfe
           could
           be
           such
           a
           blocke-head
           ,
           as
           not
           to
           discerne
           the
           senselesnesse
           of
           it
           .
        
         
           
             What
             the
             King
             sought
             for
             and
             obtained
             ,
             is
             sufficiently
             
             declared
             by
             them
             that
             writ
             the
             historie
             of
             his
             reigne
             .
          
           z
           
             In
             the
             yeare
             of
             our
             Lord
             MCLV.
             the
             first
             Bull
             was
             sent
             unto
             him
             by
             Pope
          
           Adrian
           :
           
             the
             summe
             whereof
             is
             thus
             laid
             down
             in
             a
             second
             Bull
             ,
             directed
             unto
             him
             by
          
           Alexander
           the
           third
           ,
           
             the
             immediate
             successor
             of
             the
             other
             .
          
           a
           Following
           the
           stepps
           of
           reverend
           Pope
           Adrian
           ,
           and
           attending
           the
           fruit
           of
           your
           desire
           ;
           we
           ratifie
           and
           confirme
           his
           grant
           concerning
           the
           dominion
           of
           the
           KINGDOME
           of
           Ireland
           conferred
           upon
           you
           :
           reserving
           unto
           St.
           Peter
           and
           the
           holy
           Church
           of
           Rome
           ,
           as
           in
           England
           so
           in
           Ireland
           ,
           the
           yearely
           pension
           of
           one
           penny
           out
           of
           every
           house
           .
           
             In
             this
             sort
             did
             Pope
          
           Adrian
           ,
           
             as
             much
             as
             lay
             in
             him
             ,
          
           give
           Ireland
           
             unto
             King
          
           Henry
           ,
           haereditario
           jure
           possidendam
           ,
           to
           bee
           possessed
           by
           right
           of
           inheritance
           ;
           
             &
             withall
          
           b
           sent
           unto
           him
           a
           ring
           of
           gold
           ,
           set
           with
           a
           faire
           Emerauld
           ,
           for
           his
           investiture
           in
           the
           right
           thereof
           :
           as
           Iohannes
           Sarisburiensis
           ,
           
             who
             was
             the
             principall
             agent
             betwixt
             them
             both
             in
             this
             businesse
             ,
             doth
             expresly
             testifie
             .
             After
             this
             ,
             in
             the
             year
             MCLXXI
             .
             the
             King
             himselfe
             came
             hither
             in
             person
             :
             where
             the
          
           Archbishops
           and
           Bishops
           of
           Ireland
           c
           received
           him
           for
           their
           KING
           and
           Lord.
           
             The
             King
             (
             saith
          
           Iohn
           Brampton
           )
           d
           received
           letters
           from
           every
           Archbishop
           and
           Bishop
           ,
           with
           their
           seales
           hanging
           upon
           them
           in
           the
           manner
           
           of
           an
           Indenture
           ;
           confirming
           the
           KINGDOME
           of
           Ireland
           unto
           him
           and
           his
           heyres
           ,
           and
           bearing
           witnesse
           that
           they
           in
           Ireland
           had
           ordained
           him
           and
           his
           heyres
           to
           bee
           their
           KINGS
           and
           Lords
           for
           ever
           .
           At
           Waterford
           (
           saith
           Roger
           Hoveden
           )
           e
           all
           the
           Archbishops
           ,
           Bishops
           ,
           and
           Abbots
           of
           Ireland
           came
           unto
           the
           King
           of
           England
           ,
           and
           received
           him
           for
           KING
           and
           Lord
           of
           Ireland
           ;
           swearing
           fealty
           to
           him
           and
           to
           his
           heyres
           ,
           and
           power
           to
           reigne
           over
           them
           for
           ever
           :
           and
           hereof
           they
           gave
           him
           their
           Instruments
           .
           The
           Kings
           also
           and
           Princes
           of
           Ireland
           ,
           by
           the
           example
           of
           the
           Clergie
           ,
           did
           in
           like
           manner
           receive
           Henry
           King
           of
           England
           for
           Lord
           and
           KING
           of
           Ireland
           ;
           and
           became
           his
           men
           (
           or
           ,
           did
           him
           homage
           )
           and
           swore
           fealty
           to
           him
           and
           his
           heyres
           against
           all
           men
           .
        
         
           
             These
             things
             were
             presently
             after
             confirmed
             in
             the
             Nationall
             Synod
             held
             at
          
           Casshell
           :
           
             the
             Acts
             whereof
             in
          
           Giraldus
           Cambrensis
           
             are
             thus
             concluded
          
           .
           f
           For
           it
           is
           fit
           and
           most
           meet
           ,
           that
           as
           Ireland
           by
           Gods
           appointment
           hath
           gotten
           a
           Lord
           and
           a
           KING
           from
           England
           ;
           so
           also
           they
           should
           from
           thence
           receive
           a
           better
           forme
           of
           living
           .
           King
           Henry
           
             also
             at
             the
             same
             time
          
           g
           sent
           a
           transcript
           of
           the
           Instruments
           of
           all
           the
           Archbishops
           and
           Bishops
           of
           Ireland
           ,
           unto
           Pope
           Alexander
           :
           who
           by
           his
           Apostolicall
           authority
           (
           
             for
             so
             was
             it
             in
             those
             
             dayes
             of
             darknesse
             esteemed
             to
             bee
             )
          
           did
           confirme
           the
           KINGDOME
           of
           Ireland
           unto
           him
           and
           his
           heyres
           ,
           (
           according
           to
           the
           forme
           of
           the
           Instruments
           of
           the
           Archbishops
           &
           Bishops
           of
           Ireland
           )
           h
           and
           made
           them
           KINGS
           thereof
           for
           ever
           .
           
             The
             King
             also
          
           i
           
             obtained
             further
             from
             Pope
          
           Alexander
           ,
           that
           it
           might
           bee
           lawfull
           for
           him
           to
           make
           which
           of
           his
           sonnes
           hee
           pleased
           ,
           KING
           of
           Ireland
           ,
           and
           to
           crowne
           him
           accordingly
           ;
           and
           to
           subdue
           the
           Kings
           and
           great
           ones
           of
           that
           land
           ,
           which
           would
           not
           subject
           themselves
           unto
           him
           .
           
             Whereupon
             ,
             in
             a
             grand
             Councell
             held
             at
          
           Oxford
           
             in
             the
             yeere
             of
             our
             Lord
             MCLXXVII
             .
          
           k
           before
           the
           Bishops
           and
           Peeres
           of
           the
           Kingdome
           hee
           constituted
           his
           sonne
           Iohn
           KING
           of
           Ireland
           ;
           l
           according
           to
           that
           grant
           and
           confirmation
           of
           Pope
           Alexander
           .
           
             And
             to
             make
             the
             matter
             yet
             more
             sure
             ,
             in
             the
             yeere
             MCLXXXVI
             .
             hee
             obtained
             a
             new
             licence
             from
             Pope
          
           Vrban
           the
           third
           ;
           m
           that
           one
           of
           his
           sonnes
           ,
           whom
           hee
           himselfe
           would
           ,
           should
           bee
           crowned
           for
           the
           KINGDOME
           of
           Ireland
           .
           
             And
             this
             the
             Pope
             did
             not
             onely
          
           confirme
           by
           his
           Bull
           :
           
             but
             also
             the
             yeere
             following
             purposely
             sent
             over
             Cardinall
          
           Octavian
           and
           Hugo
           de
           Nunant
           (
           or
           Novant
           )
           n
           
             his
             Legates
             into
          
           Ireland
           ,
           
             to
             crowne
          
           Iohn
           
             the
             Kings
             sonne
             there
          
           .
        
         
           By
           all
           this
           wee
           may
           see
           ,
           how
           farre
           King
           Henry
           the
           second
           proceeded
           in
           this
           businesse
           :
           which
           I
           doe
           not
           
           so
           much
           note
           ,
           to
           convince
           the
           stolidity
           of
           Osullevan
           ,
           who
           would
           faine
           perswade
           fooles
           ,
           that
           he
           was
           preferred
           onely
           to
           bee
           collector
           of
           the
           Popes
           Peter-pence
           :
           as
           to
           shew
           ,
           that
           Ireland
           at
           that
           time
           was
           esteemed
           a
           Kingdome
           ,
           and
           the
           Kings
           of
           England
           accounted
           no
           lesse
           than
           Kings
           thereof
           .
           And
           therefore
           *
           Paul
           the
           fourth
           needed
           not
           make
           all
           that
           noyse
           ,
           and
           trouble
           o
           
             the
             whole
             Court
             of
             heaven
          
           with
           the
           matter
           :
           when
           in
           the
           yeere
           MDLV
           .
           he
           tooke
           upon
           him
           by
           his
           
             Apostolicall
             authority
          
           (
           such
           I
           am
           sure
           ,
           as
           none
           of
           the
           Apostles
           of
           Christ
           did
           ever
           assume
           unto
           themselves
           )
           to
           erect
           Ireland
           unto
           the
           title
           and
           dignity
           of
           a
           Kingdome
           .
           Whereas
           hee
           might
           have
           found
           ,
           even
           in
           his
           owne
           *
           
             Romane
             Provinciall
          
           ,
           that
           Ireland
           was
           reckoned
           among
           the
           Kingdomes
           of
           Christendome
           ,
           before
           hee
           was
           borne
           .
           Insomuch
           ,
           that
           in
           the
           yeere
           MCCCCXVII
           .
           when
           the
           Legates
           of
           the
           King
           of
           England
           and
           the
           French
           Kings
           Ambassadours
           fell
           at
           variance
           in
           the
           Councell
           of
           Constance
           for
           precedencie
           ;
           the
           English
           Orators
           ,
           among
           other
           arguments
           ,
           alledged
           this
           also
           for
           themselves
           .
           p
           
             It
             is
             well
             knowne
             ,
             
             that
             according
             to
             Albertus
             Magnus
             and
             Bartholomaeus
             in
             his
             booke
             De
             proprietatibus
             rerum
             ,
             the
             whole
             world
             being
             divided
             into
             three
             parts
             (
             to
             wit
             ,
             Asia
             ,
             Africk
             and
             Europe
             )
             Europe
             is
             divided
             into
             foure
             Kingdomes
             :
             namely
             ,
             the
             Romane
             for
             the
             first
             ,
             the
             Constantinopolitane
             for
             the
             second
             ,
             the
             third
             the
             Kingdome
             of
             Ireland
             which
             is
             now
             translated
             unto
             the
             English
             ,
             and
             the
             fourth
             the
             Kingdome
             of
             Spain
             .
             Whereby
             it
             appeareth
             ,
             that
             the
             King
             of
             England
             and
             his
             Kingdome
             are
             of
             the
             more
             eminent
             ancient
             Kings
             and
             Kingdomes
             of
             all
             Europe
             :
             which
             prerogative
             the
             Kingdome
             of
             France
             is
             not
             said
             to
             obtaine
             .
          
           And
           this
           have
           I
           here
           inserted
           the
           more
           willingly
           ,
           because
           it
           maketh
           something
           for
           the
           honour
           of
           my
           Country
           (
           to
           which
           ,
           I
           confesse
           ,
           I
           am
           very
           much
           devoted
           )
           and
           in
           the
           printed
           Acts
           of
           the
           Councell
           it
           is
           not
           commonly
           to
           be
           had
           .
        
         
           But
           now
           commeth
           forth
           Osullevan
           againe
           ,
           and
           like
           a
           little
           furie
           flyeth
           upon
           q
           the
           English-Irish
           Priests
           of
           his
           owne
           religion
           ,
           which
           in
           the
           late
           rebellion
           of
           the
           Earle
           of
           Tirone
           did
           
             not
             deny
             that
             Hellish
             doctrine
             ,
             fetcht
             out
             of
             Hell
             for
             the
             destruction
             of
             Catholickes
             ,
             that
             it
             is
             lawfull
             for
             Catholickes
             to
             beare
             armes
             and
             fight
             for
             Heretickes
             against
             Catholickes
             and
             their
             country
             .
          
           or
           rather
           (
           if
           you
           will
           have
           it
           in
           plainer
           termes
           )
           that
           it
           is
           lawfull
           for
           them
           of
           the
           Romish
           Religion
           ,
           to
           beare
           armes
           and
           fight
           for
           their
           Soveraigne
           and
           fellow-subjects
           that
           are
           of
           another
           profession
           ,
           against
           those
           of
           their
           own
           religion
           that
           trayterously
           rebell
           against
           their
           Prince
           and
           Country
           .
           and
           to
           shew
           ,
           r
           
             how
             madde
             
             and
             how
             venemous
             a
             doctrine
             they
             did
             bring
          
           (
           these
           bee
           the
           caitiffes
           owne
           termes
           )
           
             that
             exhorted
             the
             laitie
             to
             follow
             the
             Queens
             side
             :
          
           he
           setteth
           downe
           the
           censure
           of
           the
           Doctors
           of
           the
           University
           of
           Salamanca
           and
           Vallodilid
           ,
           published
           in
           the
           yeere
           MDCIII
           .
           for
           the
           justification
           of
           that
           Rebellion
           ,
           and
           the
           declaration
           of
           Pope
           Clement
           the
           eights
           letters
           touching
           the
           same
           ;
           wherein
           he
           signifieth
           that
           s
           
             the
             English
             ought
             to
             be
             set
             upon
             no
             lesse
             than
             the
             Turkes
             ,
             and
             imparteth
             the
             same
             favours
             unto
             such
             as
             set
             upon
             them
             ,
             that
             hee
             doth
             unto
             such
             as
             fight
             against
             the
             Turkes
             .
          
           Such
           wholesome
           directions
           doth
           the
           Bishop
           of
           Rome
           give
           vnto
           those
           that
           will
           be
           ruled
           by
           him
           :
           far
           different
           (
           I
           wisse
           )
           from
           that
           holy
           doctrine
           ,
           wherewith
           the
           Church
           of
           Rome
           was
           at
           first
           seasoned
           by
           the
           Apostles
           .
           t
           
             Let
             every
             soule
             bee
             subject
             unto
             the
             higher
             powers
             ;
             for
             there
             is
             no
             power
             but
             of
             God
             :
          
           was
           the
           lesson
           that
           S.
           Paul
           taught
           to
           the
           ancient
           Romanes
           .
           Where
           if
           it
           bee
           demanded
           ;
           u
           
             whether
             that
             power
             also
             ,
             which
             persecuteth
             the
             servants
             of
             God
             ,
             impugneth
             the
             faith
             ,
             and
             subverteth
             religion
             ,
             be
             of
             God
             ?
          
           our
           countryman
           Sedulius
           will
           teach
           us
           to
           answer
           with
           Origen
           ;
           that
           
             even
             such
             a
             power
             as
             that
             ,
             is
             given
             of
             God
             ,
             for
             the
             revenge
             of
             the
             evill
             ,
             and
             the
             praise
             of
             the
             good
             .
          
           although
           he
           were
           as
           wicked
           ,
           as
           eyther
           Nero
           among
           the
           Romans
           ,
           or
           Herod
           among
           the
           Iewes
           :
           the
           one
           whereof
           most
           cruelly
           persecuted
           the
           Christians
           ,
           the
           other
           Christ
           himselfe
           .
        
         
           
             And
             yet
             when
             the
             one
             of
             them
             swayed
             the
             scepter
             ,
             
             Saint
          
           Paul
           
             told
             the
             Christian
          
           Romanes
           ;
           
             that
             they
          
           x
           must
           needes
           be
           subject
           ,
           not
           only
           for
           wrath
           ,
           but
           also
           for
           conscience
           sake
           :
           
             and
             of
             the
             causelesse
             feare
             of
             the
             other
             ,
             these
             Verses
             of
          
           Sedulius
           
             are
             solemnly
             sung
             in
             the
             Church
             of
          
           Rome
           ,
           
             even
             unto
             this
             day
          
           .
           
             
               
                 y
                 Herodes
                 hostis
                 impie
                 ,
              
               
                 Christum
                 venire
                 quid
                 times
                 ?
              
               
                 Non
                 eripit
                 mortalia
                 ,
              
               
                 Qui
                 regna
                 dat
                 coelestia
                 .
              
            
             
               
                 Why
                 ,
                 wicked
                 Herod
                 ,
                 dost
                 thou
                 feare
              
               
                 And
                 at
                 Christs
                 comming
                 frowne
                 ?
              
               
                 The
                 mortall
                 he
                 takes
                 not
                 away
                 ,
              
               
                 That
                 gives
                 the
                 heavenly
                 crowne
                 .
              
            
          
           
             a
             better
             paraphrase
             whereof
             you
             cannot
             have
             ,
             than
             this
             which
          
           Claudius
           
             hath
             inserted
             into
             his
             Collections
             upon
             St.
          
           Matthew
           .
           z
           That
           King
           which
           is
           borne
           ,
           doth
           not
           come
           to
           overcome
           Kings
           by
           fighting
           ,
           but
           to
           subdue
           them
           after
           a
           wonderfull
           manner
           by
           dying
           :
           neither
           is
           he
           borne
           to
           the
           end
           that
           hee
           may
           succeed
           thee
           ,
           but
           that
           the
           world
           may
           faithfully
           beleeve
           in
           him
           .
           For
           he
           is
           come
           ,
           not
           that
           hee
           may
           fight
           being
           alive
           ,
           but
           that
           hee
           may
           triumph
           being
           slaine
           :
           nor
           that
           he
           may
           with
           gold
           get
           an
           armie
           
           unto
           himselfe
           out
           of
           other
           nations
           ,
           but
           that
           hee
           may
           shed
           his
           precious
           bloud
           for
           the
           saving
           of
           the
           nations
           .
           Vainly
           didst
           thou
           by
           envying
           feare
           him
           to
           be●
           thy
           successor
           ,
           whom
           by
           beleeving
           thou
           oughtest
           to
           seeke
           as
           thy
           Saviour
           :
           because
           if
           thou
           diddest
           beleeve
           in
           him
           ,
           thou
           shouldest
           reigne
           with
           him
           ;
           and
           as
           thou
           hast
           received
           a
           temporall
           kingdome
           from
           him
           ,
           thou
           shouldest
           also
           receive
           from
           him
           an
           everlasting
           .
           For
           the
           kingdome
           of
           this
           Childe
           is
           not
           of
           this
           world
           ;
           but
           by
           him
           it
           is
           that
           men
           do
           reign
           in
           this
           world
           .
           He
           is
           the
           Wisedome
           of
           God
           ,
           which
           saith
           in
           the
           Proverbs
           :
           By
           mee
           Kings
           reigne
           .
           This
           Childe
           is
           the
           Word
           of
           God
           :
           this
           Childe
           is
           the
           Power
           and
           Wisedome
           of
           God
           :
           If
           thou
           canst
           ,
           thinke
           against
           the
           Wisedome
           of
           God
           :
           thou
           workest
           thine
           owne
           destruction
           ,
           and
           dost
           not
           know
           it
           .
           For
           thou
           by
           no
           meanes
           shouldest
           have
           had
           thy
           kingdome
           ,
           unlesse
           thou
           hadst
           received
           it
           from
           that
           Childe
           which
           now
           is
           borne
           .
        
         
           As
           for
           the
           Censure
           of
           the
           Doctors
           of
           Salamanca
           and
           Vallodilid
           :
           our
           Nobility
           and
           Gentry
           ,
           by
           the
           faithfull
           service
           which
           at
           that
           time
           they
           performed
           unto
           the
           Crowne
           of
           England
           ,
           did
           make
           a
           reall
           confutation
           of
           it
           .
           Of
           whose
           fidelity
           in
           this
           kinde
           I
           am
           so
           well
           perswaded
           ,
           that
           I
           doe
           assure
           my selfe
           ,
           that
           neither
           the
           names
           of
           
             Franciscus
             Zumel
          
           and
           
             Alphonsus
             Curiel
          
           (
           how
           great
           Schoole-men
           soever
           they
           were
           )
           nor
           of
           the
           
             Fathers
             of
             the
             Society
             (
             Iohannes
             de
             Ziguenza
             ,
             Emanuel
             de
             Roias
             ,
          
           and
           
             Gaspar
             de
             Mena
          
           )
           nor
           of
           the
           Pope
           himselfe
           ,
           upon
           whose
           sentence
           they
           wholly
           ground
           their
           Resolution
           ;
           eyther
           then
           was
           or
           hereafter
           will
           be
           of
           any
           force
           ,
           to
           remove
           them
           one
           whit
           from
           the
           allegeance
           and
           duty
           which
           they
           doe
           owe
           
           unto
           their
           King
           and
           Country
           .
           Nay
           I
           am
           in
           good
           hope
           ,
           that
           their
           loyall
           mindes
           will
           so
           farre
           distaste
           that
           evill
           lesson
           ,
           which
           those
           great
           Rabbies
           of
           theirs
           would
           have
           them
           learne
           ;
           that
           it
           will
           teach
           them
           to
           unlearne
           another
           bad
           lesson
           ,
           wherewith
           they
           have
           beene
           most
           miserably
           deluded
           .
           For
           whereas
           heretofore
           a
           wise
           men
           did
           learne
           to
           give
           credence
           to
           the
           truth
           ,
           
             by
             whosoevers
             mouth
             it
             should
             be
             delivered
             :
          
           now
           men
           are
           made
           such
           fooles
           ,
           that
           they
           are
           taught
           b
           
             to
             attend
             in
             the
             doctrine
             of
             Religion
             ,
             not
             what
             the
             thing
             is
             that
             is
             said
             ,
             but
             what
             the
             person
             is
             that
             speaketh
             it
             .
          
        
         
           But
           how
           dangerous
           a
           thing
           it
           is
           ,
           to
           have
           the
           faith
           of
           our
           Lord
           
             Iesus
             Christ
          
           in
           respect
           of
           persons
           ;
           and
           to
           give
           entertainment
           to
           the
           truth
           ,
           not
           so
           much
           for
           it selfe
           as
           for
           the
           regard
           that
           is
           had
           to
           the
           deliverer
           of
           it
           :
           I
           wish
           men
           would
           learne
           otherwise
           ,
           than
           by
           wofull
           experience
           in
           themselves
           .
           c
           
             The
             truth
          
           (
           saith
           
             Claudius
             )
             is
             to
             bee
             loved
             for
             it selfe
             ,
             not
             for
             the
             Man
             ,
             or
             for
             the
             Angell
             ,
             by
             whom
             it
             is
             preached
             .
             For
             he
             that
             doth
             love
             it
             in
             respect
             of
             the
             preachers
             of
             it
             ,
             may
             love
             lyes
             also
             ,
             if
             they
             peradventure
             shall
             deliver
             any
             .
          
           as
           here
           without
           all
           peradventure
           ,
           the
           Pope
           and
           his
           Doctors
           have
           done
           :
           unlesse
           the
           teaching
           of
           flat
           Rebellion
           and
           high
           Treason
           may
           passe
           in
           the
           account
           of
           Catholicke
           verities
           .
           The
           Lord
           of
           his
           mercie
           open
           their
           eyes
           ,
           that
           they
           
           may
           see
           the
           light
           ;
           and
           give
           them
           grace
           to
           
             receive
             the
             love
             of
             the
             truth
             ,
             that
             they
             may
             be
             saved
             .
          
           The
           Lord
           likewise
           grant
           (
           if
           it
           bee
           his
           blessed
           will
           )
           that
           Truth
           and
           Peace
           may
           meet
           together
           in
           our
           dayes
           ,
           that
           we
           may
           bee
           all
           gathered
           into
           d
           
             one
             fold
          
           under
           
             one
             shepheard
          
           ,
           and
           that
           e
           
             the
             whole
             earth
             may
             be
             filled
             with
             his
             glory
             .
             Amen
             ,
             Amen
             .
          
        
         
           FINIS
           .
        
      
    
     
       
         
         
           Faults
           in
           some
           Copies
           .
        
         
           IN
           the
           Iesuites
           Challenge
           ,
           pag.
           3.
           lin
           .
           2.
           read
           ,
           contrary
           .
           pag.
           4.
           lin
           .
           9.
           for
           should
           ,
           read
           shall
           .
        
         
           
             In
             the
          
           Answer
           ,
           
             pag.
             4.
             l.
          
           26.
           likewise
           .
           p.
           5.
           l.
           21.
           satisfie
           .
           
             p.
             12.
             l.
          
           7.
           continued
           .
           
             p.
             16.
             l.
          
           22.
           
           Penitentiall
           .
           
             p.
             26.
             l.
          
           6.
           knew
           .
           
             p.
             27.
             l.
          
           26.
           
           Augustin
           .
           
             p.
             50.
             l.
          
           23.
           (
           saith
           n
           Fulgentius
           )
           
             p.
             51.
             l.
          
           6.
           when
           he
           ●s
           found
           to
           be
           that
           .
           
             p.
             62.
             l.
          
           3.
           
           Antoninus
           .
           
             p.
             64.
             l.
          
           12.
           after
           Christ.
           
             p.
             72.
             l.
             4.
             for
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             put
          
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           .
           
             p.
             75.
             l.
             6.
             cresse
             out
             ,
          
           of
           Mets
           first
           and
           afterwards
           .
           
             p.
             76.
             l.
          
           3.
           
           Carisiacum
           or
           Cressy
           .
           
             p.
             96.
             l.
          
           9.
           secretly
           .
           
             p.
             123.
             l.
          
           26.
           commanded
           .
           
             p.
             124.
             l.
          
           5.
           sinnes
           .
           
             p.
             126.
             l.
          
           17.
           intercession
           .
           
             ibid.
             l.
             19.
             for
             the
          
           comma
           
             put
             a
          
           full
           point
           ;
           
             and
             in
             the
             next
             line
             for
             the
          
           full
           po●nt
           
             put
             a
          
           comma
           .
           
             p.
             136.
             l.
          
           1.
           
           Anastasius
           .
           
             p.
             139.
             l.
          
           4.
           
           Scriptures
           .
           
             ibid.
             l.
          
           7.
           
           Levite
           .
           146.
           l.
           31.
           instrumentally
           .
           
             p.
             147.
             l.
          
           22.
           death
           .
           
             pag.
             154.
             l.
          
           25.
           
           Augustine
           .
           
             p.
             156.
             l.
          
           2.
           and
           
             p.
             162.
             l.
          
           19.
           medicine
           .
           
             p.
             171.
             l.
          
           16.
           the
           
             p.
             172.
             l.
          
           14.
           for
           these
           ,
           read
           their
           .
           
             p.
             285.
             l.
          
           2.
           
           Clympiodorus
           .
           
             p.
             188.
             l.
          
           10.
           (
           about
           243.
           
             p.
             190.
             l.
          
           4.
           who
           very
           .
           
             p.
             194
             l.
          
           16.
           (
           with
           .
           
             ibid.
             l.
             18.
             for
          
           pid
           read
           paide
           .
           
             p.
             195.
             l.
          
           6.
           intended
           .
           
             p.
             205.
             l.
          
           15.
           
           Halleluia
           .
           
             p.
             206.
             l.
             8.
             for
          
           drive
           ,
           read
           not
           drive
           .
           
             p.
             221.
             l.
          
           1.
           write
           ,
           
             p.
             226.
             l.
          
           19.
           in
           the
           Romane
           Pontificall
           .
           
             p.
             228.
             l.
          
           17.
           apocryphal
           .
           
             p.
             234.
             l.
          
           7.
           entring
           againe
           into
           .
           
             p.
             253.
             l.
          
           8.
           forme
           .
           
             p.
             264.
             l.
          
           5.
           kindes
           .
           
             p.
             270.
             l.
             18.
             for
          
           ceasing
           ,
           read
           casing
           .
           
             p.
             277.
             l.
          
           26.
           ascension
           .
           
             p.
             281.
             l.
          
           23.
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           
             p.
             284
             l.
          
           5.
           expounding
           that
           place
           in
           .
           
             p.
             291.
             l.
          
           1.
           entring
           again
           into
           .
           
             p.
             307.
             l.
          
           14.
           apocryphall
           ;
           
             p.
             310
             l.
             1.
             crosse
             out
             ,
          
           Vs.
           
             p.
             323.
             l.
          
           17.
           
           Steuchus
           .
           
             p.
             328.
             l.
          
           20
           ,
           21.
           with
           that
           which
           Olympiodorus
           writeth
           upon
           the
           same
           chapt
           er
           .
           
             p.
             330.
             l.
          
           3.
           divisiun
           .
           p.
           343.
           
             l.
             5.
             crosse
             out
             the
             last
          
           comma
           .
           l.
           22.
           palace
           .
           
             p.
             359.
             l.
          
           28.
           of
           it
           .
           
             p.
             361.
             l.
          
           .
           27.
           iudgment
           .
           
             p.
             368.
             l.
             6.
             for
          
           giveth
           ,
           read
           goeth
           .
           
             p.
             376.
             l.
          
           25.
           sister
           .
           
             p.
             379.
             l.
          
           12.
           comming
           .
           
             p.
             391.
             l.
          
           26.
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           
             p.
             395.
             l.
             26.
             for
          
           depravation
           ,
           r.
           deprivation
           .
           
             p.
             398.
             l.
          
           2.
           
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           .
           l.
           18.
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           
             p.
             427.
             l.
             9.
             for
          
           excepting
           r.
           accepting
           .
           l.
           15.
           invocation
           .
           l.
           16.
           salvation
           .
           l.
           18.
           noted
           .
           l.
           20.
           call
           .
           
             p.
             428.
             l.
             19.
             in
             stead
             of
          
           for
           ,
           r.
           of
           .
           
             p.
             437.
             l.
          
           6.
           
           Anastasius
           .
           
             p.
             439.
             l.
          
           6.
           were
           in
           .
           
             p.
             441.
             l.
          
           16.
           lliads
           .
           
             p.
             443.
             l.
          
           4.
           tryed
           .
           
             p.
             449.
             l.
          
           11.
           congruitie
           .
           
             p.
             453.
             l.
          
           14.
           here
           a.
           
             p.
             454.
             l.
          
           25.
           there
           of
           .
           
             p.
             461.
             l.
          
           26.
           descend
           .
           p.
           469.
           l.
           17.
           of
           Ang.
           
             p.
             471.
             l.
          
           30.
           
           Collections
           .
           
             p.
             472.
             l.
          
           5.
           
           Colossians
           .
           l.
           22.
           
           Phrygia
           .
           
             p.
             473.
             l.
             6.
             for
          
           mad
           ,
           r.
           made
           .
           l.
           18.
           the
           word
           .
           
             p.
             476.
             l.
          
           17.
           (
           saith
           .
           l.
           28.
           speake
           .
           )
           
             p.
             491.
             l.
          
           4.
           m
           Blessed
           .
           
             p.
             492.
             l.
          
           10.
           despise
           .
           
             p.
             497
             ,
             500
             ,
             501.
             and
          
           504.
           
             in
             the
             title
             ,
             r.
          
           Of
           Images
           .
           
             p.
             497
             l.
             21.
             for
          
           confirme
           ,
           rs
           .
           conforme
           .
           
             p.
             503.
             l.
          
           12.
           
           Origen
           .
           
             p.
             505.
             l.
          
           8.
           deaes
           and
           divers
           .
           
             p.
             506
             l.
          
           13.
           prevaile
           .
           
             p.
             508.
             l.
          
           9.
           a
           whoring
           .
           
             p.
             516.
             l.
          
           15.
           destitute
           .
           
             p.
             518.
             l.
          
           3.
           pu●e
           .
           
             pag.
             521.
             l.
          
           19.
           to
           bew
           ,
           
             p.
             525.
             l.
          
           15.
           observeth
           .
           
             p.
             535.
             l.
          
           12.
           pray
           .
           
             p.
             538.
             l.
          
           6.
           iuvet
           .
           
             p.
             539.
             l.
          
           30.
           hortatuque
           
             p.
             540.
             l.
          
           2.
           ex
           fracto
           .
           
             p.
             541.
             l.
          
           17.
           inspiration
           .
           
             p.
             547.
             l.
          
           27.
           hereby
           .
           
             p.
             548.
             l.
          
           10.
           therefore
           .
           
             p.
             556.
             l.
          
           7.
           in
           the.
           
             p.
             557.
             l.
          
           6.
           freely
           .
           
             p.
             561.
             l.
          
           10.
           receiving
           .
           
             p.
             569.
             l.
          
           24.
           substantiall
           .
        
         
           
             In
             the
             Margent
             .
             Pag.
             17.
             after
             the
             letter
             i
             ,
             lin
             .
             3.
             read
          
           Monasterii
           .
           p.
           29.
           g.
           l.
           10.
           praescientiam
           .
           p.
           31.
           n.
           l.
           1.
           in
           2.
           2.
           p.
           42.
           k.
           l.
           8.
           
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           .
           
             l.
             lin
          
           .
           5.
           
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           .
           
             p.
             43.
             0.
             l.
          
           8.
           presbyter
           .
           p.
           45.
           b.
           l.
           2.
           videtis
           .
           l.
           8.
           apud
           Fulgentium
           in
           fine
           libelli
           de
           Baptismo
           AEthiopis
           ;
           Bedam
           ,
           &c.
           
             p.
             46.
             l.
             ult
          
           .
           Psalmum
           .
           
             p.
             49.
             l.
          
           14.
           
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           .
           p.
           50.
           n.
           l.
           6.
           invenitur
           .
           Fulgentius
           (
           in
           fine
           libelli
           de
           Baptismo
           AEthiopis
           )
           Augustini
           nomine
           citatus
           apud
           Bed.
           &c.
           p.
           54.
           a.
           l.
           1●
           .
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           .
           p.
           66.
           r.
           l.
           5.
           divinâ
           autem
           illum
           .
           p.
           72.
           p.
           l.
           1.
           
           Removeantur
           .
           p.
           73.
           t.
           l.
           4.
           
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           .
           p.
           74.
           c.
           l.
           7.
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           p.
           76.
           i.
           l.
           2.
           effieitur
           .
           ibid.
           k.
           Suprà
           .
           
             p.
             77.
             r.
             l.
          
           1.
           mysterium
           .
           p.
           82.
           h.
           l.
           8.
           
           Colleg.
           p.
           87.
           l.
           
             lin
             .
             16
             for
             162.
             read
             262.
             p.
          
           88.
           o.
           l.
           2.
           
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           .
           ibid.
           q.
           l.
           4.
           
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           .
           p.
           94.
           l.
           l.
           25.
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           
             ibid.
             l.
          
           30
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           .
           p.
           104.
           l.
           
             lin
             .
             ult
          
           .
           inter
           .
           p.
           111.
           o.
           l.
           10.
           quod
           .
           p.
           116.
           g.
           l.
           3
           non
           p.
           119
           s.
           l.
           2.
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           p.
           121.
           g.
           l.
           3.
           
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           .
           p.
           123
           a
           l.
           3.
           
           Sacerdotio
           .
           p.
           124.
           g.
           l.
           6.
           
           Theophyl
           act
           in
           Ioh.
           8.
           p.
           126.
           u.
           l.
           11.
           
           Vossio
           .
           p.
           128.
           f.
           l.
           14.
           inedit
           .
           ibid.
           k.
           l.
           3.
           misericordiam
           .
           p.
           129.
           *
           l.
           1.
           for
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           ,
           r.
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           .
           p.
           143.
           i.
           l.
           4.
           
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           .
           p.
           152.
           t.
           l.
           2.
           ignoret
           .
           p.
           156.
           l.
           
             lin
             .
             ult
          
           .
           Aquisgran
           .
           sub
           Ludovico
           Pio
           ,
           cap.
           37.
           p.
           157.
           m.
           l.
           1.
           illum
           .
           
             ibid.
             l.
          
           27.
           
           Iidem
           .
           p.
           167.
           c.
           l.
           13
           quaest
           .
           p.
           171.
           o.
           l.
           33.
           ostendendi
           .
           p.
           177.
           x.
           l.
           4.
           
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           .
           ibid.
           y.
           l.
           2.
           
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           .
           p.
           180.
           h.
           
             l.
             18.
             for
          
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           .
           p.
           182.
           s.
           l.
           10.
           
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           .
           p.
           187.
           m.
           l.
           17.
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           p.
           188.
           o.
           l.
           27.
           corripimur
           .
           p.
           189.
           p.
           
             l.
             23.
             after
          
           conversat
           .
           
             insert
             this
             parenthesis
          
           (
           cuius
           author
           Eligius
           Noviomensis
           )
           p.
           192.
           d.
           l.
           2.
           
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           .
           p.
           196.
           d.
           l.
           4.
           offerimus
           .
           
             ibid.
             l.
          
           13.
           
             crosse
             out
          
           ,
           &
           178.
           
             ibid.
             g.
             l.
          
           8.
           
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           .
           p.
           197.
           i.
           
             l.
             15.
             blot
             out
             the
             point
             after
          
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           .
           ibid.
           k.
           l.
           2.
           
           Apostolis
           .
           p.
           198.
           n.
           l.
           5.
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           p.
           199.
           s.
           l.
           3
           ;
           fruntur
           .
           ibid.
           l.
           5.
           contextione
           .
           p.
           202.
           h.
           l.
           25.
           refern
           .
           p.
           205.
           o.
           l.
           2.
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           p.
           206.
           u.
           l.
           2.
           
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           .
           p.
           208.
           c.
           l.
           6.
           quos
           .
           p.
           209.
           g.
           l.
           4.
           
           Gra.
           câ
           .
           p.
           210.
           n.
           l.
           4.
           
           Beneventani
           )
           p.
           211.
           r.
           l.
           10.
           for
           in
           r.
           ex
           .
           p.
           213.
           y.
           l.
           6.
           
           Menesi●
           .
           p.
           214.
           §
           l.
           1.
           
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           .
           p.
           215.
           *
           l.
           19.
           pareret
           .
           p.
           218.
           i.
           l.
           9.
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           l.
           13.
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           p.
           222.
           l.
           6.
           consequuntur
           .
           ibid.
           y.
           l.
           
             ult
             .
             col
          
           .
           228.
           e.
           p.
           228.
           q.
           l.
           2.
           
           Apocrypha
           .
           p.
           231.
           a.
           l.
           14.
           invenire
           .
           p.
           232.
           c.
           l.
           10.
           
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           .
           p.
           235.
           q.
           l.
           10.
           praecesserunt
           videantur
           usque
           ad
           iudiciidiem
           ,
           per
           plurimum
           scilicet
           temporis
           ,
           debitâ
           sibi
           remuneratione
           ,
           &c.
           p.
           236.
           x.
           l.
           29.
           for
           206.
           r.
           220.
           p.
           237.
           a.
           l.
           3.
           
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           .
           ibid.
           c.
           l.
           22.
           
           Ephesius
           .
           p.
           238.
           *
           l.
           3.
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           l.
           8.
           
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           .
           
             ibid.
             ●
          
           .
           l.
           14.
           
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           .
           &
           l.
           17.
           
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           .
           p.
           241.
           k.
           l.
           6.
           
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           .
           p.
           245.
           a.
           l.
           2.
           
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           .
           p.
           246.
           f.
           l.
           6.
           
           Euchologio
           ,
           p.
           247.
           m.
           l.
           1.
           
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           .
           p.
           248.
           n.
           l.
           6.
           
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           .
           p.
           253.
           h.
           l.
           1.
           
           Volaterran
           .
           ibid.
           l.
           6.
           
           Rupe
           .
           p.
           254.
           o.
           l.
           1.
           
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           .
           p.
           255.
           r.
           l.
           12.
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           p.
           260.
           e.
           l.
           10.
           
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           .
           p.
           262.
           d.
           l.
           29.
           
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           .
           p.
           263.
           el.
           16.
           
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           .
           p.
           264.
           h.
           l.
           3
           ,
           4.
           
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           .
           p.
           265.
           l.
           lin
           8.
           
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           .
           ibid.
           l
           9.
           
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           .
           
             ibid.
             l.
          
           13.
           
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           .
           
             ibid.
             l.
             ult
          
           138.
           p.
           269.
           l.
           3
           ,
           4.
           
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           .
           p.
           272.
           s.
           l.
           22.
           
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           .
           ibid.
           l.
           37.
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           p.
           273.
           t.
           l.
           5.
           
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           .
           ibid.
           l.
           9.
           
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           .
           p.
           275.
           h.
           
             l.
             6.
             for
          
           aufe●e
           ,
           r.
           offerre
           .
           p.
           278.
           m.
           l.
           2.
           for
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           ,
           r.
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           .
           p.
           282.
           g.
           l.
           24.
           donec
           .
           p.
           284.
           p.
           l.
           2.
           
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           .
           p.
           286.
           al.
           10.
           
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           .
           p.
           287.
           h.
           l.
           9.
           
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           .
           ibid.
           l.
           11.
           
           Asterius
           .
           p.
           290.
           s.
           l.
           4.
           
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           .
           p.
           291.
           z
           ,
           l.
           11.
           
             crosse
             out
          
           in
           .
           ibid.
           l.
           14.
           
           Lugd.
           p.
           292.
           l.
           lin
           .
           3.
           
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           .
           p.
           293.
           n.
           l.
           9.
           
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           .
           ibid.
           r.
           l.
           ult
           .
           intravit
           .
           p.
           294.
           u.
           l.
           6.
           
             crosse
             out
          
           ,
           in
           fine
           .
           p.
           295.
           z.
           l.
           6.
           paupertatis
           .
           p.
           297.
           h.
           l.
           10.
           infernum
           .
           p.
           299.
           q.
           l.
           3.
           infernum
           ibid.
           s.
           l.
           1.
           
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           .
           ibid.
           u.
           l.
           1.
           
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           .
           l.
           2.
           
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           .
           p.
           300.
           x.
           l.
           3.
           
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           ;
           Ira.
           ibid.
           z.
           l.
           11.
           
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           .
           
           l.
           18.
           
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           .
           p.
           301.
           g.
           l.
           3.
           
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           .
           ibid.
           m.
           l.
           3.
           
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           .
           ibid.
           n.
           l.
           4.
           laudantes
           .
           p.
           303.
           z.
           l.
           1.
           2.
           
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           .
           p.
           308.
           y.
           l.
           4.
           
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           .
           p.
           313.
           y.
           l.
           1.
           for
           mortuorum
           ,
           r.
           mortuum
           .
           p.
           318.
           l.
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           .
           ibid.
           *
           .
           l.
           3.
           
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           .
           ibid.
           m.
           l.
           1.
           
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           .
           p.
           319.
           p.
           l.
           12.
           uruntur
           .
           ibid.
           l.
           14.
           m.
           Annaeus
           Seneca
           ,
           lib.
           8.
           ibid.
           r.
           l.
           10.
           
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           .
           p.
           323.
           o.
           l.
           19.
           falso
           .
           p.
           325.
           c.
           l.
           1.
           
           Ibidem
           in
           .
           p.
           327.
           s.
           l.
           9.
           
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           .
           p.
           328.
           u.
           l.
           8.
           recidant
           .
           ibid.
           x.
           l.
           4
           ,
           5.
           
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           .
           ibid.
           z.
           
             in
             stead
             of
             the
             Latin
             ,
             put
             the
             Greek
             .
          
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           ;
           Olympiod
           .
           Caten
           .
           Graec.
           in
           Iob
           17.
           p.
           333.
           h.
           l.
           1.
           
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           .
           p.
           342.
           *
           l.
           13
           ,
           14.
           phasada
           for
           corruption
           .
           p.
           343.
           s.
           l.
           1.
           
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           .
           p.
           346.
           u.
           l.
           4.
           
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           .
           ibid.
           v.
           l.
           2.
           
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           .
           p.
           347.
           b.
           l.
           2
           ,
           3.
           
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           .
           p.
           348.
           d.
           s.
           9.
           
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           .
           p.
           349.
           h.
           l.
           3.
           
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           .
           p.
           350.
           m.
           l.
           10.
           
             cr●sse
             out
             the
          
           comma
           .
           p.
           351.
           s.
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           .
           p.
           352.
           a.
           l.
           3.
           
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           .
           ibid.
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           .
           ibid.
           l.
           4.
           
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           .
           p.
           353.
           b.
           l.
           2.
           
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           .
           ibl
           .
           6.
           
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           .
           p.
           357.
           n.
           l.
           25.
           
           Num.
           16.
           30
           ,
           33.
           ib.
           o.
           l.
           10.
           
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           .
           p.
           361.
           dil
           .
           10.
           
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           .
           ib.
           l.
           18
           ,
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           .
           ib.
           l.
           24.
           
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           .
           p.
           362.
           h.
           l.
           2.
           
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           .
           ib.
           l.
           3.
           
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           .
           p.
           363.
           s.
           l.
           ult
           .
           
             for
             238.
             put
          
           237.
           p.
           364.
           t.
           l.
           6.
           
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           .
           ib.
           x.
           l.
           i.
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           .
           p.
           366.
           l.
           1.
           c.
           Autholog
           .
           ib.
           e.
           l.
           8
           ,
           9.
           
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           .
           p.
           367.
           a.
           apud
           .
           p.
           3●9
           .
           r.
           
             put
             the
          
           comma
           
             before
             ,
             not
             after
          
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           .
           p.
           370.
           b.
           l.
           2.
           
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           .
           p.
           371.
           k.
           l.
           1.
           
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           .
           ib.
           l.
           lin
           .
           1.
           
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           .
           ib.
           o.
           l.
           1.
           
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           .
           p.
           376.
           k.
           l.
           4.
           positam
           p.
           377.
           l.
           lin
           .
           18.
           
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           .
           ibm
           .
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           .
           ib.
           l.
           18.
           
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           .
           ib.
           n.
           l.
           ult
           .
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           ;
           p.
           378.
           o.
           l.
           12.
           
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           .
           p.
           379.
           u.
           l.
           31.
           
           Numer
           .
           p.
           383.
           k.
           l.
           2.
           
             cresse
             out
             ,
             294.
             
             &
             .
          
           p.
           384.
           r.
           l.
           2.
           
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           .
           p.
           386.
           *
           l.
           16.
           for
           349.
           r.
           939.
           ibid.
           l.
           13.
           
           Ad.
           p.
           387.
           a.
           l.
           17
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           .
           ib.
           l.
           19.
           
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           .
           p.
           391.
           a.
           l.
           2.
           
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           .
           p.
           394.
           c.
           l.
           10.
           
           Spoletinus
           .
           p.
           401.
           z.
           l.
           6.
           
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           .
           ib.
           l.
           9.
           
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           .
           p.
           401.
           l.
           lin
           .
           1.
           
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           .
           p.
           404.
           r.
           l.
           18.
           
             for
             308.
             put
          
           309.
           p.
           407.
           i.
           l.
           3.
           
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           .
           ib.
           l.
           4.
           
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           .
           ib.
           k.
           l.
           4.
           
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           .
           p.
           422.
           0.
           l.
           4.
           
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           .
           ib.
           l.
           19.
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           ,
           ib.
           l.
           20.
           
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           .
           p.
           423.
           r.
           l.
           2.
           
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           .
           ib.
           s.
           l.
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           .
           p.
           425
           ,
           x.
           l.
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           .
           p.
           428.
           b.
           l.
           11
           ,
           12.
           
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           .
           p.
           43.
           n.
           l.
           ult
           .
           
             for
             142.
             put
          
           241.
           p.
           432.
           o.
           for
           contr
           .
           put
           conc
           .
           p.
           436.
           
           ●
           .
           l.
           9
           ,
           supplicia
           .
           ib.
           g.
           l.
           5.
           for
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           ,
           put
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           ,
           p.
           4.
           
           ●7
           .
           h.
           l.
           25.
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           ,
           p.
           43.
           8.
           l.
           1.
           k.
           Sic
           ,
           p.
           440.
           q.
           l.
           8.
           
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           .
           ib.
           l.
           29
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           .
           p.
           44.
           u.
           l.
           4.
           
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           .
           ib.
           z.
           l.
           2.
           
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           .
           ib.
           l.
           7.
           
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           .
           p.
           44
           ,
           2.
           a.
           l.
           15.
           
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           .
           ib.
           22.
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           ,
           p.
           444.
           d.
           l.
           3.
           
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           .
           p.
           446.
           l.
           lin
           .
           4
           ,
           5.
           for
           initio
           pag.
           392.
           put
           pag.
           435.
           ad
           .
           y.
           literam
           .
           p.
           452.
           *
           l.
           16.
           quaestiones
           ,
           ib.
           l.
           18.
           for
           ,
           auctorum
           ,
           r.
           sanctorum
           .
           p.
           453.
           m.
           l.
           16.
           
           Vi
           ,
           p.
           457.
           u.
           l.
           6.
           for
           ,
           audiens
           ,
           r.
           audens
           ,
           p.
           458.
           g.
           l.
           ult
           .
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           .
           p.
           60.
           k.
           l.
           44.
           
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           .
           ib.
           l.
           14.
           
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           .
           ib.
           l.
           16.
           
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           .
           ib.
           l.
           27.
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           ,
           ib.
           l.
           29.
           
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           .
           ib.
           l.
           12.
           in
           .
           Matth.
           and
           ,
           in
           Eclogis
           .
           ib.
           l.
           lin
           .
           5.
           
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           .
           p.
           461.
           m.
           l.
           7.
           
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           .
           ib.
           n.
           l.
           2
           ,
           ●
           .
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           ,
           ib.
           o.
           l.
           4.
           
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           .
           p.
           462.
           q.
           l.
           20.
           
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           .
           ib.
           r.
           l.
           ult
           .
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           .
           p.
           463.
           l.
           5
           ,
           6.
           
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           .
           ib.
           l.
           26.
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           ,
           p.
           46●
           .
           y.
           l.
           7.
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           ,
           p.
           46.
           
           *
           .
           l.
           2.
           
           Feirand
           ,
           p.
           469.
           t.
           l.
           1.
           
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           .
           ib.
           u.
           l.
           9.
           
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           .
           ib.
           l.
           ●0
           .
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           ,
           p.
           473.
           1.
           l.
           4.
           
           Origin
           ib.
           l.
           l.
           2.
           
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           .
           p.
           474.
           o.
           l.
           5.
           quirogae
           .
           ib.
           p.
           l.
           4.
           
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           .
           p.
           475.
           
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           .
           p.
           476.
           u.
           l.
           8.
           honorari
           ,
           p.
           477.
           a.
           l.
           7.
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           ,
           ib.
           d.
           l.
           1.
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           ,
           lin
           .
           3.
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           ,
           ib.
           e.
           l.
           ult
           .
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           ,
           p.
           485.
           h.
           l.
           18.
           
           AEneid
           ,
           p.
           490.
           d.
           l.
           2.
           tribulationis
           ●p
           .
           491.
           q.
           l.
           1.
           
           Miserere
           ,
           p.
           502.
           x.
           l.
           5.
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           ,
           ib.
           z.
           l.
           3.
           
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           .
           p.
           506.
           u.
           l.
           1.
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           ,
           l.
           6.
           
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           .
           p.
           507.
           z.
           l.
           3.
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           ,
           p.
           508.
           b.
           l.
           2.
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           ,
           p.
           509.
           l.
           17.
           for
           ,
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           ,
           r.
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           .
           p.
           514.
           l.
           1.
           a.
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           .
           p.
           ●16
           .
           l.
           1.
           f.
           Quis.
           à
           nostrūm
           p.
           518.
           x.
           l.
           3.
           istis
           ,
           r.
           estis
           ,
           p.
           519.
           v.
           l.
           5.
           ut
           sit
           .
           p.
           523.
           l.
           in
           .
           22.
           aliqua
           ,
           l.
           27.
           aequitatem
           ,
           inesse
           ,
           p.
           526.
           a.
           appetere
           ,
           p.
           537.
           i.
           Prosper
           ,
           p.
           538.
           k.
           l.
           11.
           cùm
           ,
           p.
           540.
           *
           l.
           25.
           
           Baron
           ,
           p.
           542.
           x.
           l.
           2.
           viribus
           ,
           p.
           543.
           a.
           l.
           ult
           .
           Augustini
           ,
           p.
           548.
           c.
           l.
           2.
           quam
           ,
           p.
           553.
           
           *
           .
           l.
           5.
           merue
           .
           p.
           554.
           *
           l.
           7.
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           ,
           p.
           555.
           g.
           l.
           10.
           
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           .
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           .
           ib.
           l
           ,
           17.
           
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           .
           ib.
           l
           ,
           21.
           
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           .
           p.
           556.
           m.
           lin
           .
           5.
           
           Proaemium
           .
           ib.
           n.
           l.
           4
           ,
           5.
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           ,
           ib.
           p.
           l.
           2.
           
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           .
           p
           557.
           q.
           l.
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           .
           ib.
           s.
           l.
           5.
           
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           .
           ib.
           t.
           l.
           1.
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           ,
           ib.
           u.
           l.
           2.
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           ,
           p.
           5●8
           .
           x.
           l.
           10.
           
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           .
           ib.
           a.
           l.
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           .
           l.
           2.
           
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           .
           l.
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           .
           l.
           4.
           
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           .
           l.
           6.
           
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           ,
           18.
           after
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           .
           put
           a
           full
           point
           ;
           
             and
             after
          
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           ,
           in
           lin
           9.
           
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           .
           l.
           11.
           
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           .
           p.
           562.
           k.
           l.
           2.
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           ,
           p.
           563.
           n.
           l.
           18.
           resecat
           ,
           ib.
           p.
           3.
           comparari
           ,
           p.
           564.
           q.
           l.
           6.
           
             blot
             out
             .
             the
          
           point
           .
           after
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           .
           ibid.
           r.
           l.
           4
           ,
           5.
           
             read
             the
             place
             thus
          
           ;
           quippiam
           iustum
           ,
           non
           respondebo
           ,
           sed
           meum
           iudicem
           deprecabor
           .
           Veiut
           si
           apertiùs
           fa●catur
           ,
           dicens
           :
           Etsi
           ad
           opus
           virtutis
           excrevero
           ,
           &c.
           p.
           565.
           t.
           l
           2.
           
           Beda
           ,
           p.
           573.
           a.
           l.
           3.
           bona
           ,
           p.
           576.
           q.
           Enchirid
           ,
           p.
           580.
           p.
           1.
           10.
           condignae
           ,
           p.
           58.
           1.
           q.
           l.
           8.
           quidam
           ,
           p.
           582.
           v.
           l.
           4.
           
           Origin
           ,
           ib.
           z.
           l.
           15.
           
           Ca●sidor
           ,
           ib.
           a.
           l.
           2.
           
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
        
         
           
             In
             the
             Catalogue
             of
             the
             Authors
             at
             the
             end
             ;
             referre
          
           Tatianus
           
             to
             they
             yeare
             170.
             at
             the
             yeare
             290.
             put
          
           Pamphilus
           ,
           for
           Pamphylus
           .
           
             at
             the
             yeare
          
           475.
           
           Faustus
           Regensis
           ,
           for
           Repensis
           .
           referre
           Concilium
           Aquisg●anense
           sub
           Pipino
           ,
           
             to
             the
             yeare
             836.
             at
             the
             yeare
             ●●3
             .
             〈◊〉
          
           Asser
           Menevensis
           
             be
             placed
          
           .
        
      
       
         Notes, typically marginal, from the original text
         
           Notes for div A14233-e50
           
             a
             Luke
             16.
             31.
             
          
           
             b
             2
             Thes.
             2.
             10
             ,
             11.
             
          
        
         
           Notes for div A14233-e640
           
             a
             Ephes.
             5.
             17.
             
          
           
             b
             Rom.
             12.
             3.
             
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
          
           
             c
             1
             Cor.
             4.
             6.
             
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
          
           
             d
             Scrutamini
             legem
             ,
             in
             quâ
             voluntas
             ejus
             continetur
             .
             
               Sedul
               .
               in
               Ephes.
            
             5.
             
          
           
             e
             Plus
             vult
             sapere
             ,
             qui
             illa
             scrutatur
             quae
             Lex
             non
             dicit
             .
             
               Id.
               in
               Rom.
            
             12.
             
          
           
             f
             Proptereà
             errant
             ,
             quia
             Scripturas
             nesciunt
             :
             &
             quia
             Scripturas
             ignorant
             ,
             consequenter
             nesciunt
             virtutem
             Dei
             ,
             hoc
             est
             ,
             Christum
             ,
             qui
             est
             Dei
             virtus
             &
             Dei
             sapientia
             .
             
               Claud.
               in
               Matth.
               lib.
            
             3.
             
             Habetur
             MS.
             Romae
             in
             Bibliothecâ
             Vallicellaná
             ;
             &
             Cantabrigiae
             ,
             in
             Bibliothce
             .
             Colleg.
             Benedict
             .
             &
             Aulae
             Pembrochianae
             .
          
           
             g
             Hoc
             ,
             quia
             de
             Scripturis
             non
             habet
             authoritatem
             ,
             eâdem
             facilitate
             contemnitur
             quâ
             probatur
             .
             
               Id.
               ib.
            
             
          
           
             h
             Tantùm
             ea
             quae
             in
             Propheticis
             ,
             Evangelicis
             &
             Apostolicis
             literis
             discere
             poterant
             ,
             pietatis
             &
             castitatis
             opera
             diligenter
             observantes
             .
             
               Bed.
               lib.
               3.
               histor
               .
               Ecclesiast
               .
               cap.
            
             4.
             
          
           
             i
             In
             tantum
             autem
             vita
             illius
             à
             nostri
             temporis
             segniciâ
             distabat
             ;
             ut
             omnes
             qui
             cum
             eo
             incedebant
             ,
             sive
             adtonsi
             ,
             sive
             laici
             ,
             meditari
             deberent
             ,
             id
             est
             ,
             aut
             legendis
             Scripturis
             ,
             aut
             Psalmis
             discendis
             operam
             dare
             .
             
               Id.
               ibid.
               cap.
            
             5.
             
          
           
             k
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             Chrysost.
             in
             serm
             .
             de
             utilitate
             lectionis
             Scripturae
             ,
             tom
             .
             8
             edit
             .
             Savil.
             pag
             111.
             
          
           
             l
             Quinque
             gentium
             linguis
             unam
             eandemque
             summae
             veritatis
             &
             verae
             sublimitatis
             scien●●a●
             scrutatur
             &
             confitetur
             ;
             Angl●rum
             videlicet
             ,
             B●itonum
             ,
             Scotorum
             ,
             Pictorum
             ,
             &
             Latinorum
             ,
             quae
             meditatione
             Scripturarum
             caeteris
             omnibus
             est
             facta
             communis
             .
             
               Bed.
               lib.
               1.
               
               Histor.
               Ecclesiast
               .
               cap.
            
             1.
             
          
           
             *
             Iohn
             5.
             39.
             
          
           
             m
             Bonis
             semper
             moribus
             delectatur
             &
             consentit
             ;
             &
             assiduis
             Scripturarum
             meditationibus
             &
             eloquiis
             animam
             vegetar
             .
             
               Patric
               .
               de
               abuseonibus
               saeculi
               ,
               cap.
               5.
               de
            
             Pudicitia
             .
          
           
             n
             Columban
             .
             in
             Monastichis
             ,
             &
             in
             epistolâ
             ad
             Hunaldum
             .
          
           
             o
             Successit
             E●gfrido
             in
             regnum
             Altfrit
             ,
             vir
             in
             Scripturis
             doctissimus
             .
             
               Bed.
               lib.
               4.
               hist.
               ca.
            
             26.
             
          
           
             p
             Ab
             ipso
             tempore
             pueritiae
             suae
             curam
             non
             modicam
             lectionibus
             saeris
             ,
             simul
             &
             monasticis
             exhibebat
             disciplinis
             .
             
               Bed.
               lib.
               3
               hist.
               cap.
               19.
               
               Ab
               infantiâ
               sacris
               literis
               &
               monasticis
               disciplinis
               eruditus
               .
            
             Iohannes
             de
             Tinmouth
             (
             
               &
               ex
               eo
               Io.
               Capgrar
            
             .
             )
             in
             vita
             Fursei
             .
          
           
             q
             A
             puerili
             aetate
             magnum
             habet
             studium
             sacras
             discere
             literas
             .
             
               Tom.
               4.
               
               Antiqu.
               lect
               .
               Heur
               .
               Canis
               .
               pag.
            
             642.
             
          
           
             r
             Davidic●●
             Psalmo●um
             melodiis
             ,
             &
             sanctorum
             Evangeliorum
             mell
             .
             fluis
             lectionibus
             atque
             caeteris
             divitiis
             exercitationibus
             E●u
             
               fac
               .
               in
               vitâ
               Livini
            
             .
          
           
             s
             Tantum
             i●●ejus
             pectore
             divinatum
             thesauri
             Scripturarum
             conditi
             tenebantur
             ;
             ut
             intra
             adolescentiae
             aetatem
             detentus
             ,
             Psalmorum
             librum
             elimato
             sermone
             exponeret
             .
             
               Ion●●
               in
               vitâ
               Columba
               i
               ,
               cap.
            
             2.
             
          
           
             t
             B.
             Burgundofora
             monasterium
             quod
             Euoriacas
             appellatur
             ,
             &c.
             secundùm
             regulam
             S.
             Columbani
             instituit
             .
             
               Id.
               in
               vitâ
               Burgundos
            
             .
          
           
             u
             Cùm
             jam
             in
             extremis
             posita
             posceret
             per
             successiones
             noctium
             lumen
             coram
             se
             accendi
             ,
             &
             sacrae
             lectionis
             praeconia
             ante
             se
             legi
             ,
             
               &c.
               
               Id
               ibid.
            
             
          
           
             x
             Hebraicam
             veritatem
             
               Sedul
               .
               in
               Galat.
               3.
               
               &
               Hebr.
            
             7.
             
          
           
             y
             Non
             ,
             ut
             malè
             in
             Latinis
             codicious
             ,
             corrumpit
             .
             
               Sedul
               .
               in
               Gal.
            
             5.
             
          
           
             z
             Instruat
             ;
             sive
             ,
             ut
             melius
             habetur
             in
             Graeco
             ,
             perficiat
             in
             spiritu
             lenitatis
             .
             
               Claud.
               in
               Gal.
            
             6.
             
          
           
             a
             Absit
             à
             te
             Domine
             :
             vel
             ut
             meliùs
             habetur
             in
             Graeco
             ;
             Propitius
             esto
             tibi
             ,
             Domine
             .
             
               Id.
               lib.
               2.
               comment
               .
               in
               Matth.
               
            
          
           
             b
             Lingua
             balbo●um
             velociter
             loquetur
             &
             planè
             .
          
           
             c
             Linguae
             balbutientes
             velociter
             discent
             loqui
             pacem
             .
          
           
             d
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ,
          
           
             e
             Exultabitis
             sicut
             vituli
             ex
             vinculis
             resoluti
             .
             Graec.
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
          
           
             f
             Salietis
             sicut
             vituli
             de
             armento
             .
          
           
             g
             Divitiae
             quas
             congregabit
             injustè
             ,
             evomentur
             de
             ventre
             ejus
             ,
             trahit
             illum
             angelus
             mortis
             .
             Itá
             draconum
             mulctabi●ur
             :
             interficiet
             illum
             lingua
             colubri
             .
             Graec.
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
          
           
             h
             Divitias
             quas
             devoravit
             ●vomet
             ,
             &
             de
             ventie
             illius
             extrah●t
             ●as
             Deus
             .
             Caput
             aspidum
             suget
             ,
             &
             occidet
             cum
             lingua
             viperae
             .
          
           
             *
             ●●nn
             .
             Hisior
             .
             Briton
             .
             cap.
             1.
             
          
           
             i
             Si
             rectè
             offeras
             ,
             rectè
             autem
             non
             dividas
             ,
             peccas
             .
             
               Asser
               Menervens
               .
               de
               gestis
               Alfreat
               R.
               
            
          
           
             k
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
          
           
             l
             Nonne
             si
             bene
             egeris
             ,
             recipies
             ?
             fin
             autem
             malè
             ,
             statim
             in
             foribus
             peccatum
             ●derit
             ?
          
           
             m
             In
             Psalmo
             117.
             ubi
             LXX
             .
             interpretes
             transtulerunt
             ,
             
               O
               Domine
               salvū
               me
               fac
            
             ;
             in
             Hebraeo
             scriptum
             est
             ,
             
               Anna
               Adonai
               Osanna
            
             :
             quod
             interpres
             noster
             Hieronymus
             diligentiùs
             elucidans
             ita
             transtulit
             ;
             
               Obsecro
               Domine
               ,
               salva
               obsecro
            
             .
             Claud.
             Scot.
             in
             Matth.
             lib.
             3.
             
          
           
             n
             MS.
             in
             Bibliothec●
             eruditissi●i
             antistiatis
             D.
             Guilielmi
             Bedelli
             ,
             Kilmorersis
             &
             Ardachadensis
             apud
             nos
             Episcopi
             .
          
           
             o
             
               Caradoc
               .
               in
               Chronico
               Cambriae
               ,
               circa
               annum
               1099.
               ad
               quem
               in
               aliis
               etiam
               Annalibus
               Britannicis
               MSS.
               annotatum
               repperi
               .
            
             Sub
             hujus
             anni
             ambitum
             morti
             succumbit
             Richmarch
             cogno
             .
             mine
             Sapiens
             ,
             filius
             Sulgeni
             Episcopi
             ,
             cum
             jam
             annum
             XLIII
             .
             aetatis
             ageret
             .
          
           
             p
             Quid
             praetereà
             beatus
             Esdras
             Propheta
             ille
             ,
             Bibliotheca
             legis
             ,
             minatus
             sit
             attendite
             .
             
               Gild.
               Epist.
            
             
          
           
             *
             Vid.
             Richard.
             Armachanum
             ,
             de
             questionib
             .
             Armeniorum
             ,
             〈◊〉
             18.
             cap.
             1.
             
          
           
             q
             Hucusque
             Hebraeorum
             divina
             Scriptura
             tempurum
             seriem
             continet
             .
             Quae
             verò
             post
             haec
             apud
             Iudaeos
             sunt
             gesta
             ,
             de
             libro
             Maccabaeorum
             ,
             &
             Iosephi
             atque
             Aphricani
             scriptis
             exhibentur
             .
             
               Marian.
               Chron.
               MS.
            
             
          
           
             r
             In
             Maccabaeorum
             libris
             etsi
             aliquid
             mirabilium
             numero
             inserendum
             conveniens
             fuisse
             huic
             ordini
             inveniatur
             ;
             de
             hoc
             tamen
             nullâ
             curâ
             satigabimur
             :
             quia
             tantum
             agere
             proposuimus
             ,
             unde
             divini
             canonis
             mirabilibus
             exiguam
             (
             quamvis
             ingenioli
             nostri
             modulum
             excedentem
             )
             historicam
             expositionem
             ex
             parte
             aliquâ
             tangeremus
             .
             
               Lib.
               2.
               de
               mirabilib
               .
               Script
               .
               cap.
            
             34.
             (
             
               inter
               opera
               B.
               Augustini
               ,
               tom
               .
            
             3.
             )
          
           
             s
             De
             ●acu
             vero
             iterùm
             &
             Abacuk
             translato
             in
             Belis
             &
             Draconis
             fabulà
             ,
             idcirco
             in
             hoc
             ordine
             non
             ponitur
             ;
             quòd
             in
             authoritate
             divinae
             Scripturae
             non
             habentur
             .
             
               ibid.
               cap.
            
             32.
             
          
        
         
           Notes for div A14233-e3440
           
             b
             Praescitam
             &
             praedestinatam
             immobili
             consilio
             creaturam
             ,
             ad
             se
             laudandum
             ,
             &
             ex
             se
             &
             in
             se
             &
             per
             se
             beatè
             vivendum
             .
             
               S.
               Gallus
               in
               serm
               .
               habit
               .
               Constant.
               
            
          
           
             c
             Praedestinatione
             scilicèt
             aeternâ
             ,
             non
             creatione
             temporariâ
             ,
             sed
             vocatione
             gratuitâ
             ,
             vel
             ●ndebitâ
             ,
             gratiâ
             .
             
               Id.
               ib.
            
             
          
           
             d
             Miseretur
             magná
             bonitate
             ,
             ●obdurat
             nullà
             iniquita●●
             :
             ut
             neque
             libera●●s
             de
             luis
             meritis
             glorietur
             ,
             neq
             damnatus
             nisi
             de
             suis
             meritis
             conquetatur
             Sola
             enim
             〈◊〉
             ●edemptos
             discernit
             à
             perditis
             ,
             quos
             in
             unam
             perdi●●●●
             concreavcrat
             massam
             ,
             ab
             ori●●ne
             ducta
             caussa
             communi
             .
             
               Sedul
               .
               in
               Rom.
            
             9.
             
          
           
             e
             Videt
             universum
             genus
             humanum
             tam
             justo
             judicio
             divinoque
             in
             apostaticâ
             radice
             damnatum
             ;
             ut
             etiamsi
             nullus
             inde
             liberatur
             ,
             nemo
             rectè
             posset
             Dei
             vituperare
             justitiam
             :
             &
             qui
             liberantur
             ,
             sic
             oportuisse
             liberari
             ,
             ut
             ex
             pluribus
             non
             liberatis
             ,
             atque
             damnatione
             justissimâ
             derelictis
             ,
             ostenderetur
             quid
             meruisset
             universa
             conspersio
             ,
             quòd
             etiam
             justos
             debitum
             judicium
             Dei
             damnaret
             ,
             nisi
             in
             ejus
             debitum
             misericordia
             subveniret
             :
             ut
             volentium
             de
             suis
             meritis
             gloriari
             ,
             omne
             os
             obstruatur
             ;
             &
             qui
             gloriatur
             ,
             in
             Domino
             glorietur
             .
             
               Id
               ibid.
            
             
          
           
             f
             Libero
             arbitrio
             malè
             utens
             homo
             ,
             &
             se
             perdidit
             ,
             &
             ipsum
             .
             Sicut
             enim
             qui
             se
             occidit
             ,
             utique
             vivendo
             se
             occidit
             ,
             sed
             se
             occidendo
             non
             vivit
             ,
             neque
             seipsum
             poterit
             refuscitare
             cùm
             occiderit
             :
             ita
             cùm
             libero
             arbitrio
             peccaretur
             ,
             victore
             peccato
             amissum
             est
             &
             liberum
             arbitrium
             .
             à
             quo
             enim
             quis
             devictus
             est
             ,
             huic
             &
             servus
             addictus
             est
             .
             sed
             ad
             benè
             faciendum
             ista
             libertas
             unde
             erit
             homini
             addicto
             &
             vendito
             ,
             nisi
             redimat
             ,
             cujus
             illa
             vox
             est
             ;
             Si
             vos
             Filius
             liberaverit
             ,
             verè
             liberi
             eritis
             ?
             
               Id.
               ibid.
            
             
          
           
             g
             Quòd
             ab
             adolescentia
             mens
             hominum
             apposita
             sit
             ad
             malitiam
             :
             non
             est
             enim
             homo
             qui
             non
             peccet
             .
             
               Id.
               in
               Ephes.
            
             2.
             
          
           
             h
             Quid
             habes
             ex
             teipso
             nisi
             peccatum
             ?
             
               Id.
               in
               1
               Cor.
            
             4.
             
          
           
             i
             Deus
             author
             est
             omnium
             bonorum
             ,
             hoc
             est
             ,
             &
             naturae
             bonae
             ,
             &
             voluntatis
             bonae
             ;
             quam
             nisi
             Deus
             in
             illo
             operetur
             ,
             non
             facit
             homo
             .
             quia
             praeparatur
             voluntas
             à
             Domino
             in
             homine
             bona
             ;
             ut
             faciat
             Deo
             donante
             ,
             quod
             à
             seipso
             facere
             non
             poterat
             per
             liberi
             arbitrii
             voluntatem
             .
             
               Claud.
               li.
               1.
               in
               Matth.
            
             
          
           
             k
             Praecedit
             bona
             voluntas
             hominis
             multa
             Dei
             dona
             ,
             sed
             non
             omnia
             :
             quae
             autem
             non
             praecedit
             ipsa
             ,
             in
             eis
             est
             &
             ipsa
             .
             Nam
             utrumque
             legitur
             in
             sanctis
             eloquiis
             ;
             &
             
               misericordia
               ejus
               praeveniet
               me
            
             ,
             &
             
               misericordia
               ejus
               subsequetur
               me
            
             :
             nolentem
             praevenit
             ut
             velit
             ,
             volentem
             subsequitur
             ,
             ne
             frustrà
             velit
             .
             Cur
             enim
             admonemur
             petere
             ut
             accipiamus
             ;
             nisi
             ut
             ab
             illo
             fiat
             quod
             volumus
             ,
             à
             quo
             factum
             est
             ut
             velimus
             ?
             
               Sedul
               .
               in
               Rom.
            
             9.
             
          
           
             l
             Non
             ergo
             lex
             data
             est
             ,
             ut
             peccatum
             auferret
             ,
             sed
             ut
             sub
             peccato
             omnia
             concluderet
             .
             Lex
             enim
             oflendebat
             esse
             peccatum
             ,
             quod
             illi
             per
             consuetudinem
             caecati
             possent
             putare
             iustitiam
             :
             ut
             hoc
             modo
             humiliati
             cognoscerent
             non
             in
             suâ
             manu
             esse
             salutem
             suam
             ,
             sed
             in
             manu
             mediatoris
             .
             
               Id.
               in
               Gal.
            
             3.
             
          
           
             m
             Non
             remissio
             ,
             nec
             ablatio
             peccatorum
             ,
             sed
             cognitio
             .
             
               Id.
               in
               Rom.
            
             3.
             
          
           
             n
             Lex
             ,
             quae
             per
             Moysen
             data
             est
             ,
             tantùm
             peccata
             ostendit
             ,
             non
             abstulit
             .
             
               Claud.
               in
               Gal.
            
             2.
             
             Perque
             illam
             legem
             morbos
             ostendentem
             non
             auferentem
             ,
             etiam
             praevaricationis
             crimine
             contrita
             superbia
             est
             .
             
               Id.
               in
               Gal.
            
             3.
             
          
           
             o
             Lex
             non
             do●at
             peccata
             ,
             sed
             damnat
             .
             
               Sedul
               .
               in
               Rom.
            
             4.
             
          
           
             p
             Dominus
             Deus
             imposuerat
             non
             justitiae
             servientibus
             sed
             peccato
             :
             justam
             scilicèt
             legem
             injustis
             hominibus
             dando
             ,
             ad
             demonstranda
             peccata
             eorum
             ,
             non
             auferenda
             .
             Non
             enim
             aufert
             peccata
             nisi
             gratiâ
             fidei
             quae
             per
             dilectionem
             operatur
             .
             
               Claud.
               in
               argument
               .
               epist.
               ad
               Gal.
               
            
          
           
             q
             Gratis
             nobis
             donantur
             peccata
             .
             
               Sedul
               .
               in
               Gal.
            
             1.
             
             A
             morte
             redemptis
             gratis
             peccata
             dimittuntur
             .
             
               Id.
               in
               Ephes.
            
             1.
             
          
           
             r
             Absque
             operum
             merito
             ,
             &
             peccata
             nobis
             concessa
             sunt
             pristina
             ,
             &
             p●x
             indulta
             post
             veniam
             .
             
               Claud.
               in
               Gal.
            
             1.
             
          
           
             s
             Gratiâ
             estis
             salvati
             per
             fidem
             ,
             id
             est
             ,
             non
             per
             opera
             .
             
               Sedul
               .
               in
               Eph.
            
             2.
             
          
           
             t
             Non
             in
             propriâ
             justitiâ
             ,
             vel
             doctrinâ
             ,
             sed
             in
             fide
             crucis
             ,
             per
             quam
             mihi
             omnia
             peccata
             dimissa
             sunt
             .
             
               Sedul
               &
               Claud.
               in
               Gal.
            
             6.
             
          
           
             u
             Abjecta
             &
             irrita
             gratia
             est
             ,
             si
             ●●bi
             sola
             non
             sufficit
             .
             
               Sedul
               .
               in
               Gal.
            
             2.
             
          
           
             x
             Christum
             vilem
             habetis
             ,
             dum
             putatis
             eum
             vobis
             non
             sufficere
             ad
             salutem
             .
             
               Id.
               in
               Galat.
            
             3.
             
          
           
             y
             Disposuit
             Deus
             propitium
             sefuturum
             esse
             humano
             generi
             ,
             si
             credant
             in
             sanguine
             ejus
             se
             esse
             liberandos
             .
             
               Id.
               in
               Rom.
            
             3.
             
          
           
             z
             Vita
             corporis
             amma
             ,
             vi
             a
             animae
             fides
             est
             .
             
               Id.
               in
               Hebr.
            
             10.
             
          
           
             a
             In
             fide
             vivo
             filii
             Dei
             ,
             id
             est
             ,
             in
             solâ
             fide
             ,
             qui
             ni●●ld●b
             olegi
             .
             
               Id.
               in
               .
               Gal.
            
             2.
             
          
           
             b
             Perfectionem
             legi
             habet
             ,
             qui
             credit
             in
             Christo.
             Cùm
             enim
             nullus
             iustifica●●tui
             ex
             lege
             ,
             quia
             nemo
             implebat
             legem
             ,
             nisi
             qui
             sp●raret
             in
             promissionem
             Ch●●●●
             :
             fides
             posita
             est
             ,
             quae
             cederet
             pro
             perfectione
             legi
             ;
             ut
             in
             omnibus
             praetermissis
             fides
             satissaceret
             pro
             totâ
             lege
             .
             
               Id.
               in
               Rom.
            
             10.
             
          
           
             c
             Non
             nostra
             ,
             non
             in
             nobis
             ,
             sed
             in
             Christo
             ,
             quasi
             membra
             in
             capite
             .
             
               Id.
               in
               2
               Cor.
            
             5.
             
          
           
             d
             Fides
             ,
             dimissis
             per
             gratiam
             peccatis
             ,
             omnes
             credentes
             filios
             efficit
             Abrahae
             .
             
               Id.
               in
               Rom.
            
             4.
             
          
           
             e
             Iustum
             fuerat
             ,
             ut
             quo
             modo
             Abraham
             credens
             ex
             gentibus
             per
             solam
             fidem
             iustificatus
             est
             ;
             ita
             caeteri
             fidē
             eius
             imitantes
             salvarentur
             .
             
               Id.
               in
               Rom.
            
             1.
             
          
           
             f
             Per
             adoptionem
             efficimur
             filii
             Dei
             ,
             credendo
             in
             Filium
             Dei.
             
               Claud.
               l●b
               .
               1.
               in
               Mat.
               
            
          
           
             g
             Testimonium
             adoptionis
             ,
             quòd
             habemus
             spiritum
             ,
             per
             quem
             ita
             oramus
             :
             ●
             intam
             enim
             arrham
             non
             poterant
             ,
             nisi
             filii
             accipere
             .
             
               Sed.
               in
               Rom.
            
             8.
             
          
           
             h
             Ipse
             Moses
             distinxit
             inter
             utramque
             iustitiam
             ,
             fidei
             scilicet
             atque
             factorum
             :
             quia
             altera
             operibus
             ,
             altera
             solâ
             credulitate
             iustificet
             accedentem
             .
             
               Id.
               in
               Rom.
            
             10.
             
          
           
             i
             Patriarchae
             &
             Prophetae
             non
             ex
             operibus
             legis
             ,
             sed
             ex
             fide
             iustificati
             sunt
             .
             
               Id.
               in
               Gal.
            
             2.
             
          
           
             k
             Ita
             praevaluit
             consuetudo
             peccandi
             ,
             ut
             nemo
             iam
             perficiat
             legem
             :
             sicut
             Petrus
             Apostolus
             ait
             ;
             Quod
             neque
             nos
             neque
             patres
             nostri
             portare
             potuimus
             .
             Si
             qui
             verò
             iusti
             non
             erant
             maledicti
             ;
             non
             ex
             operibus
             legis
             ,
             sed
             fidei
             gratiâ
             salvati
             sunt
             .
             
               Id.
               in
               Gal.
            
             3.
             
          
           
             l
             Hoc
             contra
             illos
             agit
             ,
             qui
             solam
             fidem
             posse
             sufficere
             dicunt
             .
             
               Sedul
               .
               in
               Ephes.
            
             5.
             
             Non
             ergo
             sola
             ad
             vitam
             sufficit
             fides
             .
             
               Claud
               in
               Gal.
               5.
               bis
            
             .
             Haec
             sententia
             illos
             revincit
             ,
             qui
             solam
             fidem
             ad
             salutem
             animarum
             suarum
             sufficere
             arbitrantur
             .
             
               Id.
               ibid.
               in
               fine
            
             .
          
           
             m
             Gal.
             5.
             6.
             
          
           
             n
             Iam.
             2.
             17.
             
          
           
             o
             Si
             gentes
             fides
             sola
             non
             salvat
             ,
             nec
             nos
             :
             quia
             ex
             operibus
             legis
             nemo
             iustificabitur
             .
             
               Claud.
               in
               Galat
            
             .
             2.
             
          
           
             p
             Non
             quò
             legis
             opera
             contemnenda
             sint
             ,
             &
             absque
             eis
             simplex
             fides
             adpetenda
             ;
             sed
             ipsa
             opera
             fide
             Christi
             adornentur
             .
             Sc●●
             est
             enim
             sapientis
             viri
             ●sla
             sententia
             ;
             non
             fidelem
             v●v●●e
             ex
             iustitiâ
             ,
             sed
             iustum
             ex
             fide
             .
             
               Id.
               in
               Galat
            
             .
             3.
             
          
           
             q
             Gratis
             proposuit
             per
             solam
             fidem
             dimittere
             peccata
             .
             
               Sedul
               .
               in
               Rom.
            
             4.
             
          
           
             r
             Vt
             solâ
             fide
             salvatentur
             credentes
             .
             
               Idem
               .
               in
               Galat.
            
             3.
             
          
           
             s
             Per
             solam
             fidem
             Christi
             ,
             quae
             per
             dilectionem
             operatur
             ,
             
               Id.
               in
               Hebr.
            
             6.
             
          
           
             t
             Haee
             fides
             cùm
             justificata
             fuerit
             ,
             ●anquam
             radix
             imbre
             suse
             pro
             ,
             haeret
             in
             animae
             solo
             ;
             ut
             cum
             per
             legem
             Dei
             excoli
             ●aeperit
             ,
             rurtùm
             in
             eam
             surgant
             rami
             ,
             qui
             fructus
             operum
             ferant
             .
             Non
             ergo
             ex
             operibus
             radix
             justitiae
             ,
             sed
             ex
             radice
             justitiae
             fructus
             operum
             crescit●
             illâ
             scilicet
             radice
             justitiae
             ,
             cu●
             Deus
             accep●●in
             fert
             justitiam
             sine
             operibus
             .
             
               Id.
               in
               Rom.
            
             4.
             
          
           
             u
             Columban
             .
             in
             〈◊〉
             .
          
           
             x
             Pe●s●three
             Convers.
             part
             .
             1.
             chap.
             3.
             sect
             .
             10.
             
          
           
             y
             Habet
             enim
             progeniem
             Seoticae
             gentis
             ,
             de
             Britannorum
             viciniâ
             .
             
               Hieron
               .
               prooem
               .
               lib.
               3.
               commentar
               .
               in
               Ierem.
               
            
          
           
             z
             Vnumquem
             jue
             adiustitiam
             voluntate
             propriâ
             regi
             ;
             tantumque
             accipere
             gratiae
             ,
             quantum
             meruerit
             .
             
               Morian
               ,
               Scot.
               Chron.
               ad
               an
               .
               Dom
               413.
               vel
               414.
               
               Whereof
               see
               more
               particularly
               ,
               the
               Answer
               to
               the
               Iesuite
               ,
               in
               the
               question
               of
            
             Free-will
             .
          
           
             a
             Omnium
             bonarum
             voluntatum
             inssigator
             ;
             necnon
             etiam
             ,
             ut
             habeantur
             bona
             desiderata
             ,
             largissimus
             administrator
             .
             neque
             enim
             unquam
             aliquem
             bene
             velle
             insligaret
             ,
             nisi
             &
             hoc
             ,
             quod
             bene
             &
             iustò
             quisque
             habere
             desiderat
             ,
             largiter
             administraret
             .
             
               Asser.
               d●
               rebus
               gestic
               Aelfredi
               .
               R.
               
            
          
           
             b
             Prosp.
             Aquitan
             .
             advers
             .
             Coelater
             .
             〈…〉
             .
          
           
             d
             Blasphemia
             &
             stultiloquium
             est
             dicere
             ,
             esse
             hominem
             sine
             peccato
             quod
             omnino
             non
             potest
             ,
             nisa
             unus
             mediater
             Dei
             &
             hominum
             〈◊〉
             Christus
             Iesus
             ,
             qui
             sine
             peccato
             est
             conceptus
             &
             partus
             .
             
               Epist.
               Cler.
               Roman
               .
               apud
               .
               ●●dam
               ,
               lib.
               2.
               hist.
               cap.
            
             13.
             
          
           
             e
             Quia
             ,
             (
             quod
             omnibus
             sapientibus
             patet
             ,
             licèt
             haeretici
             contradicant
             )
             nemo
             est
             ,
             qui
             sine
             adtactu
             alicuius
             peccati
             vivere
             possit
             super
             terram
             .
             
               Claud.
               lib.
               2.
               in
               .
               Matth.
               
            
          
           
             f
             Nullus
             electus
             &
             ita
             magnus
             ,
             quem
             Diabolus
             non
             audeat
             accusare
             :
             nisi
             illum
             solum
             ,
             qui
             peccatum
             non
             fecit
             ,
             qui
             &
             dicebat
             ;
             Nunc
             venit
             princeps
             huius
             mundi
             ,
             &
             in
             me
             nihil
             .
             invenit
             .
             
               Sedul
               .
               in
               Rom.
            
             8.
             
          
           
             g
             Non
             potest
             impleri
             .
             
               Id.
               in
               Rom.
            
             7.
             
          
           
             h
             Non
             est
             qui
             faciat
             bonum
             ,
             hoc
             est
             ,
             perfectum
             &
             integrum
             bonum
             
               Id.
               in
               Rom.
            
             3.
             
          
           
             i
             Ad
             hoc
             nos
             elegit
             ,
             ut
             essemus
             sancti
             &
             immaculati
             ,
             in
             futurâ
             vitâ
             ;
             quoniam
             Ecclesia
             Christi
             non
             habebit
             maculam
             neque
             rugam
             .
             Licèt
             etiam
             in
             praesenti
             vitâ
             justi
             ,
             &
             sancti
             ,
             &
             immaculati
             ,
             quamvis
             non
             ex
             toto
             ,
             tamen
             ex
             parte
             ,
             non
             inconuenienter
             dici
             possunt
             .
             
               Id.
               in
               Ephes
            
             .
             1.
             
          
           
             k
             Tunc
             erit
             iustus
             fine
             ullo
             omninò
             peccato
             ,
             quando
             nulla
             lex
             erit
             in
             memberis
             eius
             ,
             repugnans
             legi
             mentis
             eius
             .
             
               Claud.
               in
               Gal.
            
             5.
             
          
           
             l
             Non
             enim
             iam
             regnat
             peccatum
             in
             eorum
             mortali
             corpore
             ad
             obediendum
             desideriis
             eius
             :
             quamvis
             habitet
             in
             eodem
             mortali
             corpore
             peccatum
             ,
             nondum
             extincto
             impetu
             consuetudinis
             naturalis
             ,
             quâ
             mortaliter
             nati
             sumus
             ,
             &
             ex
             proptlis
             vitae
             nostrae
             ,
             cùm
             &
             nos
             ipsi
             peccando
             auximus
             quod
             ab
             origine
             peccati
             humani
             damnationis
             trahebamus
             .
             
               Id
               ibid.
            
             
          
           
             m
             Vocatione
             Dei
             ,
             non
             merito
             facti
             .
             
               Sedul
               .
               in
               .
               Rō
            
             .
             1.
             
          
           
             n
             Se●●nd●m
             virtutem
             quae
             operatur
             in
             nobis
             ;
             non
             secundùm
             merita
             nostra
             .
             
               Id.
               in
               Ephes.
            
             3.
             
          
           
             o
             Sciendum
             est
             ,
             quin
             omne
             quod
             habent
             homines
             à
             Deo
             ,
             gratia
             est
             :
             nihil
             enim
             ex
             ●ebito
             habent
             .
             
               Id.
               in
               Rom.
            
             16.
             
          
           
             p
             Nihil
             dignum
             inveniri
             vel
             comparati
             ad
             futuram
             glori●m
             potest
             .
             
               Id.
               in
               Rom.
            
             8.
             
          
        
         
           Notes for div A14233-e5980
           
             a
             Qui
             de
             Purgatorio
             dubitat
             ,
             Scotiam
             pergat
             ,
             Purgatorium
             sancti
             Patricii
             intret
             ,
             &
             de
             Purgatorii
             poenis
             ampliùs
             non
             dubitabit
             .
             
               Caesar.
               Heisterbach
               .
               Dialog
               .
               lib.
               12.
               cap.
            
             38.
             
          
           
             b
             Cujus
             loci
             fama
             ,
             ita
             sparsim
             per
             omnes
             Europae
             partes
             velare
             visa
             est
             ;
             ut
             Caesarius
             celeberrimus
             auctor
             ,
             de
             eo
             nihil
             dubitans
             sic
             scribat
             .
             
               Guil.
               Thyraeus
               ,
               in
               Discurs
               Panegyrit
               .
               de
               S.
               Patric
               .
               pag.
            
             151.
             
          
           
             c
             Henr.
             Saltereyens
             .
             in
             lib.
             de
             Visione
             Oeni
             mil
             t
             is
             MS.
             in
             publicâ
             Cantabrigiensis
             academiae
             Bibliothecâ
             ;
             &
             privatâ
             viri
             doctiss
             .
             M.
             Tho●ae
             Alani
             Oxomensis
             ;
             &
             in
             Nigro
             libro
             Ecclesiae
             S.
             Trinitat
             .
             Dublin
             .
          
           
             d
             De
             posteriori
             non
             minùs
             authentica
             videtur
             auctoritas
             Giraldi
             Cambrensis
             ,
             rerum
             lbernicarum
             diligentissimi
             investigatoris
             ,
             qui
             taliter
             loquitur
             .
             
               Thyr
               ,
               Discurs
               .
               Panegyric
               .
               pag.
            
             153.
             
          
           
             e
             De
             infernalibus
             namque
             reproborum
             poenis
             ,
             &
             de
             verâ
             post
             mortem
             perpetuâque
             electorum
             vitâ
             vir
             sanctus
             cum
             gente
             incredulâ
             dum
             disputâsset
             :
             ut
             tanta
             ,
             tam
             inusitata
             ,
             tam
             inopinabilis
             rerum
             novitas
             rudibus
             infidelium
             animis
             oculatâ
             fide
             certi●s
             imprimeretur
             :
             efficaciorationum
             instantiâ
             magnam
             &
             admirabilem
             utriusque
             rei
             notitiam
             ,
             dutaeque
             cervicis
             populo
             perutilem
             ,
             meruit
             in
             terris
             obtinere
             .
             
               Giral
               .
               Cambrens
               .
               Topograph
               .
               Hibern
               .
               distinct
               .
               2.
               cap.
            
             5.
             
          
           
             f
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             Marcus
             Ephesius
             ,
             in
             Graecorum
             Apolog.
             de
             igne
             Purgatorio
             ad
             Concil
             .
             Basileens
             .
          
           
             g
             Tria
             sunt
             sub
             omnipotentis
             Dei
             nutu
             habitacula
             :
             primum
             ,
             mum
             ,
             medium
             ▪
             Quorum
             sumimum
             ,
             regnum
             Dei
             vel
             reg●ū
             Coelorum
             di●itur
             ,
             imum
             vocatur
             inferous
             ,
             medium
             Mundu●
             praesens
             vel
             Orbis
             tertarum
             appellatur
             .
             Quo●um
             extrema
             omninô
             sibi
             invieem
             sunt
             contraria
             ,
             &
             nullâ
             sibi
             societate
             conju●cta
             :
             (
             quae
             enim
             societas
             potest
             esse
             luci
             ad
             tenebras
             ,
             &
             Christo
             ad
             Belial
             ?
             )
             medium
             veò
             nonnullam
             habet
             similitudinem
             ad
             extrema
             ,
             &c
             Commixio
             namque
             malorum
             simul
             &
             honorum
             in
             h●c
             mundo
             est
             .
             In
             regno
             autem
             Dei
             nulli
             mali
             sunt
             ,
             sed
             omnes
             boni
             :
             at
             in
             Inferno
             nulli
             boni
             sunt
             ,
             sed
             omnes
             mali
             .
             Et
             uterque
             locus
             ex
             medio
             suppietur
             .
             H●minum
             enim
             huius
             mundi
             ali●
             elevantur
             ad
             Coelum
             ,
             ali●
             trahuntur
             ad
             Infernum
             .
             Similes
             quippe
             similibus
             i●●gu
             〈◊〉
             ,
             id
             est
             ,
             boni
             bonis
             ,
             &
             mali
             malis
             ;
             iusti
             homines
             iustis
             angelis
             ,
             transg
             essores
             homine
             transgressoribus
             angelis
             ;
             servidei
             Deo
             ,
             servi
             diaboli
             Diabolo
             .
             Benedicti
             vocantur
             ad
             〈…〉
             paratum
             ab
             origine
             mundi
             :
             maledicti
             expelluntur
             in
             ignem
             aeternum
             ,
             qui
             prae
             para●●
             〈◊〉
             Diabolo
             &
             angelis
             eius
             .
             
               Patric
               .
               de
               trib
               ,
               babitac
               .
               MS.
               in
               Bibliothecâ
               Regid
               Iacobae●
               .
            
          
           
             h
             Custodita●imam
             usque
             dum
             steterit
             ante
             tribunal
             Christi
             ;
             cui
             refert
             sua
             prout
             gesserit
             propria
             .
             Nec
             archangelus
             potest
             ducere
             ad
             vitam
             ,
             usque
             dum
             indicaverit
             eam
             Dominus
             ;
             nec
             Zabulus
             ad
             poenam
             traducere
             ,
             nisi
             Dominus
             damnaverit
             cam
             .
             
               Synod
               .
               Hibern
               .
               in
               vet
               .
               cod
               .
               Canonum
               ,
               titulorum
               66.
               
               MS.
               in
               Bibliothecá
               D.
               Roberti
               Cot●oni
               .
            
             Cuius
             initium
             :
             
               inter
               vetera
               Concilia
               ,
               quatuor
               esse
               venerabiles
               Synodos
               ,
               &c.
               
            
          
           
             i
             Finem
             dixit
             exitum
             vitae
             &
             actuum
             ;
             cui
             aut
             mors
             ,
             aut
             vita
             succedit
             .
             
               Sedul
               .
               in
               Rom.
            
             7.
             
          
           
             k
             Mors
             po●ta
             est
             ,
             per
             quam
             itur
             ad
             regnum
             
               Id.
               in
               .
               1.
               
               Cor.
            
             3.
             
          
           
             l
             Suscepit
             Christus
             sine
             reatu
             supplicium
             nostrum
             ;
             ut
             inde
             solreret
             reatum
             uostrum
             ,
             &
             finiret
             etiam
             supplicium
             nostrum
             .
             
               Claud.
               in
               Galat.
            
             3.
             
          
           
             m
             Beda
             lib.
             3.
             hist.
             Anglor
             .
             cap.
             19.
             scribit
             ,
             B.
             Furseum
             à
             mortuis
             resurgentem
             narrâsse
             multa
             ,
             quae
             vidit
             de
             purgatoriis
             poenis
             .
             
               Bellarm.
               de
               Purgator
               .
               lib.
               1.
               cap.
            
             11.
             
          
           
             n
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             Phot.
             Bibliothec.
             num
             .
             ●30
             .
          
           
             o
             Etsi
             terribilis
             iste
             &
             grandis
             rogus
             videtur
             ,
             tamen
             iuxta
             merita
             operum
             singulos
             examina●
             :
             quia
             uniuscuiusque
             cupiditas
             in
             hoc
             igne
             ardebit
             .
             
               Bede
               lib.
               3.
               cap.
            
             19.
             
          
           
             p
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             Damasc.
             .
             apud
             ●o
             .
             Philoponum
             〈◊〉
             1.
             
             Meteor
             .
             fol.
             104.
             b.
             
          
           
             q
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             Id.
             ibid.
             
          
           
             r
             Hic
             homo
             non
             purgavit
             delicta
             sua
             in
             terrâ
             ,
             〈◊〉
             vindictam
             hic
             recipit
             .
             Vbi
             ●st
             ergo
             iusticia
             Dei
             ?
             
               ab
               .
               v●ae
               Furse●
            
             .
          
           
             s
             Si
             peccata
             mortuorum
             redimi
             possunt
             ab
             amicis
             suis
             remanentibus
             in
             hâc
             vitâ
             ;
             orando
             ,
             vel
             eleemosynas
             faciendo
             .
             
               Vit.
               Brendani
               ,
               in
               Legendâ
               .
               Io.
               Cap.
               gravii
               .
            
          
           
             t
             Colmannus
             ,
             inquit
             ,
             vocor
             :
             qui
             sui
             Monachus
             iracundus
             ,
             discordiaeque
             seminator
             inter
             fratres
             .
             Ibid.
             
          
           
             u
             In
             hoc
             ergo
             ,
             dilectissimi
             ,
             apparet
             :
             quòd
             oratio
             vivorum
             multùm
             mortuis
             prodest
             .
             〈◊〉
             .
          
           
             x
             Multa
             apocrypha
             deliramenta
             .
             
               Molan
               .
               in
               Vsuard
               .
               martyolog
               .
               Mai.
            
             26.
             
          
           
             y
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             Phof
             .
             Bibliothec
             .
             num
             .
             130.
             
          
           
             z
             Nova
             Legenda
             Angliae
             .
             
               impress
               .
               Londin
               .
               an
            
             .
             1516.
             
          
           
             a
             Qui
             videlicèt
             Columba
             nunc
             à
             nonnullis
             ,
             composito
             à
             cella
             &
             Columba
             nomine
             ,
             Colum-celli
             vocatur
             .
             
               Bed.
               lib.
               5.
               hist.
               ca.
            
             10.
             
          
           
             b
             Adaman
             .
             Vit.
             Columb
             .
             lib.
             3.
             cap.
             15.
             
          
           
             c
             Meque
             (
             ait
             )
             hodiè
             ,
             quamlibèt
             indignus
             sim
             ,
             ob
             venerationem
             illius
             animae
             ,
             quae
             hâc
             in
             nocte
             inter
             sanctos
             Angelorum
             choros
             vecta
             ultra
             siderea
             coelorum
             spatia
             ad
             Paradisum
             ascendit
             ,
             sacra
             oportet
             Eucharistiae
             celebrare
             mysteria
             .
             
               Ib.
               cap.
            
             16.
             
          
           
             d
             Vidi
             ,
             inquit
             ,
             animam
             cujusdam
             sancti
             manibus
             Angelicis
             ad
             gaudia
             regni
             coelestis
             ferri
             .
             
               Bed.
               in
               vit
               .
               Cuthbert
               .
               cap.
            
             34.
             
          
           
             e
             Coeperunt
             missas
             agere
             ,
             &
             precibus
             insistere
             pro
             commemoratione
             B.
             Columbani
             .
             
               Walafrid
               .
               Vit.
               Gall.
               lib.
               1.
               cap.
               26.
               
               Theodor.
               vit
               .
               Magni
               ,
               li.
               1.
               cap.
               ult
               .
               edit
               .
               Goldasti
               ,
               c.
               12.
               
               Canissi
               .
            
          
           
             f
             Deinde
             tanti
             patris
             memoriam
             precibus
             sacris
             &
             sacrificiis
             salutaribus
             frequentaverunt
             .
             Ibid.
             
          
           
             g
             Post
             hujus
             vigilias
             noctis
             ,
             cognovi
             per
             visionem
             ,
             Dominum
             &
             patrem
             meum
             Colum.
             banum
             de
             hujus
             vitae
             angustiis
             hodie
             ad
             Paradisi
             gaudia
             commigrásse
             .
             Pro
             ejus
             itaque
             requie
             sacrificium
             salutis
             debeo
             immolare
             .
             Ibid.
             
          
           
             h
             Presbytez
             eum
             ut
             surgeret
             monuit
             ,
             &
             pro
             requie
             defuncti
             ambitiosiùs
             Dominum
             precaretur
             .
             Intraverunt
             itaque
             Ecclesias
             ,
             &
             ●piscopus
             pro
             ●●a●ssimo
             salutares
             hostias
             immolavit
             amico
             .
             Finito
             autem
             fraternae
             commemorationis
             obsequio
             ,
             
               &c.
               Walafrid
               .
               Strab.
               vit
               .
               Gall.
               lib.
               1.
               cap.
               30.
               qui
               etiam
               addit
               postea
               ,
               Discipulos
               ejus
               ,
            
             pariter
             cum
             Episcopo
             orationem
             pro
             illo
             fecisse
             .
             cap.
             33.
             
          
           
             i
             Noli
             flere
             ,
             venerabilis
             P●aesul
             ,
             quia
             me
             in
             tot
             mundialium
             perturbationum
             procellis
             laborantem
             conspicis
             :
             quoniam
             credo
             in
             misericordiâ
             Dei
             ,
             quòd
             anima
             mea
             in
             immortalitatis
             libertate
             fit
             gavisura
             .
             tamen
             deprecor
             ,
             ut
             orationibus
             tuis
             sanctis
             me
             peccatorem
             &
             animam
             meam
             non
             desinas
             adjuvare
             .
             
               Theodor
               ,
               Campiden
               .
               vel
               quicunque
               author
               fuit
               vitae
               Magni
               ,
               lib.
               2.
               cap.
               13.
               edit
               .
               Goldasti
               ,
               cap.
               28.
               
               Canissi
               .
            
          
           
             k
             Veni
             ,
             Magne
             ,
             veni
             ;
             accipe
             cotonam
             quam
             tibi
             Dominus
             praeparatam
             habet
             .
             Ibid.
             
          
           
             l
             Cessen●●●
             flere
             ,
             frater
             ;
             quia
             potiùs
             nos
             oportet
             gaudere
             de
             animae
             ejus
             in
             immortalitate
             sumprae
             hoc
             signo
             audito
             ,
             quàm
             luctum
             facere
             :
             sed
             eamus
             ad
             Ecclesiam
             ,
             &
             pro
             tam
             charissimo
             amico
             salutares
             hostias
             Domino
             immolare
             studeamus
             .
             Finito
             itaque
             fraternae
             commemorationis
             obsequio
             ,
             
               &c.
               Ibid.
            
             
          
           
             m
             Dum
             in
             praesenti
             seculo
             sumus
             ,
             sive
             orationibus
             ,
             sive
             consiliis
             invicem
             posse
             nos
             adjuvari
             :
             cùm
             autem
             ante
             tribunal
             Christi
             venerimus
             ,
             nec
             Iob
             ,
             nec
             Daniel
             ,
             nec
             Noe
             ,
             rogare
             posse
             pro
             quoquam
             ;
             sed
             unumquemque
             portare
             onus
             suum
             .
             
               Claud.
               in
               Gal.
            
             6.
             
          
           
             n
             Columban
             .
             in
             epist.
             ad
             Hunaldum
             .
          
        
         
           Notes for div A14233-e8130
           
             a
             Adorare
             alium
             praeter
             Patrem
             &
             Filium
             ,
             &
             Spiritum
             sanctum
             ,
             impietatis
             crimen
             est
             .
             
               Sedul
               .
               in
               Rom.
            
             1.
             
          
           
             b
             Totum
             quod
             debet
             Deo
             anima
             ,
             si
             alicui
             praeter
             Deum
             reddiderit
             ,
             moechatur
             .
             
               Id.
               in
               Rom.
            
             2.
             
          
           
             c
             Recedentes
             à
             lumine
             veritatis
             sapientes
             ;
             quasi
             qui
             invenissent
             ,
             quo
             modo
             invisibilis
             Deus
             per
             simulacrum
             visibile
             coleretur
             .
             
               Id.
               in
               .
               Rom.
            
             1.
             
          
           
             d
             Deus
             non
             in
             manufactis
             habitat
             ,
             nec
             in
             metallo
             aut
             saxo
             cognoscitur
             .
             
               Claud.
               lib.
               2.
               in
               Matth.
            
             
          
           
             e
             Non
             adjurandam
             esse
             crea●uram
             aliam
             ,
             nisi
             creatorem
             .
             
               yaod
               .
               Patricij
               .
               can
               .
               23.
               
               MS.
               
            
          
           
             f
             Auselm
             .
             lib.
             3.
             epist.
             143.
             
          
           
             g
             Episcopis
             ,
             presbyteris
             totius
             Hiberniae
             ,
             infimus
             praesulum
             Gille
             Lunicensis
             in
             Christo
             salutē
             .
             Roga●●
             ,
             nec
             non
             &
             praecepto
             multorum
             ex
             vobis
             (
             Charissimi
             )
             canonicalem
             consuetudinem
             in
             dicencis
             Horis
             ,
             &
             peragendo
             totius
             Ecclesiastici
             ordinis
             officio
             ,
             scribere
             conatus
             sum
             ;
             non
             praesumptivo
             ,
             sed
             vestrae
             cupiens
             piissimae
             servire
             jusstoni●
             ut
             diversi
             &
             schismatici
             illi
             Ordines
             ,
             quibus
             Hibernia
             penè
             tota
             delusa
             est
             ,
             uni
             Catholico
             &
             Roma●o
             ced●nt
             officio
             .
             Quid
             enim
             magis
             indecens
             aut
             schismaticum
             dici
             poterit
             ;
             quàm
             doctiss●mum
             unius
             ordinis
             in
             alterius
             Ecclesiâ
             idiotam
             &
             laicum
             fieri
             ?
             
               &c.
               Prolog
               Gille
               five
               Gilleberti
               Lummicensis
               epise
               .
               De
               usu
               Ecclesiastic
               .
               MS.
               in
               Colleg.
               S.
               Benedict
               .
            
             &
             public●
             academiae
             Cantabrigiensis
             Bibliothecâ
             .
          
           
             h
             Apostolicas
             sanctiones
             as
             decreta
             sanctorum
             patrum
             ,
             praecipueque
             consuetudines
             sanctae
             Romanae
             ecclesiae
             in
             cunctis
             eccle●iis
             statuebat
             .
             Hinc
             est
             quòd
             hodieque
             in
             illis
             ad
             horas
             canonicas
             cantatur
             &
             psallitur
             juxta
             motem
             universae
             terrae
             :
             nam
             minimè
             id
             antè
             f●●bat
             ,
             ne
             in
             civitate
             quidem
             .
             Ipse
             verò
             in
             adolescentiâ
             cantum
             didicerat
             ,
             &
             in
             suo
             coenobio
             mox
             cantati
             fecit
             ;
             cùm
             necdum
             in
             civitate
             seu
             in
             episcopatu
             universo
             cantare
             scirent
             ,
             vel
             vellent
             ,
             
               Bernard
               .
               in
               vitâ
               Mal●thia
            
             .
          
           
             i
             Officium
             etiam
             Ecclesiasticum
             ritè
             modulandum
             statuerunt
             .
             
               Iohan.
               Brampto●
               ,
               in
               Ioralanensi
               historiâ
               .
               MS.
               
            
          
           
             k
             Omnia
             divina
             ad
             instar
             sa
             ●osanctae
             Ecclesiae
             ,
             iuxta
             quod
             Anglicana
             observat
             Ecclesia
             ,
             in
             om●ibus
             pa●tibus
             Hiberniae
             amodo
             tractentur
             .
             
               Girald
               .
               Cambr.
               Hibern
               .
               exp●gnat
               .
               lib.
               1.
               cap.
            
             34.
             
          
           
             l
             Conci●●
             statuta
             sub●cripta
             sunt
             ,
             &
             Regiae
             sublimitatis
             authoritate
             firmata
             
               Id.
               ibid.
            
             
          
           
             m
             Ex
             ipsius
             triumphatoris
             mandato
             ,
             in
             civitate
             Cassiliensi
             convenerunt
             .
             
               Id.
               ibid.
            
             
          
           
             n
             Vt
             ministerium
             baptizandi
             ,
             quo
             Deo
             renascimur
             ,
             iuxta
             morem
             Sanctae
             Romanae
             &
             Apostolicae
             Ecclesiae
             compleatis
             ,
             
               Bed.
               lib.
               2.
               
               Histor
               cap.
            
             2.
             
          
           
             o
             Per
             universum
             orbè
             terra●um
             ,
             in
             Ecclesiâ
             ordo
             cursus
             Gallorum
             diffusus
             est
             .
             
               Fragment
               .
               de
               Ecclesiasticorum
               officiorum
               origine
               .
               MS.
               Bibliothecâ
               C●ttonianâ
               .
            
          
           
             p
             
               Gildas
               ait
            
             .
             Britones
             toti
             mundo
             contrarii
             ,
             moribus
             Romanis
             inimici
             non
             solùm
             in
             Missâ
             ,
             sed
             etiam
             in
             tonsurâ
             .
             
               Cod.
               Ca●●●●
               titulorum
               66.
               
               MS.
               in
               eâdem
               Bibliothecâ
               .
            
          
           
             q
             Adamnan
             .
             Vit.
             columb
             .
             lib.
             3.
             cap.
             31.
             
          
           
             r
             〈◊〉
             Tactic
             .
             cap.
             11.
             sect
             .
             18.
             
          
           
             s
             Adamnan
             .
             Vit.
             Columb
             .
             lib.
             〈…〉
             .
             15.
             
          
           
             t
             Walafrid
             .
             Strab.
             Vit.
             Gall.
             lib.
             1.
             cap.
             26.
             
             Theodor.
             Campidonens
             .
             vel
             quicunque
             author
             .
             fuit
             Vit.
             Magni
             ,
             lib.
             1.
             cap.
             9.
             edit
             .
             Goldast
             .
             cap.
             12.
             
             Conis●i
             .
          
           
             u
             Heb.
             13.
             16.
             
          
           
             x
             2
             Cor.
             ●5
             .
          
           
             y
             Heb.
             13.
             15.
             
          
           
             z
             Praeceptor
             mens
             B.
             Columbanus
             in
             vasis
             aeneis
             Domino
             solet
             sacrificium
             offerre
             salutis
             .
             
               walafrid
               .
               Strab.
               Vit.
               Gall.
               lib.
               1.
               cap.
            
             19.
             
          
           
             a
             Testamentū
             Episcopi
             sive
             principis
             est
             ;
             10.
             scripuli
             Sacerdoti
             danti
             sibi
             sacrificium
             .
             
               Synod
               .
               Hibern
               .
               in
               vet
               .
               lib.
               Can●num
               Cotte●●nious
               ,
               titulorum
            
             66.
             
          
           
             b
             Qui
             in
             vitâ
             suâ
             non
             merebi●●
             sacrificū
             accipere
             :
             quomodo
             post
             mortem
             illi
             potest
             adjuvare
             ?
             
               Synod
               Patric
               .
               cap.
               12.
               
               MS.
               
            
          
           
             c
             Invicem
             expectate
             ,
             id
             est
             ,
             usque
             quo
             sacrificium
             accipiatis
             .
             
               Sedul
               .
               in
               1
               Cor.
            
             11.
             
          
           
             d
             Gravi
             infirmitate
             depressus
             ,
             à
             suis
             commonitus
             est
             vicinis
             ,
             ut
             iuxta
             morem
             susciperet
             sacrificium
             communienis
             .
             
               Ex
               vitâ
               S.
               Samsonis
               MS.
               in
               libro
               〈◊〉
               Eccles●●
               〈◊〉
            
             Tilo
             .
          
           
             e
             Hebr.
             13.
             10.
             
          
           
             f
             Id
             fit
             potissimùm
             ob●●acrificii
             ,
             non
             ob
             Sacramenti
             integtitatem
             .
             
               Bellarmin
               .
               de
               sacrament
               .
               Eucharist
               .
               lib.
               4.
               cap.
               22.
               in
               fine
               .
            
          
           
             g
             Rhem.
             annotat
             .
             in
             Matth.
             26.
             26.
             
          
           
             h
             Mittas
             presbyterum
             qui
             illam
             ,
             priusquam
             moriatur
             ,
             visitet
             ;
             eique
             Dominici
             corporis
             &
             sanguinis
             sacramenta
             ministret
             
               Bed.
               de
               Vit.
               Cuthbert
               .
               pros
               .
               cap.
            
             15.
             
          
           
             i
             Acceptis
             è
             me
             sacramentis
             salutaribus
             exin●●
             suum
             ,
             quem
             iam
             venisse
             cognovit
             ,
             Dominici
             corporis
             &
             sanguinis
             com●un●●●●
             munivit
             .
             
               Ibid.
               cap.
            
             39.
             
          
           
             k
             Bed.
             de
             Vit.
             Cuthbert
             .
             corm
             .
             cap.
             36.
             
          
           
             l
             Petivitque
             &
             accepit
             sacri
             corporis
             &
             sanguinis
             communionem
             .
             
               Author
               antiqu
               .
               Vitae
               Fursaei
            
             .
          
           
             m
             Principes
             &
             doctores
             Ecclesiae
             Christi
             ,
             animas
             fidelium
             ad
             poenitentiae
             lamentum
             post
             culpas
             pro●ocent
             ;
             &
             eas
             spirituall
             pastis
             doctrinae
             ,
             ac
             sacri
             corporis
             &
             sanguinis
             participatione
             solidis
             reddant
             .
             Ibid.
             
          
           
             n
             Pe●
             alterum
             ●stium
             Abbati●●
             cu●suis
             puellis
             &
             vid●is
             fidelibus
             〈…〉
             convivio
             corporis
             &
             sanguinis
             fruantur
             Iesu
             Christi
             .
             
               Cogitos
               .
               vit
               .
               Brigid
            
             .
          
           
             o
             Quadam
             ex
             his
             nomine
             Domna
             ,
             cùm
             jam
             corpus
             Domini
             accepisset
             ,
             ac
             sanguinem
             libâffet
             .
             
               I●n
               .
               Vit.
               Burgundofor
            
             .
          
           
             p
             1
             Cor.
             11.
             26.
             
          
           
             q
             Rhem.
             in
             Mat.
             26.
             26.
             
          
           
             r
             Venerabilis
             viri
             Sedulii
             Paschale
             opus
             ,
             quod
             heroicis
             descripsit
             versibus
             ,
             insigni
             laude
             praeferimus
             .
             
               Synod
               .
               Roman
               .
               sub
               Gelasi●
               .
            
          
           
             s
             Hinc
             quoque
             conspicui
             radiavit
             lingua
             Seduli
             .
             
               Venant
               .
               Fortunat.
               de
               vitâ
               S.
               Martini
               ,
               lib.
            
             1.
             
          
           
             t
             Bonus
             Sedulius
             ,
             poëta
             Evangelicus
             ,
             Orator
             facundus
             ,
             scriptor
             catholicus
             .
             
               Hildephons
               .
               Toletan
               .
               serm
               .
               5.
               de
               assumpt
               .
               Maria
               .
            
          
           
             u
             Sedulii
             Scoti
             Hiberniensis
             ,
             in
             omnes
             epistolas
             Pauli
             Collectan
             :
             
               excus
               .
               Basil.
            
             an
             .
             1528.
             
          
           
             x
             Sedul
             .
             Carm.
             Paschal
             .
             lib.
             4.
             
          
           
             y
             Triticeae
             sementis
             cibus
             suavis
             ,
             &
             amoenae
             vitis
             potus
             amabilis
             .
             
               Id.
               pros
               .
               lib.
               4.
               ca.
            
             14.
             
          
           
             z
             Melchisedech
             vinum
             &
             panem
             obtulit
             Abraham
             ,
             in
             figuram
             Christi
             ,
             corpus
             &
             sanguinem
             suum
             Deo
             patri
             in
             cruce
             offerentis
             .
             
               Secul●n
               Heb.
            
             5.
             
          
           
             a
             Nos
             verò
             in
             commemorationem
             Dominicae
             semel
             passionis
             quotidie
             nostraeque
             salutis
             offerimus
             .
             
               Id●●
               Heb.
            
             10.
             
          
           
             b
             Suam
             memoriam
             nobis
             reliquit
             :
             quemadmodum
             si
             quis
             peregrè
             proficiscens
             aliquod
             pignus
             ei
             quem
             diligit
             derelinquat
             ;
             ut
             quotiescunque
             illud
             viderit
             ,
             possit
             ejus
             beneficia
             &
             amicitias
             recordari
             .
             
               Id.
               in
               1
               Cor.
            
             11.
             
          
           
             c
             Voluit
             antè
             discipulis
             suis
             tradere
             sacramentum
             corporis
             &
             sanguinis
             sui
             ,
             quod
             significavit
             in
             fractione
             corporis
             &
             effusione
             calicis
             ,
             &
             posteà
             ipsum
             corpus
             immolari
             in
             ara
             Crucis
             .
             
               Claud.
               lib.
               3.
               in
               Matth.
            
             
          
           
             d
             See
             
               Chrysostom
               ,
               Theodoret
            
             ,
             and
             
               Ephraemius
               Antiochenus
            
             ,
             in
             the
             Answer
             to
             the
             Iesuit
             ,
             pag.
             66
             ,
             67.
             of
             the
             last
             edition
             .
          
           
             e
             Apud
             Rathrannum
             (
             sive
             Bertramum
             )
             &
             Aelfricum
             ,
             passim
             .
          
           
             f
             Quia
             panis
             corpus
             confirmat
             ,
             vinum
             verò
             sanguinem
             operatur
             in
             carne
             :
             hic
             ad
             corpus
             Christi
             mysticè
             ,
             illud
             refertur
             ad
             sanguinem
             .
             
               Id.
               ibid.
            
             
          
           
             g
             Quòd
             corpus
             Christi
             in
             altaris
             sacramento
             est
             solum
             speculum
             ad
             corpus
             Christi
             in
             coelo
             .
             
               Ex
               actis
               ●
               illelmi
               Andreae
               Midensis
               episcopi
               contra
               Henr.
               Crumpe
               ,
               anno
               1384.
               que
               MS
               a.
               hab●o
               .
            
          
           
             h
             Iohannis
             Scoti
             liber
             de
             Eucharistiâ
             lectus
             est
             ,
             ac
             damnatus
             .
             
               Lanfranc
               .
               de
               Eucharist
               .
               contr
               .
               Berengar
               .
            
          
           
             i
             Iohanne
             mjnū
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             
               Alfred
               .
               praefat
               .
               in
               Gregor
               .
               Pastoral
               .
               Saxonic
               .
            
          
           
             k
             Praefertim
             cùm
             ex
             mirabilibus
             Scripturae
             Dominicae
             nil
             praeterire
             disposui
             ,
             in
             quibus
             à
             ministerio
             quotidian●
             excellere
             in
             aliis
             videntur
             .
             
               Lib.
               2.
               de
               mirabilib
               .
               Scriptur
               .
               cap.
            
             21.
             
          
        
         
           Notes for div A14233-e12470
           
             a
             
               Quod
               infantes
               baptismo
               sine
               Chrismate
               consecrato
               baptizantur
               .
            
             Lanfranc
             .
             epist.
             MS.
             in
             Bibliothecâ
             Cottonian●
             :
             &
             apud
             Baron
             .
             an
             .
             1089.
             num
             .
             16.
             ubi
             tamen
             sive
             malè
             habetur
             prosine
             .
          
           
             b
             Vsum
             saluberrimum
             Confessionis
             ,
             sacramentum
             Confirmationis
             ,
             contractum
             conjugiorum
             (
             quae
             omnia
             aut
             ignorabant
             aut
             negligebant
             )
             Malachias
             de
             novo
             instituit
             .
             
               Bernard
               .
               in
               vitâ
               Malachiae
            
             .
          
           
             c
             Inter
             mundanas
             occupationes
             castissimam
             vitam
             rationabili
             consideratione
             degere
             dicuntur
             .
             
               Alcuin
               .
               epist.
               26.
               edit
               .
               H.
               Canisti
               ,
               71.
               
               Andreae
               Quercetan●
               .
            
          
           
             d
             Dicitur
             verò
             neminem
             ex
             Laicis
             suam
             velle
             Confessionem
             sacerdotibus
             dare
             :
             quos
             à
             Deo
             Christo
             cum
             sanctis
             Apostolis
             ligandi
             solvendique
             potestatem
             accepisse
             credimus
             ,
             Ibid.
             
          
           
             e
             Coram
             omnibus
             qui
             ibidem
             erant
             peccata
             sua
             confessus
             est
             .
             
               Adamnan
               .
               vit
               .
               Columb
               .
               lib.
               1.
               cap.
            
             16.
             (
             
               vel
               20.
               in
               MS.
            
             )
          
           
             f
             Surge
             fili
             ,
             &
             consolare
             :
             dimi●●a
             sunt
             tua
             ,
             quae
             commi●isti
             ,
             peccamina
             .
             quia
             sicut
             scriptum
             est
             ;
             Cor
             contritum
             &
             humiliatum
             Deus
             non
             spernit
             .
             Ibid.
             
          
           
             g
             Accedens
             ad
             sacerdotem
             ,
             à
             quo
             sibi
             spera●at
             iter
             salutis
             posse
             demonstrari
             ;
             confessus
             est
             reatum
             suum
             ,
             petiique
             〈◊〉
             consilium
             sibi
             daret
             ,
             quo
             posset
             fugere
             à
             venturâ
             Dei
             irâ
             .
             
               Bed.
               lib.
            
             4.
             
               histor
               .
               cap.
            
             25.
             
          
           
             h
             Confessa
             dignis
             (
             ut
             imperabat
             )
             poenitentiae
             fructibus
             abstergerent
             .
             
               Id.
               ibid.
               cap.
            
             27.
             
          
           
             i
             Christianu●
             qui
             occiderit
             ,
             aut
             fornicationem
             fecerit
             ,
             aut
             more
             Gentilium
             ad
             aruspicem
             meaverit
             ;
             per
             singula
             crimina
             annum
             poenitentiae
             agar
             ,
             impleto
             cum
             testibus
             veniat
             anno
             Poenitentiae
             ,
             &
             posteà
             resolvetur
             à
             sacerdote
             .
             
               Synod
               .
               Patricij
               ,
               Auxilij
               &
               Issernini
               MS.
               in
               Bibliothecâ
               Collegii
               Benedict
               .
               Cantabrig
               .
            
          
           
             k
             Necnon
             etiam
             nunc
             in
             Episcopis
             ac
             Presbyteris
             omni
             Ecclesiae
             officium
             idem
             committitur
             :
             Ut
             videlicèt
             agnitis
             peccantium
             caussis
             ,
             quoscunq
             ,
             humiles
             ac
             verè
             poe●●●entes
             aspexerint
             ,
             hos
             iam
             à
             timore
             perpetuae
             mortis
             miserantes
             absolvant
             ,
             quos
             ver
             in
             peccatis
             quae
             egerint
             persistere
             cognove●int
             illos
             perennibus
             suppliciis
             obli
             gandos
             ●●●sinuent
             .
             
               Claud
               in
               Matth.
               lib.
            
             2.
             
          
           
             l
             Verum
             dicunt
             Scribae
             ,
             quia
             nemo
             dim●●tere
             peccata
             nisi
             sulus
             Deus
             potest
             ;
             qui
             per
             eos
             quoque
             dimi●
             ut
             ,
             quibus
             dimitiendi
             tribuit
             p●testatem
             .
             Et
             ideò
             Christus
             verè
             Deus
             esse
             probatur
             ;
             quia
             dimittere
             peccata
             quasi
             Deus
             potest
             .
             Verum
             Deo
             testimonium
             reddunt
             ;
             sed
             personam
             Christi
             negando
             falluntur
             .
             
               Id.
               in
               Matth.
               lib.
            
             1.
             
          
           
             m
             Si
             &
             Deus
             est
             ,
             iuxta
             Psalmistam
             ,
             qui
             quantum
             distat
             Oriens
             ab
             occasu
             clongavit
             à
             nobis
             iniquitates
             nostras
             ;
             &
             filius
             hominis
             potestatem
             habet
             in
             terrâ
             dimittendi
             peccata
             :
             ergò
             idem
             ipse
             &
             Deus
             &
             filius
             hominis
             est
             .
             ut
             &
             homo
             Christus
             per
             divinitatis
             suae
             potentiam
             peccata
             dimittere
             possit
             ;
             &
             idem
             Deus
             Christus
             per
             humanitatis
             suae
             fragilitatem
             pro
             peccatoribus
             mori
             .
             Ibid.
             
          
           
             n
             Ostendit
             se
             Deum
             ,
             qui
             potest
             cordis
             occulta
             cognoscere
             ;
             &
             quodam
             modo
             tacens
             loquitur
             .
             Eâdem
             maiestate
             &
             potentiâ
             quà
             cogitationes
             vestras
             intueor
             ,
             possum
             &
             hominibus
             delicta
             dimittere
             .
             Ibid.
             
          
           
             o
             In
             paralytico
             à
             quatuor
             viris
             portato
             ,
             quatuor
             divina
             opera
             cernuntur
             .
             Dum
             dimittuntur
             ei
             peccata
             ,
             &
             praesentis
             aegritudinis
             plaga
             verbo
             tunc
             solvitur
             ,
             &
             cogitationibus
             in
             ore
             Dei
             omnia
             scrutantis
             respondetur
             .
             
               Auth.
               lib.
               de
               Mirabilib
               .
               S.
               Scriptur
               .
               lib.
               3.
               cap.
            
             7.
             
          
           
             p
             Deus
             solus
             potest
             occulta
             hominum
             scire
             ,
             
               Sedul
               .
               in
               Rom.
            
             2.
             
          
           
             q
             Corda
             hominum
             nôffe
             solius
             Dei
             est
             ,
             &
             mentis
             secreta
             agnoscere
             .
             
               Id.
               ibid.
            
             
          
           
             r
             
               Nondum
               deeimas
               vel
               primitias
               solvunt
               :
               nondum
               matri●●nia
               contrahunt
               ;
               non
               incestus
               vitant
               .
            
             Girald
             .
             Cambr.
             Topograph
             .
             Hibera
             .
             distinct
             .
             3.
             cap.
             19.
             
             Vide
             etiam
             Lanfranci
             epist.
             ad
             Gothricum
             &
             Terdeluacum
             reges
             Hibern
             .
             apud
             Baronium
             ,
             an
             .
             1089.
             num
             .
             13.
             
             &
             16.
             
          
           
             s
             Videtur
             indicare
             ,
             esse
             aliquid
             quod
             donum
             quidem
             fit
             ,
             non
             tamen
             spirituale
             :
             ut
             Nuptiae
             .
             
               Sedul
               .
               in
               Rom.
            
             1.
             
          
           
             t
             De
             consanguinitate
             in
             conjugio
             .
             Intelligite
             quid
             Lex
             loquitur
             ,
             non
             minùs
             nec
             plus
             .
             Quod
             autem
             observatur
             apud
             nos
             ,
             ut
             quatuor
             genera
             dividantur
             ;
             nec
             vidisse
             di●unt
             nec
             legisse
             .
             
               Synod
               .
               Patric
               .
               cap.
               19.
               
               MS.
               
            
          
           
             u
             Audi
             decreta
             Synodi
             super
             istis
             .
             Frater
             thorum
             defuncti
             fratris
             non
             ascandat
             :
             Domino
             dicente
             ,
             Erunt
             duo
             in
             carne
             unâ
             .
             Ergo
             uxor
             fratris
             tui
             soror
             tua
             est
             ,
             
               Ibid.
               cap.
               25.
               &
               in
               Excerptis
               è
               Inre
               Sacerdota●i
               Egborti
               archiepisc
               .
               per
               Hucarium
               Levitam
               .
               MS.
               
            
          
           
             x
             Vit
             ●ilia●●
             ,
             tom
             .
             4.
             antiqu
             .
             lect
             .
             Henr.
             Ca●●sti
             ,
             pag.
             633.
             
             &
             644.
             
          
           
             y
             Iudaismum
             inducens
             ,
             judicat
             justum
             esse
             Christiano
             ,
             ut
             si
             voluerit
             ,
             viduam
             fratris
             defuncti
             accipiat
             uxorem
             .
             
               Bonifac
               .
               epist.
               ad
               Zachar
               .
               tomo
               3.
               
               Concil
               .
               part
               .
               1.
               pag.
               382.
               edit
               .
               Colon.
               An.
            
             1618.
             
          
           
             z
             Inferens
             Christianis
             Iudaismum
             ,
             dum
             praedicat
             fratris
             defuncti
             accipere
             uxorem
             .
             
               Concil
               .
               Roman
               .
               II.
               sub
               .
               Zachar.
               ibid.
               pag.
               383.
               e.
               
            
          
           
             a
             Quinimo
             (
             quod
             valde
             detestabile
             est
             ,
             &
             non
             tantùm
             fidei
             ,
             sed
             &
             cuilibet
             honestati
             valde
             contrarium
             )
             fratres
             pluribus
             per
             Hiberniam
             locis
             fratrum
             defunctorum
             uxores
             ,
             non
             dico
             ducunt
             ,
             sed
             traducunt
             ,
             imo
             verius
             seducunt
             ;
             dum
             trupiter
             eas
             ,
             &
             tam
             incestuosè
             cognoscunt
             :
             veteris
             in
             hoc
             testamenti
             non
             medullae
             sed
             cortici
             adhaerentes
             ,
             veteresque
             libentiùs
             in
             vitiis
             quàm
             virtutibus
             imitari
             volentes
             .
             
               Girald
               .
               Cambr.
               Topograph
               .
               Hibern
               .
               distinct
               .
               3.
               cap.
            
             19.
             
          
           
             b
             Non
             licet
             secundùm
             praeceptum
             Domini
             ut
             dimittatur
             conjunx
             ,
             nisi
             caussâ
             fornicationis
             .
             
               Sedul
               .
               in
               1
               Cor.
            
             7.
             
          
           
             c
             Non
             licet
             viro
             dimittere
             uxorem
             nisi
             ob
             caussam
             fornicationis
             .
             ac
             fi
             dicat
             ,
             ob
             hanc
             caussam
             .
             Vnde
             si
             ducat
             alterum
             ,
             velut
             post
             mortem
             prioris
             ,
             non
             ve●ant
             .
             
               Synod
               .
               Patrie
               .
               cap.
               36
               MS.
               
            
          
           
             d
             Si
             alicujus
             uxor
             fornicata
             fuerit
             cum
             alio
             viro
             :
             non
             adducet
             aliam
             uxorem
             ,
             quandiù
             viva
             fuerit
             uxor
             prima
             .
             Si
             fortè
             conversa
             fuerit
             ,
             &
             agat
             poenitentiam
             ,
             suscipiet
             eam
             ;
             &
             serviet
             ei
             in
             vicem
             ancillae
             :
             &
             anuum
             integrum
             in
             pan●
             &
             aquâ
             per
             mensuram
             poeniteat
             ;
             nec
             in
             uno
             lecto
             permaneant
             .
             Ex
             libro
             〈◊〉
             Cott●●an●
             ,
             titul●●m
             66.
             
          
           
             e
             Quicunque
             Clericis
             ,
             ab
             Ostiario
             usque
             ad
             Sacerdotem
             ,
             fine
             〈◊〉
             visus
             fuerit
             ,
             &c.
             &
             uxor
             ejus
             si
             non
             velato
             capite
             ambulaverit
             :
             pariter
             à
             laicis
             contemnenurtur
             ,
             &
             ab
             Ecclesiâ
             separentur
             .
             
               Synod
               .
               Patric
               .
               Auxil
               Issernin
               .
            
          
           
             f
             Patrem
             habui
             Calporn●●●●
             Diaconum
             ,
             filium
             quondam
             Potiti
             presbyteri
             .
             
               S.
               Patricii
               Confessio
               .
               MS.
            
             
          
           
             g
             Imperfecta
             est
             patrum
             castitas
             ,
             si
             eidem
             non
             &
             〈◊〉
             accumul●●●
             .
             Sed
             quid
             crir
             ,
             ubi
             nec
             pater
             ,
             nec
             filius
             mali
             genitoris
             exemplo
             pravatus
             ,
             conspicitu●
             castus
             ?
             Gildas
             .
          
           
             h
             Sic
             inveni
             ,
             ut
             tibi
             Samuel
             (
             infans
             magistri
             mei
             Benlani
             presbyteri
             )
             in
             istâ
             pagina
             scripsi
             .
             
               Nennius
               in
               MS
               
               o.
               Dunelmensi
               .
            
          
           
             i
             Versus
             Nennii
             ad
             Samuelem
             filium
             magistri
             sui
             Benlani
             ,
             viri
             religiosi
             ,
             ad
             quem
             historiam
             istam
             scripserat
             .
             
               Nenn.
               MS.
               in
               publicâ
               Cantaebrigiensis
               academiae
               Bibliothecâ
            
          
           
             *
             Hinc
             apud
             Balaeum
             ,
             Centur.
             1
             cap.
             77.
             
             Benlani
             presbyteri
             〈◊〉
             Laeta
             est
             nominata
             .
          
           
             k
             Si
             clericus
             haberet
             foeminam
             datam
             à
             suo
             genere
             ,
             &
             sic
             habee
             filium
             ex
             eâ
             ;
             &
             posteà
             ille
             cleritus
             presbyteratus
             ordinem
             accipiens
             ,
             si
             post
             votum
             consecrationis
             filium
             haberet
             de
             eâdem
             foeminâ
             ;
             prior
             filius
             non
             debet
             partiri
             cum
             filio
             post
             nato
             .
             
               Ex
               legib
               .
               Howel
               Dha
               ,
               MS.
               in
               〈◊〉
               Cottonia●â
               .
            
          
           
             l
             Successivè
             &
             post
             patres
             filii
             ecclesias
             obtinent
             ,
             non
             electivè
             sed
             haereditate
             possidentes
             &
             polluentes
             Sanctuarium
             Dei.
             quia
             si
             praelatus
             alium
             eligere
             &
             instituere
             fortè
             praesumpserit
             ;
             in
             instituentem
             procùl
             dubiò
             ,
             vel
             institutum
             ,
             genus
             injuriam
             vindicabit
             .
             
               Girald
               ,
               Cambrensis
               Descript.
               Cambri●
               ,
               libro
            
             2
             ●
             .
             MS.
             Successio●is
             quippe
             vitium
             non
             solùm
             in
             sedibus
             cathedralibus
             ,
             verùm
             etiam
             adeò
             per
             totam
             in
             clero
             sicut
             &
             in
             populo
             Walliam
             per●inaciter
             inyaiuit
             ;
             quòd
             &
             post
             patres
             filii
             passim
             ecclesias
             &
             consequenter
             obtineant
             ,
             tanquam
             haereditate
             possidentes
             &
             polluentes
             Sanctuarium
             Dei
             ,
             
               &c.
               
               Id.
               in
               Dialogo
               de
               Ecclesiâ
               Menevensi
               ,
               distinct
               .
               1.
               
               MS.
               
            
          
           
             m
             Hildebert
             .
             epist.
             65.
             ad
             Honorium
             II.
             (
             tomo
             12.
             
             Bibloth
             .
             Patr.
             part
             .
             1.
             pag.
             338.
             339.
             edit
             .
             Colon.
             )
          
           
             n
             Ex
             quibus
             constare
             potest
             ,
             utrumque
             vitium
             toti
             huic
             genti
             Britanniae
             tam
             cismarinae
             quàm
             transmarinae
             ab
             antiquo
             commune
             fuisse
             .
             
               Girald
               .
               Cambr.
               in
               utroque
            
             .
          
           
             o
             Alphons
             .
             Ciacon
             .
             in
             Vitis
             Pontificum
             &
             Cardinalium
             ,
             pag.
             515.
             
          
        
         
           Notes for div A14233-e14620
           
             a
             〈…〉
             in
             clerum
             electi
             〈…〉
             distinct
             3.
             cap.
             29.
             
          
           
             b
             Ecgbenu●
             cum
             C●adda
             adolescente
             &
             ipse
             adolescens
             in
             Hiberniâ
             monasticam
             in
             orationibus
             &
             continentiâ
             &
             meditatione
             divinarū
             scriptura●um
             vitam
             sedulus
             agebat
             .
             
               Bed.
               lib.
               4.
               hist.
               cap.
            
             3.
             
          
           
             c
             Sed
             &
             diebus
             Dominicis
             ad
             ecclesiam
             sive
             ad
             monasteria
             certatim
             ,
             non
             reficiendi
             eorp●ris
             ,
             sed
             erudiendi
             sermonis
             Dei
             gratiâ
             confluebant
             
               Id.
               lib.
               3.
               cap.
            
             26.
             
          
           
             d
             Hactenus
             videri
             poterat
             actum
             esse
             cum
             sapientiae
             studiis
             ;
             nisi
             semen
             Deus
             servâsset
             in
             aliquo
             mundi
             angulo
             .
             In
             Scotis
             &
             Hibernis
             haeserat
             aliquid
             adhuc
             de
             doctrinâ
             cognitionis
             Dei
             &
             honestatis
             civilis
             ;
             quòd
             nullus
             fuerit
             in
             ultimis
             illis
             mundi
             finibus
             armorum
             terror
             ,
             &c.
             
             Et
             summam
             possumus
             ibi
             conspicere
             &
             adorare
             Dei
             bonitatem
             ;
             quòd
             in
             Scotis
             ,
             &
             locis
             ,
             ubi
             nemo
             putâsset
             ,
             tam
             numerosi
             coaluerint
             sub
             strictissimâ
             disciplinâ
             coetus
             .
             
               Jacob.
               Curi●
               ,
               lib.
               ●
               rerum
               Chronologie
               .
            
          
           
             e
             Si
             quis
             frater
             inobediens
             fuerit
             ;
             duos
             dies
             uno
             paxmate
             &
             aquâ
             .
             Si
             quis
             dicit
             ,
             Non
             faci●m
             ;
             tres
             dies
             uno
             paxmatio
             &
             aquâ
             .
             Si
             quis
             ●●murat
             ;
             duos
             dies
             uno
             paxmatio
             &
             aquâ
             .
             Si
             quis
             veniam
             non
             petit
             ,
             aut
             dicit
             excu●●tionem
             ;
             〈◊〉
             dies
             uno
             paxmatio
             &
             aquâ
             .
             
               Col●●
               lib.
               de
               quatidi●●us
               P●●itentus
               〈◊〉
               ca
               10.
               
               MS.
               in
               ●●asteris
               S.
               Galli
               .
            
          
           
             f
             Quid
             prodest
             ,
             si
             virgo
             corpore
             sit
             ,
             &
             non
             sit
             virgo
             ●ente
             ?
             
               Id.
               in
               Regulâ
               〈◊〉
               .
               cap.
            
             8.
             
          
           
             g
             Quotidie
             proficiendum
             est
             :
             sicut
             quotidie
             orandum
             ,
             quotidicque
             est
             legendum
             .
             
               Ibid.
               cap.
            
             5.
             
          
           
             h
             Bona
             vanè
             laudat●
             Pharis●i
             perierunt
             :
             &
             peccata
             Publicani
             accusata
             evanuerunt
             .
             Non
             exeat
             igitur
             verbum
             grande
             de
             ore
             Monachi
             :
             ne
             suus
             grandis
             pereat
             labor
             .
             
               Ibid.
               cap.
            
             7.
             
          
           
             i
             Tantam
             nos
             habere
             per
             natura●
             liberi
             arbitrii
             non
             peccandi
             possibilitatem
             :
             ut
             plus
             etiam
             quàm
             praeceptum
             est
             ,
             faciamus
             :
             quoniam
             perpe●a
             servatur
             à
             plerisque
             virginitas
             ,
             quae
             praecepta
             non
             est
             ;
             cùm
             ad
             〈◊〉
             peccandum
             praecepta
             impl●re
             sufficiat
             .
             
               Aug.
               de
               gesti●
               Synod
               .
               Palestin
               .
               contra
               Pelag.
               cap.
            
             13.
             
          
           
             k
             Ipsis
             Apostolis
             &
             eorum
             sequacibus
             ita
             bonum
             virginitatis
             arripiendum
             persuasit
             :
             ut
             hoc
             scirent
             non
             humanae
             industriae
             ,
             sed
             muneris
             esse
             divini
             .
             
               S.
               Gallus
               ,
               in
               serm
               .
               ●abit
               .
               Constant.
               
            
          
           
             l
             Non
             in
             solo
             rerum
             corporearum
             nitore
             ,
             sed
             etiam
             in
             ipsis
             sordibus
             luctuosis
             esse
             posse
             jactantiam
             :
             &
             eo
             periculosiorem
             ,
             quo
             sub
             nomine
             servitutis
             Dei
             decipit
             .
             
               Claud.
               lib.
               1.
               in
               Matth.
            
             
          
           
             m
             Act.
             20.
             35.
             
          
           
             n
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ;
             Euseb.
             lib.
             1.
             hist.
             cap.
             ult
             .
          
           
             o
             Qui
             nostra
             reliquimus
             ,
             ut
             secundùm
             Evangelicam
             jussionem
             Dominum
             sequeremur
             ,
             non
             debemus
             alienas
             amplecti
             divitias
             ;
             ne
             fortè
             praevagicatores
             simus
             divini
             mandati
             .
             
               Walafrid
               .
               Strab.
               vit
               .
               Galli
               ,
               lib.
               1.
               cap.
            
             2.
             
          
           
             p
             Alii
             hortum
             labor
             averunt
             ,
             alii
             arbores
             pomiferas
             excoluerunt
             .
             B.
             verò
             Gallus
             texebat
             retia
             ,
             &c.
             &
             de
             ●odem
             labore
             afliduas
             populo
             benedictiones
             exhibuit
             .
             
               Ibid.
               cap.
            
             6.
             
          
           
             q
             Et
             primùm
             quidem
             permodicum
             ab
             eis
             panem
             ,
             quo
             vesceretur
             accipi●hat
             ,
             ac
             suo
             bibebat
             è
             fonte
             :
             postmodùm
             verò
             proprio
             mantum
             labore
             juxta
             exempla
             patrum
             vivere
             magis
             aptum
             ducebat
             .
             Rogavit
             ergo
             afferri
             sibi
             instrumenta
             quibus
             terram
             exerceret
             ,
             &
             triticum
             quod
             fereret
             .
             
               Bed.
               vit
               .
               Cuthbert
               .
               pros
               .
               cap.
               19.
               
               Vid.
               li.
               4.
               hist
               ,
               eccles
               .
               cap.
            
             28.
             
          
           
             r
             Id.
             in
             Carm.
             de
             vit
             .
             Cuthbert
             .
             cap.
             17.
             
          
           
             s
             Id.
             lib.
             3.
             hist.
             eccles
             .
             cap.
             19.
             
          
           
             t
             Bonifac.
             in
             vitâ
             Livini
             ,
             pag.
             240.
             
          
           
             u
             Theod.
             Ca●did
             .
             vit
             .
             Magni
             ,
             lib.
             1.
             cap.
             5.
             edit
             .
             Goldasti
             ,
             6.
             
             Ca●issi
             .
          
           
             x
             2
             Thes.
             3.
             12.
             
          
           
             y
             Qui
             in
             monasteriis
             degun●
             ,
             cum
             silentio
             operante●
             ,
             suum
             panem
             manducent
             .
             
               Vit.
               Fursei
            
             .
          
           
             z
             ●am
             enim
             istis
             in
             temporibus
             non
             poterit
             magnus
             aut
             mediocris
             in
             clero
             &
             populo
             aut
             vix
             cibum
             sumere
             ,
             ubi
             tales
             non
             affuerint
             mendicantes
             :
             non
             more
             pauperum
             petentes
             ad
             portas
             vel
             ostia
             humiliter
             eleemosynam
             (
             ut
             Franciscus
             in
             Testamento
             praecepit
             &
             docuit
             )
             mendicando
             ;
             sed
             curias
             ,
             sive
             domos
             ,
             sine
             verecundiâ
             penetrantes
             ,
             &
             inibi
             hospitantes
             ,
             nullatenùs
             invitati
             ,
             edunt
             &
             bibunt
             quae
             apud
             eos
             reperiunt
             .
             secum
             nihilominùs
             aut
             grana
             ,
             aut
             similam
             ,
             aut
             panes
             ,
             aut
             carnes
             ,
             seu
             caseos
             (
             et●amsi
             in
             domo
             non
             fuerint
             nisiduo
             )
             secum
             extorquendo
             reportant
             :
             nec
             eis
             quisquam
             poterit
             denegare
             ,
             nisi
             verecundiam
             naturalem
             abjiciat
             .
             
               Rich.
               Armachanus
               ,
               in
               Defensorio
               Curaterum
               ,
               pag.
               56.
               57.
               edit
               .
               Paris
               .
               an
               .
            
             1625.
             (
             
               collat
               .
               cum
               vetere
               editione
               Ascensianâ
               .
            
             )
          
           
             a
             Prima
             conclusio
             erat
             ,
             quòd
             Dominus
             Iesus
             Christus
             in
             conversatione
             suâ
             humanâ
             semper
             pauper
             erat
             ,
             non
             quia
             propter
             se
             paupertatem
             dilexit
             aut
             voluit
             .
             
               Ibid.
               pag.
            
             104
             ,
             105.
             
          
           
             b
             Secunda
             conclusio
             erat
             ,
             quòd
             Dominus
             noster
             Iesus
             Christus
             nunquam
             spontaneè
             mendicavit
             .
             
               Ib.
               pag.
            
             107.
             
          
           
             c
             Tertia
             conclusio
             fuit
             ;
             quòd
             Christus
             nunquam
             docuit
             spontaneè
             mendicare
             .
             
               Ib.
               pag.
            
             121.
             
          
           
             d
             Quarta
             conclusio
             fuit
             ;
             quòd
             Dominus
             noster
             Iesus
             Christus
             docuit
             non
             debere
             homines
             spontaneè
             mendicare
             .
             
               Ibid.
               pag.
            
             123.
             
          
           
             e
             Quinta
             conclusio
             erat
             ;
             quod
             nullis
             potest
             prudenter
             &
             sanctè
             spontaneam
             mendicitatem
             super
             se
             assumere
             perpetuò
             asservandam
             .
             quoniam
             ex
             quo
             talis
             mendicitas
             vel
             mendicatio
             est
             dissuasa
             à
             Christo
             ,
             à
             suis
             Ap●sto●●
             &
             Discipulis
             ,
             &
             ab
             Ecclesiâ
             ac
             sacris
             Scripturis
             ,
             ac
             etiam
             reprobata
             :
             consequitur
             quòd
             non
             potest
             prudenter
             &
             sanctè
             assumi
             hoc
             modo
             .
             
               Ibid.
               pag.
               131.
               
               Vid.
               ejusd
               .
               Richardi
               sermonem
            
             3
             apud
             Crucem
             Londi●
             .
             edit
             .
             Paris
             an
             .
             1512.
             
          
           
             f
             Quòd
             fratres
             de
             quatuor
             ordinibus
             Mendican●●●
             non
             sunt
             nec
             fuer●at
             Domino
             inspirante
             instituti
             ;
             sed
             contra
             Concilium
             generale
             〈◊〉
             sub
             Innocentio
             tertio
             celebratum
             ,
             ac
             per
             ficta
             &
             falsa
             &
             falsa
             somnia
             ,
             Papa
             Honorius
             suasus
             à
             fratr●●bus
             eos
             confirmavit
             .
             
               Act.
               contra
               Henr.
               Crumpe
               ,
               in
               Thomae
               Waldensis
               Fasciculo
               〈◊〉
               ,
               quem
               MS
               
               um
               ●abeo
               .
            
          
           
             g
             Quòd
             omnes
             Doctores
             determinantes
             pro
             parte
             fratrum
             〈…〉
             Dudum
             ,
             vel
             timuerunt
             veritatem
             dicere
             ,
             ne
             eorum
             libri
             per
             fratres
             Inquisitores
             haer●●●
             pravitatis
             damnarentur
             ;
             vel
             dixerunt
             ,
             ut
             videtur
             ,
             vel
             solùm
             disputative
             &
             non
             deter●●tivè
             processerunt
             :
             quia
             si
             planè
             veritatem
             pro
             Ecclesiâ
             dixissent
             ,
             persecuti
             eos
             fuisse●●
             Fratres
             ,
             sicut
             persequebantur
             sanctum
             Doctorem
             Armachanum
             .
             Ibid.
             
          
           
             h
             Tribus
             monachorum
             (
             qui
             suis
             ,
             sibi
             ipsi
             laboribus
             victum
             ,
             manibus
             operando
             suppeditabant
             )
             millibus
             praefuisse
             creditur
             .
             
               Nicol.
               Horpsfield
               .
               hist.
               Eccles.
               Angl.
               lib.
               1.
               cap.
            
             25.
             
          
           
             i
             Monachum
             oportet
             labore
             manuum
             suarum
             vesci
             &
             vestiri
             .
             
               Vit.
               S.
               Brendani
            
             .
          
           
             k
             In
             quo
             tantus
             fertur
             fuisse
             numerus
             monachorum
             ;
             ut
             cùm
             in
             septem
             portiones
             esset
             cum
             praepositis
             sibi
             rectoribus
             monasterium
             divisum
             ,
             nulla
             harum
             portio
             minus
             quàm
             trecentos
             homines
             haberet
             :
             qui
             omnes
             de
             labore
             manuum
             suarum
             vivere
             solebant
             .
             
               Bed.
               lib.
               2.
               histor
               .
               Ecclesiast
               .
               cap.
            
             2.
             
          
           
             *
             Chronicle
             of
             Wales
             ,
             pag.
             253
             ,
             254.
             
          
           
             †
             Vid.
             Arnal
             .
             Hibern
             .
             a
             Camdeno
             edit
             .
             ad
             an
             .
             1370.
             
          
           
             l
             Ad
             exemplum
             venerabilium
             patrum
             ,
             sub
             regulá
             &
             Abbate
             canonico
             ,
             in
             magnâ
             continentiâ
             &
             finceritate
             proprio
             labore
             manuum
             vivunt
             .
             
               Bed.
               lib.
               4.
               bist
               .
               eccles
               .
               cap.
            
             4.
             
          
           
             m
             Iure
             ,
             inquit
             ,
             est
             coenobitarū
             vita
             miranda
             ,
             qui
             Abbatis
             per
             emnia
             subjiciuntur
             imperiis
             ;
             ad
             ejus
             arbitrium
             cuncta
             vigilandi
             ,
             orandi
             ,
             jejunandi
             ,
             atque
             operandi
             tempora
             moderantur
             .
             
               Bed.
               vit
               .
               Cuthbert
               .
               pros
               .
               cap.
            
             22.
             
          
           
             n
             id
             .
             Carm.
             cap.
             20.
             
          
           
             o
             Quotidie
             jejunandum
             est
             ,
             sicut
             quotidie
             reficiendum
             est
             .
             
               Columb
               .
               Regul
               .
               c.
            
             5.
             
          
           
             p
             Quia
             haec
             est
             vera
             discretio
             ,
             ut
             possibilitas
             spiritalis
             profectus
             cum
             abstinentiâ
             carnem
             macetante
             retentetur
             .
             Ibid.
             
          
           
             q
             Ideò
             quotidie
             edendum
             est
             ,
             quia
             quotidie
             proficiendum
             est
             .
             Ibid.
             
          
           
             r
             Si
             enim
             modum
             abstinentia
             excesserit
             ,
             vitium
             non
             virtus
             erit
             .
             Ibid.
             
          
           
             s
             Cibus
             sit
             vilis
             &
             vespertinus
             Monachorum
             ,
             satietatem
             fugiens
             &
             potus
             ebrietatem
             ;
             ut
             &
             sustineat
             ,
             &
             non
             noccat
             .
             Ibid.
             
          
           
             *
             Synodus
             Hiberniensium
             dicit
             .
             In
             tribus
             quadragesimis
             anni
             ,
             in
             die
             Dominico
             &
             in
             quartâ
             feriâ
             &
             sextâ
             ,
             conjugaies
             continere
             se
             debent
             .
             
               Canonum
               Collectio
               ,
               cujus
               initium
            
             ;
             Sancta
             Synodus
             bis
             in
             anno
             decrevit
             habere
             Concilia
             .
             
               MS.
               in
               Bibliothecâ
               Cotton
            
             .
          
           
             t
             Si
             quis
             ante
             horam
             nonam
             quartâ
             sextaque
             feriâ
             manducat
             ,
             nisi
             infirmus
             ;
             duos
             dies
             in
             pane
             &
             aquâ
             .
             
               Columban
               .
               lib.
               de
               quotidianis
               Poenitent
               .
               monachor
               .
               cap.
            
             13.
             
          
           
             u
             Cujus
             exemplis
             informati
             ,
             tempore
             illo
             ,
             religiosi
             quique
             viri
             ac
             foeminae
             ,
             consuetudinem
             fecerunt
             per
             totum
             annum
             ,
             (
             exceptâ
             remissione
             quinquagesimae
             Paschalis
             )
             quartâ
             &
             sextâ
             sabbati
             ieiunium
             ad
             nonam
             usque
             horam
             protelare
             .
             
               Bed.
               lib.
               3.
               hist.
               eccles
               .
               cap.
            
             5.
             
          
           
             x
             Quibus
             diebus
             cunctis
             ,
             exceptâ
             Dominicâ
             ,
             iciunium
             ad
             vesperam
             iuxta
             morem
             protelans
             ;
             nec
             tunc
             nisi
             panis
             permodicum
             ,
             &
             unum
             ovum
             gallinaceum
             ,
             cum
             parvo
             lacte
             aquâ
             mixto
             percipiebat
             .
             
               Ibid.
               cap.
            
             23.
             
          
           
             y
             Ostendens
             evidenter
             ,
             filios
             sapientiae
             intelligere
             ,
             nec
             in
             abstinendo
             nec
             in
             manducando
             esse
             iustitiam
             ;
             sed
             in
             aequanimitate
             tolerandi
             inopiam
             ,
             &
             temperanti●
             per
             abundantiam
             non
             se
             co●rumpendi
             ,
             atque
             opportunè
             sumendi
             vel
             non
             sumendi
             ea
             ,
             quorum
             non
             usus
             sed
             concupiscentia
             reprehendenda
             est
             .
             
               Claud.
               lib.
               2.
               in
               Matth.
            
             
          
           
             z
             Sunt
             nonnulli
             ,
             qui
             spiritualibus
             vitiis
             impugnantur
             ;
             sed
             his
             omissis
             ,
             corpus
             in
             abstinentiâ
             affigunt
             .
             
               Vit.
               S.
               Fursei
            
             .
          
           
             a
             Multi
             enim
             cibis
             ,
             quos
             Deus
             ad
             percipiendum
             cum
             gratiarum
             actione
             creavit
             ,
             abstinentes
             ,
             haec
             nefanda
             quasi
             licita
             sumunt
             ;
             hoc
             est
             ,
             superbiam
             ,
             avaritiam
             ,
             invidiam
             ,
             falsum
             testimonium
             ,
             blasphemiam
             .
             Ibid.
             
          
           
             b
             
               Gildas
               in
               epistolis
               su●●
            
             .
             Hi
             dum
             pane
             ad
             mensuram
             vescuntur
             ,
             pro
             hoc
             ipso
             fine
             mensurâ
             gloriantur
             ,
             dum
             aquâ
             utuntur
             ,
             simul
             odii
             poculo
             potantur
             ;
             dum
             siccis
             ferculis
             vescuntur
             ,
             detractionibus
             utuutur
             ;
             dum
             vigiliis
             expendunt
             ,
             alios
             somno
             pressos
             vituperant
             :
             ieiunium
             caritati
             ,
             vigilias
             iustitiae
             ,
             propriam
             adinventionem
             concordiae
             ,
             clausulam
             Ecclesiae
             (
             al.
             Cellae
             ,
             )
             severitatem
             humilitati
             ,
             postremò
             hominem
             Deo
             anteponunt
             .
             Horum
             ieiunium
             ,
             nisi
             per
             aliquas
             virtutes
             adfectatur
             ,
             nihil
             prodest
             .
             qui
             verò
             caritatem
             perficiunt
             ,
             cum
             citharâ
             Spiritus
             sancti
             dicunt
             :
             Quasi
             pannus
             menstruatae
             ,
             omnes
             iustitiae
             nostrae
             sunt
             .
             
               Ex
               libro
               Canonum
               Cottoniano
               ,
               titulorum
            
             66.
             
          
           
             c
             Abstinentia
             corporalium
             ciborum
             sine
             charitate
             inutilis
             est
             .
             Meliores
             ergo
             sunt
             ,
             qui
             non
             magnoperè
             ieiunant
             ,
             nec
             supra
             modum
             à
             creaturâ
             Dei
             abstinent
             ,
             cor
             intrinsccùs
             nitidum
             coram
             Domino
             sollicitè
             servantes
             ,
             à
             quo
             sciunt
             exitum
             vitae
             :
             quàm
             illi
             qui
             carnem
             non
             edunt
             ,
             nec
             prandiis
             secularibus
             delectantur
             ,
             neque
             vehiculis
             &
             equis
             vehuntur
             ,
             pro
             his
             quasi
             superiores
             caeteris
             se
             putantes
             ;
             quibus
             mors
             intravit
             per
             fenestras
             clationis
             .
             
               Gildas
               ,
               ibid.
            
             
          
        
         
           Notes for div A14233-e17460
           
             a
             Haber
             vineam
             ,
             universam
             scilicèt
             Eccl●siam
             ;
             quae
             ab
             Abel
             iusto
             usque
             adul●mum
             e●ectum
             qui
             in
             ●●ne
             mundi
             na●●riturus
             est
             ,
             quot
             sanctos
             prouilit
             ,
             quasi
             tot
             palmites
             mis●t
             .
             
               Claud.
               lib.
               ●
               in
               Matth.
            
             
          
           
             b
             Congregatio
             quippe
             iustorum
             ,
             regum
             ●●lorum
             dicitur
             ;
             quod
             est
             Ecclesia
             in●●●rum
             
               Id.
               lib.
               3.
               in
               Matth.
            
             
          
           
             c
             Ecclesiae
             filii
             sunt
             omnes
             ab
             institutione
             generis
             humani
             usque
             nu●c
             ,
             quotquet
             iusti
             &
             sancti
             esse
             pomerunt
             .
             
               Id.
               lib.
               2.
               in
               Matth.
            
             
          
           
             d
             His
             &
             caeteris
             instruimur
             ,
             tam
             Apostol●s
             omnesque
             credentes
             ,
             quàm
             ipsam
             quoque
             Ecclesiam
             ,
             coluamnam
             in
             Scripturis
             appellari
             ;
             &
             nihil
             interesse
             de
             corpore
             quid
             dicatur
             in
             membris
             ,
             cùm
             &
             corpu●
             dividatur
             in
             membra
             ,
             &
             membra
             fint
             corpori●
             .
             
               Id.
               in
               Gal.
            
             2.
             
             ●●
             Hitro●ymo
             .
          
           
             e
             Ecclesias
             vocat
             ,
             quas
             post●à
             errore
             arguit
             depravatas
             .
             Ex
             quo
             noscendum
             ,
             dupliciter
             Ecclesiam
             posse
             dici
             :
             &
             cam
             ,
             quae
             non
             habeat
             maculam
             aut
             rugam
             ,
             &
             verè
             corpus
             Christi
             sit
             ;
             &
             eam
             quae
             in
             Christi
             nomine
             absque
             plenis
             perfectisque
             virtutibus
             congregetur
             .
             
               Id.
               in
               Galat.
               1.
               ex
               eodem
               .
            
          
           
             f
             Ecclesiam
             non
             habituram
             maculam
             neque
             rugam
             dicitur
             ,
             respectu
             futurae
             vitae
             .
             
               Sc●ul
               in
               Ephes.
            
             1.
             
          
           
             g
             Magnam
             domum
             non
             Ecclesiam
             dicit
             (
             ut
             quidam
             putant
             )
             quae
             non
             habet
             maculam
             neque
             rugam
             :
             sed
             mundum
             ,
             in
             quo
             z●zauia
             sunt
             mixta
             tritico
             .
             
               Id.
               in
               .
               2.
               
               Tim.
            
             2.
             
          
           
             h
             Sancta
             Ecclesia
             decem
             Virginibus
             similis
             denuntiatur
             :
             in
             quâ
             quia
             mali
             cum
             bonis
             &
             reprobi
             cum
             electis
             admixtisunt
             ,
             rectè
             similis
             virginibus
             prudentibus
             &
             fatuis
             esse
             perhibetur
             .
             
               Claud.
               lib.
               3
               ▪
               in
               Matth.
               
            
          
           
             i
             Perhas
             regis
             nuptias
             praesens
             Ecclesia
             designatur
             ;
             in
             quâ
             cum
             bonis
             &
             mali
             conveniunt
             .
             
               Id.
               lib.
               eod
            
             .
          
           
             k
             In
             h●c
             ergo
             Ecclesiâ
             ,
             nec
             mali
             esse
             sine
             bo●is
             ,
             nec
             boni
             esse
             sine
             malis
             possunt
             :
             quos
             tamen
             sancta
             Ecclesia
             &
             nunc
             indiscretè
             suscipit
             ,
             &
             postmodum
             in
             egressione
             discernit
             .
             
               Id.
               ibid.
            
             
          
           
             l
             Exceptis
             paucia
             ,
             &
             valdè
             ,
             paucis
             ,
             qui
             (
             ob
             amissioné
             .
             tan●ae
             multitudinis
             ,
             quae
             quotidiè
             p●ona
             ruit
             ad
             tartara
             )
             tam
             brevis
             numeri
             habentur
             ;
             ut
             ●os
             quodammodò
             venerabilis
             mater
             Ecclesia
             in
             suo
             sinu
             recumber●es
             non
             videat
             ,
             quos
             solos
             veros
             filios
             habet
             .
             
               Gild.
               epist.
            
             
          
           
             m
             Nonnunquam
             Ecclesia
             ●ntis
             gentilium
             pressuris
             ,
             non
             solùm
             aftlicta
             ,
             sed
             &
             faedata
             est
             ;
             ut
             ,
             si
             fieri
             possit
             ,
             redemptor
             ipsius
             cam
             prorsus
             de●eruisse
             ad
             tempus
             videretur
             .
             
               Claud.
               lib.
               2.
               in
               Matth.
            
             
          
           
             n
             Ecclesia
             non
             apparebit
             ,
             impiis
             tunc
             persecutoribus
             ultra
             modum
             saevientibus
             .
             
               Id.
               lib.
               3.
               in
               Matth.
            
             
          
           
             o
             Temporibus
             Antichristi
             non
             solum
             tormenta
             crebtiora
             &
             acerbiora
             ,
             quàm
             priùs
             consueverant
             ,
             ingerenda
             sunt
             fidelibus
             ;
             sed
             (
             quod
             gravius
             est
             )
             signorum
             quoque
             operatio
             eos
             qui
             tormenta
             ingerunt
             ,
             comitabitur
             :
             tests
             Apostolo
             ,
             qui
             ait
             ;
             Cujus
             est
             adventus
             secundùm
             operationem
             Satanae
             ,
             in
             omni
             seductiorie
             ,
             signis
             ,
             &
             prodiglis
             mendacii
             .
             
               Id.
               lib.
               c●d
            
             .
          
           
             p
             Praestiglosis
             :
             sicut
             antè
             praedictum
             est
             ;
             Dabunt
             signa
             ,
             ita
             ut
             seducantur
             ,
             si
             fieri
             potest
             ,
             etiam
             electi
             .
             per
             phantasticam
             virtutem
             :
             ficut
             Iamnes
             &
             Mambres
             coram
             Pharaone
             ●ecerunt
             .
             Sedul
             .
             in
             ●
             Thes.
             2.
             
          
           
             q
             Quis
             ergo
             ad
             fidem
             convertitur
             incredulus
             ?
             cujus
             jam
             credentis
             non
             pavet
             &
             concutitur
             fides
             ?
             quando
             persecut●r
             pietatis
             fit
             etiam
             operator
             virtutis
             :
             idemque
             ipse
             qui
             tormentis
             〈◊〉
             ut
             Christus
             negetur
             ,
             provocat
             miraculis
             ut
             Antichristo
             〈◊〉
             .
             
               Claud.
               lib.
               3.
               in
               Matth.
            
             
          
           
             r
             Quàm
             ergo
             mundo
             &
             simplici
             oculo
             opus
             est
             ,
             ut
             inveniatur
             via
             sapientiae
             ,
             cui
             tantae
             malorum
             &
             perversorum
             hominum
             deceptiones
             erroresque
             obstrepunt
             ?
             quas
             omnes
             necesse
             est
             evadere
             ,
             hoc
             est
             ,
             venire
             ad
             certissimam
             pacem
             ,
             &
             immobilem
             stabilitatem
             sapientiae
             .
             
               Id.
               lib.
               1.
               in
               Matth.
            
             
          
           
             s
             Nec
             si
             se
             Angelus
             nobis
             ostendat
             ,
             ad
             seducendos
             nos
             subornatus
             fallaciis
             patris
             sui
             Diaboli
             ,
             praevalere
             debebit
             adversum
             nos
             :
             neque
             si
             virtus
             ab
             aliquo
             facta
             siet
             ,
             sicut
             dicitur
             à
             Simone
             Mago
             in
             aäre
             volâsse
             .
             
               Sedul
               .
               in
               Rom.
            
             8.
             
          
           
             t
             Neque
             signa
             vos
             terreant
             ,
             tanquam
             per
             Spiritum
             facta
             :
             quia
             hoc
             &
             Salvator
             praemonuit
             .
             
               Id.
               in
               2
               Thess.
            
             2.
             
          
           
             u
             Hic
             ostenditur
             ,
             crescente
             fide
             signa
             cessare
             :
             quando
             fidelium
             causâ
             danda
             esse
             praedicantur
             .
             
               Id.
               in
               1
               Corinth
            
             .
             14.
             
          
           
             x
             Vnde
             nunc
             cùm
             fidelium
             numerositas
             excrevit
             ,
             intra
             sanctam
             Ecclesiam
             multi
             sunt
             qui
             vitam
             virtutum
             tenent
             ,
             &
             signa
             virtutum
             non
             habent
             :
             quia
             frustrà
             miraculum
             foris
             ostenditur
             ,
             si
             deest
             quod
             intùs
             operetur
             .
             Nam
             iuxta
             Magistri
             Gentium
             vocem
             :
             Linguae
             in
             signum
             sunt
             ,
             non
             fidelibus
             sed
             in
             fidelibus
             .
             
               Claud.
               lib.
               1
               in
               Matth.
            
             
          
           
             y
             Qualia
             propter
             infideles
             cùm
             fecerit
             Dominus
             ,
             monuit
             tamen
             ne
             talibus
             decipiamur
             ,
             arbitran●es
             ibi
             esse
             invisibilem
             sapientiam
             ,
             ubi
             miraculum
             visibile
             viderimus
             .
             Adiungit
             ergo
             &
             dicit
             ,
             Multi
             dicent
             mihi
             in
             illâ
             die
             ,
             Domine
             ,
             Domine
             :
             〈◊〉
             in
             nomine
             tuo
             prophetavimus
             ,
             &
             in
             tuo
             nomine
             daemonia
             eiecimus
             ,
             &
             in
             tuo
             nomine
             virtutes
             multas
             fecimus
             ?
             
               Id.
               lib.
               eod
            
             .
          
           
             z
             Ille
             Deum
             tentat
             ,
             qui
             iactantiae
             suae
             vitio
             ,
             superfluam
             &
             inutilem
             vult
             ostentare
             virtutem
             .
             Quid
             e●im
             utilitatis
             habet
             ,
             quid
             commodi
             confert
             ,
             si
             praeceps
             hin●
             in
             plana
             descendero
             ?
             
               &c.
               Id.
               lib.
               eod
            
             .
          
           
             a
             Inane
             est
             enim
             omne
             miraculum
             ,
             quod
             utilitatem
             saluti
             non
             operatur
             humanae
             .
             Ibid.
             
          
           
             b
             Amphiloch
             ▪
             in
             l
             ●
             ambis
             ad
             Sel●●●●um
             .
          
           
             c
             Cogitos
             .
             Vit.
             Brigid
             .
             in
             exemplaribus
             MS
             
             o.
             antiquiss
             .
             Bibliothec
             Cottonianae
             ,
             &
             Ecclesiae
             Sarisburiensis
             .
          
           
             d
             Tom.
             5.
             
             Antiqu
             .
             lection
             .
             in
             lacunâ
             ,
             sub
             ●●nem
             ,
             pag.
             629.
             
          
           
             e
             Fundamenta
             .
             ]
             Christum
             ,
             &
             Apostolos
             ,
             &
             Prophetas
             .
             
               Sedul
               .
               in
               Hebr.
            
             11.
             
          
           
             f
             Compertum
             est
             in
             petrâ
             vel
             lapide
             Christum
             esse
             significatum
             .
             
               Id.
               in
               Rom.
            
             9.
             
          
           
             g
             Apostoli
             fundamentum
             sunt
             ,
             vel
             Christus
             fundamentum
             est
             Apostolorum
             .
             Christus
             est
             fundamentum
             ,
             qui
             etiam
             lapis
             dicitur
             angularis
             ,
             duos
             conjungens
             &
             continens
             parietes
             .
             Ideò
             hic
             fundamentum
             &
             summus
             est
             lapis
             ;
             quia
             in
             ipso
             &
             fundatur
             ,
             &
             consummatur
             Ecclesia
             .
             
               Id.
               in
               Ephes.
            
             2.
             
          
           
             h
             Vt
             ministros
             Christi
             :
             non
             ut
             fundamentum
             .
             
               Id.
               in
               1
               Cor.
            
             4.
             
          
           
             i
             Super
             hanc
             petram
             aedificabo
             ecclesiam
             meam
             ,
             id
             est
             ,
             super
             Dominū
             salvatorem
             ,
             qui
             fideli
             suo
             cognitori
             ,
             amatori
             ,
             confessori
             ,
             participium
             sui
             nominis
             donavit
             ,
             ut
             scilicet
             à
             petrâ
             Petrus
             vocaretur
             .
             Aedificatur
             Ecclesia
             :
             quia
             non
             nisi
             per
             fidem
             &
             dilectionem
             Christi
             ,
             per
             susceptionem
             sacramentorum
             Christi
             ,
             per
             observantiam
             mandatorum
             Christi
             ,
             ad
             sortem
             .
             electorum
             &
             aeternam
             pertingitur
             vitam
             ,
             Apostolo
             attestante
             qui
             ai●
             ;
             Fundamentum
             enim
             aliud
             nemo
             potest
             ponere
             praeter
             id
             quod
             positum
             est
             ,
             qui
             est
             Christus
             Iesus
             .
             
               Claud.
               lib.
               2.
               in
               Matth.
            
             
          
           
             k
             Pettum
             solum
             nominat
             ,
             &
             sibi
             comparat
             :
             quia
             primatum
             ipse
             accepit
             ad
             fundandam
             Ecclesiam
             :
             se
             quoque
             pari
             modo
             electum
             ,
             ut
             primatum
             habeat
             in
             fundandis
             Gentium
             Ecclesiis
             .
             
               Id.
               in
               Galat.
            
             2.
             
          
           
             l
             Id.
             in
             Galat.
             5.
             
          
           
             m
             Id.
             in
             Galat.
             2.
             
          
           
             n
             Ab
             his
             itaque
             probatum
             dicit
             donum
             quod
             accepit
             à
             Deo
             ,
             ut
             dignus
             essect
             habere
             primatum
             in
             praedicatione
             Gentium
             ,
             sicut
             &
             habebat
             Petrus
             in
             praedicatione
             Circumcisionis
             .
             
               Id.
               in
               Gal.
            
             2.
             
          
           
             o
             Gratiam
             sibi
             soli
             primus
             vendicat
             concessam
             à
             Deo
             ,
             sicut
             &
             soli
             Petro
             concessa
             est
             inter
             Apostolos
             .
             
               Id.
               ibid.
            
             
          
           
             p
             Non
             illi
             sum
             inferior
             ;
             quia
             ab
             uno
             sumus
             ambo
             in
             unum
             ministerium
             ordinati
             .
             
               Id.
               ibid.
            
             
          
           
             q
             Apostolum
             se
             Christi
             titulo
             praenotavit
             ,
             ut
             ex
             ipsâ
             lecturos
             nominis
             auctoritate
             terreret
             ;
             judicans
             omnes
             ,
             qui
             in
             Christo
             crederent
             ,
             debere
             sibi
             esse
             subjectos
             .
             
               Id.
               in
               Gal.
            
             1.
             
          
           
             r
             Nam
             sicut
             interrogatis
             generaliter
             omnibus
             ,
             Petrus
             respondit
             unus
             pro
             omnibus
             :
             ita
             quod
             Petro
             Dominus
             respondit
             ,
             in
             Petro
             omnibus
             respondit
             .
             
               Id.
               lib.
               2.
               in
               Matth.
            
             
          
           
             s
             Quae
             solvendi
             ac
             ligandi
             potestas
             ,
             quamvis
             soli
             Petro
             data
             videatur
             à
             Domino
             ;
             absque
             ullâ
             tamen
             dubietate
             noscendum
             est
             ,
             quia
             &
             caeteris
             Apostolis
             datur
             :
             ipso
             teste
             ,
             qui
             post
             passionis
             resurrectionisque
             suae
             triumphum
             apparens
             eis
             insufflavit
             ,
             &
             dixit
             omnibus
             :
             Accipite
             Spiritum
             sanctum
             ,
             quorum
             remiscritis
             peccata
             ,
             remittuntur
             eis
             ,
             &
             quorum
             retinueritis
             ,
             rerenta
             sunt
             .
             
               Id.
               lib.
               eod
            
             .
          
           
             t
             Vero
             sacerdoti
             dicitur
             :
             Tu
             es
             Petrus
             ,
             &
             super
             hanc
             petram
             aedificabo
             ecclesiam
             meam
             .
             
               Gild.
               epist.
            
             
          
           
             u
             Petro
             ejusque
             successoribus
             dicit
             Dominus
             :
             Et
             tibi
             dabo
             claves
             regni
             coelorum
             .
             Ibid.
             
          
           
             x
             Itemque
             omni
             sancto
             sacerdoti
             promittitur
             :
             Et
             quaecunque
             solveris
             super
             terram
             ,
             erunt
             soluta
             &
             in
             coelo
             ;
             &
             quaecunque
             ligaveris
             super
             terram
             ,
             erunt
             ligata
             &
             in
             coelo
             .
             Ibid.
             
          
           
             y
             Apostolicam
             sedem
             legitimè
             obtinent
             .
             Ibid.
             
          
           
             z
             Si
             hunc
             vos
             Apostoli
             retinetis
             in
             omnibus
             affectum
             ;
             ejus
             quoque
             cathedrae
             legitimè
             insidere
             noscatis
             .
             Ibid.
             
          
           
             a
             Sedem
             Petri
             Apostoli
             immundis
             pedibus
             usurpantes
             ;
             sed
             merito
             cupiditatis
             in
             Iudae
             traditoris
             pestilentem
             cathedram
             decidentes
             .
             Ibid.
             
          
           
             b
             Iudam
             quedam
             modo
             in
             Petri
             cathedrâ
             Domini
             traditorem
             statuunt
             .
             Ibid.
             
          
           
             c
             Super
             ipsos
             Ecclesiae
             fit
             positum
             fundamentum
             .
             
               Claud.
               in
               Gal.
            
             2.
             
          
           
             d
             Constans
             in
             Dei
             timore
             ,
             &
             fide
             immobilis
             ,
             super
             quem
             aedificatur
             ut
             Petrum
             Ecclesia
             :
             cujusque
             Apostolatum
             à
             Deo
             sortitus
             est
             ,
             &
             inferni
             porta
             adversus
             eum
             non
             praevalebunt
             .
             
               Hymn
               in
               laud.
               S.
               Patricij
            
             .
          
           
             e
             Christus
             illum
             sibi
             elegit
             in
             terris
             Vicarium
             .
             Ibid.
             
          
           
             f
             Brianus
             rex
             Hiberniae
             ,
             Parasceve
             Paschae
             ,
             sextâ
             feriâ
             ,
             IX
             .
             Calend.
             Maii
             ,
             manibus
             &
             mente
             ad
             Deum
             intentus
             necatur
             .
             
               Marian
               .
               Scot.
               See
               Caradoc
               of
               Lhancarran
               ,
               in
               the
               Chronicle
               of
               Wales
               ,
               pag.
            
             80.
             
          
           
             g
             Sanctus
             Patricius
             iens
             ad
             coelum
             ,
             mandavit
             totum
             fructum
             laboris
             sui
             (
             tam
             baptismi
             ,
             tam
             causarum
             quàm
             eleemosynarum
             )
             deserendum
             esse
             Apostolicae
             Vrbi
             ,
             quae
             Scoticè
             nominatur
             Arddmacha
             .
             Sic
             repperi
             in
             Bibliothecis
             Scotorum
             .
             Ego
             scripsi
             ,
             id
             est
             ,
             Calvus
             Perennis
             ,
             in
             conspectu
             Briani
             Imperatoris
             Scotorum
             .
             
               Ex.
               Vet.
               Cod.
               Ecclesiae
               Armachanae
            
             .
          
           
             h
             Domino
             semper
             suo
             ,
             &
             Apostolico
             Patri
             ,
             Desiderio
             Papae
             ,
             
               Gallus
               peccator
            
             .
          
           
             i
             Cogitos
             .
             in
             vit
             .
             Brigid
             .
             tom
             .
             5.
             antiqu
             .
             lect
             .
             Henr.
             Canisii
             ,
             pag.
             625.
             lin
             ult
             .
          
           
             k
             Ibid.
             pag.
             640.
             lin
             .
             2.
             
          
        
         
           Notes for div A14233-e20050
           
             a
             Edm.
             Camp.
             History
             of
             Ireland
             .
             lib.
             2.
             ca.
             2.
             
          
           
             b
             Pallio
             decoravit
             ,
             illique
             vices
             suas
             committens
             atque
             legatum
             suum
             constituens
             ,
             quaecunque
             in
             Hiberniâ
             gesserat
             ,
             constituerat
             ,
             disposuerat
             ,
             auctoritatis
             suae
             munimine
             confirmavit
             .
             
               Iocelin
               .
               vit
               .
               Patric
               .
               cap.
            
             166.
             
          
           
             c
             Metropoliticae
             sedi
             deerat
             adhuc
             ,
             &
             defuerat
             ab
             initio
             pallii
             usus
             .
             
               Bernard
               .
               vit
               .
               Malach
            
             .
          
           
             d
             Anno
             1151.
             
             Papa
             Eugenius
             quatuor
             pallia
             per
             legatum
             suum
             Iohannem
             Papirum
             transmisit
             in
             Hiberniam
             ,
             quò
             nunquam
             anteà
             pallium
             delatum
             fuerat
             .
             
               Annal.
               Coenobij
               Melros
               .
               MS.
               in
               Bibliothecâ
               Cottonianâ
               .
            
          
           
             e
             Apud
             Ardmacham
             sibi
             sedem
             elegit
             ;
             quam
             etiam
             quasi
             metropolim
             constituit
             &
             proprium
             totius
             Hiberniae
             primatiae
             locum
             .
             
               Girald
               .
               Cambr.
               Topograph
               .
               Hibern
               .
               distinct
               .
               3.
               cap.
            
             16.
             
          
           
             f
             Archiepiscopi
             verò
             in
             Hiberniâ
             nulli
             fuerant
             ;
             sed
             tantùm
             se
             Episcopi
             invicem
             consecrabant
             :
             donec
             Iohannes
             Papyrio
             Romanae
             sedis
             legatus
             ,
             non
             multis
             retrò
             annis
             advenit
             .
             Hic
             quatuor
             pallia
             in
             Hiberniam
             portavit
             ,
             
               &c.
               Ibid.
               cap.
            
             17.
             
          
           
             g
             Hic
             primus
             Archiepiscopus
             dicitur
             ,
             quia
             primo
             pallio
             usus
             est
             .
             Alii
             verò
             ante
             ipsum
             solo
             nomine
             Archiepiscopi
             &
             Primates
             vocabantur
             ;
             ob
             reverentiam
             &
             honorem
             Sancti
             Patricii
             ,
             tanquam
             Apostoli
             illius
             gentis
             .
             
               Pembrigius
               ,
               author
               .
               Annal.
               Hibern
               .
               à
               Guil.
               Camden●
               edit
               .
               Thomas
               Casaeus
               in
               Chronic.
               Hi●ern
               .
               MS.
               ad
               ann
               .
            
             1174.
             
          
           
             h
             Episcopi
             quoque
             (
             qui
             debent
             esse
             forma
             &
             exemplum
             aliis
             Canonicae
             religionis
             )
             inordinatè
             ,
             sicut
             audivimus
             ,
             aut
             à
             solis
             Episcopis
             ,
             aut
             in
             locis
             ubi
             ordinari
             non
             debent
             ,
             consecrantur
             .
             
               Anselm
               .
               lib.
               3.
               epist.
            
             142.
             
          
           
             i
             Dicitur
             ,
             ab
             uno
             Episcopo
             Episcopum
             ,
             sicut
             quemlibet
             presbyterum
             ,
             ordinari
             .
             
               Id.
               ibid.
               epist.
            
             147.
             
          
           
             k
             Terdeluacho
             inelyto
             Regi
             Hiberniae
             ,
             Archiepiscopis
             ,
             Episcopis
             ,
             Abbatibus
             ,
             Proceribus
             ,
             omnibusque
             Christianis
             Hiberniam
             inhabitantibus
             .
             Gregor
             .
             VII
             .
             
               epist.
               ad
               Hibern
               .
               MS.
               in
               Bibitothecâ
               Cotton
               .
            
          
           
             l
             Ecclesias
             sundauit
             CCCLXV
             .
             Ordinavit
             Episcopos
             eodem
             numero
             CCCLXV
             .
             Presbyteros
             autem
             usque
             ad
             tria
             millia
             ordinavit
             .
             
               Nenn.
               histor
               .
               Brit.
               MS.
            
             
          
           
             m
             Mutabantur
             &
             multiplicabantur
             Episcopi
             pro
             libitu
             metropolitani
             ;
             ita
             ut
             unus
             Episcopatus
             uno
             non
             esset
             contentus
             ,
             sed
             singulae
             penè
             Ecclesiae
             singulos
             haberent
             Episcopos
             .
             
               Bernard
               .
               vit
               .
               Malach.
            
             
          
           
             n
             Quòd
             in
             villis
             ,
             vel
             civitatibus
             plures
             ordinantur
             .
             
               Lanfranc
               .
               epist.
               ad
               Terdeluachum
               regem
               Hibern
               .
               apud
               Baron
               .
               ann
               .
               1089.
               num
               .
            
             16.
             
          
           
             o
             Dicitur
             ,
             Episcopos
             in
             terrâ
             vestrâ
             passim
             eligi
             ,
             &
             sine
             certo
             Episcopatus
             loco
             constitui
             .
             
               Anselm
               .
               lib.
               3.
               epist.
               147.
               ad
               Muriardachum
               regem
               Hibern
               .
            
          
           
             p
             Rex
             Engus
             &
             S.
             Patricius
             ,
             cum
             omni
             populo
             ,
             ordinaverunt
             Archiepiscopassm
             Mumeniae
             in
             civitare
             &
             in
             sede
             sancti
             Albei
             ,
             qui
             tunc
             ab
             eisdem
             Archiepiscopus
             ordinatus
             est
             ,
             per
             seculum
             .
             
               Ex
               vitâ
               S.
               Declani
            
             .
             Rex
             Engus
             &
             Patricius
             ordinaverunt
             ;
             ut
             in
             civitate
             &
             cathedrâ
             sancti
             Albei
             e●●et
             Archiepiscopatus
             omnium
             Memonensium
             semper
             ,
             
               Ex
               vitâ
               S.
               Albei
            
             .
          
           
             q
             Factâ
             Synodo
             magnâ
             in
             terrâ
             Laginensium
             ,
             decrevit
             rex
             Brandubh
             ,
             &
             tam
             laici
             quàm
             clerici
             ,
             ut
             Archiepiscopatus
             omnium
             Laginensium
             semper
             esset
             in
             sede
             &
             cathedrâ
             sancti
             Moedog
             .
             Et
             tunc
             sanctus
             Moedog
             à
             multis
             catholicis
             consecratus
             est
             Archiepiscopus
             .
             
               Ex
               vit
               .
               S.
               Edani
            
             .
             A
             rege
             jam
             Laginensium
             Brandubh
             filio
             Eathach
             constitutum
             est
             ,
             ut
             Archiepiscopatus
             Laginensium
             in
             civitate
             sancti
             Moedog
             esset
             .
             Ipsa
             civitas
             vocatur
             Ferna
             ,
             quae
             est
             in
             terrâ
             gentis
             Kenselach
             .
             
               Ex
               vit
               .
               S.
               Molyng
            
             .
          
           
             r
             Erat
             &
             altera
             Metropolitica
             sedes
             ,
             quem
             de
             novo
             constituerat
             Celsus
             ,
             primae
             tamen
             sedi
             &
             illius
             Archiepiscopo
             subdita
             tanquam
             primati
             .
             
               Bernard
               .
               in
               vitâ
               Malachiae
            
             .
          
           
             s
             Illo
             defuncto
             ,
             Rex
             Calomagnus
             ,
             &
             eius
             Palatinorum
             chorus
             cum
             suis
             subaulicis
             ,
             totiusque
             regionis
             illius
             confluentiâ
             ,
             pari
             cordis
             affectu
             conclamaverunt
             ,
             sanctum
             Sacerdotem
             Livinum
             in
             honorem
             huius
             ordinis
             dignissimè
             sublimandum
             fore
             .
             His
             Rex
             omnibus
             devotior
             consentiens
             ,
             ter
             quaterque
             bearum
             virum
             in
             cathedrâ
             Archiepiscopatus
             debito
             honore
             ,
             Domino
             jubente
             ,
             collocavit
             .
             
               Bonifat
               .
               Vit.
               Livin
            
             .
          
           
             t
             Rex
             Ecgfridus
             Episcopum
             fecit
             ordinari
             Lindisfarnensium
             ecclesiae
             virum
             sanctum
             &
             venerabilem
             Cudbertum
             .
             
               Bed.
               lib.
               4.
               hist.
               cap.
               27.
               
               &
               Vit.
               Cuthbert
               .
               cap.
            
             24.
             
          
           
             u
             Episcopatum
             Salzburgensem
             ,
             pro
             debito
             regiae
             magnificentiae
             ,
             sancto
             concessit
             Virgilio
             .
             
               Vit.
               Episc.
               Saluburgensaom
               .
               2.
               
               Antiqu.
               lect
               .
               Henr.
               Canis
               .
               pag.
               259.
               &
               tom
               .
               6.
               pag.
            
             1174.
             
          
           
             x
             Walafrid
             .
             Strab.
             Vit.
             Gall.
             lib.
             1.
             cap.
             16
             ,
             17
             ,
             19
             ,
             20.
             
          
           
             y
             Theodor
             .
             Compidonens
             .
             v●lquicunque
             author
             fuit
             vitae
             Magni
             .
             lib.
             1.
             cap.
             8.
             edit
             .
             Goldesti
             ,
             10.
             
             Canisii
             .
          
           
             *
             In
             the
             Lawes
             of
             Howel
             Dhae
             it
             is
             named
             
               Ecclesia
               Teilau
            
             :
             and
             so
             in
             Caradot
             of
             Lhancarvans
             Chronicle
             of
             Wales
             ,
             pag.
             94.
             
             Ioseph
             is
             called
             Bishop
             of
             Teilo
             ,
             or
             Landaff
             .
          
           
             z
             Super
             omnes
             Britannos
             dextralis
             partis
             Britanniae
             B.
             Dubticium
             summum
             Doctorem
             ,
             à
             Rege
             &
             ab
             omni
             parochiâ
             electum
             Archiepiscopum
             ,
             consecraverunt
             .
             Hâc
             dignitate
             ei
             à
             Germano
             &
             Lupo
             datâ
             ;
             constituerunt
             ei
             Episcopalem
             sedem
             concessu
             Mourici
             Regis
             ,
             Principum
             ,
             Cleri
             &
             populi
             ,
             apud
             Podium
             Lantavi
             .
             
               Lib.
               Ecclesiae
               Landavensis
               ,
               MS.
            
             
          
           
             a
             Electione
             Cleri
             &
             populi
             succedit
             in
             episcopatu
             Landavensis
             Ecclesiae
             .
             electione
             cleri
             Mercguini
             &
             Elgoreti
             &
             Gunnuini
             magistri
             ;
             &
             trium
             Abbatum
             ,
             Catgen
             abbatis
             ●●duti
             ,
             Concenn
             abbatis
             Catmaili
             ,
             Cetnig
             abbatis
             Docguinni
             ;
             laicorum
             ,
             Regis
             Mourici
             ,
             &
             filiorum
             Athruis
             &
             Idnerth
             ,
             Guidgen
             &
             Cetiau
             ,
             Brogmail
             ,
             Gendoc
             ,
             Louhonerd
             ,
             Catgualatyr
             ,
             &
             omnium
             principum
             totius
             parochiae
             .
             Missus
             est
             S.
             Oudoceus
             cum
             clericis
             suis
             praedictis
             (
             Merchui
             &
             Elguoret
             &
             Gunubui
             )
             cum
             legatis
             trium
             Abbatum
             &
             Regis
             &
             Principum
             ,
             ad
             Dorobornensem
             civitatem
             ad
             beatum
             Archiepiscopum
             ;
             ubi
             sacratus
             est
             ecclesiae
             Landaviae
             in
             honore
             S.
             Petri
             fundatae
             .
             Ibid.
             
          
           
             b
             DCCCCLXXXII
             .
             (
             vel
             DCCCLXXII
             .
             potius
             )
             lucarnationis
             Domini
             anno
             ,
             Gucaunus
             episcopus
             Landaviae
             confecratus
             à
             metropolitano
             Du●stano
             Dorobornensis
             ecclesiae
             archiepiscopo
             ,
             datâ
             sibi
             virgâ
             pastorali
             in
             regali
             curià
             à
             summo
             Rege
             Anglorum
             AE●garo
             .
             Ibid.
             
          
           
             c
             DCCCCLXXXIII
             .
             anno
             ,
             electione
             factà
             regum
             Morcannuc
             ,
             Ouein
             videlicèt
             &
             Idguallaun
             ,
             Catell
             &
             Cinuin
             filiorum
             Morcantheu
             ,
             Rotri
             &
             Crifud
             filiorum
             Elired
             ,
             &
             totius
             Cleri
             &
             populi
             Morcannuc
             infra
             hortum
             Taratir
             in
             Gui
             &
             hortum
             Tivi
             positi
             :
             &
             dato
             sibi
             baculo
             in
             regali
             curiâ
             à
             summo
             Rege
             Anglorum
             Adelredo
             ,
             &
             à
             metropolitano
             Dorobornensis
             Ecclesiae
             Albrico
             archiepiscopo
             ,
             Bledri
             episcopus
             Landaviae
             consecratus
             est
             ;
             &
             1022.
             o●
             .
             anno
             Incarnationis
             Domini
             ,
             ordinationis
             suae
             autem
             39
             o.
             anno
             ,
             migravit
             ad
             Dominum
             .
             Ibid.
             
          
           
             d
             MXXII
             .
             anno
             Incarnationis
             Domini
             ,
             consecratus
             est
             Ioseph
             episcopus
             Landaviae
             ,
             Cantuariae
             à
             metropolitano
             Dorobornensis
             ecclesiae
             Aelnod
             archiepiscopo
             ,
             in
             Kalendis
             Ostobris
             ,
             &
             in
             primo
             (
             vel
             XVI●
             .
             potiùs
             )
             anno
             Cycli
             decennovennalis
             ,
             verbo
             Regis
             Anglorum
             Cout
             ,
             &
             dato
             sibi
             baculo
             in
             Curiâ
             illius
             :
             electione
             populi
             &
             cleri
             Landaviae
             ,
             &
             Regum
             Britanniae
             ,
             regis
             videlicèt
             Riderch
             regnantis
             per
             totam
             Gualiam
             tune
             tempore
             ,
             &
             Hivel
             subreguli
             regis
             Moreannuc
             infra
             hortum
             Taratir
             in
             Gui
             &
             hortum
             Tivi
             regnantis
             .
             Ibid.
             
          
           
             f
             Edm.
             Campion
             .
             Histor.
             Hibern
             .
             lib.
             1.
             cap.
             ult●
             ad
             annum
             948.
             
          
           
             g
             Girald
             .
             Cambrens
             .
             Topograph
             .
             Hiber●
             .
             distinct
             .
             3.
             cap.
             43.
             
          
           
             h
             Eodem
             tempore
             Norwagenses
             sive
             Ostmanni
             ,
             qui
             civitates
             Hiberniae
             &
             maritima
             occupaverunt
             ,
             Normanni
             vocati
             sunt
             .
             
               Annal.
               Dublin
               .
               ad
               ann
            
             .
             1095.
             
          
           
             i
             Dominus
             Iohannes
             Papiron
             legatus
             Romanae
             Ecclesiae
             veniens
             in
             Hiberniam
             ,
             invenit
             Dublin
             Episcopum
             habentem
             ,
             qui
             tantum
             intra
             muros
             Episcoplae
             officium
             exercebat
             .
             
               Testimon
               .
               Tuamens
               .
               archiepisc
               .
               in
               Registro
               Dublin
               .
               archiepisc
               .
               &
               nigro
               libro
               Ecclesia
               S.
               Trinitatis
               .
            
          
           
             k
             Ad
             regimen
             Dublinensis
             Ecclesiae
             Lanfrancus
             archiepiscopus
             Cantuariae
             ,
             petente
             Goderico
             rege
             ,
             Dubliniensis
             Ecclesiae
             populo
             &
             clero
             consentientibus
             &
             eligentibus
             ,
             in
             Ecclesiâ
             sancti
             Pauli
             Londin
             .
             Patricium
             sacravit
             Antistitem
             .
             
               Annul
               .
               Dublin
               .
               ad
               annum
            
             1074.
             
          
           
             l
             Habentur
             apud
             Baron
             .
             ann
             .
             1089.
             num
             .
             12.
             
             &
             15.
             
          
           
             m
             Anno
             Dom.
             1085.
             
             Laufrancus
             Archiepiscopus
             Cantuar.
             ad
             regimen
             Dublinensis
             Ecclesiae
             sacravit
             Donatum
             monasterii
             sui
             monachum
             in
             sede
             metropoli
             Cantuar.
             petentibus
             atque
             eligentibus
             eum
             Terdeluaco
             Hiberniae
             rege
             ,
             &
             episcopis
             Hiberniae
             regionis
             ,
             atque
             clero
             &
             populo
             praefarae
             civitatis
             .
             
               Annal.
               Dublin
            
             .
          
           
             n
             A
             Rege
             Hiberniae
             ,
             Murierdach
             nomine
             ,
             ●ecnon
             à
             clero
             &
             populo
             in
             Episcopatum
             psius
             civitatis
             electus
             est
             ;
             atque
             ad
             Anselmum
             ,
             iuxta
             morem
             antiquum
             ,
             sacrandus
             cum
             communi
             decreto
             directus
             .
             
               Fadmer
               .
               Histor.
               Nevor
               .
               lib.
               2.
               pag.
            
             34.
             
          
           
             o
             Ibid.
             pag.
             36.
             
          
           
             p
             Nos
             &
             Rex
             noster
             Murcherta●bus
             ,
             &
             Episcopus
             Dofnaldus
             ,
             &
             Dermeth
             Dux
             noster
             frater
             Regi●
             ,
             elegimus
             hunc
             Presbyterum
             Malchum
             ,
             Walkelini
             Wintoniensis
             Episcopi
             monachum
             ,
             nobis
             sufficientissimè
             cognitum
             ,
             &c.
             
          
           
             *
             Vt
             apud
             Graecos
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ,
             non
             est
             semper
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ,
             qu●madmodum
             ad
             Iliad
             .
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             notatum
             est
             ab
             Eustathi●
             (
             pag.
             884
             &
             831.
             edit
             .
             Roman
             .
             )
             sed
             aliquando
             respondet
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             ita
             &
             vox
             Mando
             ,
             apud
             Latinos
             mediae
             aetatis
             scriptores
             .
             ut
             apud
             Vincentium
             ,
             verbi
             gratiâ
             ,
             lib.
             30.
             
             Specul
             .
             Historical
             .
             cap.
             130
             (
             
               humiliter
               ei
               mandaverunt
            
             .
             )
             &
             hoc
             in
             loco
             .
          
           
             q
             Sciatls
             vos
             reverâ
             ,
             quòd
             Episcopi
             Hiberniae
             maximum
             zelum
             erga
             nos
             habent
             ,
             &
             maximè
             ille
             Episcopus
             qui
             habitat
             Ardimachae
             :
             quia
             nos
             nolumus
             obedire
             eorum
             ordinationi
             ,
             sed
             semper
             sub
             vestro
             dominio
             esse
             volumus
             .
             
               MS.
               ad
               calcem
               collectionis
               Is●dori
               Mercatoris
               ,
               in
               Bibliothecâ
               Cottonianâ
               .
            
          
           
             r
             
               Charta
               S.
               Patricii
            
             ,
             in
             Gulielmi
             Mal●esburiensis
             libello
             ,
             de
             Antiquitate
             Glastoniensis
             Ecclesiae
             .
             MS.
             
          
           
             s
             In
             scriptis
             recentioribus
             inveni
             ,
             quòd
             sancti
             Phaganus
             &
             Deruvianus
             perquifierant
             ab
             Eleutherio
             Papâ
             ,
             qui
             eos
             miserat
             ,
             X.
             (
             al.
             XXX
             .
             )
             annos
             indulgentiae
             .
             Et
             ego
             frater
             Patricius
             à
             piae
             memoriae
             Celestino
             Papâ
             XII
             .
             annos
             tempore
             meo
             acquisivi
             .
             Ibid.
             
          
           
             t
             Patricius
             ai●
             Siquae
             quest●ones
             in
             h●c
             insulâ
             oriantur
             ,
             ad
             sedem
             Apostolicam
             referantur
             .
             
               Vet.
               Collect
               .
               Canonum
               ,
               Bibliothecae
               Cottoniane
               .
            
             cujus
             initium
             :
             Synodicorum
             exemplariorum
             innumerositatē
             conspiciens
             .
          
           
             u
             Quaecunque
             causa
             valdè
             difficilis
             exorta
             suerit
             ,
             atque
             ignota
             cunctis
             Scotorum
             gentium
             judiciis
             ;
             ad
             Cathedram
             Archiepiscopi
             Hibernensium
             (
             id
             est
             ,
             Patricii
             )
             atque
             huius
             antistitis
             examinationem
             rectè
             referenda
             .
             Si
             verò
             in
             illâ
             ,
             cum
             suis
             sapientibus
             ,
             facile
             sana●i
             non
             poterit
             tali
             .
             causa
             〈◊〉
             negotiationis
             :
             ad
             se●●m
             Apostolicam
             decrevimus
             esse
             mittendam
             ;
             id
             est
             ,
             ad
             petri
             Apostoli
             Cathedram
             ,
             auctoritatem
             Romae
             Vrbis
             habentem
             .
             Hi
             sunt
             qui
             de
             hoc
             decreverunt
             :
             id
             est
             ,
             Auxilius
             ,
             Patricius
             ,
             Secundinus
             ,
             Benignus
             ,
             
               Vet.
               Codex
               Ecclesiae
               Armacha●e
            
             .
          
           
             x
             Copping
             .
             〈◊〉
             to
             the
             Catholicks
             of
             Ireland
             ,
             lib.
             2.
             cap.
             3.
             
          
           
             y
             Gregor
             .
             lib.
             2.
             epist.
             36.
             
             Indict
             .
             30.
             
          
           
             z
             Ardentissimo
             studio
             protrium
             capi
             ulorum
             defensione
             ,
             junctis
             animis
             omnes
             qui
             in
             Hiberniâ
             erant
             Episcopi
             ,
             insurrexere
             .
             Addiderunt
             &
             illud
             nefas
             ,
             ut
             cùm
             percepissent
             Romanam
             Ecclesiam
             aequè
             suscepisse
             Trium
             damnationum
             capitulorum
             ,
             atque
             suo
             consensu
             Quintam
             Synodum
             roborâsse
             :
             ab
             eâdem
             pariter
             resilierint
             ,
             atque
             reliquis
             qui
             vel
             in
             Italiâ
             ,
             vel
             in
             Africâ
             ,
             aliisve
             regionibus
             erant
             schismaticis
             inhaeserint
             ;
             fiduciâ
             illâ
             vanâ
             erecti
             ,
             quòd
             pro
             fide
             Catholicâ
             starent
             ,
             cùm
             quae
             essent
             in
             Concilio
             Chalcedonensi
             statuta
             defenderent
             .
             
               Baron
               .
               Annal.
               tom
               .
               7.
               an
               .
               566.
               num
               .
            
             21.
             
          
           
             a
             Sed
             eo
             fixiùs
             inhaerent
             errori
             ,
             cùm
             quaecunque
             Italia
             passa
             sit
             bellorum
             motibus
             ,
             fame
             ,
             vel
             pestilentiâ
             ,
             eâ
             ex
             caussâ
             illi
             cuncta
             infausta
             accidisse
             putarent
             ,
             quòd
             pro
             Quintâ
             Synodo
             adversus
             Chalcedonense
             Concilium
             praelium
             suscepisset
             .
             Ibid.
             
          
           
             b
             Prima
             itaque
             epistolae
             vestrae
             frons
             ,
             gravem
             vos
             pati
             persecutionem
             innotuit
             .
             Quae
             quidem
             persecutio
             dum
             non
             rationabiliter
             sustinetur
             ,
             nequaquam
             proficit
             ad
             salutem
             .
             
               Gregor
               .
               Regest
               .
               lib.
               2.
               epist.
            
             36.
             
          
           
             c
             Dum
             igit●●
             ita
             sit
             ,
             incongruum
             nimis
             est
             de
             eâ
             vos
             ,
             quam
             dicitis
             ,
             persecutione
             gloriari
             ,
             per
             quam
             vos
             constat
             ad
             aeterna
             praemia
             minimè
             provehi
             .
             Ibid.
             
          
           
             d
             Quod
             autem
             scribitis
             ,
             quia
             ex
             illo
             tempore
             inter
             alias
             provincias
             maximè
             flagelletur
             Italia
             ;
             non
             hoc
             ad
             ejus
             debetis
             intorquere
             opprobrium
             :
             quoniam
             scriptum
             est
             ;
             Quem
             diligit
             Dominus
             ,
             castigat
             ,
             flagellat
             autem
             omnem
             filium
             quem
             recipit
             .
             Ibid.
             
          
           
             e
             Porrò
             autem
             si
             post
             hujus
             libri
             lectionem
             in
             eâ
             ,
             quâ
             estis
             ,
             volueritis
             deliberatione
             persistere
             ;
             sine
             dubio
             non
             rationi
             operam
             ,
             sed
             obstinationi
             vos
             dare
             monstratis
             .
             Ibid.
             
          
           
             f
             Vid.
             Roman
             Correct
             .
             in
             Gratian.
             De
             comsecrat
             .
             distinct
             .
             4.
             cap.
             144.
             
             
               Ab
               antiqua
            
             .
          
           
             g
             Quando
             verò
             Doctores
             Ibernici
             de
             gravibus
             fidei
             quaestionibus
             minimè
             consentiebant
             ,
             vel
             aliquid
             novi
             dogmatis
             peregrè
             allati
             audiebant
             ;
             soliti
             erant
             Romanum
             Pontificem
             veritatis
             Oraculum
             consulere
             .
             
               Philip
               Osullevan
               .
               Bearr
               .
               hist.
               Catholic
               .
               Ibern.
               tom
               .
               1.
               lib.
               4.
               cap.
            
             6.
             
          
           
             h
             Namque
             de
             tempore
             agendi
             Paschatis
             solennia
             (
             de
             que
             aliae
             queque
             Catholicae
             gentes
             saepè
             ambegerunt
             )
             &
             de
             Pelagianâ
             haeresi
             ubi
             fuit
             in
             quaestionem
             disputationemque
             deducta
             ;
             Doctores
             Iberni
             ad
             Sedem
             Apostolicam
             retulerunt
             .
             Ac
             ita
             miseri
             Pelagli
             error
             nullum
             in
             Iberniâ
             patronum
             vel
             assertorem
             invenisse
             fertur
             ;
             vel
             insulae
             aditu
             interclusus
             ,
             vel
             ab
             eâ
             protinùs
             explosus
             ,
             ubi
             contagiosam
             faciem
             aperuit
             ,
             seseque
             cognoscendum
             praebuit
             :
             &
             ratio
             communis
             &
             ab
             Ecclesiâ
             usitata
             celebrandi
             redivivi
             Domini
             festum
             ab
             Australibus
             Ibernis
             fuit
             semper
             observata
             ;
             &
             à
             Septentrionalibus
             quoque
             &
             Pictis
             &
             Britonibus
             ,
             qui
             Doctoribus
             Ibernis
             fidem
             acceperunt
             ,
             amplexa
             ,
             ubi
             Ecclesiae
             Romanae
             ritum
             cognoverunt
             .
             Quod
             ex
             Apostolicarum
             literarum
             duplici
             capite
             à
             Bedâ
             relato
             non
             obscurè
             constat
             .
             Ibid.
             
          
           
             i
             Hibernia
             siquidem
             olim
             Pelagianâ
             foedata
             fuerat
             haeresi
             ,
             Apostolicaque
             censurâ
             damnata
             ,
             quae
             nisi
             Romano
             judicio
             solvi
             non
             poterat
             .
             
               Author
               antiqu
               .
               Vit.
               Kilian
            
             .
          
        
         
           Notes for div A14233-e23910
           
             a
             Non
             enim
             Paschae
             diem
             Dominicum
             suo
             tempore
             ,
             sed
             à
             decimaquartâ
             usque
             ad
             vicesimam
             Lunam
             observabant
             .
             Quae
             computatio
             84
             ▪
             annorum
             circulo
             continetur
             .
             
               Bede
               lib.
               2.
               hist.
               cap.
            
             2.
             
          
           
             b
             Porrò
             isti
             secundùm
             decennem
             novemque
             Anatolii
             computatum
             ,
             aut
             potiùs
             juxta
             Sulpicii
             Severini
             regulam
             ,
             qui
             LXXXIV
             .
             annorum
             cursum
             descripsit
             ,
             XIV
             .
             Lunâ
             cum
             Iudaeis
             Paschale
             sacramentum
             celebrant
             :
             cùm
             neutrum
             Ecclesiae
             Romanae
             Pontifices
             ad
             perfectam
             calculi
             rationem
             sequantur
             .
             
               Aldelm
               .
               epist
               ad
               Geruntium
               regem
               &
               Domnonios
               :
               inter
               epistolas
               Bonifacij
               ,
               num
               .
            
             44.
             
          
           
             c
             Bed.
             lib.
             3.
             hist.
             cap.
             3.
             
             &
             25.
             
             Vid.
             Dionysii
             Petavii
             notas
             in
             Epiphan
             .
             pag.
             194.
             195.
             
          
           
             d
             Ad
             veram
             Paschae
             rationem
             nunquam
             pervenire
             eos
             ,
             qui
             cycium
             LXXXIIII
             .
             annorum
             observant
             .
             
               Cumm●an
               .
               epist.
               ad
               Seg●enum
               abbat
               .
               de
               Disputatione
               Lunae
               .
               MS.
               in
               Bibli●thec
               .
               Cottonian
               .
            
          
           
             e
             Exhortans
             ,
             ne
             paucitatem
             suam
             in
             extremis
             terrae
             finibus
             constitutā
             ,
             sapientiorem
             antiquis
             sive
             modernis
             ,
             quae
             per
             Orbem
             terrae
             erant
             ,
             Christi
             Ecclesiis
             aestimarent
             :
             neve
             contra
             Paschales
             computos
             ,
             &
             decreta
             synodalium
             totius
             Orbis
             Pontificum
             aliud
             Pascha
             celebrarent
             .
             
               Bed.
               lib.
               2.
               hist.
               cap.
            
             19.
             
          
           
             *
             S.
             Patrick
             ,
             
               &
               his
               followers
            
             .
          
           
             f
             Bed.
             lib.
             3.
             hist.
             cap.
             5.
             
          
           
             g
             Id.
             lib.
             2.
             cap.
             19.
             
          
           
             h
             Ego
             enim
             primo
             anno
             quo
             cyclus
             DXXXII
             .
             annorum
             à
             nostris
             celebrari
             ors●s
             est
             ;
             non
             suscepi
             ,
             sed
             silui
             ,
             nec
             laudare
             nec
             vituperare
             ausus
             .
             
               Cummian
               .
               epist.
               ad
               Segienum
            
             .
          
           
             i
             Sed
             non
             post
             multum
             surrexit
             quidam
             paries
             dealbatus
             ,
             traditionem
             seniorem
             serva●e
             se
             simulans
             ;
             qui
             utraque
             non
             fecit
             unum
             sed
             divisit
             ,
             &
             irritum
             ex
             parte
             fecit
             quod
             promissum
             est
             :
             quem
             Dominus
             ut
             spero
             ,
             percutiet
             quoquo
             modo
             veluerit
             .
             Ibid.
             
          
           
             k
             Seniores
             verò
             ,
             quos
             in
             velamine
             repulsionis
             habetis
             ,
             quod
             optimum
             in
             diebus
             suis
             esse
             noverunt
             ●impliciter
             &
             fideliter
             sine
             culpa
             contradictionis
             ullius
             &
             animositatis
             observaverunt
             ,
             &
             suis
             posteris
             sic
             mandaverunt
             .
             Ibid.
             
          
           
             n
             Vniversalia
             Ecclesiae
             Catholicae
             unanimem
             regulam
             .
             Ibid.
             
          
           
             o
             Roma
             errat
             ,
             Hierosolyma
             errat
             ,
             Alexandria
             errat
             ,
             Antiochia
             errat
             ,
             totus
             mundus
             errat
             :
             soli
             tantùm
             Scoti
             &
             Britones
             rectum
             sapiunt
             ▪
             Ibid.
             
          
           
             *
             This
             seemeth
             to
             have
             fallen
             out
             ,
             eith
             r●i●
             the
             yeere
             634.
             or
             645.
             wherein
             Easter
             was
             solemnized
             at
             Rome
             the
             24.
             day
             of
             April
             .
             and
             it
             appeareth
             by
             ou●
             Annals
             ,
             that
             Segenius
             was
             abbot
             of
             Y●Columkille
             from
             the
             yeere
             624.
             untill
             652.
             
          
           
             p
             Vidimus
             oculis
             nostris
             puellam
             coecam
             omnine
             ad
             has
             reliqulas
             oculos
             aperientem
             ,
             &
             paralyticum
             ambulantem
             ,
             &
             multa
             daemonia
             ejecta
             .
             Cummian
             .
          
           
             q
             Intellex●rat
             enim
             veraciter
             Oswi
             ,
             quamvis
             educatus
             à
             Scotis
             ,
             quia
             Romana
             esset
             Catholica
             &
             Apostolica
             Ecclesia
             .
             
               Bed.
               lib.
               3.
               hist.
               cap.
            
             29.
             
          
           
             r
             Sed
             cognoscentes
             Britones
             ,
             Sc●ttos
             meliores
             putavimus
             .
             Scottos
             verò
             per
             Daganum
             Episcopum
             in
             hanc
             insulam
             ,
             &
             Columbanum
             Abbatem
             in
             Galliis
             venientem
             ,
             nihil
             discrepare
             〈◊〉
             Britonibus
             in
             eorum
             conversatione
             didici●●m
             .
             Nam
             Daganus
             episcopus
             ad
             nos
             veniens
             ,
             non
             solùm
             cibum
             nobiscum
             ,
             sed
             nec
             in
             eodem
             hospitio
             quo
             vescebamur
             ,
             sumere
             voluit
             ,
             
               Laurent
               .
               epist.
               apud
               Bed.
               lib.
               2.
               cap.
            
             4.
             
          
           
             s
             Qui
             cuius
             meriti
             fuerit
             ,
             etiam
             miraculorm
             signis
             internus
             arbiter
             edocuit
             .
             
               ●ed
               .
               lib.
               3.
               hist.
               cap.
               15.
               item
               .
               16
               ▪
               &
            
             17.
             
          
           
             t
             Nunquid
             reverendissimum
             patrem
             nostrum
             Columbam
             ,
             &
             successores
             ejus
             ,
             viros
             Deo
             dilectos
             ,
             qui
             eodem
             modo
             Pascha
             fecerunt
             ,
             divinis
             paginis
             contraria
             sapuisse
             vel
             egisse
             credendum
             est
             ?
             cùm
             plurimi
             fuerint
             in
             eis
             ,
             quorum
             sanctitati
             coelesti
             signa
             &
             virtutem
             quae
             fecerunt
             miracula
             ,
             testimonium
             praebuerunt
             :
             quos
             ut
             ipse
             sanctos
             esse
             non
             dubitans
             semper
             eorum
             vitam
             ,
             mores
             &
             disciplinam
             sequi
             non
             desisto
             
               Colman
               .
               apud
               .
               Bed.
               lib.
               3.
               hist.
               cap.
            
             29.
             
          
           
             u
             Revelante
             Spiritu
             Sanct●
             prophetavit
             de
             illâ
             quae
             post
             dies
             mult●s
             ob●diversitatem
             Paschalis●
             festi
             ona
             est
             inter
             Sco●iae
             Ecclesias
             discordiâ
             .
             
               Adam●nan
               .
               Vit.
               Columb
               .
               lib.
               1.
               cap.
            
             3.
             
          
           
             x
             Quodam
             tempore
             erat
             magnum
             Concilium
             populorum
             Hiberniae
             in
             Campo
             albo
             :
             inter
             quos
             erat
             contentio
             circa
             ordinē
             Paschae
             .
             Lasre●nus
             enim
             abbas
             monasterii
             Leighlinne
             ,
             cui
             suberant
             mille
             quingenti
             monachi
             ,
             no●um
             ordinem
             defend
             ●●at
             qui
             nuper
             de
             Româ
             venit
             :
             alii
             verò
             veterem
             defendebant
             .
             
               Vit.
               S.
               Munna
               abbatit
               MS.
            
             
          
           
             y
             Obsecremus
             Deum
             ,
             qui
             habi●ate
             fecit
             unanimes
             in
             do●o
             patris
             sui
             ,
             ●t
             ipse
             nobis
             in●●●●●re
             coelestib●s
             signis
             dignetur
             ,
             quae
             sequenda
             traditio
             ,
             quibus
             sit
             vi●●
             ad
             ingressum
             regni
             illius
             properandum
             .
             Adducatur
             aliquis
             aeger
             ;
             &
             per
             cujus
             preces
             fuerit
             curatus
             ,
             hujus
             fides
             &
             operatio
             Deo
             devota
             atque
             omnibus
             sequenda
             ●redatur
             .
             〈◊〉
             ●
             
               lib.
               2.
               hist.
               cap.
            
             2.
             
          
           
             z
             Breviter
             disputemus
             :
             sed
             in
             nomine
             Domini
             agamus
             judicium
             .
             Tres
             optiones
             dantur
             tibi
             ,
             Lasreane
             .
             Duo
             libri
             in
             ignem
             mittentur
             ,
             liber
             veteris
             ordinis
             &
             novi
             ;
             ut
             videamus
             ,
             quis
             eorum
             de
             igne
             liberabitur
             .
             Vel
             duo
             monachi
             ,
             unus
             meus
             alter
             tuus
             ,
             in
             unam
             domum
             recludantur
             ,
             &
             domus
             comburatur
             :
             &
             videbimus
             ,
             quis
             ex
             eis
             evadat
             intactus
             igne
             .
             Aut
             eamus
             ad
             sepulchrum
             mortui
             iusti
             monachi
             ,
             &
             resuscitemus
             eum
             ;
             &
             indicet
             nobis
             ,
             quo
             ordine
             debemus
             hoc
             anno
             Pascha
             celebrare
             .
             
               Vit.
               S.
               Munn●
            
             .
          
           
             a
             Non
             ibimus
             ad
             iudicium
             tuum
             ,
             quoniam
             scimus
             quòd
             ,
             pro
             magnitudine
             laboris
             tui
             &
             sanctitatis
             ,
             si
             diceres
             ut
             mons
             Marge
             commutaretur
             in
             locum
             Campi
             albi
             &
             Campus
             albus
             in
             locum
             montis
             Marge
             ;
             hoc
             propter
             te
             Deu.
             statim
             faceret
             .
             Ibid.
             
          
           
             b
             Bed.
             lib.
             3.
             hist.
             cap.
             26.
             
          
           
             c
             Quodam
             tempore
             in
             diebus
             Colmanni
             Eboracae
             civitatis
             episcopi
             metropolitani
             ,
             regantibus
             Oswi
             &
             Alhfrido
             filio
             eius
             ,
             Abbates
             &
             Presbyteri
             omnesque
             Ecclesiasticae
             disciplinae
             gradus
             simul
             in
             unum
             convenientes
             ,
             in
             coenobio
             quae
             Streaneshel
             dicitur
             ;
             praesente
             sanctimoniale
             matre
             piissimâ
             Hilde
             ,
             praesentibus
             quoque
             Regibus
             &
             duobus
             Colmanno
             &
             Aegilberhto
             Episcopis
             ,
             de
             Paschali
             ratione
             conquirebant
             ,
             quid
             esset
             rectissimum
             .
             utrum
             more
             Brittonum
             &
             Scottorum
             omnisque
             Aquilonalis
             partis
             à
             XIIII
             .
             Lunâ
             Dominicâ
             die
             veniente
             usque
             ad
             XXII
             .
             (
             leg
             XX.
             )
             Pascha
             agendum
             ;
             an
             melius
             sit
             ratione
             Sedis
             Apostolicae
             ,
             à
             XV.
             Lunâ
             usque
             XXI
             .
             Paschalem
             Dominicam
             celebrandam
             .
             Tempus
             datum
             est
             Colman●o
             episcopo
             primum
             ,
             ut
             dignum
             erat
             ,
             audientibus
             cunctis
             reddere
             rationem
             .
             Ille
             autem
             intrepidâ
             mente
             responden●
             ,
             dixit
             .
             Patres
             nostri
             &
             antecessores
             eorum
             manifestè
             Spiritu
             sancto
             inspirati
             ,
             ut
             erat
             Columcille
             ,
             XIIII
             .
             Lunâ
             die
             Dominicâ
             Pascha
             celebrandum
             sanxerunt
             :
             exemplum
             tenentes
             Iohannis
             Apostoli
             &
             Evangelistae
             ,
             qui
             supra
             pectus
             Domini
             in
             Coenâ
             recubuit
             ,
             &
             amator
             Domini
             dicebatur
             .
             Ille
             XIIII
             .
             Lunâ
             Pascha
             celebravit
             ;
             &
             nos
             ,
             sicut
             discipuli
             eius
             Polycarpus
             &
             alii
             ,
             celebramus
             :
             nec
             hoc
             audemus
             pro
             patribus
             (
             ●ort
             .
             partibus
             )
             nostris
             ,
             nec
             volumus
             mutare
             .
             
               Stephanus
               presbyter
               (
               qui
               &
               Ae●di
               ,
               apud
               B●dam
               ,
               lib.
               4.
               hist.
               cap.
            
             2.
             )
             
               in
               Vitâ
               wilfrid
               .
               cap.
               10.
               
               MS.
               in
               Bibliothecâ
               Sarisburiensis
               Ecclesiae
               ,
               &
               D.
               Roberti
               Cottoni
               .
            
          
           
             d
             Pascha
             hoc
             quod
             agere
             soleo
             ,
             à
             maioribus
             meis
             accepi
             ,
             qui
             me
             huc
             Episcopum
             miserunt
             :
             quod
             omnes
             patres
             nostri
             viri
             Deo
             dilecti
             eodem
             modo
             celebrâsse
             noscuntur
             .
             Quod
             ne
             cui
             contemnendum
             &
             reprobandum
             esse
             videatur
             :
             ipsum
             est
             quod
             beatus
             Iohannes
             Evangelista
             ,
             discipulus
             specialiter
             Domino
             dilectus
             ,
             cum
             omnibus
             quibus
             prae
             erat
             Ecclesiis
             ,
             celebrâsse
             legitur
             .
             
               Colman
               .
               apud
               Bedam
               ,
               lib.
               3.
               hist.
               cap.
            
             23.
             
          
           
             e
             F●idegod
             .
             Vit.
             Wilfrid
             .
             MS
             in
             Bibliothec.
             Cottonian
             .
          
           
             *
             i.
             Sancti
             vel
             Beati
             .
          
           
             f
             Cum
             quibus
             de
             duabus
             ultimi●
             Oceani
             insulis
             ,
             his
             non
             totis
             ,
             contra
             totum
             Orbem
             stulto
             labore
             pugnant
             .
             
               Wilfrid
               .
               apud
               Bed.
               lib.
               3.
               cap.
            
             25.
             
          
           
             g
             Et
             si
             sanctus
             erat
             aut
             potens
             virtutibus
             ●lle
             Columba
             vester
             ,
             imo
             &
             noster
             si
             Christi
             erat
             :
             num
             praeferri
             potuit
             beatissimo
             Apostolorum
             principi
             ?
             cui
             Dominus
             ●it
             :
             Tu
             es
             Petrus
             ,
             &
             super
             hanc
             petram
             aedificabo
             Ecclesiam
             meā
             ,
             &
             portae
             inferi
             non
             praevalebunt
             adversus
             eam
             ;
             Et
             tibi
             dabo
             claves
             ●egni
             coelorum
             .
             Ibid.
             
          
           
             h
             Nefortè
             me
             adveni●nte
             ad
             fores
             regni
             coelorum
             ,
             non
             sit
             qui
             reseret
             ,
             averso
             illo
             qui
             claves
             tenere
             probatur
             .
             Ibid.
             
          
           
             i
             Tonsuram
             &
             Paschae
             rationem
             propter
             timorem
             patriae
             suae
             contempsit
             .
             
               Steph.
               presbyter
               ,
               in
               Vit.
               Wilfrid
               .
               cap.
            
             10.
             
          
           
             k
             Colman
             videns
             spretam
             suam
             doctrinam
             ,
             sectamque
             esse
             despectam
             ;
             assumptis
             his
             qui
             se
             sequi
             voluerunt
             ,
             id
             est
             ,
             qui
             Pascha
             catholicum
             &
             tonsuram
             coronae
             (
             nam
             &
             de
             hoc
             quaestio
             non
             minima
             erat
             )
             recipere
             nolebant
             ,
             in
             Scotiam
             regressus
             est
             .
             
               Bed.
               lib.
               3.
               hist.
               cap.
               26.
               
               Vide
               etiam
               lib.
               4.
               cap.
            
             4.
             
          
        
         
           Notes for div A14233-e26970
           
             a
             Paschalem
             rationem
             ,
             quam
             schismatici
             Britanniae
             &
             Hiberniae
             non●cognoverunt
             ;
             &
             alias
             multas
             Ecclesiasticae
             disciplinae
             regulas
             Bonifacius
             archidiaconus
             quasi
             proprio
             filio
             suo
             diligenter
             dictavit
             .
             
               Step
               ▪
               Presb.
               vit
               .
               Wilfrid
               .
               cap.
               5.
               
               See
               also
               Bede
               ,
               lib.
               5.
               cap.
            
             20.
             
          
           
             b
             Se
             primum
             fuisse
             ,
             qui
             verum
             Pascha
             in
             Northanimbriâ
             Scotis
             eiectis
             docuerit
             ,
             qui
             cantus
             Ecclesiasticos
             antiphonatim
             instituerit
             ,
             qui
             sanctissimi
             Bendicti
             regulam
             à
             monachis
             observari
             jusserit
             .
             
               Gulielm
               .
               Malmesbur
               .
               lib.
               3.
               de
               gest
               .
               Pontific
               .
               Angl.
               
            
          
           
             c
             Sed
             perstitit
             ille
             negare
             ;
             ne
             ab
             Episcopis
             Scottis
             ,
             vel
             ab
             iis
             quos
             Scotti
             ordinaverant
             ,
             consecrationem
             susciperet
             ,
             quorum
             communionem
             sedes
             aspernaretur
             Apostolica
             .
             
               Id.
               ibid.
            
             
          
           
             d
             O
             Domini
             venerabiles
             Reges
             ;
             omnibus
             modis
             nobis
             necessarium
             est
             providè
             considerare
             ,
             quomodo
             cum
             electione
             vestrâ
             ,
             sine
             accusatione
             catholicorum
             vitorum
             ,
             ad
             granum
             Episcopalem
             cum
             Dei
             adiutorio
             venire
             valeam
             .
             Sunt
             enim
             hîc
             in
             Brytannia
             multi
             episcopi
             ,
             quorū
             nullum
             meum
             est
             accusare
             ,
             quamvis
             veraciter
             sciam
             ,
             quòd
             aut
             quatuordecim
             anni
             sunt
             ,
             ut
             Brytones
             &
             Scotti
             ab
             illis
             sunt
             ordinati
             ,
             quos
             nec
             Apostolica
             sedes
             in
             communionem
             recepit
             ,
             neque
             eos
             qui
             schismaticis
             consentiunt
             ,
             Et
             ideò
             in
             meâ
             humilitate
             à
             vobis
             posco
             ,
             ut
             me
             mittatis
             cum
             vestro
             praefidio
             trans
             mare
             ad
             Galliarum
             regionem
             ,
             ubi
             catholici
             episcopi
             multi
             habentur
             :
             ut
             sine
             controversiâ
             Apostolicae
             sedis
             ,
             licèt
             indignus
             ,
             gradum
             Episcopalem
             merear
             accipere
             .
             
               Steph.
               Presb.
               Vit.
               Wilfrid
               .
               cap.
            
             12.
             
          
           
             e
             Quo
             ultra
             mare
             moras
             nectente
             ,
             Oswius
             Rex
             ,
             praeventus
             consiliis
             Quartadecimanorum
             (
             qui
             vocabantur
             ita
             ,
             quia
             Pascha
             in
             quartadecima
             Lunâ
             cum
             Iudaeis
             celebrabant
             )
             Ceddam
             virum
             sanctissimum
             ,
             tamen
             contra
             regulas
             ,
             intrusit
             tribunali
             Eborac●nsi
             .
             
               Gulielm
               .
               Malmesb.
               lib.
               3.
               de
               gest
               .
               Pontif.
               Angl.
               
            
          
           
             f
             Ordinantes
             servum
             Dei
             religiosissimum
             &
             admirabilem
             Doctorem
             ,
             de
             Hiberniâ
             insulâ
             venientem
             nomine
             Coeodda
             ,
             adhuc
             eo
             ignorante
             ,
             in
             sedem
             Episcopalem
             Euroicae
             civitatis
             indoctè
             contra
             canones
             constituerunt
             .
             
               Steph.
               presb
               .
               Vit.
               Wilfrid
               ▪
               cap.
            
             14.
             
          
           
             g
             Ab
             illo
             est
             consecratus
             antistes
             ,
             assumptis
             in
             societatem
             ordinationis
             duobus
             de
             Britonum
             gente
             Episcopis
             ,
             qui
             Dominicum
             Paschae
             diem
             secus
             morem
             canonicum
             à
             XIIII
             .
             usque
             ad
             XXI
             .
             Lunam
             celebrant
             .
             Non
             enim
             erat
             tunc
             ullus
             ,
             excepto
             illo
             Wini
             ,
             in
             totâ
             Brittanniâ
             canonicè
             ordinatus
             episcopus
             .
             
               Bed.
               lib.
               3.
               hist.
               ca.
            
             28.
             
          
           
             h
             Cum
             illis
             autem
             qui
             ab
             unitate
             catholicae
             pacis
             ,
             vel
             Pascha
             non
             suo
             tempore
             celebrando
             ,
             vel
             perversè
             vivendo
             aberrant
             ,
             vobis
             sit
             nulla
             communio
             ,
             
               &c.
               
               Id.
               in
               Vit.
               Cuthbert
               .
               cap.
            
             39.
             
          
           
             i
             
               J●stitutio
               dicit
               Rom.
            
             Cavendum
             est
             ne
             ad
             alias
             provincias
             aut
             ecclesias
             referantur
             causae
             ,
             quae
             alio
             more
             &
             aliâ
             religione
             utantur
             :
             sive
             ad
             Iudaeos
             ,
             qui
             umbrae
             legis
             magis
             quàm
             veritati
             deserviunt
             ;
             aut
             Britones
             ,
             qui
             omnibus
             contratii
             sunt
             ,
             &
             à
             Romano
             more
             &
             ab
             unitate
             Ecclesiae
             se
             absciderunt
             ;
             aut
             Haereticos
             ,
             quamvis
             sint
             in
             Ecclesiasticis
             causis
             docti
             ,
             &
             studiosi
             fuerint
             ,
             
               Ex
               Codice
               Canonum
               Cottoniano
               ,
               titulorum
            
             66.
             
          
           
             k
             Qui
             ordinati
             sunt
             à
             Scottorum
             vel
             Brittannorum
             Episcopis
             ,
             qui
             in
             Paschâ
             vel
             Tonsurâ
             Catholicae
             non
             sunt
             adunati
             Ecclesiae
             ;
             iterùm
             à
             Catholico
             Episcopo
             manus
             impositione
             confirmentur
             Similiter
             &
             Ecclesiae
             quae
             ab
             illis
             Episcopis
             ordinantur
             ,
             aquâ
             exorcizatâ
             aspergantur
             ,
             &
             aliquâ
             collectione
             confirmentur
             .
             Licentiam
             quoque
             non
             habemus
             eis
             poscentibus
             Chrismam
             vel
             Eucharistiam
             dare
             ,
             ni
             antè
             confessi
             fuerint
             velle
             se
             nobiscum
             esse
             in
             unitate
             Ecclesiae
             .
             Et
             qui
             ex
             horum
             similiter
             gente
             ,
             vel
             quacunque
             ,
             de
             baptismo
             suo
             dubitaverint
             ,
             baptizentur
             .
             
               Decret
               Pontific
               .
               MS.
               cap.
            
             9.
             
             De
             communicatione
             Scottorum
             &
             Brittonum
             ,
             qui
             in
             Paschâ
             &
             Tonsurâ
             catholici
             non
             sunt
             .
          
           
             l
             Bed.
             lib.
             2.
             hist.
             cap.
             4.
             
          
           
             *
             Septem
             Britonum
             Episcopi
             ,
             &
             plures
             viri
             doctissimi
             ,
             maximè
             de
             nobilissimo
             eorum
             monasterio
             ,
             quod
             vocatur
             linguâ
             Anglorum
             Bancornaburg
             ,
             cui
             Dinoot
             abbas
             praefuisse
             narratur
             .
             
               Bed.
               lib.
               2.
               hist.
               cap.
            
             2.
             
          
           
             m
             Illi
             nihil
             horum
             se
             facturos
             ,
             neque
             illum
             pro
             Archiepiscopo
             habituros
             e●se
             respondebant
             .
             
               Id
               ●bid
            
             .
             Tam
             ipsum
             quàm
             ejus
             statuta
             ,
             statim
             reversi
             spreverunt
             :
             nec
             ipsum
             pro
             Archiepiscopo
             se
             habituros
             publicè
             proclamabant
             .
             
               Girald
               .
               Cambrens
               .
               ●tinerar
               .
               Cambriae
               ,
               lib.
               2.
               cap.
            
             1.
             
          
           
             n
             In
             a
             Welsh
             Manuscript
             ,
             sometime
             belonging
             unto
             
               P.
               Mostein
            
             Gentleman
             .
          
           
             o
             A●ctorizabant
             suas
             ceremonias
             non
             solùm
             à
             sancto
             Eleutherio
             Papâ
             primo
             institutore
             suo
             ab
             ipsâ
             penè
             infantiâ
             Ecclesiae
             dicatas
             ,
             ve●ùm
             à
             sanctis
             patribus
             suis
             Dei
             amicis
             &
             Apostolorum
             sequacibus
             hactenùs
             observatas
             ;
             quas
             non
             deberent
             mutare
             propter
             novos
             dogmatistas
             .
             
               Gotcel●
               .
               monachus
               ,
               in
               vitâ
               Augustini
               ,
               cap.
               32.
               
               MS.
               in
               Bibliothecâ
               Cottonianâ
               .
            
          
           
             p
             Si
             quilibet
             de
             nostris
             ,
             id
             est
             ,
             Catholicis
             ad
             eos
             habi●andi
             gratiâ
             perrexerint
             ;
             non
             priùs
             ad
             consortium
             sodalitatis
             suae
             adsciscere
             dignantur
             ,
             quàm
             quadraginta
             dierum
             spatia
             in
             poenitendo
             peragere
             compellantur
             .
             
               Aldhelm
               .
               epist.
               ad
               Domnonios
            
             .
          
           
             q
             Quippe
             cùm
             usque
             hodie
             moris
             sit
             Britonum
             ,
             fidē
             religionemque
             Anglorum
             pro
             nihilo
             habere
             ,
             neque
             in
             aliquo
             eis
             magis
             communicare
             quàm
             paganis
             .
             
               Bed.
               lib.
               2.
               hist.
               cap.
            
             20.
             
          
           
             *
             Chronicle
             of
             Wales
             ,
             pag.
             254.
             
          
           
             r
             Baptist.
             Mantuan
             .
             Fastor
             .
             lib.
             1.
             
          
           
             s
             Quòd
             autem
             Pascha
             non
             suo
             tempore
             observabat
             ,
             vel
             canonicum
             ejus
             tempus
             ignorans
             ,
             vel
             suae
             gentis
             auctoritate
             ,
             ne
             agnitum
             sequeretur
             ,
             devictus
             ;
             non
             approbo
             nec
             laudo
             .
             
               Bed.
               lib.
               3.
               hist.
               cap.
            
             17.
             
          
           
             t
             More
             suae
             gentis
             .
             
               Ibid.
               cap.
            
             3.
             
          
           
             u
             Pascha
             contra
             morem
             eorum
             qui
             ipsum
             miserant
             ,
             facere
             non
             potuit
             .
             
               Ibid.
               cap.
            
             25.
             
          
           
             x
             Id.
             ibid.
             
          
           
             y
             Colmanus
             qui
             de
             Scotiâ
             erat
             Episcopus
             ,
             relinquens
             Britanniam
             ,
             tulit
             secum
             omnes
             quos
             in
             Lindisfarorum
             insulâ
             congregaverat
             Scotos
             .
             
               Bede
               lib.
               4.
               cap.
            
             4.
             
          
           
             z
             Optione
             datâ
             ,
             maluerunt
             loco
             cedere
             ,
             quàm
             Pascha
             catholicum
             ,
             caeterosque
             ritus
             canonicos
             juxta
             Romanae
             &
             Apostolicae
             Ecclesiae
             consuetudinem
             recipere
             .
             
               Id.
               lib.
               5.
               cap.
               20.
               
               See
               also
               lib.
               3.
               cap.
               25.
               where
            
             Humpum
             is
             ●●sprinted
             for
             Hripum
             .
          
           
             a
             Ibid
             cap.
             16.
             
             &
             22.
             
          
           
             b
             Nec
             mora
             ,
             quae
             dixerat
             ,
             regiâ
             autoritate
             perfecit
             .
             Statim
             namque
             jussu
             publico
             mittebantur
             ad
             transcribendum
             ,
             discendum
             ,
             observandum
             per
             universus
             Pictorum
             provincias
             circuli
             Paschae
             decennovennales
             ;
             obliteratis
             per
             omnia
             erroneis
             octoginta
             &
             quatuor
             annorum
             circulis
             .
             Attondehantur
             omnes
             in
             coronam
             ministri
             altaris
             ac
             monachi
             .
             
               &c.
               Ibid.
               ca.
            
             22.
             
          
           
             c
             Id.
             lib.
             3.
             ca.
             4.
             &
             lib.
             5.
             cap.
             23.
             
          
           
             d
             Id.
             lib.
             5.
             cap.
             23.
             
             &
             24.
             
          
           
             e
             See
             the
             Chronicle
             of
             Wales
             ,
             pag.
             17.
             18.
             and
             Humfr.
             I.
             buyd
             .
             fragment
             .
             Britan
             .
             Descript.
             fol.
             55.
             b.
             
          
           
             f
             Ego
             Nennius
             sancti
             Elbodi
             discipulus
             ,
             aliqua
             excerpta
             scribere
             curavi
             .
             
               Nem.
               MS.
               in
               publicá
               Cantabrig
               .
               academ
               .
               Bibliothecá
               ,
               ubi
               alia
               exemplaria
               habent
               :
               Ego
            
             Nennius
             (
             vel
             Ninnius
             )
             Elvodugi
             discipulus
             .
          
           
             g
             Ab
             adventu
             Patricii
             in
             jam
             dictam
             insulam
             (
             
               Hiberniam
               sc.
            
             )
             usque
             ad
             cyclum
             decennovennalem
             in
             quo
             sumu●
             ,
             22.
             sunt
             cycli
             ,
             id
             est
             ,
             421.
             &
             sunt
             duo
             anni
             in
             Ogdoade
             usque
             in
             hunc
             annum
             .
             Id.
             
          
           
             h
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             Tom.
             8.
             
             Chrysost.
             edit
             .
             Henr.
             Savil.
             pag.
             321.
             60
             &
             in
             Noels
             .
             col
             .
             ●66
             .
             5.
             
          
           
             i
             〈◊〉
             lib.
             2.
             hist.
             cap.
             ●
             .
          
           
             k
             Ann.
             Dom.
             612.
             (
             vel
             613.
             )
             Bellum
             Cairelegion
             ,
             ubi
             Sancti
             occisi
             sunt
             .
             
               Amlt.
               Vlton
               .
               MS.
            
             
          
           
             l
             Bed.
             lib.
             3.
             hist.
             cap.
             3.
             
             &
             6.
             
          
           
             m
             Ibid.
             cap.
             21.
             22.
             24.
             
          
           
             n
             Ibid.
             cap.
             3.
             5.
             17.
             25.
             26.
             
          
           
             o
             Ibid.
             cap.
             22.
             25.
             
          
           
             p
             Ibid
             cap.
             21.
             24.
             
          
           
             q
             Paucitas
             enim
             Sacerdotum
             cogebat
             unum
             antistitem
             duobus
             populis
             praefici
             .
             
               Ibid.
               cap.
            
             21.
             
          
           
             r
             Ibid.
             cap.
             3.
             4.
             5.
             17.
             26.
             
          
           
             s
             Etsi
             Pascha
             contra
             morem
             eorum
             qui
             ipsum
             miserant
             ,
             facere
             non
             potuit
             ;
             opera
             tamen
             fidei
             ,
             pietatis
             &
             dilectionis
             ,
             juxta
             morem
             omnibus
             sanctis
             consuetum
             diligenter
             exequi
             curavit
             .
             Vnde
             ab
             omnibus
             etiam
             his
             qui
             de
             Pascha
             aliter
             sentiebant
             ,
             meritò
             diligebatur
             :
             nec
             solùm
             à
             mediocribus
             ,
             verùm
             ,
             ab
             ipsis
             quoque
             episcopis
             ,
             Honorio
             Cantua●●orum
             &
             Felice
             Orientalium
             Anglorum
             ,
             venerationi
             habitus
             est
             .
             
               Ibid.
               cap.
            
             25.
             
          
           
             t
             Dominis
             charissimis
             fratribus
             ,
             Episcopis
             vel
             Abbatious
             per
             universam
             Scotiam
             ;
             Laurentius
             ,
             Mellitus
             ,
             &
             Iustus
             Episcopi
             ,
             servi
             servorum
             Dei
             
               Id
               lib.
               2
               cap.
            
             4.
             
          
           
             u
             Gens
             quanquam
             absque
             reliquatum
             gentium
             legibus
             ;
             tamen
             in
             Christiani
             vigoris
             dogmate
             florens
             ,
             omnium
             vicinarum
             gentium
             fidem
             praepollet
             .
             
               Ion.
               Vit.
               Columban
               .
               cap.
            
             1.
             
          
        
         
           Notes for div A14233-e30780
           
             c
             Allen.
             Answer
             to
             the
             Execution
             of
             Iustice
             in
             England
             .
             pag.
             140.
             
          
           
             d
             Cum
             juri
             suo
             renuntiare
             liberum
             fit
             cuilibet
             (
             quanquam
             subjectionis
             cujuslibet
             hactenus
             immunes
             )
             his
             tamen
             hodiè
             nostris
             diebus
             ,
             Anglorum
             Regi
             Henrico
             secundo
             omnes
             Hiberniae
             principes
             firmis
             fidei
             sacramentique
             vinculis
             se
             sponte
             submiserunt
             .
             
               Girald
               .
               Cambrens
               .
               Hibern
               expug●at
               .
               lib.
               3.
               cap.
            
             7.
             
          
           
             e
             Iudg.
             11.
             26.
             
          
           
             f
             Genebrard
             .
             Chr●●graph
             .
             lib.
             3.
             in
             Sylvest
             .
             1.
             
             Bellarmin
             .
             de
             Roman
             .
             Pontif.
             lib.
             5.
             cap.
             9.
             in
             fine
             .
          
           
             g
             Insulas
             omnes
             sibi
             speciall
             quodam
             iure
             vendicat
             .
             
               Girald
               .
               Cambr.
               Hibern
               .
               expugnat
               .
               lib.
            
             ●
             .
             cap.
             3.
             
          
           
             h
             Nos
             hanc
             alim
             quaesturam
             aliquot
             per
             a●not
             gessimus
             ;
             eiusque
             muneris
             obeundi
             caussâ
             ,
             primùm
             in
             Angliam
             venitnus
             .
             
               Poly
               〈◊〉
               Vergil
               .
               Anglic.
               bis●●
               .
               lib.
            
             4.
             
          
           
             i
             Id
             Hiberni
             posse
             fieri
             ,
             nisi
             autoritate
             Romani
             Pontificis
             negabant
             ;
             quòd
             iam
             indè
             ab
             initio
             ,
             post
             Christianam
             religionem
             acceptam
             ,
             sese
             ac
             omnia
             sua
             in
             eius
             ditionem
             dedidissent
             :
             atque
             constanter
             affirmabant
             ,
             non
             alium
             habere
             se
             Dominum
             ,
             praeter
             ipsum
             Pontificem
             :
             id
             quod
             etiam
             nunc
             iactitant
             ,
             
               Id.
               lib.
               13.
               eiusa
               .
               histor
               .
            
          
           
             k
             Camp.
             History
             of
             Ireland
             .
             lib.
             2.
             cap.
             1.
             
          
           
             l
             Hiberni
             initio
             statim
             post
             Christianam
             religionem
             acceptam
             ,
             sesuaque
             omni●
             in
             Pontificis
             Romani
             ditionem
             dederant
             ;
             nec
             quenquam
             alium
             supremum
             Hiberniae
             Principem
             ad
             illud
             usque
             tempus
             praeter
             unum
             Romanum
             pontificem
             agnoverunt
             ,
             
               Sander
               de
               schism
               .
               Anglican
               .
               lib.
               1.
               ad
               ann
               .
            
             1542.
             
          
           
             m
             Sanè
             omnes
             Insulas
             ,
             quibus
             Sol
             iustitiae
             Christus
             illuxit
             ,
             &
             quae
             documenta
             fidei
             Christianae
             susceperunt
             ,
             ad
             ius
             S.
             Petri
             &
             sacrosanctae
             Romanae
             Ecclesiae
             (
             quod
             tua
             etiam
             Nobilitas
             recognoscit
             )
             non
             est
             dubium
             pertinete
             .
             Bull-Adrian
             .
             IV.
             
               ad
               Henr.
            
             II.
             
               Angl.
               reg
            
             .
          
           
             n
             Ad
             preces
             meas
             illustri
             Regi
             Anglorum
             Henrico
             secundo
             concessit
             &
             dedit
             Hiberniam
             iure
             haereditario
             possidendam
             :
             sicut
             literae
             ipsius
             testantur
             in
             hodiernum
             diem
             .
             Nam
             omnes
             insulae
             ,
             de
             iure
             antiquo
             ,
             ex
             donatione
             Constantini
             ,
             qui
             eam
             fundavit
             &
             dotavit
             ,
             dicuntur
             ad
             Romanam
             Ecclesiam
             pertinere
             .
             
               Iohan.
               Sarisburiens
               .
               Metalogie
               .
               lib.
               4.
               cap.
            
             42.
             
          
           
             o
             Per
             nostram
             Imperialem
             iussionem
             sacram
             ,
             tam
             in
             Oriente
             quàm
             in
             Occidente
             ,
             vel
             etiam
             septentrionali
             &
             meridianâ
             plagâ
             ,
             videlicèt
             in
             Iudaeâ
             ,
             Graeciâ
             ,
             Asiâ
             ,
             Thraciâ
             ,
             Aphricâ
             &
             Italiâ
             ,
             vel
             diversis
             Insulis
             nostrâ
             largitate
             eis
             libertatem
             concessimus
             :
             eâ
             prorsus
             ratione
             ,
             ut
             per
             manus
             beatissimi
             patris
             nostri
             Sylvestri
             Pontificis
             successorumque
             eius
             omnia
             disponantur
             .
             
               Edict
               .
               Constantin
            
             .
          
           
             p
             Vltra
             Occanum
             verò
             quid
             erat
             praeter
             Britanniam
             ?
             Quae
             à
             vobis
             ita
             recuperata
             est
             ;
             ut
             illae
             quoque
             nationes
             terminis
             eiusdem
             insulae
             cohaerentes
             vestris
             nutibus
             obsequantur
             .
             
               Eumen
               .
               Panegyric
               .
               ad
               Constant.
               
            
          
           
             q
             Pomp.
             Laet.
             in
             Roman
             .
             histor
             .
             Compend
             .
             Io.
             Cuspian
             .
             in
             Caesarib
             .
             Seb.
             Mu●ster
             .
             in
             lib.
             2.
             
             Cosmograph
             .
          
           
             r
             Harding
             .
             Clhronic
             .
             cap.
             241.
             
          
           
             s
             Ibid.
             cap.
             132
             ▪
             
          
           
             t
             Osullevan
             .
             Histor
             .
             Catholic
             .
             Iberniae
             ,
             tom
             .
             2.
             lib.
             1.
             cap.
             7.
             
          
           
             u
             Ibid.
             cap.
             4.
             5.
             9.
             
             &
             lib.
             2.
             cap.
             3.
             
          
           
             x
             Illius
             terrae
             populus
             te
             recipiat
             ,
             &
             sicut
             Dominum
             veneretur
             .
             
               Bull.
               Adrian
               .
               IV.
            
             
          
           
             y
             Sicut
             Dominum
             veneretur
             ,
             id
             est
             ,
             ut
             Principem
             dignum
             magno
             honore
             ;
             non
             Dominum
             Iberniae
             ,
             sed
             praefectum
             caussâ
             colligendi
             tributi
             Ecclesiastici
             .
             
               Osullevan
               .
               Hist.
               Ibern
               .
               fol.
               59.
               b.
               in
               margine
               .
            
          
           
             z
             Robert.
             de
             Monte.
             Roger.
             de
             Wendover
             .
             Matth.
             Paris
             .
             &
             Nicol.
             Trivett
             in
             Chronic.
             an
             .
             1155.
             
          
           
             a
             Venerabilis
             Adriani
             Papae
             vestigiis
             inhaerentes
             ,
             vestrique
             desiderii
             fructum
             attendentes
             ;
             concessionem
             eiusdem
             super
             Hibernici
             regni
             dominio
             vobis
             indulto
             (
             salvâ
             Beato
             Petro
             &
             sacrosanctae
             Ecclesiae
             Romanae
             ,
             sicut
             in
             Angliâ
             Sic
             in
             Hiberniâ
             de
             singulis
             domibus
             annuâ
             unius
             denarii
             pensione
             )
             ratam
             habemus
             &
             confirmamus
             .
             
               Bul.
               Alexandri
               III.
               apud
               Grialdum
               Cambrens
               .
               lib.
               2.
               
               Histor.
               Hibern
               .
               expugnat
               .
               cap.
               6.
               in
               codicibus
               MS.
               (
               in
               edito
               enim
               caput
               hoc
               mancum
               est
               )
               &
               Io.
               Rossum
               Warvicensem
               ,
               in
               tract
               .
               De
               terris
               Coronae
               Angliae
               annexis
               .
            
          
           
             b
             Annulum
             quoque
             per
             me
             transmisit
             aureum
             ,
             smaragdo
             optimo
             decoratum
             ,
             quo
             fieret
             investitura
             iuris
             in
             gerenda
             Hibernia
             :
             idemque
             adhuc
             annulus
             in
             curiali
             archîo
             publico
             custodiri
             jussus
             est
             .
             Io.
             
               Sarisbur
               .
               Metalogic
               .
               lib.
               4.
               cap.
               42.
               de
               quo
               consulendus
               etiam
               est
               Giraldus
               Cambrens
               .
               lib.
               2.
               
               Hibern
               .
               expugnat
               .
               cap.
            
             6.
             
          
           
             c
             
               In
               Regem
               &
               Dominum
               receperunt
            
             .
             Roger.
             Wendover
             ,
             &
             Matth.
             Paris
             .
             in
             Historiâ
             maiori
             ,
             an
             .
             1171.
             
             Roger.
             Hoveden
             ,
             in
             posteriore
             parte
             Annalium
             .
             Iohan.
             Brampton
             in
             Historiâ
             Ioralanensi
             ,
             &
             Bartholomaeus
             de
             Cotton
             ,
             in
             Histor.
             Anglor
             .
             MS.
             
          
           
             d
             Recepit
             ab
             unoquoque
             Archiepiscopo
             &
             Episcopo
             literas
             ,
             cum
             sigillis
             suis
             in
             modum
             Char●ae
             pendentibus
             ;
             regnum
             Hiberniae
             sibi
             &
             haeredibus
             suis
             confirmantes
             ,
             &
             testimonium
             perhibentes
             ipsos
             in
             Hiberniâ
             cum
             &
             haeredes
             suos
             sibi
             in
             Reges
             &
             Dominos
             in
             perpetuum
             constituisse
             .
             Io.
             
               Brampton
               .
               ibid.
            
             
          
           
             e
             Venerunt
             ibidem
             ad
             regem
             Angliae
             omnes
             Archiepiscopi
             ,
             Episcopi
             ,
             Abbates
             totius
             Hiberniae
             ,
             &
             receperunt
             cum
             in
             Regem
             &
             Dominum
             Hiberniae
             ;
             jurantes
             ei
             &
             haeredibus
             suis
             fidelitatem
             ,
             &
             regnandi
             super
             ●os
             potestatē
             in
             perpetuum
             :
             &
             inde
             dederunt
             ei
             chartas
             suas
             .
             Exemplo
             autem
             clericorum
             ,
             praedicti
             Reges
             &
             Principes
             Hiberniae
             ,
             receperunt
             simili
             modo
             Henricum
             regem
             Angliae
             in
             Dominum
             &
             Regem
             Hiberniae
             ;
             &
             homines
             sui
             devenerunt
             ,
             &
             ei
             &
             haeredibus
             suis
             fidelitatem
             juraverunt
             contra
             omnes
             homines
             .
             
               Rog.
               Hoveden
               .
               ad
               ann
            
             .
             1171.
             
          
           
             f
             Dignum
             etenim
             &
             justissimum
             est
             ,
             ut
             sicut
             Dominum
             &
             Regem
             ex
             Angliâ
             sortita
             est
             divinitùs
             Hibernia
             ;
             sic
             etiam
             exinde
             vivendi
             formam
             accipiant
             meliorem
             .
             
               Girald
               .
               Cambrens
               .
               Hibern
               .
               Expugnat
               .
               lib.
               1.
               cap.
            
             34.
             
          
           
             g
             Rex
             Angliae
             misst
             transcriptum
             Chartarum
             universorum
             Archiepiscoporum
             &
             Episcoporum
             Hiberniae
             ,
             ad
             Alexandrum
             Papam
             :
             &
             ipse
             authoritate
             Apostolicâ
             confirmavit
             illi
             &
             haeredibus
             suis
             regnum
             Hiberniae
             ,
             secundùm
             formam
             Chartarum
             Archiepiscoporum
             &
             Episcoporum
             Hiberniae
             .
             
               Rog.
               Hoveden
            
             .
          
           
             h
             Nam
             summus
             Pontifex
             regnum
             illud
             sibi
             &
             haeredibus
             suis
             auctoritate
             Apostolicâ
             confirmavit
             ;
             &
             in
             perpetuum
             eos
             constituit
             inde
             Reges
             .
             Io.
             Brampton
             .
          
           
             i
             Perquisierat
             ab
             Alexandro
             summo
             Pontifice
             ,
             quòd
             liceret
             ei
             filium
             suum
             quem
             vellet
             Regem
             Hiberniae
             facere
             ,
             &
             fimiliter
             coronare
             ;
             ac
             Reges
             &
             potentes
             ejusdem
             terrae
             ,
             qui
             subjectionem
             ei
             facere
             ●ollent
             ,
             debellare
             .
             
               Id.
               ad
               .
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             1177.
             
          
           
             k
             Iohannem
             filium
             suum
             coram
             Episcopis
             &
             regni
             sui
             principibus
             Regem
             Hiberniae
             constituit
             .
             
               Id.
               ibid.
               &
               Gualterus
               Coventrensis
               ,
               inejusdem
               anni
               historiâ
               .
            
          
           
             l
             Constituit
             Iohannem
             filium
             suum
             Regem
             in
             Hiberniâ
             ,
             concessione
             &
             confirmatione
             Alexandri
             summ●
             Pontificis
             .
             
               Rog.
               Hoveden
               .
               Annal.
               part
               .
               2.
               ad
            
             an
             .
             1177.
             
          
           
             m
             Ab
             eo
             impetravit
             ;
             quòd
             unus
             quem
             vellet
             de
             filiis
             suis
             coronaretur
             de
             regne
             Hiberniae
             .
             &
             hoc
             confirmavit
             ei
             Dominus
             Papa
             Bullâ
             suâ
             :
             &
             in
             argumentum
             voluntatis
             &
             confirmationis
             suae
             ,
             misit
             ei
             coronam
             de
             pennâ
             pavonis
             auro
             contextam
             .
             
               Id.
               ad
               an
            
             .
             1185.
             
          
           
             n
             Quibus
             ipse
             commisit
             legatiam
             in
             Hiberniam
             ,
             ad
             ceronandum
             ibi
             Iohannem
             filium
             Regis
             .
             Sed
             Dominus
             Rex
             coronationem
             illam
             distulit
             .
             
               Jd.
               ad
               an
            
             .
             1187.
             
          
           
             *
             Paulus
             IIII
             nostris
             temporibus
             Hiberniam
             insulam
             in
             regni
             titulum
             ac
             dignitatem
             erexit
             .
             
               Gabutius
               in
               vitā
               PijV.
            
             
          
           
             o
             Ad
             omnipotentis
             Dei
             laudem
             &
             gloriam
             ,
             ac
             gloriosissimae
             ejus
             genitricis
             Virginis
             Mariae
             ,
             totiusque
             Curiae
             coelestis
             honorem
             ,
             &
             fidei
             Catholicae
             exaltationem
             ,
             Philippo
             Rege
             &
             Mariâ
             Reginâ
             nobis
             super
             hoc
             humiliter
             supplicantibus
             ,
             de
             fratrum
             nostrorum
             consilio
             &
             Apostolicae
             potestatis
             plenitudine
             ,
             Apostolicâ
             authoritate
             Insulam
             Hiberniae
             in
             Regnum
             perpetuò
             erigimus
             ;
             ac
             titulo
             ,
             dignitate
             ,
             honore
             ,
             facultatibus
             ,
             juribus
             ,
             insigniis
             ,
             praerogativis
             ,
             antelationibus
             ,
             praeeminentiis
             regiis
             ,
             ac
             quibus
             alia
             Christi
             fidelium
             Regna
             utuntur
             ,
             potiuntur
             ,
             &
             gaudent
             ,
             ac
             uti
             ,
             potiri
             ,
             &
             gaudere
             poterunt
             quomodo
             libet
             ,
             in
             futurum
             insignimus
             &
             decoramus
             .
             
               Bulla
               Pauli
               IV.
               in
               Rotulo
               Patentium
               ,
               ann
               .
               2.
               
               &
               3.
               
               Philippi
               &
               Mariae
               ,
               in
               Cancellariâ
               Hiberniae
               .
            
          
           
             *
             Provinciale
             ex
             archivis
             Cancellariae
             Apostolicae
             .
             edit
             .
             tomo
             2.
             
             Tractat.
             Doctor
             .
             fol.
             344.
             (
             impres
             .
             Venet.
             an
             .
             1548.
             )
          
           
             p
             Satis
             constat
             ,
             secundum
             Albertum
             Magnum
             &
             Bartholomaeum
             de
             proprietatibus
             rerum
             ,
             quòd
             toto
             Mundo
             in
             tres
             partes
             diviso
             (
             videlicèt
             Asiam
             ,
             Africam
             ,
             &
             Europam
             )
             Europa
             in
             quatuor
             dividitur
             regna
             :
             primum
             videlicèt
             Romanum
             ,
             secundum
             Constantinopolitanum
             ,
             tertium
             regnum
             Hiberniae
             quod
             jam
             translatum
             est
             in
             Anglicos
             ,
             &
             quartum
             regnum
             Hispaniae
             .
             Ex
             quo
             patet
             ,
             quòd
             rex
             Angliae
             &
             regnum
             suum
             sunt
             de
             eminentioribus
             antiquioribus
             Regibus
             &
             Regnis
             totius
             Europae
             :
             quam
             praerogativam
             regnum
             Franciae
             non
             fertur
             obtinere
             .
             
               Act.
               Concil
               .
               Constant.
               Sess.
               28.
               
               MS.
               in
               Bibliothecâ
               Regiâ
               .
            
          
           
             q
             Cujus
             mali
             maxima
             culpa
             in
             aliquot
             Angloibernos
             Sacerdotes
             jure
             transferenda
             est
             ;
             qui
             tartareum
             dogma
             ab
             Orco
             in
             Catholicorum
             perniciem
             emissum
             non
             negabant
             ,
             licere
             Catholicis
             contra
             Catholicos
             &
             suam
             patriam
             pro
             Haereticis
             getere
             arma
             &
             dimicare
             .
             
               Philip.
               Osullevan
               .
               Hist.
               Cathosic
               .
               Iberniae
               ,
               tous
               .
               4.
               lib.
               3.
               cap.
               5.
               fol.
               263.
               edit
               .
               Vlissipon
               .
               an
               .
            
             1621.
             
          
           
             r
             Haec
             est
             Academiarum
             censura
             ;
             quâ
             liquidò
             constat
             ,
             quantâ
             ignoratione
             &
             caligine
             erraverint
             illi
             Iberni
             ,
             qui
             in
             hoc
             bello
             Protestantibus
             opem
             tulerunt
             ,
             &
             Catholicos
             oppugnârunt
             :
             quamque
             insanam
             &
             venenosam
             doctrinam
             attulerint
             nonnulli
             doctiores
             vulgò
             habiti
             ,
             qui
             saeculares
             homines
             ad
             Reginae
             partes
             sequendas
             exhortati
             ,
             à
             fide
             tuendâ
             averterunt
             .
             
               Id.
               tom
               .
               3.
               lib.
               8.
               cap.
               7.
               fol.
            
             204.
             
          
           
             s
             Cùm
             enim
             Pontifex
             dica●
             Anglos
             adversus
             Catholicam
             Religionem
             pugnare
             ,
             eosque
             non
             minut
             ac
             Turcas
             oppugnari
             debere
             ;
             eisdemque
             gratiis
             eos
             oppugnantes
             prosequatur
             ,
             quibus
             contra
             Turcas
             pugnantes
             prosequitur
             :
             quis
             dubitet
             ,
             bellum
             ab
             Anglis
             adversus
             exercitum
             Catholicum
             omninò
             iniquum
             geri
             ?
             
               Censur
               .
               Doct.
               Salmanti●
               .
               &
               Vallisolet
               .
               de
               Hibermiae
               bello
               .
            
          
           
             t
             Rom.
             13.
             1.
             
          
           
             u
             Quid
             ,
             &
             illa
             potesta●
             ,
             quae
             servos
             Dei
             persequitur
             ,
             fidem
             impugnat
             ,
             religionem
             subvertit
             ,
             à
             Deo
             est
             ?
             Ad
             quod
             respondendum
             ,
             quòd
             etiam
             talis
             potestas
             à
             Deo
             data
             est
             ,
             ad
             vindictam
             quidem
             malorum
             ,
             laudem
             verò
             bonorum
             .
             
               Sedul
               in
               Rom.
            
             13.
             
          
           
             x
             Rom.
             13.
             5.
             
          
           
             y
             Sedul
             .
             in
             Hymno
             acrostich
             .
             de
             Vit●
             Christi
             .
          
           
             z
             Rex
             iste
             qui
             natus
             est
             ,
             non
             venit
             Reges
             pugnando
             superare
             ,
             sed
             moriendo
             mirabiliter
             subjugare
             :
             neque
             ideò
             natus
             est
             ut
             tibi
             succedat
             ,
             sed
             ut
             in
             eum
             mundus
             fideliter
             credat
             .
             Venit
             enim
             ,
             non
             ut
             regnet
             vivu●
             ,
             sed
             ut
             triumphet
             occisus
             :
             nec
             sibi
             de
             aliis
             gentibus
             auro
             exercitum
             quaerat
             ;
             sed
             ut
             pro
             salvandis
             gentibus
             pretiosum
             sanguinem
             fundat
             .
             Inaniter
             invidendo
             timuisti
             successorem
             ,
             quem
             credendo
             debuisti
             quaerere
             salvatorem
             ;
             quia
             si
             in
             eum
             crederes
             ,
             cum
             eo
             regnares
             ;
             &
             sicut
             ab
             illo
             accepisti
             teraporale
             regnum
             ,
             accipe●es
             etiam
             sempiternum
             .
             Hujus
             enim
             pueri
             regnum
             non
             est
             de
             hoc
             mundo
             ;
             sed
             per
             ipsum
             regnatur
             in
             hoc
             mundo
             .
             Ipse
             est
             etiam
             Sapientia
             Dei
             ,
             quae
             dicit
             in
             Proverbiis
             :
             Per
             me
             Reges
             regnant
             .
             Puer
             iste
             Verbum
             Dei
             est
             ,
             Puer
             iste
             Virtus
             &
             Sapientia
             Dei
             est
             .
             Si
             potes
             ,
             contra
             Dei
             sapientiam
             cogita
             :
             in
             tuam
             perniciem
             versaris
             ,
             &
             nescia
             .
             Tu
             enim
             regnum
             nullatenus
             habuisses
             ,
             nisi
             ab
             isto
             Puero
             qui
             nunc
             natus
             est
             accepisses
             .
             
               Claud.
               lib.
               I.
               in
               Matth.
            
             
          
           
             a
             Veritas
             sapienti
             nitet
             ,
             cujuscunque
             ore
             prolata
             fuerit
             .
             
               Gildas
               ,
               in
               Codice
               Ca●num
               Cottoniano
               tit
               .
            
             De
             veritate
             credendâ
             ,
             quocunque
             ore
             prolata
             fuerit
             .
             
               Similiter
               Nennius
               ,
               praefat
               .
               in
               in
               Historiam
               Brittonum
               (
               Ms.
               in
               publicâ
               Cantabrigiensis
               academiae
               Bibliothecâ
               :
               )
            
             Non
             quis
             dicat
             ,
             aut
             qualiter
             dicatur
             ,
             sed
             quid
             dictum
             sit
             ,
             veritatis
             testimonio
             magis
             attendendum
             esse
             probanae
             .
          
           
             b
             In
             doctrinâ
             religionis
             non
             quid
             dicatur
             ,
             sed
             quis
             loquatur
             attendendum
             esse
             .
             
               Thom.
               Stapleton
               .
               Defens
               .
               Ecclesiastic
               .
               authoritat
               .
               lib.
               3.
               cap.
               57.
               
               &
               Demonstrat
               .
               Principior
               .
               Doctrinal
               .
               lib.
               10.
               cap.
            
             5.
             
          
           
             c
             Veritas
             propter
             seipsam
             diligenda
             est
             ,
             non
             propter
             Hominem
             ,
             aut
             propter
             Angelum
             ,
             per
             quem
             adnunciatur
             .
             Qui
             enim
             propter
             adnunciatores
             eam
             diligit
             ,
             potest
             &
             mandacia
             diligere
             ,
             siqua
             fortè
             ipsi
             sus
             protulerint
             .
             
               Claud.
               in
               Galat.
            
             1.
             
          
           
             d
             Iohn
             10.
             16.
             
          
           
             e
             Psal.
             72.
             19.